Nid 00 fake Bye DD
% ore, Meer ebaan sae Lad
FRG bey MERA ADA NS na
Aram Ps Fo AtIEOG D San hota ons oe Wrens 425
rs Sood Re
‘ ; SRM A BALE s
5 . * ‘ a ‘ ‘ se heat a: aegis ace
: " * . on et fh My Me ob ave “ Y - eh: {EER TS NPT HE
3 ‘ : Fe ao stale Lesh Re eae
: + \ . i eat ert j
: aC Lickaby ayed tras ¢ : : . " y et + + anita se ote
i Ls : rc bs : . : ween ane oe ro
Aste he ean
aor
a ~ ae
ces 4 Site | ‘ =a a: Apa enananeeas A
Bonide RE ‘ % :
y . fi
‘3 : ra. : ote nes - en rvs * , ook Anns Mae APY Nayctaneetoeamoncn
one 4 : . ‘: x é. ow Sessa
parecer eer oy oe od Saas fax
mate AaB¥AoI
yy ote h hd se
§ eee
SEE
sooty
rrbead Co re eee 2a
amet ot Wea bye
rae fein yA
Pra
Pe M3 Ae PIAL Seas ey Sy
.
eohstng Dig SARE ees PE Oe Re y
~ Poe eigeiseeness ora”
f gt,
eel del hee Pe fk
: : J is i; i od sree : ‘ J , > hi . 3 jee % td de ae ee eae
1 nage 9 Sosa co yee oe : Vee ; by i ; : Sandbyieahe det NE eae
™ nee Ease oeeg z
es etree afd wis.
ae aiid Beir
pale
’ ; feat ats MY ed hey k ta ity Bs . - Pa pena
pe: 5 “4 . . ¥ ‘ 7 \4 ? hit ? * Jaca 5 Ke pee ee Teal pete A a
’ slat Ee Ss 5 : cola eed At aes
“ oot aes
i
nit
phy - : xr? se ; wee x an eee
- . 3 2 P \ : : : ‘ Seng ey ae 2 PASSES Sy rte
t
a
Ae
ens ae
ae aie
ik
: oO papeae
4m: 2 ‘ i : ? ivi sare = Pegs tse # Se 2e*
: : 4 : ; “i : z dee ‘ ; iere tsb se? Want xp aes et
t ; ; ewe : Bony em : 7 J : “4 4 24 oS Eo sgn [Res deb ae eA SYS em FTE?
3 re : San ‘3 x Pee ceanive oe 2) KU SU Ae otras
fof at eae aa Seok
co on dinetyesane ae
Bu ee Geese bas pe tae
(anesays eta e ie
oe er oe eo ed
wee to Cpayate.
aes Vases ls God seens sos stes
Ses gad- uh e-4aee Se;
e Sane aes a
eg sate ‘. ‘seatelSatetar er ahe
Le Wee pet an Stee ASE
ome eee es hagas Sap FE ALS Ne
at aaa ae wee a
i
Bey: s ‘pp DOr Lae ay aa aa
.
eA ALE a ah ota 1a,
x a. pops ea
. : ; vets de ‘ ‘ ; é : “ Sa c
wy ‘ ent T fm np tt Fatwa ‘ rts es : : ia a we SS eae
‘fe ~. ‘ > 4 F) ad aed (" Parr ence eho e
eal anu
mo Nowe A) ee ee er a, ee
” — wn — a) yc eh aoe ” |
ee NOILNLILSNI NVINOSHLINS Sa 1yYVvuad nr BRARI ES SMITHSONIAN NOILAL
= z = Re ea oe Z Ed
5 Zz = ae Sas ae Zz ar
ac O el Ea DO Ne = oO oh
nw ”n YW Ww Ny . Ww hie n
O se Oo 3 a \. oO ue oe
2 FE Z = » 2 E Z y
FA op) Ze. ” * Ze ” 2 q!
1_ LIBRARIES SMITHSONIAN _INSTITUTION NOILNLILSNI LIBRA
Zz Hi Zz te = ” Z
n Es ” i wo i ”
= a S - fe = fae e.
(es i ; Cc PS C S c
zal fae} a m Et a =
O or e) = ro) S Oo
Fs - = I a : al Zz
CIS isnt rr tlavea!T EIBRARIES SMITHSONIAN INSTITOTEOs NOILN
_ 3 E Aah 3
= = ca = S =
> = =) a =a) aa =
om im > - », > =
E é E es = hes =
nm” w
= ph fe D z B z
=
LIBRARIES SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION NOILNLILSNI_NVINOSHLINS Saiuvugi7_LIBRA
2
INSTITUTION NOILAL
NVINOSHLIWS
SMITHSONIAN
NVINOSHLIWS
SMITHSONIAN
f
NVINOSHLIWS
X
YY
oa.
NOILNLILSNI_ NVINOSHLIWS Sa1uvyal LIBRARIES
SJIMVNAIF LIBRARIES SMITHSONIAN
LIBRARIES
NOILMLILSNI
LIBRARIES
NOILNLILSNI
NOILNLILSNI
LIBRAR 1ES SMITHSONIAN
1 LIBRARIES SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION NOILNLILSNI NVINOSHLINS S3I1YVUGIT LIBRA
Saluvugii
saruvudit
YN NOILALILSNI NVINOSHLINS S3IYVYalT LIBRARIES
INSTITUTION
INSTITUTION
INSTITUTION
SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION
NVINOSHLINS S3IYVUSEII
NVINOSHLIWS
SMITHSONIAN
SMITHSONIAN
GL)
hb >” bk
Ae pad
NVINOSHLIWS
NVINOSHLINS
A
TC
SMITHSONIAN
* :
1 LIBRARIES SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION NOILOLILSNI NVINOSHLINS S3IYVYEIT_ LIBRA
LIBRARIES
NOILALILSNI
NOILALILSNI
NOILNLILSNI
LIBRARIES
SaiadVuYdit LIBRARTES
N NOILNLILSNI SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION NOILN-
S3i1uYvVYaIT LIBRARIES
INSTITUTION NOILONLILSNI
= = ion ay =
S S : 6
= = es = =
= = 9) : 5
2 ie ze — =
o ae i < 2 y
= Be z a EB Zz WAS
TLULIBRARIES SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION NOILNLILSNI NVINOSHLINS Saluvudi7_ LIBRA
< = = = . g = = J y z RN
= a > aa Ve fi > =~ Vi = \
= S Me Y flys bE eo SS
= S Z 8 YY li 6 Mp fr = “X
S34
~
IVINOSHLINS S3IYVYE!I] LIBRARIES SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION NOILNLILSNI NVINOSHLI¥
INS
Se
NS
Se.
N‘
NVINOSHLIWS
QL
Ws YS
ASN
YS
SMITHSONIAN
NVINOSHLIWS
SMITHSONIAN
NVINOSHLIWS
wae
ASS
SY
SMITHSONIAN
*
MITHSONIAN INSTITUTION NOILONLILSNI
LIBRARIES SMITHSONI/
By be ma i ate
: : : 5 z
es = 4 a = SA ee Ze
2 < = < : GM
ac oc x« GYuy
z. ro. a Vy
: = = e = a Vif
ae =f Pd > a Fs =
ea lYVvug ae LIBRARI ES_ SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION NOILALILSNI_NVINOSHLIV
fe) — O ) = S amet a3
= Sy = = = =
ee]
= > = “D> 2 >
= = — ‘2 = ae
BAS 2 m 2 : m 2 m
Le = op) nae ~ = (op)
MITHSONIAN INSTITUTION NOILNLILSNI NVINOSHLINS S31u¥WYuRgIT LIBRARIES
a W z 72) ee 7)
ee = x = a a =
Fa = ne = = =
oO a Ae ae oO a
= >’ = > = ~ WS >
“” Fs wn Fc ” - =
LIBRARIES SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION NOILONLILSNI NVINOSHLII!
o ” . 0 =a
tu a Ww 7 ud ”
= “4 re a a =
SAN al ioe | =i
Ne = c = hae = (
as rae) a om. a rae) om
coe = O = O ae O
ce} =z ey) za =) Zz
SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION NOILONLILSNI NVINOSHLINS S3IYVYUE!IT LIBRARIES SMITHSONI
saruvudi
INSTITUTION
Saiuvyadl
Saleva dial
INSTITUTION
WWINOSHLINS S3IYVYGIT LIBRARIES SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION NOILALILSNI NVINOSHLI
INSTITUTION
w Ze wn = 2) =
= if a NS = sk ES aes
2) ar ae ANNE =
x Bho SW Ft S = 6
BGs ERR 8 2 a5 2
z “fy = NS 2 = Zz =
ia Te ae
MITHSONIAN _INSTITUTION NOILNLILSNI NVINOSHLINS S3IYVYSGIT LIBRARIES SMITHSONI,
— (ep) =z, Y
+o e a Ww us b us
= ax , o = a
<x =f = ES
= oc ‘S : e se.
; Ye: Oo ~ oO — O ~
? Zz —! Ze iy ey Zz =
WWINOSHLIWS _ $3 1YVvug Pies LIBRARI Eo Sea SST OiON NOILALILSNI
. z
O = iS aes Zz 2
c= 1c] = ty ee) = wo
5 2 5 FY> :
= = t LPL Es ~
m
= a = S = ”
SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION NOILALILSNI NVINOSHLIWS SaluYvygit
THSONIAN
JOSHLIWS
THSONIAN
NOSHLIWS
THSONIAN
NOSHLIWS
2g
Ni
mw. Gs
ANNALS OF THE ANNALE VAN DIE
SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM SUID-AFRIKAANSE MUSEUM
VOLUME 86 BAND 86
ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
ANNALE VAN DIE SUID-AFRIKAANSE MUSEUM
VOLUME 86 BAND
HE TRUSTEES OF THE DIE TRUSTEES VAN DIE
SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM SUID-AFRIKAANSE MUSEUM
GAPE TOWN KAAPSTAD
1981-1982
SET, PRINTED AND BOUND IN THE REPUBLIC OF SOUTH AFRICA BY
THE RUSTICA PRESS (PTY.) LTD., WYNBERG, CAPE
D54
List OF CONTENTS
Page
CurRiE, P. J.
The osteology and relationships of Tangasaurus mennelli Haughton (Reptilia,
osuchia) (Published: May 19825)).— sae save 44 oe cis ie Mes owen A eae 247
GosLINER, T. M.
The South African Janolidae (Mollusca, Nudibranchia) with the description of a
new genus and two new species. (Published September 1981.)................ 1
GRINE, F. E.
Description of some juvenile hominid specimens from Swartkrans, Transvaal.
CEnblisneGlOctober 198M.) i sxe Seok ee ce Mig ae ene mre Rp Tae Sin i Set 43
GRINE, F. E.
Occlusal morphology of the mandibular permanent molars of the South African
Negro and the Kalahari San (Bushman). (Published October 1981.) .......... IS y7/
GRInE, F. E.
Relative sizes of the maxillary deciduous canine and central incisor teeth in the
Kalahari San (Bushman) and South African Negro. (Published December
ASUS) rea Rte ee baby trae alae a Sig there io ROS Eee) si fee Re ee ere 229
GRINE, F. E. see VAN DEN HEEVER, J. A.
KENNEDY, W. J., KLINGER, H. C. & SUMMESBERGER, H.
Cretaceous faunas from Zululand and Natal, South Africa. Additional observations
on the ammonite subfamily Texanitinae Collignon, 1948. (Published October
GIL) Ss OUNCE sean Rae elle a ate isk aed ee ee SCE SS, at, is ot OR 115
KLEIN, R. G. see Scott, L.
KLINGER, H. C. see KENNEDY, W. J.
Scorr, L. & KLEIN, R. G.
A hyena-accumulated bone assemblage from Late Holocene deposits at Deelpan,
@ranecibree state: (Published December 19812) 22... seh te gee eee te oe 217
SUMMESBERGER, H. see KENNEDY, W. J.
VAN DEN HEEVER, J. A. & GRINE, F. E.
Dinocephalia type material in the South African Museum (Reptilia, Therapsida).
MiublishedvOctober lO Sila) ete aera cayenne Wea tee Cyr rm ete, Sua tus ee a tae ye 73
NEW GENERIC NAMES PROPOSED IN THIS VOLUME
Bonisa Gosliner, 1981
SEPTEMBER 1981 ISSN 0303-2515
PA Mind 7
‘OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN
“MUSEUM
CAPE TOWN
INSTRUCTIONS TO AUTHORS
lt. MATERIAL should be original and not published elsewhere, in whole or in part.
2. LAYOUT should be as follows:
(a) Centred masthead to consist of
Title: informative but concise, without abbreviations and not including the names of new genera or species
Author’s(s’) name(s)
Address(es) of author(s) (institution where work was carried out)
Number of illustrations (figures, enumerated maps and tables, in this order)
(b) Abstract of not more than 200 words, intelligible to the reader without reference to the text
(c) Table of contents giving hierarchy of headings and subheadings
(d) Introduction 2
(e) Subject-matter of the paper, divided into sections to correspond with those given in table of contents
(f) Summary, if paper is lengthy
(g) Acknowledgements
(h) References
(i) Abbreviations, where these are numerous
3. MANUSCRIPT, to be submitted in triplicate, should be typewritten and neat, double spaced
with 2,5 cm margins all round. First lines of paragraphs should be indented. Tables and a list of
legends for illustrations should be typed separately, their positions indicated in the text. All
pages should be numbered consecutively.
Major headings of the paper are centred capitals; first subheadings are shouldered small
capitals; second subheadings are shouldered italics; third subheadings are indented, shouldered
italics. Further subdivisions should be avoided, as also enumeration (never roman numerals)
of headings and abbreviations.
Footnotes should be avoided unless they are short and essential.
Only generic and specific names should be underlined to indicate italics; all other marking
up should be left to editor and publisher.
4. ILLUSTRATIONS should be reducible to a size not exceeding 12 « 18 cm (19 cm including
legend); the reduction or enlargement required should be indicated; originals larger than
35 x 47 cm should not be submitted; photographs should be rectangular in shape and final
size. A metric scale should appear with all illustrations, otherwise magnification or reduction
should be given in the legend; if the latter, then the final reduction or enlargement should be
taken into consideration.
All illustrations, whether line drawings or photographs, should be termed figures (plates
are not printed; half-tones will appear in their proper place in the text) and numbered in a
single series. Items of composite figures should be designated by capital letters; lettering of
figures is not set in type and should be in lower-case letters.
The number of the figure should be lightly marked in pencil on the back of each illustration.
5. REFERENCES cited in text and synonymies should all be included in the list at the end of
the paper, using the Harvard System (ibid., idem, loc. cit., op. cit. are not acceptable):
(a) Author’s name and year of publication given in text, e.g.:
‘Smith (1969) describes .. .’
‘Smith (1969: 36, fig. 16) describes...’
“As described (Smith 1969a, 19696; Jones 1971)’
‘As described (Haughton & Broom 1927)...’
‘As described (Haughton et al. 1927)...’
Note: no comma separating name and year
Dagination indicated by colon, not p.
names of joint authors connected by ampersand
- et al. in text for more than two joint authors, but names of all authors given in list of references.
(b) Full references at the end of the paper, arranged alphabetically by names, chronologically
within each name, with suffixes a, b, etc. to the year for more than one paper by the same
author in that year, e.g. Smith (1969a, 19695) and not Smith (1969, 1969a).
For books give title in italics, edition, volume number, place of publication, publisher.
For journal article give title of article, title of journal in italics (abbreviated according to the World list oa,
scientific periodicals. 4th ed. London: Butterworths, 1963), series in parentheses, volume number, part
number (only if independently paged) in parentheses, pagination (first and last pages of article).
Examples (note capitalization and punctuation)
BULLOUGH, W. S. 1960. Practical invertebrate anatomy. 2nd ed. London: Macmillan.
FIsCHER, P.—H. 1948. Données sur la résistance et de le vitalité des mollusques. J. Conch., Paris 88: 100-140.
Fiscuer, P.-H., DuvAL, M. & RaArFy, A. 1933. Etudes sur les échanges respiratoires des littorines. Archs
Zool. exp. gén. 74: 627-634.
Konn, A. J. 1960a. Ecological notes on Conus (Mollusca: Gastropoda) in the Trincomalee region of Ceylon.
Ann. Mag. nat. Hist. (13) 2: 309-320.
Konn, A. J. 19606. Spawning behaviour, egg masses and larval development in Conus from the Indian Ocean.
Bull. Bingham oceanogr. Coll. 17 (4): 1-51.
THELE, J. 1910. Mollusca: B. Polyplacophora, Gastropoda marina, Bivalvia. In: SCHULTZE, L. Zoologische
und anthropologische Ergebnisse einer Forschungsreise im westlichen und zentralen Siid-Afrika 4: 269-270.
Jena: Fischer. Denkschr. med.-naturw. Ges. Jena 16: 269-270.
(continued inside back cover)
bthes
date nt
Ae
Lie fil
ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
ANNALE VAN DIE SUID-AFRIKAANSE MUSEUM
Volume 86 Band
September 1981 September
Part 1 Deel
THE SOUTH AFRICAN JANOLIDAE
(MOLLUSCA, NUDIBRANCHIA)
mare THE DESCRIPTION.OF A NEW GENUS
AND TWO NEW SPECIES
By
TERRENCE M. GOSEINER
Cape Town Kaapstad
The ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
are issued in parts at irregular intervals as material
becomes available
Obtainable from the South African Museum, P.O. Box 61, Cape Town 8000
Die ANNALE VAN DIE SUID-AFRIKAANSE MUSEUM
word uitgegee in dele op ongereelde tye na gelang van die
beskikbaarheid van stof
Verkrygbaar van die Suid-Afrikaanse Museum, Posbus 61, Kaapstad 8000
OUT OF PRINT/UIT DRUK
iy 20S, 5-8), SGD, 2S, 8, ico), SES, 5, 7-5),
G(s ep ib), (=a) 8 OC 2a) O32)
INGED, 5, 7, tor), 15S), WO), 2, BGS), 2X), 28, 250)
EDITOR/REDAKTRISE
Ione Rudner
Copyright enquiries to the South African Museum
Kopieregnavrae aan die Suid-Afrikaanse Museum
ISBN 0 86813 022 2
Printed in South Africa by In Suid-Afrika gedruk deur
The Rustica Press, Pty., Ltd., Die Rustica-pers, Edms., Bpk.,
Court Road, Wynberg, Cape Courtweg, Wynberg, Kaap
THE SOUTH AFRICAN JANOLIDAE
(MOLLUSCA, NUDIBRANCHIA)
WITH THE DESCRIPTION OF A NEW GENUS
AND TWO NEW SPECIES
By
TERRENCE M. GOSLINER
South African Museum, Cape Town
(With 28 figures and 3 tables)
[MS accepted 28 April 1981]
ABSTRACT
Examination of the shallow waters of the Cape Peninsula, South Africa, has revealed the
presence of three sympatric species of Janolidae. The description of Janolus capensis Bergh,
1907 is expanded. Janolus longidentatus sp. nov. is described in detail and, despite its
resemblance to J. capensis, possesses several consistently distinct morphological characteristics.
The two species differ in body shape, position of the gonopore and nephroproct, dentition of
the jaws and radula, arrangement of ganglia within the central nervous system, and in several
aspects of reproductive morphology. The third species differs significantly from all other
members of the Janolidae in that the digestive gland surrounds the stomach rather than
entering the notum and cerata. Bonisa nakaza gen. et sp. nov. is described in detail. The
presence of intermediate morphological characters in several species of janolids necessitates the
synonomy of Janolus Bergh, 1884, and Antiopella Hoyle, 1902.
CONTENTS
PAGE
MNILOMUCHON js tine aes hee teen Ge ate oe 1
Janolus capensis Benen lO07. 5 generac. Aas ae. tan 2
NOCOTS UDGOIGHCHIS S05 Wl aeecbheccsesceaoncses 9
Bonisa nakaza Senn etispsnOVei. 44-25 os eek eee 19
DIScussionvOK ne anolidace sys oe coe eee 26
PNCKAMOWLE GS CMICINS ee hay ficients acca teredire ts Cuenta rae Rennes ot 40
INCIERENCES Men aie heii en ee aay en Nea se 41
INTRODUCTION
The Janolidae are a family of arminacean nudibranchs consisting of 18
species in 5 genera. They are widely distributed in the temperate and tropical
waters of the world. The genus Caldukia Burn & Miller, 1969, and the
monotypic genus Galeojanolus Miller, 1971, are known only from Australia and
New Zealand. Proctonotus Alder & Hancock, 1844, is also monotypic and has
been reported only from Great Britain and the Brittany coast of France
(Thompson & Brown 1976). Antiopella Hoyle, 1902, and Janolus Bergh, 1884,
are much more widely distributed.
Ann. S. Afr. Mus. 86 (1), 1981: 1-42, 28 figs, 3 tables.
2 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Bergh (1907) described Janolus capensis from three specimens dredged
from False Bay, south-western Cape. Intertidal and subtidal collections by
means of S.C.U.B.A. around the Cape Peninsula have yielded specimens of
Janolus capensis as well as two previously unknown species, which are here
described.
Antiopella and Janolus have been considered as distinct genera by most
workers who have studied the Janolidae (Eliot 1906; Pruvot-Fol 1954; Marcus
1958; Burn & Miller 1969; Miller 1971). The South African species possess
morphological features which are intermediate between those utilized to separ-
ate Antiopella from Janolus. For this reason, a review of the generic status of
the Janolidae is provided. To supplement this review, specimens of Janolus
fuscus from California, J. cristatus from England, and J. toyamensis from
_ Hawaii were also examined.
Janolus capensis Bergh, 1907
Figs 1A-B, 2-9
Janolus capensis Bergh, 1907: 90, pl. 7 (figs 6-21). Barnard, 1927: 207, pl. 20 (figs 6-7).
Material examined
10 specimens, 20 m depth off Llandudno (34°01’'S 18°20'E), 23 December
ORE
6 specimens, intertidal, Clovelly, False Bay (34°05’S 18°26’E), 17-18
January 1980
3 specimens, 10 m depth, Rooi Els (34°18’S 18°49’E), 23 January 1980
1 specimen, 10 m depth, Castle Rocks, False Bay (34°18’S 18°29’E), 12
February 1980
5 specimens, 10 m depth, Windmill Beach, False Bay (34°12'S 18°27’E), 9
October 1980
2 specimens, 10 m depth, Rooi Els (34°18’S 18°49’E), 26 October 1980
2 specimens, 5 m depth, Miller’s Point, False Bay (34°14’S 18°29’E), 28
October 1980
Distribution
Atlantic and Indian Ocean coasts of the Cape Peninsula, extending east-
ward to Rooi Els, Cape Hangklip.
External morphology
The living animals (Fig. 1A—B) attain a length of 30 mm. The stout body is
broadest anteriorly, tapering to the acute posterior end of the foot. The
rhinophores (Fig. 2A) are perfoliate with 11 to 16 complete or incomplete
transverse lamellae. Between the rhinophores is the large, convoluted inter-
rhinophoral crest (caruncle) (Fig. 2B). The anus in middorsal, near the poster-
ior limit of the notum. The head (Fig. 2C) is rounded with the mouth situated
SOUTH AFRICAN JANOLIDAE 3
Fig. 2. Janolus capensis Bergh, 1907. A. Rhinophore, scale 1,0 mm. B. Inter-rhinophoral crest,
scale 1,0 mm. C. Ventral view of head, scale 2,0 mm. D. Lateral view, scale 3,0 mm. Figs
2A-B, D are drawn from preserved material, Fig. 2C is from living material.
centrally. Short, blunt dorsoventrally flattened oral tentacles are present on
either side of the head. The foot is rounded anteriorly with a deep transverse
groove. The separate male and female gonopores are situated on the right side
near the middle of the body, while the nephroproct is situated more posteriorly
(Fig. 2D).
The cerata are entirely smooth, somewhat laterally compressed and are
arranged in 5 to 6 closely packed longitudinal rows which are irregularly
arranged. Within each ceras (Fig. 3A) are 2 to 4 irregular lobes of the digestive
gland which branch near the middle of the ceras. The anteriormost cerata lack
extensions of the digestive gland.
The ground colour is translucent white. Opaque white markings may be
present or absent on the rhinophoral lamellae, inter-rhinophoral crest and
4 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
along the dorsolateral margin of the foot. The cerata are tipped with an apical
band of opaque white guanine crystals which may have a bluish tinge. The
digestive gland within the cerata varies from chocolate brown to brick red or
red-orange.
Digestive system (Fig. 3B)
Near the opening of the mouth, numerous small, simple oral glands are
present on the surface of the outer lips of the buccal mass. The buccal mass is
large and muscular with an ovoid opening. A pair of large, highly dendritic
Fig. 3. Janolus capensis Bergh, 1907. A. Ceras dissected to show branching of digestive gland,
scale 1,0 mm. B. Digestive system, scale 1,0 mm.
SOUTH AFRICAN JANOLIDAE =)
salivary glands extends anteriorly from the stomach and enters the buccal mass
near its anterior limit via glandular ducts. The salivary glands are thick at their
insertion, taper sharply and again expand into the dendritic portion. The
oesophagus is wide throughout its length and enters the highly ridged stomach.
Three major branches of the digestive gland emerge from the stomach. At the
posterior limit of the stomach the intestine curves to the right and continues
posteriorly, terminating at the medial anus. A well-developed anal gland
surrounds the anus.
The buccal mass is large and muscular with an oblong opening (Fig. 4A).
The paired jaws (Fig 4B) are large and strong. The inner masticatory border
(Fig. 5A) is thickened and entirely smooth. There is a raised, arched portion
which strengthens the masticatory edge.
The radula (Figs. 5B, 6) is broad and well developed. There may be from
17 to 21 rows of teeth with 26 to 42 lateral teeth on each side of the narrow,
linear rachidian tooth. The hook-shaped lateral teeth (Fig. 6B) are smooth and
sharply arched. Laterally from the centre of the radula, the lateral teeth
increase in size until about one-third of the breadth of that half of the radula, at
which point they again begin to diminish in size for the remaining outer
two-thirds.
Central nervous system
All the major ganglia of the central nervous system (Fig. 7) are situated
anteriorly in the circumoesophageal nerve ring. The cerebral and pleural
ganglia are almost entirely fused, forming a pair of ganglionic masses separated
by a short commissure. The anteriormost nerves on the dorsal surface of the
Fig. 4. Janolus capensis Bergh, 1907.
A. Buccal mass, scale 1,0 mm.
B. Jaw, scale 1,0 mm.
ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
FAEes
EAW
, scale 300 wm between
h of radula, scale 10 wm
jaw
between squares.
icrograp
is Bergh, 1907. A. Scanning electron
tory border of
lectron mi
ica
ing e
micrograph of mast
squares. B. Scann
Fig. 5. Janolus capens
SOUTH AFRICAN JANOLIDAE
Fig. 6. Janolus capensis Bergh, 1907. A. Scanning electron micro-
graph of central portion of radula. B. Scanning electron micrograph
of lateral tooth from outer portion of radula. Scales 10 wm between
squares.
8 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Fig. 7. Janolus capensis Bergh, 1907.
Central nervous system.
Scale 0,5 mm
cerebropleural ganglia bifurcate near the base. The outer branch innervates the
rhinophore and a small rhinophoral ganglion is present near the apex of the
nerve at the base of each rhinophore. The inner branch divides again with both
branches innervating the inter-rhinophoral crest. The eyes are situated on short
nerves which join the cerebropleural ganglia near their juncture with the
somewhat smaller pedal ganglia. At the junction of each eye to the cerebro-
pleural ganglia is a minute optic ganglion. Anterior to each buccal ganglion
(Fig. 3B) is a minute gastro-oesophageal ganglion. The pedal ganglia are
separated by a short commissure.
Reproductive system (Fig. 8)
The ovotestis consists of numerous lobes and gives rise to a slightly
convoluted ampulla which subsequently narrows and bifurcates into the male
wae
| See Eee |
Fig. 8. Janolus capensis Bergh, 1907.
Reproductive system. Scale 4,0 mm.
SOUTH AFRICAN JANOLIDAE 9
and female ducts. The vas deferens is highly convoluted and prostatic through-
out its length. It terminates at an elongate, acutely pointed penis. The
extremely elongate oviduct is muscular and gives rise to a very long receptacu-
lum seminis and continues until it joins the albumen gland of the female gland
mass at the female atrium. /n situ, the oviduct and receptaculum seminis are
surrounded by the two lobes of the voluminous mucous gland. The membrane
and albumen glands are significantly smaller than the mucous gland. Adjoining
the oviduct and female gland mass, at the female atrium, is a small pyriform
bursa copulatrix.
Egg mass
The egg mass (Fig. 9) is highly convoluted and corresponds to type B
(Hurst 1967). There are 38 to 45 eggs per capsule.
Natural history
Janolus capensis is associated with, and feeds upon, several species of
arborescent cheilostomatous ectoprocts, most commonly Menipea triseriata
Busk, 1852, and Onchoporella buskii (Harmer, 1923). Mating individuals and
egg masses are often found on ectoproct colonies as well. Janolus capensis is
found commonly throughout the year along the Atlantic and Indian Ocean
coasts of the Cape Peninsula from the intertidal to at least 40 m in depth.
Janolus longidentatus sp. nov.
Figs 1C, 10-17
Type material
Holotype—SAM-A34883, 1 specimen, 3 m depth, Miller’s Point (34°14’S
18°29’E), 10 December 1980
Paratypes—SAM-A34884, 2 specimens, 10 m depth, Castle Rocks, False
Bay (34°18’S 18°29’E), 1 October, 1980
SAM-—A34885, 1 specimen, 5 m depth, Miller’s Point, False Bay
(34°14'S 18°29'E), 28 October 1980
Other material
3 specimens, intertidal, Clovelly, False Bay (34°05’S 18°26'E), 17 Decem-
ber 1979
2 specimens, 10 m depth, Windmill Beach, False Bay (34°12'S 18°29’E), 11
July 1980
Etymology
The epithet /ongidentatus refers to the elongate cusp of the lateral radular
teeth which characterizes this species.
10
ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Fig. 9. Janolus capensis Bergh, 1907.
A. Egg mass X 6.
B. Single egg capsule x 50.
SOUTH AFRICAN JANOLIDAE 11
External morphology
Fully mature specimens (Fig. 1C) attain a maximum length of 20 mm. The
slender body is widest anteriorly, tapering to an acute posterior margin of the
foot. The rhinophores (Fig. 10A) are perfoliate with 9 to 12 complete or
incomplete, transverse lamellae. The inter-rhinophoral crest (Fig. 10B) is
highly convoluted, narrowest in the middle. The anus is situated mid-dorsally
near the posterior end of the notum. The mouth is located centrally on the
ventral side of the rounded head (Fig. 10C). A pair of short, blunt oral
tentacles extend from either side of the head. The anteriorly rounded foot
possesses a deep transverse groove at its anterior limit. The separate male and
female gonopores are situated laterally in the anterior third of the right side of
the body, while the nephroproct is located more posteriorly, but within the
anterior half of the body (Fig. 10D).
The entirely smooth cerata are long and slender, arranged in 4 or 5
irregular, longitudinal rows. Within each ceras there are 2 main branches of the
digestive gland which usually branch again above the base of the ceras (Fig.
11). The anteriormost cerata lack extensions of the digestive gland within them.
The general body colour of living animals is translucent white, with a pink
or blue cast. Varying amounts of opaque white pigment are present on the
rhinophores and at the apices of the cerata. The digestive gland within the
cerata is chocolate brown to red-orange.
Digestive system
Near the mouth and surrounding the outer lips of the buccal mass is a
narrow ring of small, simple oral glands. The buccal mass (Fig. 12A) is
somewhat dorsoventrally compressed, muscular, with a circular opening. The
paired salivary glands are very thin anteriorly and expand posteriorly into the
dendritic, glandular portion with numerous ramifications. The oesophagus is a
straight glandular tube which expands into the corrugated, saccate stomach.
From the stomach arise three major branches of the digestive gland: two
branches emanate from the anterodorsal portion of the stomach and give rise to
the left and right anterior digestive branches; the third branch arises at the
ventral portion of the stomach and branches to the right and left posterior
digestive branches. The intestine emerges from the posterior portion of the
stomach and curves to the right, continuing posteriorly to the anus. The anus is
surrounded by a large anal gland.
The jaws (Figs 12B, 13A) are of moderate thickness, angular and termin-
ate posteriorly in a rather acute point. The masticatory border consists of 7 or 8
large, rounded denticles. The radula (Figs 13B, 14) is broad, consisting of 18 to
23 rows of teeth. There are 19 to 26 gradually arched, edenticulate lateral teeth
on each side of the somewhat broad rachidian tooth. In the ten specimens
examined, the rachidian teeth all possess 6 to 10 minute striations on each side
of the base of the elongate central cusp. The lateral teeth have an elongate cusp
2 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Fig. 10. Janolus longidentatus sp. nov. A. Rhinophore, scale 0,5 mm. B. Inter-rhinophoral
crest, scale 0,5 mm. C. Ventral view of head, scale 1,5 mm. D. Lateral view, scale 2,0 mm.
Figs 2A—B, D are drawn from preserved material, Fig. 2C is from living material.
SOUTH AFRICAN JANOLIDAE 13
Fig. 11. Janolus longidentatus sp. nov.
Cerata dissected to show branching of digestive gland.
Scale 1,0 mm.
Fig. 12. Janolus longidentatus sp. nov.
A. Buccal mass, scale 1,0 mm.
B. Jaw, scale 1,0 mm.
14
ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Fig. 13. Janolus longidentatus sp. nov. A. Scanning electron
micrograph of masticatory border of jaw, scale 300 wm between
squares. B. Scanning electron micrograph of radula, scale 10 wm
between squares.
SOUTH AFRICAN JANOLIDAE
Bee sa ae |
Fig. 14. Janolus longidentatus sp. nov. A. Scanning electron
micrograph of central portion of radula, scale 30 wm. B. Scan-
ning electron micrograph of lateral teeth from outer portion of
radula, scale 30 wm between squares.
15
16 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
and increase in length towards the outer edges of the radula. Only the
outermost teeth decrease in length.
Central nervous system (Fig. 15)
The major ganglia are situated in the circumoesophageal nerve ring. The
cerebral and pleural ganglia are largely distinct. The anteriormost nerve of the
dorsal surface of the cerebral ganglia bifurcates near its base with the inner
branch innervating the inter-rhinophoral crest and the outer branch innervating
the rhinophores. There is a distinct rhinophoral ganglion near the apex of the
rhinophoral nerve. The eyes are situated at the apex of short optic nerves which
join the central nervous system via small optic ganglia at the junction of the
cerebral and pleural ganglia. Extending from the cerebral ganglia are the buccal
~ nerves which join the round buccal ganglia. Anterior to each buccal ganglion is
a minute gastro-oesophageal ganglion. The pedal ganglia are long with an
elongate commissure between them.
Reproductive system (Fig. 16)
The follicles of the ovotestis are numerous and arranged into distinct lobes.
The thick ampulla has 2 or 3 convolutions and narrows to the bifurcation of the
vas deferens and oviduct. The glandular prostatic vas deferens is short with few
convolutions. It enlarges into a much thicker penis sac which is recurved to an
acutely pointed unarmed penial papilla. The muscular oviduct is embedded
Fig. 15. Janolus longidentatus sp. nov.
Central nervous system.
Scale 1,0 mm.
SOUTH AFRICAN JANOLIDAE i7/
Fig. 16. Janolus longidentatus sp. nov.
Reproductive system.
Scale 1,0 mm.
between two lobes of the mucous gland and branches near the middle of its
length to a short, bulbous receptaculum seminis. The major branch continues
distally to its connection with the albumen gland and female gonopore. The
narrow, linear bursa copulatrix joins the oviduct near the junction of the female
gland mass, at the female atrium.
Egg mass (Fig. 17)
The egg mass is a low, flat spiral consisting of 3 or 4 whorls and
corresponds to type B (Hurst 1967). There are 5 to 9 eggs per capsule.
Natural history
Janolus longidentatus feeds upon the cheilostomatous ectoproct Menipea
triseriata Busk. It is commonly found in False Bay but has not been encoun-
tered on the Atlantic coast of the Cape Peninsula. J. longidentatus appears to
have a seasonal distribution. Specimens have not been found from February to
July and appear to be present largely in the winter and spring months.
Specimens have been found from the intertidal to 30 m depth.
Bonisa gen. nov.
Diagnosis
Body stout, ovoid in outline. Rhinophores perfoliate. Inter-rhinophoral
crest low, triangular with few convolutions. Cerata smooth, caducous, not
18
ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Fig. 17. Janolus longidentatus sp. nov.
A. Egg mass X 6.
B. Single egg capsule x 100.
SOUTH AFRICAN JANOLIDAE 19
containing branches of digestive gland. Gonopore near middle of body with
nephroproct in posterior third of body. Oral glands small, simple. Salivary
glands well developed with basal bulb. Digestive gland of three lobes surround-
ing stomach, not extending into notum or cerata. Anal glands absent. Jaws
thick with smooth masticatory border. Rachidian and lateral teeth weakly to
strongly denticulate. Pedal ganglia lateral to well separated cerebral and pleural
ganglia. Optic nerves elongate. Reproductive system hermaphroditic, andro-
diaulic. Vas deferens short, prostatic, expanding into blunt, corrugated penis.
Receptaculum seminis large, muscular and adjacent to gonopore. Bursa copula-
trix small, linear and joining receptaculum seminis at female gonopore.
Type species
Bonisa nakaza sp. nov.
Etymology
Bonisa is named for my wife Bonnie Isabel Julien Gosliner.
Bonisa nakaza sp. nov.
Figs 1D-F, 18-25
Type material
Holotype—SAM-A34886, 20 m depth, off Llandudno (34°01'S 18°20’E),
ZaeDecember 1979.
Paratypes—SAM-A34887, 4 whole specimens, 20 m depth, off Llandudno
(34°01’S 18°20’E), 23 December 1979
Other material
1 specimen, 10 m depth, Oudekraal (33°59'S 18°21’E), 13 January 1980
2 specimens, 10 m depth, Castle Rocks, False Bay (34°18’S 18°29’E), 17
January 1980
Etymology
Nakaza is a Zulu word meaning ‘to adorn with beautiful colours’, and the
name is based on the bright coloration typical of this species.
External morphology
Fully mature specimens may reach a length of 100 mm. The body is broad,
roughly oval in outline. The rhinophores (Fig. 18A) are perfoliate with 14 to 23
transverse lamellae. The slightly convoluted inter-rhinophoral crest (Fig. 18B)
is triangular in shape, widest anteriorly. The mid-dorsal anus is located near the
posterior end of the notum. The broad head (Fig. 18C) is round in shape, with
a secondary, anterior lobe. The paired oral tentacles are moderately elongate
and situated on either side of the head. The foot is transversely grooved at its
20 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Fig. 18. Bonisa nakaza gen. et. sp. nov. A. Rhinophore, scale 1,0 mm. B. Inter-rhinophoral
crest, scale 1,0 mm. C. Ventral view of head, scale 1,0 mm. D. Lateral view, scale 5,0 mm.
Figs 2A—B, D are drawn from preserved material, Fig. 2C is from living material.
SOUTH AFRICAN JANOLIDAE 71)\
anterior limit. The separate male and female gonopores are located near the
middle of the right side of the body (Fig. 18D). The nephroproct is situated
more posteriorly, in the posterior third of the animal. The elongate, readily
caducous cerata are smooth and cylindrical. They are arranged in 16 to 21
diagonal rows per side with 8 to 10 cerata per row. Within the cerata a central
muscular duct is present but this contains no extension of the digestive gland.
At the base of each ceras is a ganglion which bifurcates into two nerves which
extend distally into the ceras (Fig. 19A).
The living animals are variably and brightly coloured. (Fig. 1D-F). The
general body colour ranges from translucent white to yellow or yellow-orange.
Yellow or orange pigment is particularly concentrated on the anterodorsal
surface. The rhinophores possess varying amounts of yellow or orange pigment.
The cerata are strikingly variable in their coloration. On the surface they are
most commonly yellow, basally, with varying amounts and shades of blue
pigment on the more distal portion. Some specimens possess a small subapical
concentration of black or dark-blue pigment within the ceratal ducts. Other
“ae
" Bo FRAN \
y ay, 9
By." Ms aerate aa
LA eri ORO POS OR
‘are NRE Soins
d oon Ke 3a
one SESH EA
AOR
BOIS AS
\
78
a
rn
Wes
—
iD
wi
62
Ss
(|
LY
PNR
Na
4
4
r£5
= ~,
Fig. 19. Bonisa nakaza gen. et sp. nov.
A. Ceras, scale 1,0 mm.
B. Digestive system, scale 2,0 mm.
22 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
specimens, which entirely lack blue or yellow pigment, possess only an apical
band of orange on each ceras and rhinophore. A few juvenile specimens have
cerata which are pinkish with blue pigment and opaque white apices. Since
adult specimens of different colour patterns have been observed copulating,
they are considered to be conspecific.
Digestive system (Fig. 19B)
There is a moderately large ring of oral glands surrounding the outer lips.
The massive buccal mass is highly muscular and occupies the anterior third of
the body cavity. The paired salivary glands are well developed, extending from
the posterior limit of the oesophagus. Near their origin there is a large,
spherical expansion of the salivary gland duct which probably functions as a
vestibule for storage of secretory products. The oesophagus is short and
expands into a thin-walled stomach. On the dorsal surface of the stomach is a
large corrugated portion. Surrounding the stomach are three major lobes of the
highly dendritic digestive gland. A digestive lobe joins the stomach on both the
anterolateral sides of the stomach with a third lobe connecting to the antero-
ventral portion. The intestine emerges from the posteroventral portion of the
stomach and continues posteriorly to the anus. The anus is not surrounded by
anal glands.
The buccal mass (Fig. 20A) has an oblong opening. The jaws (Fig. 20B)
are thick and broad with a smooth masticatory border (Fig. 21) which is
supported by an elevated arch of chitin. The outer borders of the jaws are
sharply indented. The radula (Fig. 22) contains 21 to 46 rows of teeth with 7 to
Fig. 20. Bonisa nakaza gen. et sp. nov.
A. Buccal mass, scale 1,0 mm.
B. Jaw, scale 1,0 mm.
SOUTH AFRICAN JANOLIDAE 23
wy
7 % ; es “
“ 4 a a i thy ie
i pS : 4.
& ass me ame see =e
Fig. 21. Bonisa nakaza gen. et sp. nov. Scanning electron micrograph
of masticatory border of jaw. Scale 100 wm between squares.
33 laterals on each side of the rachidian teeth. The rachidians possess 2 to 5
small or elongate denticles. The lateral teeth possess 2 to 7 denticles on each
side of the elongate central cusp.
Central nervous system (Fig. 23)
The major ganglia of the central nervous system are situated in the
circumoesophageal nerve ring. The cerebral ganglia are closely appressed to
each other without a distinct commissure and are joined posteriorly by the
distinct pleural ganglia. The anteriormost dorsal nerve of the cerebral ganglion
innervates the rhinophores and divides near the middle of its length to give rise
to a very thin branch which innervates the inter-rhinophoral crest. The eyes are
situated at the distal end of the elongate optic nerve which joins the junction of
the cerebral and pleural ganglia via a short optic ganglion. Extending anteriorly
from the cerebral ganglia are the paired buccal nerves which enlarge into the
buccal ganglia on the surface of the buccal mass. Ventral to the oesophagus,
the buccal ganglia are joined by a commissure of moderate length and anter-
iorly each gives rise to a smail gastro-intestinal ganglion. The pedal ganglia are
situated laterally to the cerebral and pleural ganglia rather than posteriorly, and
are connected by an elongate commissure.
24
ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Fig. 22. Bonisa nakaza gen. et sp. nov. A. Scanning electron
micrograph of central portion of radula. B. Scanning electron
micrograph of lateral teeth from outer portion of radula. Scales 30
um between squares.
SOUTH AFRICAN JANOLIDAE 25
=,
Fig. 23. Bonisa nakaza gen. et sp. nov.
Central nervous system.
Scale 0,5 mm.
Reproductive system (Fig. 24)
The ovotestis consists of numerous follicles which are united into an ovoid
mass. The preampullary duct emerges from the anterior end of the ovotestis
and expands into a highly convoluted, thickened ampulla. The ampulla narrows
anteriorly and divides into the oviduct and vas deferens. The vas deferens is
short, thick, and muscular, and expands into the massive penis sac. The penial
papilla is club-shaped and strongly corrugated. The oviduct is muscular and
joins the large receptaculum seminis near its base. Traversing the base of the
receptaculum seminis is a small, linear bursa copulatrix which joins the recepta-
culum near the female gonopore. At the base of the receptaculum sac is a thick
duct which connects it with the small albumen and membrane portions of the
female gland mass. These glands join the massive mucous gland, which forms
the bulk of the female gland mass.
Egg mass (Fig. 25)
The egg mass is about 20 to 30 mm high, consists of numerous convolu-
tions and corresponds to type B (Hurst 1967). There are one or two eggs per
capsule. The egg mass is frequently deposited on the finger-like projections of
gorgonians.
Natural history
Bonisa nakaza is found in the shallow subtidal, at depths of 3 to 30 m on
both the Atlantic and Indian Ocean coasts of the Cape Peninsula. It is
26 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Fig. 24. Bonisa nakaza gen. et sp. nov.
Reproductive system.
Scale 4,0 mm.
associated with and feeds upon the heavily calcified arborescent cheilostoma-
tous ectoproct, Tubucellaria levinseni Canu & Bassler, 1930.
DISCUSSION OF THE JANOLIDAE
Within the suborder Arminacea, the tribe Pachygnatha is subdivided into
three families, the Madrellidae, Dironidae, and Janolidae (Franc 1968). The
Janolidae have been separated from the other two families by having a broad
rather than narrow radula, a medial rather than lateral anus, and by having
extensions of the digestive gland into the cerata. With the discovery of Bonisa
nakaza in this study, the diagnosis of the Janolidae must be expanded to
include forms with or Without extensions of the digestive gland into the cerata.
The family Janolidae has been previously subdivided into five genera.
Proctonotus Alder & Hancock, 1844, and Caldukia Burn & Miller, 1969, lack
an inter-rhinophoral crest. Caldukia can be separated from Proctonotus by its
distinctively stout rhinophores with transverse lamellae and its significantly
narrower radular ribbon. Of the genera which possess an inter-rhinophoral
crest Galeojanolus Miller, 1971, can be separated from Janolus Bergh, 1884,
and Antiopella Hoyle, 1902, by the helmet-like appendage extending anteriorly
from the head. Bonisa gen. nov. must be added to this group and can be readily
separated from the other janolids by the fact that the digestive gland surrounds
the stomach rather than entering the notum and cerata. In several respects
Bonisa nakaza most closely approaches Galeojanolus ionnae Miller, 1971. Both
species have an ovoid body shape, similar coloration, perfoliate rhinophores, a
low, broad inter-rhinophoral crest with few convolutions, jaws with a smooth
masticatory border, a moderately broad radula with strongly denticulate teeth
and a diaulic reproductive system. Both species lack anal glands. However,
there are several significant differences which distinguish the species. Galeo-
SOUTH AFRICAN JANOLIDAE
Fig. 25. Bonisa nakaza gen. et sp. nov.
A. Egg mass X 3.
B. Several egg capsules x 100.
Di
28 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
janolus ionnae possesses an elongate helmet-like appendage on the anterior end
of the head which may be used in capturing mobile prey (Miller 1971), while
there is a short lobe anterior to the head of Bonisa nakaza. G. ionnae has
papillate, inflated cerata, while they are smooth and cylindrical in B. nakaza.
B. nakaza lacks complex oral glands and is devoid of digestive gland ducts in
the cerata which are both present in G. ionnae. The reproductive s¥stem of G.
ionnae, while not fully mature, has a conical, tapered penis and an elongate vas
deferens, while B. nakaza has a short vas deferens and a blunt, corrugated
penis similar in shape to that described for Janolus cristatus (Schmekel 1970).
Miller described a bursa copulatrix in G. ionnae, while B. nakaza possesses
both a large receptaculum seminis and a small bursa copulatrix situated near
the gonopore. These differences, particularly those of the digestive system,
' warrant generic as well as specific separation.
It is difficult to separate Antiopella and Janolus. Several authors have
united the genera (Thiele 1931; Franc 1968; Thompson & Brown 1976), while
others have maintained them as distinct (Eliot 1906; Pruvot-Fol 1954; Marcus
1958; Burn & Miller 1969; Baba & Abe 1970; Miller 1971). Pruvot-Fol (1954)
stated that Antiopella may be separated from Janolus by virtue of the fact that
the component species possess a denticulate instead of smooth masticatory
border of the jaw, smooth instead of papillate cerata, and branched instead of
undivided ducts of the digestive gland within the cerata. However, several
species of janolids (Table 1) possess intermediate or variable character states or
individual characters. They may also possess a mixture of ‘Antiopella’ and
‘Janolus’ characters. Marcus (1958: 40) noted that the structure of the cerata in
the type species of Janolus, J. australis, is questionable. Several workers who
have suggested the separation of Antiopella from Janolus have stated that jaw
denticulation alone should not warrant generic separation (Pruvot-Fol 1954;
Marcus 1958). The fact that Janolus capensis and J. longidentatus are very
similar in many aspects of their external and internal anatomy (present study)
but differ in jaw denticulation supports the view that this character alone
should not be utilized for generic separation in the Janolidae. The division of
the genital ducts into a diaulic or triaulic configuration varies significantly
within Janolus and Antiopella. The reproductive anatomy is described for eight
of the fifteen species described in both genera. In three species, A. mucloc
(Marcus 1958), Janolus comis (Marcus 1958), and J. toyamensis (present
TABLE |
Antiopella and Janolus characteristics in three species of janolids.
Species Ceratal epithelium Ceratal ducts Jaws
Janolus toyamensis smooth or with branched (A) large
few tubercles (A or I) denticles (1)
Janolus capensis smooth (A) branched (A) smooth (J)
Janolus fuscus smooth (A) branched (J) denticulate (A)
A—Antiopella I—Intermediate J—Janolus
SOUTH AFRICAN JANOLIDAE 29
study), the reproductive system is triaulic. In A. cristata (Schmekel 1970), J.
hyalinus (Schmekel 1970), J. fuscus (present study), J. capensis (present study),
and J. longidentatus (present study) a diaulic configuration is present. The
reproductive system of the type species of Janolus, J. australis, is incompletely
described. There is no correlation between division of the genital ducts and jaw
denticulation. There is, therefore, little basis for separating Antiopella Hoyle,
1902, from Janolus Bergh, 1884, and Antiopella is here regarded as a junior
subjective synonym of Janolus on the basis of priority.
KEY TO THE GENERA OF THE JANOLIDAE
ime izestive sland surrounding Stomach . 22... . i... ite tnt eee ee eee eee Bonisa
Digcstivercland extending into notum and cerata ’. 97 .-05. 03445: oes e sas saves anne 2
PRC -oMInOphoral Crest PLESENE. 25 ow Mee ee ik we Tae eye ee ahaa gemebes 3
Inte roninophnoralccrest:abSemt 2s. Ps e256 eet tee oe oa ele al wes oe hes eda ew dees 4
Sc acawiininelmet-lke EXtenSiOM 2. oan eos Meee ne sek be cee meme eats Galeojanolus
Hela NWAGMOUIREKCENGIOM. 5 oes). nj sesepane ao Heel eyerg ales Bt Ht ge ea bs eo nee Janolus
4 Rhinophoral club stout with transverse lamellae, radula6.1.6................ Caldukia
Rhinophores with inconspicuous lamellae, radula broad.................. Proctonotus
The following species are considered to constitute the family Janolidae
(“indicates type species):
Bonisa gen. nov.
1. *Bonisa nakaza sp. nov.
Caldukia Burn & Miller, 1969
2. *Caldukia affinis (Burn, 1958)
Proctonotus? affinis Burn, 1958: 32, fig. 8, pl. 7 (fig. 15).
Caldukia affinis (Burn, 1958), Burn and Miller, 1969: 23, figs 1-2, pl. 2.
3. Caldukia albolineata Miller, 1970
Caldukia albolineata Miller, 1970: 279, figs 1-10.
4. Caldukia rubiginosa Miller, 1970
Caldukia rubiginosa Miller, 1970: figs 11-21.
Galeojanolus Miller, 1971
5. *Galeojanolus ionnae Miller, 1971
Galeojanolus ionnae Miller, 1971: 491, figs 1-4.
Janolus Bergh, 1884
6. *Janolus australis Bergh, 1884
Janolus australis Bergh, 1884: 19, pl. 8 (figs 15-22), pl. 9 (figs 6-8).
30 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
7. Janolus barbarensis (Cooper, 1863)
Aeolis barbarensis Cooper, 1863: 59.
Janolus coeruleopictus Cockerell & Eliot, 1905: 48, pl. 8 (figs 12-16). O’Donoghue, 1922: 141.
Janolus barbarensis (Cooper, 1863), O’Donoghue, 1922: 141.
Antiopella aureocincta MacFarland, 1966: 303, pl. 57 (figs 1-5), pl. 63 (figs 13-30), pl. 64 (figs
117) Roller 197053725 in) pant-
8. Janolus capensis Bergh, 1907
Janolus capensis Bergh, 1907: 90, pl. 7 (figs 6-21).
9. Janolus comis Marcus, 1955
Janolus comis Marcus, 1955: 170, pl. 25 (figs 226-236).
10. Janolus cristatus (Chiaje, 1841)
Eolis cristatus Chiaje, 1841: pl. 88 (figs 1-12).
Janus spinolae Verany, 1845: 24, pl. 2 (fig. 9). Pruvot-Fol, 1954: 375.
Antiopa splendida Alder & Hancock, 1848: 190. Alder & Hancock, 1851.
Antiopella cristata (Chiaje, 1841), Hoyle, 1902: 214.
Janolus cristatus (Chiaje, 1841), O’Donoghue, 1924: 1.
11. Janolus flagellatus Eliot, 1906
Janolus flagellatus Eliot, 1906: 374.
(Likely a junior synonym of J. hyalinus (Alder & Hancock, 1854). Eliot
(1910) considered this as an uncertain species. It was distinguished from
J. hyalinus by possession of a flagellar penis which has subsequently been
described in J. hyalinus (Schmekel 1970).)
12. Janolus fuscus O’Donoghue, 1924
Janolus fuscus O’Donoghue, 1924: 16, pl. 2 (figs 18-20).
Antiopella aureocincta Johnson & Snook, 1927: 500. Nomen nudum, Steinberg, 1963: 66.
Antiopella aureotincta MacGinitie & MacGinitie, 1949: 135. Nomen nudum, Steinberg, 1963:
66.
Antiopella aureocincta MacFarland, 1966: 303, pl. 57 (figs 1-5), pl. 63 (figs 13-30), pl. 64 (figs
11-17). Roller, 1970: 372, in part.
13. Janolus hyalinus (Alder & Hancock, 1854)
Antiopa hyalina Alder & Hancock, 1854a: 105.
Janolus hyalinus (Alder & Hancock, 1854), Eliot, 1906: 374.
14. Janolus indicus (Eliot, 1909)
Antiopella indica Eliot, 1909: 143.
Janolus indicus (Eliot, 1909), comb. nov.
15. Janolus longidentatus sp. nov.
16. Janolus mirabilis Baba & Abe, 1970
Janolus mirabilis Baba & Abe, 1970: 65, figs 2-3.
17. Janolus mucloc (Marcus, 1958)
Antiopella mucloc Marcus, 1958: 37, figs 62-71.
Janolus mucloc (Marcus, 1958), comb. nov.
18. Janolus novozealandicus (Eliot, 1907)
Antiopella novozealandica Eliot, 1907: 331.
Janolus novozealandicus (Eliot, 1907), comb. nov.
SOUTH AFRICAN JANOLIDAE Sil
19. Janolus praeclarus (Bouchet, 1975)
Antiopella praeclara Bouchet, 1975: 127, pl. 1 (fig. 3), fig. 5.
Janolus praeclarus (Bouchet, 1975), comb. nov.
20. Janolus toyamensis Baba & Abe, 1970
Janolus toyamensis Baba & Abe, 1970: 63, fig. 1.
Proctonotus Alder & Hancock, 1844
21. *Proctonotus mucroniferus (Alder & Hancock, 1844)
Venilia mucronifera Alder & Hancock, 1844: 163, pl. 2.
Proctonotus mucroniferus (Alder & Hancock, 1844) Alder, 1844: 407.
Zephyrina pilosa Quatrefages, 1844: 130, pl. 3 (fig. 1), pl. 4 (fig. 1), pl. 5 (figs 1-2), pl. 6 (figs 1,
11-12). Pruvot-Fol, 1954: 372.
Morphological variability
Janolus varies in its external and internal morphology. The major morpho-
logical features and their character states in the fifteen described species of
Janolus are summarized in Table 2. Many taxa are incompletely described,
including the type species, but the available morphological data does permit a
review of the variability within the genus. All described species have a simply
rounded head, perfoliate or, exceptionally, papillate (J. comis Marcus, 1955)
rhinophores, an inter-rhinophoral crest, and cerata which contain ducts of the
digestive gland. The inter-rhinophoral crest may be small and rectangular or
may be highly elaborate as in J. cristatus (Alder & Hancock 18546), J. capensis
(present study), J. novozealandicus (Eliot 1907), and J. longidentatus (present
study). The cerata are papillate in J. comis (Marcus 1955), J. hyalinus (Alder &
Hancock 1854b), and J. mirabilis (Baba & Abe 1970), and smooth in the
remainder of the species. The cerata of J. toyamensis are variable, with
scattered, small papillae (Baba & Abe 1970) or with an entirely smooth surface
(present study). The digestive gland may extend only within the basal half of
the cerata in Janolus comis (Marcus 1958), J. hyalinus (Bergh 1904), and
Galeojanolus ionnae (Miller 1971), or extend to the apex of the cerata in the
remaining species of Janolus. Within the cerata the digestive gland may be
branched or unbranched. In species with a branched digestive gland, the
splitting may occur apically in J. cristatus (Alder & Hancock 185456) and
J. barbarensis (MacFarland 1966), near the middle in J. mucloc (Marcus 1958),
J. praeclarus (Bouchet 1975), J. toyamensis (Baba & Abe 1970), and J. capensis
(present study), or basally in J. longidentatus (present study). In most species of
Janolus all cerata contain extensions of digestive gland except J. hyalinus (Eliot
1910), J. comis (Marcus 1958), J. capensis (present study), and J. longidentatus
(present study) where the anteriormost cerata are devoid of digestive gland
tissue.
It appears that in all species of Janolus that have been studied, simple oral
glands and elaborate salivary glands are present and the digestive gland occurs
as three major branches from the stomach. Anal glands appear to be present in
all species except J. comis (Marcus 1955) and J. fuscus (present study).
a2
ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
TABLE 2
Comparative morphology of Janolus.
Species of Ceratal Ceratal 5
Janolus Colour epithelium ducts Jaws Radular teeth
J. australis unknown smooth ? unknown smooth rachidian and =
laterals smooth
J. barbarensis . translucent white; cerata smooth branched unknown rachidian smooth, w
with gold and blue laterals: inner 2 denticulate,| |
outer smooth
J. comis light brown with dark- papillate unbranched smooth rachidian denticulate, 4
brown stipples laterals: denticulate, variable} *
J. cristatus cream or brown with smooth branched at 8-12 denticles rachidian and laterals
opaque white cerata apex smooth, rarely denticulate
J. flagellatus unknown unknown unknown smooth rachidian and laterals
smooth
J. fuscus translucent white with smooth unbranched 8-14 denticles rachidian denticulate,
: brown lines, cerata with laterals: inner 2 denticulate,| |
yellow and white outer smooth
J. hyalinus cream with red-brown papillate unbranched smooth rachidian and laterals
blotches; cerata dotted with smooth or finely denticulate
white and brown
J. indicus translucent with red-brown unknown unknown denticulate rachidian and laterals
spots, cerata grey-green smooth
J. mirabilis yellow with brown and papillate unbranched? smooth rachidian, denticulate,
Opaque white; cerata white laterals: inner 3 denticulate,
at apex outer 2 smooth
J. mucloc . transparent white with smooth branched, 8 denticles rachidian denticulate, |
opaque white lines; cerata bifurcate laterals: inner denticulate,
with orange spot and below outers smooth
opaque white lines middle
J. novozealandicus grey with purple stripe and smooth unbranched indistin-t rachidian and laterals
spots; cerata with purple denticulation smooth
spots
J. praeclarus orange with opaque white; smooth branched 6 denticles rachidian and laterals
cerata with yellow bands smooth
and bluish-white apex
J.toyamensis . yellow with white and few minute branched 2 or 3 large rachidian and laterals
brown markings; cerata papillae denticles smooth
with yellow spot and red-
brown apex
J. capensis translucent white with smooth branched smooth rachidian and laterals
Opaque white; cerata red- smooth
brown with opaque white
apex
J. longidentatus translucent white with smooth branched 7-8 denticles rachidian striate, ;
Opaque white; cerata red- basally laterals smooth
brown with opaque white
apex
{
|
|
21 x 21.1.21
SOUTH AFRICAN JANOLIDAE
33
Receptaculum Bursa Prostatic Reproductive
Radular formula seminis copulatrix Penis vas deferens ducts References
24 x 30-54.1.30-54 unknown unknown thicker unknown unknown Bergh 1884
than vas
deferens
6X27 127 unknown unknown unknown unknown unknown Cockerell & Eliot 1905
MacFarland 1966, in part
16 x 12—20.1.12—20 proximal, absent conical, proximalto triaulic Marcus 1955
25 x 41.1.41 serial flagellar penis only Marcus 1958
30 x 40.1.40 proximal, minute, blunt throughout diaulic Alder & Hancock 1851
24 x 33.1.33 semi-serial distal Alder & Hancock 1855
Schmekel 1970
Thompson & Brown 1976
15 x 20.1.20 unknown large, unknown unknown unknown Eliot 1906
elliptical
PAS C22 N22 proximal, distal conical throughout diaulic O’Donoghue 1924
ZO25. 1625 semi-serial MacFarland 1966, in part
present study
15 x 11—13.1.11-13 small, absent elongate, throughout diaulic Alder & Hancock 1854b
proximal, flagellar Alder & Hancock 1855
Bergh 1888, Eliot 1906,
semi-serial Schmekel 1970
Pip sletesil unknown unknown unknown unknown unknown Eliot 1909
DO x5 15 unknown unknown unknown unknown unknown Baba & Abe 1970
18 x 24.1.24 proximal, absent thick throughout triaulic Marcus 1958
semi-serial
within female
gland mass
PX Silos unknown unknown short unknown unknown Eliot 1907
20 x 28.1.28 unknown unknown unknown unknown unknown Bouchet 1975
20 x 10-—20.1.10-20 proximal absent elongate, throughout triaulic Baba & Abe 1970
OX 25S Ae25 flagellar present study
20 x 42.1.42 elongate, distal, elongate, throughout diaulic Bergh 1907
18 x 41.1.41 proximal, minute flagellar Barnard 1927
17 x 26.1.26 semi-serial present study
LETS< AAT a short, distal, conical short diaulic present study
22) 26:1226 proximal, minute
20 x 20.1.20 semi-serial
32
ANNAL
S OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
SOUTH AFRICAN JANOLIDAE
TABLE 2
Comparative morphology of Janolus.
Ceratal
Species of pit ducts Jaws Radular teeth Receptaculum Bursa Prostatic Reproductive
Janolus Colour ; aan Radular formula seminis copulatrix Penis vas deferens ducts References
. th ? unknown smoot rachidian and :
J. australis unknown estel) laterals smooth 24 x 30-54.1.30-54 = unknown unknown pueneD unknown unknown Bergh 1884
an vas
deferens
as anched unknown rachidian smooth
J. barbarensis . EransLiceus site ETA smooth brane! NaPeTAIee inner 2 denticul, 16 x 27.1.27 unknown unknown unknown unknown unknown Cockerell & Eliot 1905
with gold an outer smooth y MacFarland 1966, in part
5 5 i th achidi i z
J. comis light brown with dark- papillate unbranched smoo HSE PANE, 16 x 12-20.1.12-20 —_— proximal, absent conical, Proximalto triaulic Marcus 1955
brown stipples » Variable 25x 41.1.41 serial flagellar penis only Marcus 1958
= i th branched at 8-12 denticles rachidian and laterals A A =
J. cristatus cream or brown with sn100, A 30 x 40.1.40 proximal, minute, blunt throughout diaulic Al ancock 185
opaque white cerata pees smooth: rately eaten 24 x 33.1.33 semi-serial distal : ; Ree ee enee
Schmekel 1970
= Thompson & Brown 1976
J. flagellatus . unknown unknown unknown smooth Aechistan and laterals 15 x 20.1.20 unknown Testes unknown unknown unknown Eliot 1906
elliptica’
J. fuscus translucent white with SH Rote ay CCRC eS ag Facclan denteua 21 x 2.1.22 proximal, distal conical throughout diaulic O'Donoghue 1924
brown lines, cerata with Bi nae 26 x 25.1.25 semi-serial MacFarland 1966, in part
yellow and white S present study ;
F ; i branched smooth rachidian and laterals aoa
J. hyalinus cream with red-brown __ papillate wn S 15% 11-13.1.11-13 small, absent elongate, throughout diaul Al ancock 185:
6 blotches; cerata dotted with smooth or finely denticulate proximal, flagellar g) iaulic ALE - Pancake Las
white and brown : f Bergh 1888, Eliot 1906,
semi-serial Schmekel 1970
J. indicus . translucent with red-brown unknown unknown denticulate peehidian and laterals 21 31.1.31 unknown unknown unknown unknown unknown Eliot 1909
spots, cerata grey-green smoot
. mirabilis ellow with brown and papillate unbranched? smooth rachidian, denticulate, ant Ie k k
J. mirabilis seaehe De teoraial White laterals: inner 3 denticulat, 20 x 5.1.5 unknown unknown unknown unknown unknown Baba & Abe 1970
at apex outer 2 smooth
J. mucloc . transparent white with smooth branched, 8 denticles rachidian denticulate, 18 x 24.1.24 proximal, absent thick throughout _ triaulic Marcus 1958
opaque white lines; cerata bifurcate laterals: inner denticulate, semi-serial
with orange spot and below outers smooth within female
opaque white lines middle gland mass
J. novozealandicus grey with purple stripe and smooth unbranched indistin ot. rachidian and laterals 23 %37.1.37 unknown unknown short unknown unknown Eliot 1907
spots; cerata with purple denticulation smooth
spots
J. praeclarus . orange with opaque white; smooth branched 6 denticles rachidian and laterals 20 x 28.1.28 unknown unknown unknown unknown unknown Bouchet 1975
cerata with yellow bands smooth
and bluish-white apex
J. toyamensis . yellow with white and few minute branched 2 or 3 large rachidian and laterals 20 x 10-20.1.10-20 proximal absent elongate, throughout triaulic Baba & Abe 1970
brown markings; cerata papillae denticles smooth 19 x 25.1.25 flagellar present study
with yellow spot and red-
brown apex
J. capensis translucent white with smooth branched smooth rachidian and laterals 20 x 42.1.42 elongate, distal, elongate, throughout diaulic Bergh 1907
opaque white; cerata red- smooth 18x 41.1.41 proximal, minute flagellar Barnard 1927
brown with opaque white 17 x 26.1.26 semi-serial present study
apex
J. longidentatus translucent white with smooth branched 7-8 denticles rachidian striate, 18 x 21.1.21 short, distal, conical short diaulic present study
opaque white; cerata red- basally laterals smooth 22 x 26.1.26 proximal, minute
brown with opaque white 20 x 20.1.20 semi-serial
apex
21x 21.1.21
34 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
As mentioned in the discussion of the synonomy of Antiopella with Janolus
the elaboration of the masticatory border and shape of the jaw are interspeci-
fically variable (Fig. 26). Previous workers (Pruvot-Fol 1954; Marcus 1958)
have emphasized the distinctness of a smooth versus denticulate masticatory
border. However, Janolus toyamensis (Fig. 26C) possesses three large tubercles
on the masticatory border and J. novozealandicus was described as having
indistinct denticles (Eliot 1907).
The radular teeth are variable within Janolus (Fig. 27) and some intraspe-
cific variations exists. The rachidian teeth are denticulate in J. fuscus (MacFar-
land 1966; present study), J. comis (Marcus 1958), J. mirabilis (Baba & Abe
1970), and J. mucloc (Marcus 1958), striate in J. longidentatus (present study),
and smooth in the remaining species. The rachidian tooth has a broad base in
species with denticulations or striations and is linear in species with smooth
teeth. In J. fuscus (MacFarland 1966; present study), J. mirabilis (Baba & Abe
1970), and J. mucloc (Marcus 1958) the inner 1 to 3 lateral teeth are denticulate
while the outer teeth are entirely smooth. J. cristatus generally has smooth
lateral teeth (Alder & Hancock 1855), but exceptionally (Bergh 1874) they are
denticulate. The presence or absence of denticles varies with age in J. comis
(Marcus 1958) and J. hyalinus (Eliot 1906). Bouchet (1975) noted that the
lateral teeth of J. praeclarus increase in size until the eighteenth row and then
begin to diminish. In J. australis the innermost are largest (Bergh 1884). In
J. cristatus (present study) and J. capensis (present study) the teeth increase in
length on either side of the radula until about one-third of the breadth, and
subsequently diminish. In J. capensis the radular morphology of fifteen speci-
mens of various sizes did not vary significantly. In J. hyalinus (Eliot 1906) and
J. novozealandicus (Eliot 1907), and in at least ten specimens of J. longidenta-
tus (present study) the largest lateral teeth are found at or adjacent to the outer
edge of the radula. The relative length of the base to the cusp of the lateral
teeth varies considerably between species and appears to be useful in the
separation of species.
The central nervous system of Janolus cristatus was described (Alder &
Hancock 1851) as containing distinct cerebral and pleural ganglia. Bergh noted
that these ganglia are fused in Janolus australis (Bergh 1884) and J. capensis
(Bergh 1907). The present study confirms this arrangement in J. capensis, while
J. longidentatus possesses distinct ganglia as in J. cristatus.
The morphology of the reproductive system has been fully described in five
species of Janolus. In J. comis and J. mucloc (Marcus 1958) the arrangement is
triaulic with a short uterine duct connecting the vagina and female gland mass
near the separation of the oviduct and vas deferens from the ampulla. In
J. cristatus and J. hyalinus (Schmekel 1970) the vagina joins the female gland
mass only at the female atrium, producing an androdiaulic configuration. The
present study has shown that J. toyamensis (Fig. 28G) has a triaulic arran-
gement with a proximal receptaculum seminis but with no bursa copulatrix.
J. capensis and J. longidentatus have a diaulic arrangement with a proximal
SOUTH AFRICAN JANOLIDAE a5
Fig. 26. Variation in jaw morphology. A. Janolus fuscus O’Donoghue, 1924. B. Bonisa nakaza
gen. et sp. nov. C. Janolus toyamensis Baba & Abe, 1970. D. Janolus longidentatus sp. nov.
E. Janolus capensis Bergh, 1907. Scale 1,0 mm.
36 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
ss
Fig. 27. Variation in the rachidian, first, seventh and twentieth lateral teeth in the Janolidae.
A. Janolus capensis Bergh, 1907. B. Janolus longidentatus sp. nov. C. Janolus cristatus (Chiaje,
1841). D. Janolus fuscus O’Donoghue, 1924. E. Janolus toyamensis Baba & Abe, 1970.
F. Bonisa nakaza gen. et sp. nov. Not drawn to scale.
SOUTH AFRICAN JANOLIDAE 37
receptaculum seminis and a minute, distal bursa copulatrix. This configuration
is also present in J. fuscus (Fig. 28F) contrary to that described by MacFarland
(1966, pl. 64 (fig. 11)).
The shape of the penis has been utilized as a characteristic for specific
separation. Janolus flagellatus (Eliot 1906) was described as distinct from J.
hyalinus because its elongate, flagellar penial papilla was thought to be differ-
ent from the blunt papilla depicted by Bergh (1888) for J. hyalinus. Subsequent
work by Schmekel (1970) has shown that the penis of J. hyalinus is flagellar
when fully extended. The shape of the penis varies considerably within species
depending on degree of extension. In comparing penial structure between
species, it is imperative that descriptions be made from specimens with a fully
extended penis.
The egg mass of Janolus cristatus (Alder & Hancock, 1855: pl. 44 (figs
6—7)) is a short, convoluted ribbon of about one and a half whorls, with a single
egg per capsule. A similar egg mass is apparently present in Janolus fuscus
(O’Donoghue 1924). The egg mass of Janolus capensis (present study) is
globose, consisting of many whorls and with 38 to 45 eggs per capsule, while
that of J. Jongidentatus is a flat spiral consisting of 5—9 eggs per capsule.
Janolus longidentatus differs from all other species of Janolus which
possess denticles on the masticatory edge. J. mucloc (Marcus 1958) is triaulic
and therefore differs from the diaulic J. Jongidentatus. J. praeclarus (Bouchet
1975), while much of its anatomy remains unknown, differs from J. longidenta-
tus in its Orange versus translucent white coloration, smaller inter-rhinophoral
crest, branching of the ceratal ducts near the middle rather than basally, more
sharply arched radular teeth that are longest near the middle rather than at the
outer edge of the radula, and jaws with 6 denticles rather than 7 or 8. Janolus
longidentatus differs from J. fuscus in its coloration, more elaborate inter-
rhinophoral crest, smooth inner lateral teeth, and presence of anal glands.
Janolus longidentatus, although similar to J. cristatus in coloration, external and
reproductive anatomy (Schmekel 1970), differs in several significant aspects. In
J. longidentatus the ceratal ducts branch basally while they branch apically in J.
cristatus. The rachidian teeth of J. Jongidentatus are broad with striations versus
the smoothly linear form of J. cristatus. In J. cristatus the radular teeth are
largest at the inner third of the radula, while they are broadest near the outer
margin in J. longidentatus. The lateral teeth are broader and heavier in J.
cristatus. The oviduct is short in J. cristatus and elongate in J. longidentatus. J.
cristatus has a blunt club-shaped penis, while in J. /ongidentatus it is conical.
Despite the difference in the elaboration of the masticatory border of the
jaw, J. longidentatus most closely approaches J. capensis in its morphology. For
this reason a morphological comparison of the three sympatric South African
janolids is provided in Table 3.
The South African species of janolids occur together in the shallow waters
of False Bay. All three species can be found within a few centimetres of each
other. Janolus capensis and J. longidentatus have been observed to feed upon
ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
38
-6-S Sp-8E Zi 10 if ajnsdes/ss30
yisugy] jeursea Jo Joy1enb y70ys BUISEA SB SUC] Sev ‘d}e3U0[S a7e90es ‘aSIe] SIUIWIOS WNTNIe}d9901
SUOTINJOAUOD MOI yum poinjoauos ATYysTY yys1es “y10Ys SUdIOJOp SBA
yeotuos Ieyjosey povesnis09 kat stuod
jouN)sIp posnj youNSsIp eljsues jeinojd pue [eiqo1eo
qjoours ‘dsno a3e3u0]9 YIM yoous ‘podeys-yooy aje[nouep ‘podeys-yooy Y199} [e19}e]
e[NpeI JO UIsIVW 19j}NO IevoU B[Npel JO YIpIM jo ply) 4199} JSOWIOUUI sje1o}e] 1SoSIe]
SUONPII}S YIIM ‘peoiq reoul] ‘YJOOUS sopPluep o31e] YIM ‘peolq YJ00} UvIpPIyoes
Sopoluep g-/ yJOous YJOOUIS Japiog A1ojeonseul
UONIISUI Je Ie[Npueys uOonJesuI je Jode}y IIOAIOSOI [eseq YIM spurs Arearyes
punol ro 0(0) (@[0) Zuojqo sulusdo ynoul
Apoqg Jo d]pprw Iesu Apoq jo o][pprul 0} Jo1193sod Apoq JO pity} 1o11a}sod yooido1ydou
Apoq Jo pity} Jo1ajue Apog Jo 3[pprw edu Apog jo o]pprw re9u a1odouos
aseq Ieau ‘iejnse1 ‘pylupenb J[pplu Ieou ‘Ie[NsoIM “pynnuw juasqe sjonp [eye100
suOINJOAUOS Aue ‘YsTY suolNjoAuos Aueu ‘Yysty SUONNJOAUOD MOJ ‘MOT soo Je1OYdouTYI-19}UI
Jopusys no}s yno}js Apoq
Snjvuap1suo] snjouve sisuadvo snjouve DZDYDU DSIUOg
‘sprjouel uevoLyy ynos jo Asojoydiow saneiedwod
¢ ATaV
39
SOUTH AFRICAN JANOLIDAE
“Q[2OS 0} UMBIP JON ‘(Apnys yussoid) ‘Aou ‘ds j9 ‘uod DzDynU DSiuog “HY ‘(Apnys yuosoid)
OL6I “9QV w eqeg sisuaupdo] snjouve ‘DH “(Apnys jussoid) p76, ‘onysou0d,.C snosn{ snjouvr ‘4 “(OL6T [OYOWYOS Joye) (TpET ‘oferD) snywjsi9
snjouvr “ZA “(OL6I JPYouyos Joye) (post “YoooueH 2%» Jppy) snuyody snjouve *q “(OLGT [OYewWYIS Joe) Ccoy ‘snoIe] suo snjouve *D *(Apnjs
juasoid) -aou ‘ds snipjuapisuo] snjouvr ‘gq ‘(Apnys juasoid) (06, ‘YsiI9g sisuadvo snjouvs ‘YW ‘snjouvs ut Wa\sks dAONpoOidal Jo UONeLIeA °87 “SI
d
SA
SA
Pa Su
ule
40 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
the same species of ectoproct, while Bonisa nakaza feeds on a more heavily
calcified species. Fdod abundance does not appear to be a limiting factor as
many ectoproct colonies are devoid of janolids. Observation of feeding behav-
iour in Janolus capensis and J. longidentatus has produced no apparent differ-
ences in mode of feeding or handling of prey. No obvious form of resource
partitioning has been observed between the two species, although it may exist.
The hottentot, Pachymetopon blochii, is the most common fish species in
environments where janolids have been observed and is known to be a
generalized omnivore of benthic organisms (Nepgen 1977). Specimens of
Bonisa nakaza, Janolus capensis, and J. longidentatus are readily ingested by
hottentots in the field and even more readily regurgitated in an unharmed state,
suggesting defensive immunity to fish predation. More detailed study of the
three species of janolids is required to determine their competitive population
dynamics, interaction, and possible resource partitioning.
ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS
I should like to thank Dr Roberta Griffiths of the University of Cape Town
for her critical review of the manuscript. Miss Patricia Cook of the British
Museum (Natural History) kindly identified the ectoproct species. The follow-
ing members of staff at the South African Museum provided valuable assistance
in the preparation of the manuscript: Mr William R. Liltved collected many
specimens and made many of the original drawings and all the final inked
figures; Mr Sidney X. Kannemeyer and Mrs Michelle van der Merwe prepared
the final photographic prints; Mrs Gail Strong typed several drafts of the
manuscript, and Mrs Marcelle Scheiner typed the final draft. To them I extend
my appreciation.
SOUTH AFRICAN JANOLIDAE 41
REFERENCES
ALDER, J. 1844. On the genus Venilia. Ann. Mag. nat. Hist. 13: 407.
ALDER, J. & Hancock, A. 1844. Description of a new genus of nudibranchiate Mollusca, with
some new species of Eolis. Ann. Mag. nat. Hist. 13: 161-167.
ALDER, J. & Hancock, A. 1848. Additions to the British species of nudibranchiate Mollusca.
Ann. Mag. nat. Hist. (2) 1: 189-192.
ALDER, J. & Hancock, A. 1851. Monograph of the British Nudibranchiate Mollusca 5. London:
Ray Society.
ALDER, J. & Hancock, A. 1854a. Notice of some new species of British Nudibranchiata. Ann.
Mag. nat. Hist. (2) 14: 102-105.
ALDER, J. & Hancock, A. 18546. Monograph of the British Nudibranchiate Mollusca 6.
Londou: Ray Society.
ALDER, J. & Hancock, A. 1855. Monograph of the British Nudibranchiate Mollusca 7. London:
Ray Society.
BaBA, K. & ABE, T. 1970. Two new species of Janolidae from Toyama Bay, Japan (Gastro-
poda: Nudibranchia). Veliger 13: 63-66.
BARNARD, K. 1927. South African nudibranch Mollusca, with descriptions of new species, and a
note on some specimens from Tristan d’ Acunha. Ann. S. Afr. Mus. 25: 171-215.
BErGH, R. 1874. Beitrage zur Kenntniss der Aeolidiaden.2. Verh. zool-bot Ges. Wien 24:
395-416.
BERGH, R. 1884. Report on the Nudibranchiata. Report of the Scientific Results of the Voyage of
the H.M.S. Challenger, Zool. 10(26): 1-154.
BERGH, R. 1888. Beitrage zur Kenntniss der Aeolidiaden, 9. Verh. zool-bot. Ges. Wien 38:
673-706.
BeErGH, R. 1904. Malacologische Untersuchungen (9)6(1). Jn: SEMPER, C., ed. Reisen im
Archipel der Philippinen. Wiesbaden: Kreidel’s Verlag.
BERGH, R. 1907. The Opisthobranchiata of South Africa. Trans. S. Afr. phil. Soc. 17(1): 1-44.
BoucueEt, P. 1975. Nudibranches nouveaux des cotes du Sénégal. Vie Milieu 25(1A): 119-131.
Burn, R. 1958. Further Victorian Opisthobranchia. J. malac. Soc. Austr. 2: 20-36.
Burn, R. & Miiier, M. 1969. A new genus, Caldukia, and an extended description of the type
species, Proctonotus? affinis Burn, 1958 (Mollusca Gastropoda: Arminacea, Antiopelli-
dae). J. malac. Soc. Austr. 12: 23-31.
CHIAJE, S. 1841. Descrizione e notomia degli animali invertebrati della Sicilia citeriore osservati
vivi negli anni 1822-1830, Napoli. 7: pls 86-173.
CocKERELL, T. & Exior, C. 1905. Notes on a collection of Californian nudibranchs. J. malac.
12(3): 31-53.
Cooper, J. 1863. On new or rare Mollusca inhabiting the coast of California. 2. Proc. Calif.
Acad. Sci. 3: 56-60.
Euror, C. 1906. Notes on some British nudibranchs. J. mar. biol. Ass. U.K. 7(3): 333-382.
Euior, C. 1907. Nudibranchs from New Zealand and the Falkland Islands. Proc. malac. Soc.
Lond. 7: 327-361.
Eviot, C. 1909. Report on the nudibranchs collected by Mr. James Hornell at Okhamandal in
Kattiawar in 1905-6. In: Report to the government of Baroda on the marine zoology of
Okhamandal in Kattiawar 1: 137-145.
Eviot, C. 1910. A monograph of the British nudibranch Mollusca 8 (suppl.). London: Ray
Society.
Franc, A. 1968. Mollusques gastéropodes et scaphopodes. Jn: Grassk, P., ed. Traité de
Zoologie 5(3): Paris: Masson et Cie.
Hoye, W. 1902. Two points in nomenclature. 1. Cypriniadea versus Cyprina. 2. The genus
Antiopa. J. Conch., Lond. 10(7): 214.
Hurst, A. 1967. The egg masses and veligers of thirty northeast Pacific opisthobranchs. Veliger
9: 255-288.
Jounson, M. & Snook, H. 1927. Seashore animals of the Pacific Coast. New York: Dover.
MACFaRLAND, F. 1966. Studies of opisthobranchiate mollusks of the Pacific coast of North
America. Mem. Calif. Acad. Sci. 6: 1-546.
MacGinitie, G. & MacGinitie, N. 1949. Natural history of marine animals. New York:
McGraw-Hill.
42 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Marcus, E. 1955. Opisthobranchia from Brazil. Bol. Fac. Fil. Cien. Let. Univ. S. Paulo,
Brazil (Zool.) 20: 89-261.
Marcus, E. 1958. On western Atlantic opisthobranchiate gastropods. Amer. Mus. Novit. 1906:
1-82.
MiLLer, M. 1970. Two new species of the genus Caldukia Burn & Miller, 1969 (Mollusca:
Gastropoda: Opisthobranchia) from New Zealand waters. Veliger 12: 279-289.
Miter, M. 1971. A new genus and species of the nudibranch family Janolidae (Mollusca,
Gastropoda, Opisthobranchia) from New Zealand waters. J. nat. Hist. 5: 491-498.
NEPGEN, C. 1977. The biology of the hottentot, Pachymetopon blochii (Val.) and the silverfish
Argyrozona argyrozona (Val.) along the Cape south-west coast. Invest. Rep. Sea Fish.
Branch 105: 1-35.
O’DOoNOGHUE, C. 1922. Notes on the taxonomy of nudibranchiate Mollusca from the Pacific
Coast of North America. Proc. malac. Soc. Lond. 15: 133-150.
O’DonoGHuE, C. 1924. Notes on the nudibranchiate Mollusca from the Vancouver Island
Region. 4. Trans. R. Can. Inst. 15(1): 1-33.
Pruvot-FoL, A. 1954. Mollusques opisthobranches. Faune Fr. 58: 1-460.
QUATREFAGES, J. 1844. Sur les gastéropodes phlébentérés (Phlébentérata Nob.), ordre nouveau
de la classe des gastéropodes, proposé d’aprés l’examen anatomique et physiologique des
genres Zéphyrine (Zephyrina Nob.), Actéon (Acteon Oken), Actéonie (Acteonie Nob.),
Amphorine (Amphorina Nob.), Pavois (Pelta Nob.), Chalide (Chalidis Nob.). Ann. Sci.
Nat., Paris (3) Zool. 1: 129-183.
Ro.ier, R. 1970. A list of recommended nomenclatural changes for MacFarland’s ‘Studies of
Opisthobranchiate Mollusks of the Pacific Coast of North America’. Veliger 12: 371-374.
SCHMEKEL, L. 1970. Anatomie der Genitalorgane von Nudibranchiern (Gastropoda
Euthyneura). Pubbl. Staz. Zool. Napoli 38: 120-217.
STEINBERG, J. 1963. Notes on the opisthobranchs of the West Coast of North America. III.
Further nomenclatural changes in the order Nudibranchia. Veliger 6: 63-67.
THIELE, J. 1931. Handbuch der Systematischen Weichterkunde 1. Jena: Gustav Fischer.
THompson, T. & Brown, G. 1976. British opisthobranch molluscs. Synopses of the British fauna
(New Series) No. 8. London: Academic Press.
VERANY, G. 1845. Janus spinolae. Mag. Zool. (2) 7: 121-122.
ABBREVIATIONS
a anus 1 intestine
ag anal glands m muscle bands
al albumen gland me membrane gland
am ampulla mu mucous gland
b buccal mass n nephroproct
be bursa copulatrix O oral glands
Cc cerebral ganglion Pp penis
cp cerebropleural ganglion pg pedal ganglion
d digestive gland branch pl pleural ganglion
dg digestive gland rc. renopericardial canal
C eye rs receptaculum seminis
f female gland mass S stomach
g gonopores sg Salivary gland
ga _ceratal ganglion vd ___-vas deferens
gl ceratal gland
6. SYSTEMATIC papers must conform to the Jnternational code of zoological nomenclature
(particularly Articles 22 and S51).
Names of new taxa, combinations, synonyms, etc., when used for the first time, must be
followed by the appropriate Latin (not English) abbreviation, e.g. gen. nov., sp. nov., comb.
nov., Syn. nov., etc.
An author’s name when cited must follow the name of the taxon without intervening
punctuation and not be abbreviated; if the year is added, a comma must separate author’s
name and year. The author’s name (and date, if cited) must be placed in parentheses if a
species or subspecies is transferred from its original genus. The name of a subsequent user of
a scientific name must be separated from the scientific name by a colon.
Synonymy arrangement should be according to chronology of names, i.e. all published
scientific names by which the species previously has been designated are listed in chronological
order, with all references to that name following in chronological order, e.g.:
Family Nuculanidae
Nuculana (Lembulus) bicuspidata (Gould, 1845)
Figs 14-15A
Nucula (Leda) bicuspidata Gould, 1845: 37.
Leda plicifera A. Adams, 1856: 50.
Laeda bicuspidata Hanley, 1859: 118, pl. 228 (fig. 73). Sowerby, 1871: pl. 2 (fig. 8a—b).
Nucula largillierti Philippi, i861: 87.
Leda bicuspidata: Nicklés, 1950: 163, fig. 301; 1955: 110. Barnard, 1964: 234, figs 8-9.
Note punctuation in the above example:
comma separates author’s name and year
“semicolon separates more than one reference by the same author
full stop separates references by different authors
figures of plates are enclosed in parentheses to distinguish them from text-figures
dash, not comma, separates consecutive numbers
Synonymy arrangement according to chronology of bibliographic references, whereby
the year is placed in front of each entry, and the synonym repeated in full for each entry, is
not acceptable.
In describing new species, one specimen must be designated as the holotype; other speci-
mens mentioned in the original description are to be designated paratypes; additional material
not regarded as paratypes should be listed separately. The complete data (registration number,
depository, description of specimen, locality, collector, date) of the holotype and paratypes
must be recorded, e.g.:
Holotype
SAM-—A13535 in the South African Museum, Cape Town. Adult female from mid-tide region, King’s Beach
Port Elizabeth (33°51’S 25°39’E), collected by A. Smith, 15 January 1973. :
Note standard form of writing South African Museum registration numbers and date.
7. SPECIAL HOUSE RULES
Capital initial letters
(a) The Figures, Maps and Tables of the paper when referred to in the text
*)
e.g. ‘.. . the Figure depicting C. namacolus...’; ‘*.. . in C. namacolus (Fig. 10)...
- (b) The prefixes of prefixed surnames in all languages, when used in the text, if not preceded
by initials or full names
e.g. DuToit but A.L.du Toit; Von Huene but F. von Huene
(c) Scientific names, but not their vernacular derivatives
e.g. Therocephalia, but therocephalian
Punctuation should be loose, omitting all not strictly necessary
Reference to the author should be expressed in the third person
Roman numerals should be converted to arabic, except when forming part of the title of a
book or article, such as
‘Revision of the Crustacea. Part VIII. The Amphipoda.’ nae
Specific name must not stand alone, but be preceded by the generic name or its abbreviation
to initial capital letter, provided the same generic name is used consecutively.
Name of new genus or species is not to be included in the title: it should be included in the
abstract, counter to Recommendation 23 of the Code, to meet the requirements of
Biological Abstracts.
TERRENCE M. GOSLINER
THE SOUTH AFRICAN JANOLIDAE
(MOLLUSCA, NUDIBRANCHIA)
WITH THE DESCRIPTION OF A NEW GENUS
AND TWO NEW SPECIES
ea
OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN
CAPE TOWN _
INSTRUCTIONS TO AUTHORS
1. MATERIAL should be original and not published elsewhere, in whole or in part.
2. LAYOUT should be as follows:
(a) Centred masthead to consist of
Title: informative but concise, without abbreviations and not including the names of new genera or species
Author’s(s’) name(s)
Address(es) of author(s) (institution where work was carried out)
Number of illustrations (figures, enumerated maps and tables, in this order)
(b) Abstract of not more than 200 words, intelligible to the reader without reference to the text
(c) Table of contents giving hierarchy of headings and subheadings
(d) Introduction
(e) Subject-matter of the paper, divided into sections to correspond with those given in table of contents
(f) Summary, if paper is lengthy
(g) Acknowledgements
(h) References
(i) Abbreviations, where these are numerous
3. MANUSCRIPT, to be submitted in triplicate, should be typewritten and neat, double spaced
with 2,5 cm margins all round. First lines of paragraphs should be indented. Tables and a list of
legends for illustrations should be typed separately, their positions indicated in the text. All
pages should be numbered consecutively.
Major headings of the paper are centred capitals; first subheadings are shouldered small
capitals; second subheadings are shouldered italics; third subheadings are indented, shouldered
italics. Further subdivisions should be avoided, as also enumeration (never roman numerals)
of headings and abbreviations.
Footnotes should be avoided unless they are short and essential.
Only generic and specific names should be underlined to indicate italics; all other marking
up should be left to editor and publisher.
4. ILLUSTRATIONS should be reducible to a size not exceeding 12 « 18 cm (19 cm including
legend); the reduction or enlargement required should be indicated; originals larger than
35 x 47 cm should not be submitted; photographs should be rectangular in shape and final
size. A metric scale should appear with all illustrations, otherwise magnification or reduction
should be given in the legend; if the latter, then the final reduction or enlargement should be
taken into consideration.
All illustrations, whether line drawings or photographs, should be termed figures (plates
are-not printed; half-tones will appear in their proper place in the text) and numbered in a
single series. Items of composite figures should be designated by capital letters; lettering of
figures is not set in type and should be in lower-case letters.
The number of the figure should be lightly marked in pencil on the back of each illustration.
5. REFERENCES cited in text and synonymies should all be included in the list at the end of
the paper, using the Harvard System (ibid., idem, loc. cit., op. cit. are not acceptable):
(a) Author’s name and year of publication given in text, e.g.:
‘Smith (1969) describes .. .’
‘Smith (1969: 36, fig. 16) describes...’
‘As described (Smith 1969a, 1969b; Jones 1971)’
‘As described (Haughton & Broom 1927)...’
‘As described (Haughton et al. 1927)...’
Note: no comma separating name and year
Dagination indicated by colon, not p.
names of joint authors connected by ampersand
- et al. in text for more than two joint authors, but names of all authors given in list of references.
(b) Full references at the end of the paper, arranged alphabetically by names, chronologically
within each name, with suffixes a, b, etc. to the year for more than one paper by the same
author in that year, e.g. Smith (1969a, 19695) and not Smith (1969, 1969a).
For books give title in italics, edition, volume number, place of publication, publisher.
For journal article give title of article, title of journal in italics (abbreviated according to the World list o,
scientific periodicals. 4th ed. London: Butterworths, 1963), series in parentheses, volume number, part
number (only if independently paged) in parentheses, pagination (first and last pages of article).
Examples (note capitalization and punctuation)
BULLOUGH, W. S. 1960. Practical invertebrate anatomy. 2nd ed. London: Macmillan.
FISCHER, P. —H. 1948. Données sur la résistance et de le vitalité des mollusques. J. Conch., Paris 88: 100-140.
FiscHER, P.-H., DuvAL, M. & Rarry, A. 1933. Etudes sur les échanges respiratoires des littorines. Archs
Zool. exp. zen. 74: 627-634.
OH, A. J. 1960a. Ecological notes on Conus (Mollusca: Gastropoda) in the Trincomalee region of Ceylon.
Ann. Mag. nat. Hist. (13) 2: 309-320.
Konn, A. J. 19606. Spawning behaviour, ee masses and larval development in Conus from the Indian Ocean.
Bull. Bingham oceanogr. Coll. 17 (4):
THIELE, J. 1910. Mollusca: B. Polylsenphors Gastropoda marina, Bivalvia. In: SCHULTZE, L. Zoologische
und anthropologische Ergebnisse einer Forschungsreise im westlichen und zentralen Siid-Afrika 4: 269-270.
Jena: Fischer. Denkschr. med.-naturw. Ges. Jena 16: 269-270.
(continued inside back cover)
ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
ANNALE VAN DIE SUID-AFRIKAANSE MUSEUM
Volume 86 Band
October 1981 Oktober
Part 2 Deel
DESCRIPTION OF
SOME JUVENILE HOMINID SPECIMENS
FROM SWARTKRANS, TRANSVAAL
By
bo Ee GRINE
Cape Town Kaapstad
The ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
are issued in parts at irregular intervals as material
becomes available
Obtainable from the South African Museum, P.O. Box 61, Cape Town 8000
Die ANNALE VAN DIE SUID-AFRIKAANSE MUSEUM
word uitgegee in dele op ongereelde tye na gelang van die
beskikbaarheid van stof
Verkrygbaar van die Suid-Afrikaanse Museum, Posbus 61, Kaapstad 8000
OUT OF PRINT/UIT DRUK
ie ees) 53), LD, 6-59, hatin), ese, ED):
GG, tat), WO). 8, TD, My, MOGES,
GE Sy. I east, 1SCES), LO), 27, SIGE), WIG), 28, 250)
EDITOR/REDAKTRISE
Ione Rudner
Copyright enquiries to the South African Museum
Kopieregnavrae aan die Suid-Afrikaanse Museum
ISBN 0 86813 024 9
Printed in South Africa by In Suid-Afrika gedruk
deur
The Rustica Press, Pty., Ltd., Die Rustica-pers, Edms., Bpk.,
Court Road, Wynberg, Cape Courtweg, Wynberg,
Kaap
DESCRIPTION OF SOME JUVENILE HOMINID SPECIMENS
FROM SWARTKRANS, TRANSVAAL
By
F. E. GRINE
South African Museum, Cape Town
(With 15 figures)
[MS accepted 12 May 1981]
ABSTRACT
Recent work on the hominid fossils from Swartkrans revealed several juvenile specimens
which required cleaning and description. Four such specimens, representing the gnathic and/or
dental remains of three ‘robust’ australopithecine individuals, have been prepared and
described in detail. The specimens, SK 839/852, SK 1595, and SK 2147 have added a number of
deciduous and permanent teeth to the collection from this site.
CONTENTS
PAGE
HA tKOCUCEOM rere Cisse aac wea eee ee, 43
Matcnalandidescriplions (2.2 0 9.2. bees ie 45
SPECIMENISK 839 Wao eh ac Hos ee ak eee 45
WeciduousMdentitions. 4.4) ase ee eee eee 45
Rermanent Gentittion= 2445.) eae eee 50
SPECIMIEMESIKGS 592m eke ate es vd ore PS 53
Deciduousidentition= =. >.e0 ee see ee oo 54
Renmanentdentitionas ole) oe eee 58
Specimens SK 839/SK 852 composite ............ 61
SPECIMMEMYS RGIS OSes ges Reais noe omens a ie 62
Weciduousidentitions. 1.) vo sso ee ee ae 63
Rermanentadentitions oe) eee eee 65
Specimen!" SKQ14 7 ec oy ee see A 67
DISCUSSION Hye eee Oe tae chis es cpg AIOE 69
ANCKNOWIEdSeMIENES = hiss hairs bagels Hoe eee oe 69
FRETENEMCES ee ere ere ee eames eg i ae eee 70
INTRODUCTION
Since 1948, when Robert Broom and J. T. Robinson began working at
Swartkrans, the fossiliferous deposits of this cave system have yielded an
abundance of hominid remains, including a number of juvenile specimens.
Geological and palaeontological investigations have demonstrated that the
Swartkrans deposit consists of older and younger sediment groups (Brain 1958,
1976; Cooke 1963, 1978; Brain, Vrba & Robinson 1974; Hendey 1974; Vrba
1975; Butzer 1976). Butzer (1976) and Brain (1976) have defined the older
breccias as Member 1 and the younger breccias as Member 2 of the Swartkrans
Formation.
43
Ann. S. Afr. Mus. 86 (2), 1981: 43-71, 15 figs.
44 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
The first hominid specimens recovered from the Swartkrans Formation were
attributed to a new taxon, Paranthropus crassidens, by Broom (1949). The vast
majority of hominid specimens which have been found at Swartkrans (over 95 %
of individuals) have been referred to this taxon under a variety of names, viz.
Paranthropus crassidens, P. robustus, Australopithecus crassidens, A. robustus,
and A. robustus crassidens. Geological studies have shown that these australopi-
thecine remains are derived from the Member 1 sediments (Brain 1976, 1978).
The existence of. individuals of the genus Homo in the Swartkrans deposit
has been well substantiated (Broom & Robinson 1949, 1950, 1952; Robinson
1953a, 1953b, 1961; Tobias 1968, 1978; Clarke, Howell & Brain 1970; Clarke &
Howell 1972; Wallace 1972, 1975; Clarke 1977a, 1977b; Olson 1978). The first
specimen referable to Homo to be found at Swartkrans was the mandible SK 15
(Broom & Robinson 1949, 1950). The jaw was found in a pocket of brownish
breccia surrounded by the typically pink Member 1 sediments, and it was
initially thought that SK 15 was younger than the australopithecine remains
(Broom & Robinson 1949, 1950). Later, however, Robinson (1953b) consid-
ered that the brown breccia encasing the mandible was a pocket of decalcified
primary breccia and that SK 15 and the australopithecine remains were coeval.
More recent work has demonstrated that the brown breccia is, indeed, younger
than the australopithecine-bearing Member 1 sediments (Brain, Vrba & Robin-
son 1974; Brain 1976, 1978).
Three other hominid specimens, a P; (SK 18a), a proximal radius
(SK 18b), and the buccal moiety of a P, (SK 43), were recovered from within
the same pocket of Member 2 breccia as the SK 15 mandible. These four
specimens have been referred to the same taxon (Broom & Robinson 1950,
1952; Robinson 19536; Tobias & Wells 1967).
Several specimens attributed to Homo (e.g. SK 45, SK 847, SK 27, and
SK 2635) have been recovered from the australopithecine-bearing Member 1
breccia. As noted by Clarke (1977a), there is little morphological basis for
assuming that the Homo specimens from Members 1 and 2 belong to the same
specific taxon. On the other hand, it is generally accepted that the australopi-
thecine remains from Swartkrans are representive of a single, species-specific
taxon (Broom & Robinson 1952; Robinson 1956; Tobias 1967; Wallace 1972;
Clarke 1977a; Howell 1978).
Recent work on the hominid fossils from Swartkrans revealed several
juvenile specimens which required cleaning, reconstruction and description.
Four such fossils are dealt with in this paper. The specimens consist generally of
small gnathic fragments with variously preserved deciduous and permanent
teeth. The fossils are catalogued in the Transvaal Museum as SK 839, SK 852,
SK 1595, and SK 2147, and all are derived from Member 1 breccias.
Each specimen will be described as follows: (i) the data presented on the
relevant museum catalogue card, (ii) a brief statement of preservation prior to
cleaning and reconstruction, and (iii) a detailed morphological description of
the specimen after restoration.
‘JUVENILE HOMINID SPECIMENS FROM SWARTKRANS 45
All measurements recorded here were taken by the author, unless stated
otherwise. The dental measurements were taken to 0,1 mm accuracy with a
dial-equipped sliding vernier caliper.
MATERIAL AND DESCRIPTIONS
SPECIMEN SK 839
This specimen was excavated from Member 1 breccia by J. T. Robinson in
1952. The description on the catalogue card reads: ‘Fragmentary juvenile
maxilla containing some deciduous and permanent teeth some of which have
suffered considerable damage.’
Prior to restoration, this specimen consisted of isolated, incompletely
developed and slightly damaged LM' and RM’, isolated and slightly damaged
Rdm* and the distal two-thirds of the Rdm'. In addition, the badly damaged
permanent incisors, the damaged Rdi', the root of the Ldi', and a small bit of
the alveolar portion of the maxilla were preserved in a piece of breccia (Fig. 1).
Fig. 1. Stereoview of the maxillary central deciduous and central and lateral permanent
incisors of SK 839 prior to preparation. Compare with Figures 2-5. Scale in cm.
The crown of the Ldi'! was found in a box with another, unrelated, hominid
specimen from Swartkrans. The two deciduous central incisors and the four
permanent incisors were cleaned, reconstructed and strengthened by the author.
Deciduous dentition (Figs 2-4)
Maxillary central deciduous incisors
The damaged crowns and roots of both incisors are present. The crown of
the Ldi’ is only moderately well preserved; the distolinqual quadrant is missing
and the remaining lingual portion is separated from the buccal part by a narrow
crack. The buccal surface is displaced somewhat by virtue of breaks on either
side of a 0,7 mm wide vertical sliver of enamel. The crown of the Rdi’ is better
preserved, with small pieces of both the mesial and distal edges missing. The
roots of both teeth are poorly preserved; the lingual sides of both are missing
just beyond the cervical lines, and the buccal surfaces are covered by remnants
of the alveolar portion of the maxilla.
46 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Occlusal wear is moderate in degree, with some reduction of crown height;
most of the lingual aspect comprises a lingually sloping and slightly mesiodis-
tally concave dentine exposure. The buccal edge of this surface is rather sharp
and comprises a thin wall of enamel. Lingually, the remaining enamel surface
shows slight faceting. Interproximal attrition is moderate on the mesial face,
with dentine exposed on the incisal aspect of this surface; distally, interproxi-
mal wear appears to be slightly less severe. Neither crown shows any periky-
mata, but on the buccal surface of the Ldi’ there is a rather large hypoplastic
area (MD, 1,0 mm; height, 0,6 mm) surrounded by several smaller pits, whilst
on the Rdi' a considerably smaller, single hypoplastic pit is evident.
The buccal aspect of the crown appears to have been square in outline before
wear. There is no cervical enamel prominence, and this surface is nearly flat
and disposed vertically incisocervically. Wear and damage to the incisolingual
aspect of the crowns have obliterated any morphology that might have been
present.
Fig. 2. Lingual view of the maxillary central deciduous incisors;
and occlusal view of the Rdm!' and Rdm/ of SK 839.
Scale in cm.
Robinson (1956: 122) recorded the existing mesiodistal diameters of both
crowns as 5,7 mm and noted that, because of the appreciable degree of incisal
and interproximal wear, the original dimensions ‘must have been about a
millimetre greater’. The author agrees with Robinson that about 0,5 mm of
dental material has been lost from either side of each crown. The dimensions of
these teeth recorded by the present author are as follows:
MD diameter MD diameter BL diameter
(as measured) (estimated) (estimated)
led. Le ee 5,7 mm 6,7 mm 5,2 mm
Ridit syn eee 5,8 mm 6,8 mm 5,2 mm
JUVENILE HOMINID SPECIMENS FROM SWARTKRANS
Fig. 3. Oblique incisolingual view of the maxillary
deciduous central incisors of SK 839, showing type of
wear. Scale in cm.
Fig. 4. Buccal view of maxillary central deciduous
incisors and the attached alveolar bone of SK 839.
Scale in cm.
47
48 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Maxillary first deciduous molar
The distal two-thirds or more of the right crown is preserved. The portion
of the crown that is missing has been broken away along a line which runs
obliquely buccolingually from a point apparently just behind the tip of the
paracone, through the protocone to the level of the lingual developmental
groove. A slight crack runs distally from the paracone, through the tip of the
metacone where it bifurcates, one limb courses distobuccally, whilst the other
divides the distal marginal ridge. The mesiobuccal root is missing, and the
lingual root has been broken away from the crown with the cervical enamel
margin. The distobuccal root is preserved for what appears to be most of its
length. It is evident that buccally the neck of the radicular system was rather
low, there being less than 1 mm of cementum exposed between the cervical
enamel margin and the point of bifurcation of the two buccal roots. The
distobuccal root, as preserved, slopes away from the crown both distally and
very slightly buccally. The root is straight and the apical end appears to taper
slightly.
It is evident that all four principal cusps—paracone, metacone, protocone
and hypocone—were present. The size of the paracone cannot be determined
accurately, but it seems to have been approximately the same size as, or
perhaps slightly smaller than, the metacone. The protocone was apparently the
largest cusp. The hypocone and metacone are almost the same size. Occlusal
wear is moderate and has produced two bevelled surfaces. Mesially, the
protocone has been worn flat and a moderately large, concave dentine island is
exposed. The protocone is worn slightly below the level of the paracone, which
appears to have shown a very small dentine exposure. The distal portion of the
occlusal surface slopes distolingually; a moderate-sized, concave dentine island
is exposed on the hypocone, while no dentine is shown on the metacone.
Interproximal attrition appears to have been slight to perhaps moderate in
degree. The distal contact facet, which measures approximately 3,1 mm bucco-
lingually by 2,1 mm in height, is ovoid in outline and flattened. It is located, for
the most part, behind the hypocone, while the corresponding facet on the dm?
is situated over the buccal half of its mesial face.
The buccal face, as preserved, shows no cervical prominence or swelling,
and it is faintly convex occlusocervically. There is no trace of a buccal groove.
The cervical margin of the lingual face is not preserved, but this surface—over
the hypocone—is more convex than the buccal surface. The lingual groove is
very shallow and short.
The protocone and paracone appear to have been separated by a very
shallow, narrow groove. The trigon basin is represented by a short and narrow
but oblique groove. The distal trigon crest is narrow but continuous. The distal
marginal ridge is thick and high, extending without any apparent interruption
from behind the tip of the metacone to the hypocone. The talon basin, or fovea
posterior, is represented by a crescent-shaped, relatively deep groove.
It is not possible to record any. crown diameters for this tooth.
JUVENILE HOMINID SPECIMENS FROM SWARTKRANS 49
Maxillary second deciduous molar
The crown of the right tooth is preserved. It is very nearly complete; the
cervical margin has been damaged round the entire periphery save for the
buccal aspect. A large, vertical sliver of enamel has broken away from the
mesial face, and the distobuccal corner of the crown has been displaced slightly.
Several narrow cracks traverse the crown. The radicular system has been
broken away save for a short segment of the mesiobuccal root.
Viewed from the occlusal aspect, the crown is square in outline. All four
principal cusps are present and well developed. The protocone is by far the
largest cusp, followed by the metacone and the paracone, the latter being
slightly smaller. The hypocone is well developed and is approximately the same
size as the metacone. Occlusal wear is slight, and has reduced the cuspal tips to
nearly the same height. Wear is heaviest on the protocone, which shows large
enamel facets but only a tiny pit of exposed dentine. Small dentine exposures
are displayed also by the metacone and paracone. Generally, the mesial portion
of the crown has been worn more heavily than the distal part. Interproximal
contact with the dm’ appears to have been slight, while no distal contact facet is
present.
The mesial marginal ridge is thick and well developed and, though worn, it
appears to have coursed without interruption from the front of the paracone to
the protocone. Distal to the mesial marginal ridge, the fovea anterior is
represented by a short, narrow groove which is completely enclosed distally by
a short and thin but continuous epicrista. The epicrista runs parallel to the
mesial marginal ridge. The trigon basin is broad and rather deep, its floor being
represented by a triradiate groove. The distal trigon crest is moderately well
developed but is incised and thinned in its middle by a narrow but deep groove.
The distal marginal ridge is moderately thick and high and runs without
interruption from the metacone to the hypocone. It is slightly lower in its
middle, with two faint grooves on its mesial aspect; it runs continuously, high
up on to the metacone. The talon basin is represented by a deep, broad groove
which runs obliquely between the hypocone and protocone to incise the lingual
surface of the crown.
The buccal surface is rather flat and vertically disposed over the upper
third of its height, and is slightly swollen and convex over the cervical
two-thirds. There is no distinct cervical enamel prominence, and the cervical
enamel line courses, for a short distance, towards the bifurcation of the two
buccal roots. The buccal groove is rather weakly expressed; it is broad but very
shallow towards its occlusal end, and courses cervically for less than half of the
height of the crown where it terminates gradually. A number of very small
hypoplastic pits cover the buccal face around both the occlusal and cervical
extremities of the buccal groove.
The lingual surface is more convex than the buccal, and curves in a
continuous arc from the occlusal margin to the cervical line. The cervical
enamel margin is missing, but it appears that no pronounced prominence was
50 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
present. The lingual groove is deep and broad over most of its course, but
terminates gradually approximately half-way towards the cervical margin.
There is no trace of a Carabelli trait. The protocone is ringed on its mesial and
lingual aspects by a thin band of numerous, tiny, hypoplastic pits. This band is
situated near the occlusal surface.
The radicular system is represented solely by a short segment of the
mesiobuccal root. In so far as it is preserved, it courses slightly mesialward and
is considerably broader in its buccolingual than in its mesiodistal dimension. It
appears that the radicular neck was low.
Robinson (1956: 128) recorded the mesiodistal and buccolingual diameters
of this crown as 10,5 mm and 11,4 mm respectively. The measurements
obtained by the present author are as follows:
MD diameter MDdiameter BL diameter
(as measured) (estimated) (as measured)
RGIS cet oe eee 10,7 mm 10,8 mm 11,5 mm
Permanent dentition (Fig. 5)
Maxillary central permanent incisors
The left and right maxillary central incisors are represented. Both teeth
consist of rather badly damaged crowns only. They are unerupted. A root is not
present.
The crowns were badly crushed and broken in preservation, and both have
been reconstructed from several different pieces. The left crown is crushed and
the central and distal regions of the lingual surface have been displaced. The
mesial, buccal and distal surfaces have suffered considerable loss of enamel
about the cervical margin. The mesiobuccal quadrant of the left crown is
missing, and the mesial end of the lingual surface has suffered slight crushing.
The mesial end of the incisal edge is slightly rounded, while the distal
extremity of this edge shows a broad curvature. The incisal edge comprises
large mesial and distal mammelons and a considerably smaller and lower
median mammelon. Viewed from the buccal aspect, the crown is judged to
have had a tapered outline, the cervical region having been narrower than the
incisal portion. The buccal surface is gently convex incisocervically. Neither
tooth exhibits either perikymatous or hypoplastic enamel.
Lingually, there is a moderate cervical enamel swelling which appears to
have been symmetrically disposed. The mesial marginal ridge is much more
pronounced, and a relatively narrow, low median ridge projects vertically from
the cervical enamel prominence towards the incisal edge. The lingual surface is
slightly concave over the upper half of the crown, both incisocervically and
mesiodistally.
MD diameter MDdiameter BL diameter
(as measured) (corrected) (corrected)
TEL | ee oN sie 8,2 mm 8,6 mm =
Ribaie. once 8,6 mm 8,6 mm 6,8 mm
JUVENILE HOMINID SPECIMENS FROM SWARTKRANS al
Maxillary lateral permanent incisors
The crown of the right tooth is well preserved, with only slight damage to
parts of the cervical enamel margin. The crown of the left tooth is severely
crushed and distorted and, because the right crown is so well preserved, it was
deemed unnecessary to attempt a reconstruction of its antimere.
The tooth is unerupted. There is no root present. The crown appears to be
completely developed.
The mesial end of the incisal edge is gently rounded, while the distal
extremity is slightly lower than the mesial and is more broadly rounded. The
incisal edge is gently rounded and rather smooth; there is no mammelon
development.
Viewed from the buccal aspect, the crown has a tapered outline, with the
cervical region narrower than the incisal portion. The buccal surface is slightly
convex incisocervically, with a faint, broad, flattening in the centre of this
surface over the upper half. This area is bounded both mesially and distally by
faint ridges that course from the cervical region to the respective corners of the
incisal edge. The distal side of this face displays several faint perikymatous
ridges; there is no evidence of hypoplastic enamel.
Lingually, the cervical region shows a slight swelling. The mesial marginal
ridge is slightly developed, the distal marginal ridge is moderately well deve-
loped and there is no median ridge present. The mesial and distal marginal
ridges converge cervically to blend into the cervical swelling. The lingual
surface is slightly concave, especially mesiodistally.
MD diameter BL diameter Height
(as measured) (as measured) (as measured)
Rug hee). 6,0 mm 5,5 mm 8,7 mm
Maxillary first permanent molars
The unerupted crowns of both the left and right maxillary first permanent
molars are present. Both crowns have suffered from damage to the cervical
enamel; generally, the right tooth is better preserved. The buccal side of the
left crown is separated and displaced from the rest of the tooth by a crack
which runs through the tips of the paracone and metacone. Nothing of the
radicular system is present.
The two crowns are nearly identical in morphological detail (Fig. 5).
Viewed from the occlusal aspect, the crown is nearly square in outline, with all
four principal cusps present and well developed. The protocone is the largest
cusp, followed by the paracone and metacone, which are nearly equal in size.
The hypocone is the smallest cusp. The mesial marginal ridge is moderately
thick; it is higher and thicker near the protocone where a moderate-sized
protoconule is present. The protoconule is delineated on either side by shallow
grooves. A short epicrista projects from the mesial end of the paracone and,
although this crest is delineated on either side by deep, narrow grooves, there is
SZ. ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Fig. 5. Lingual view of the permanent incisors and occlusal view of
the first permanent molars of SK 839. Scale in cm.
no anterior fovea present. The trigon basin is deep. The distal trigon crest is
moderately thick, but is incised midway between the protocone and metacone
by a relatively deep pit which is continuous with the deep, but narrow, groove
between the protocone and hypocone. On the lingual surface this groove
continues vertically for approximately half of the crown height, where it ends
abruptly.
The lingual surface projects from the occlusal to the cervical margin; the
cervical half of this face is slightly convex. The mesiolingual corner of the
protocone presents two short, vertical grooves which are separated by approxi-
mately 2,7 mm of enamel. However, there is no alteration of the general
curvature of this face. The Carabelli feature is represented by grooves. This
feature is only slightly expressed on the left crown.
The buccal surface is less expanded than the lingual and is only faintly
convex occlusocervically. The buccal groove is vertically deep and narrow and
extends only over the upper third of the crown. It ends abruptly. Neither the
buccal nor the lingual surface shows any indication of hypoplastic enamel.
Robinson (1956: 81) considered these crowns to be incompletely developed
and recorded estimated, complete mesiodistal and buccolingual dimensions of
13,2 mm and 13,9 mm respectively. The present author agrees with Robinson
that the crowns are immature, but he is unable to judge accurately how much,
if any, additional increase in size would have been attained. The measurements
of the crowns as recorded are as follows:
MD diameter BL diameter
(as measured) (as measured)
|)" eaten os il eR pc 12,5 mm ==
RIVER ire el 12,8 mm 14,0 mm
JUVENILE HOMINID SPECIMENS FROM SWARTKRANS Se)
SPECIMEN SK 852
This specimen was excavated from Member 1 breccia by J. T. Robinson in
1952. The description on the catalogue card reads: ‘Poor specimen of juvenile
mandible with left dm, (broken); dm,, moderately worn; right dm, appreciably
worn; dm, moderately worn and incomplete; and fragment of M, erupting.’
Prior to cleaning and restoration, this specimen consisted of an isolated
and nearly complete Rd, as well as the isolated, complete crowns of the LI,, LI,
and LC. The major part of this specimen consisted of the poorly preserved
mandibular corpora with the roots of the Ldm,, the damaged Rdm,, Ldm,,
Rdm, and the metaconid of the RM,, and the matrix-covered crown of the LM,
(Fig. 6). The mandibular corpora were preserved in misalignment, and wedged
Fig. 6. Stereoview of the mandibular corpora and dentition of SK 852 prior to restoration.
Compare with Figure 8. Scale in cm.
between them was a large piece of unidentified bone. The region of the RM,
was covered in plaster. The two corpora were removed from the matrix and
cleaned. In this process the hypoconid and hypoconulid of the RM, were
discovered beneath the plaster; this piece of crown was reconstructed in correct
anatomical position. The corpora and their contained teeth were cleaned and,
where necessary, strengthened with plaster.
The mandibular corpora are poorly preserved, somewhat distorted and
very incomplete. Meaningful descriptions or measurements for either of these
are not possible (see Figs 8 and 10).
54 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Deciduous dentition (Figs 7-9)
Mandibular deciduous canine
The right tooth only is present. It is reasonably well preserved with rather
severe damage to the mesial portion of the crown, but the root is nearly
complete with only the apical tip missing.
Enamel from the mesial and mesiolingual parts of the crown has been
broken away. The tip is damaged also and a moderately wide vertical crack
courses across the middle of the buccal surface.
Viewed from the buccal aspect, the crown is rather ‘mitten-shaped’ with a
large primary cusp situated mesially and a small distal cuspulid. The buccal
surface is faintly convex incisocervically over the cervical third of the crown’s
height, and a cervical prominence is not present. The distal cuspulid is worn,
but there remains the trace of a short, faint vertical groove between it and the
main cusp.
Fig. 7. Stereoview of the lingual aspect of the Rd. of SK 852.
Scale in cm.
Lingually, there is a slight cervical prominence which is skewed distally.
There are no tubercles supported by this prominence. The cervical enamel line
courses downwards from mesial to distal. The mesial third of this surface has
been damaged. A moderately deep, triangular-shaped groove separates the
main cusp from the distal cuspulid. A moderate enamel ridge courses from the
tip of the distal cuspulid downwards to blend into the cervical enamel pro-
minence.
Occlusal wear is slight. A well-developed enamel facet is present along the
distal slope of the main cusp and on the tip of the distal cuspulid. This facet is
narrow but highly polished, and it is continuous along the main cusp to a
horizontal disposition on the distal cuspulid. Dentine is not exposed. Interprox-
imal attrition with the dm, was mild, with only a small, slightly flattened,
JUVENILE HOMINID SPECIMENS FROM SWARTKRANS 5)5)
circular contact facet (0,7 mm diameter) near the top of the distal cuspulid. The
dimensions of the crown are as follows:
MD diameter MD diameter BL diameter Height
(as measured) (corrected) (as measured) (estimated)
RG La 5,7 mm 5,9 mm 4,6 mm 6,5 mm
The root of this tooth is single. It has a flattened ovoid outline in
cross-section, with the longer axis (5,1 mm) running from mesiobuccal to
distolingual and the shorter axis (3,8 mm) running from mesiolingual to disto-
buccal. The root is rather straight and long. It is estimated that the original
length was approximately 13,0 mm (measured length, 11,4 mm).
Mandibular first deciduous molars
The obliquely shorn-off roots of the left tooth and the somewhat damaged
crown and roots of the right tooth are present. The right crown has suffered
enamel loss along the entire distal surface, and the occlusal surface has a wide
crack over the top of the hypoconid and metaconid. Two narrow, vertical
cracks course across the buccal surfaces of the protoconid and hypoconid.
Viewed from the occlusal aspect, the crown has a somewhat irregular
rectangular outline. The mesial end is slightly narrowed and projects anteriorly,
while the distal end of the crown is broad and appears to have been flattened.
The protoconid, hypoconid, metaconid, and entoconid are preserved. It
appears that the hypoconulid was absent, or if it was present originally it is
evident that it would have been very small. Wear and damage do not permit an
accurate assessment of the relative cuspal sizes.
Occlusal wear is moderate, with considerable reduction and flattening of
cuspal height. The occlusal surface has been worn so that a broad, rather
flattened plane has been produced; this plane slopes slightly downward distally
from the tips of the metaconid and protoconid. It appears that a small island of
dentine was exposed on the top of the protoconid, while the metaconid shows a
somewhat larger exposure. The top of the hypoconid is damaged, but it is
evident that at least a moderately large dentine island was present. The
entoconid is covered by a large, concave dentine basin. A second facet is
present in front of the protoconid tip. This facet slopes downward mesially as a
well-defined, polished enamel surface along the mesial marginal ridge.
Interproximal wear is judged to have been mild both mesially, as discussed
above, and distally. Although the distal surface of the dm, is missing, the
mesial surface of the dm, presents a moderate-sized, rectangular and somewhat
flattened contact facet. On the Ldm, this facet measures 3,5 mm in breadth and
2,3 mm in height.
The mesial marginal ridge is relatively thick and courses round from in
front of the protoconid to the mesial end of the metaconid. It is thicker buccally
than lingually, where, mesial to the metaconid, it is considerably thinner.
Nevertheless, the mesial marginal ridge is continuous around the front of the
56 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
tooth; it is not incised. Though the region is worn, it appears that a small
plesioconulid might have been present mesial of the tip of the protoconid. The
fovea anterior is represented by a short, relatively deep, transverse groove
which is enclosed completely by the mesial marginal ridge and a continuous,
high and moderately thick crest between the metaconid and protoconid. A
broad contact is present between the metaconid and hypoconid, and the buccal
groove is more mesial than the lingual groove.
The lingual surface is slightly convex occlusocervically with a faint cervical
enamel prominence present. The lingual groove is faint and fades imperceptibly
approximately half-way down this face.
The buccal surface over the hypoconid is rather bulbous in appearance and
is moderately to markedly convex occlusocervically. A slight cervical enamel
prominence is present. This face of the protoconid is convex over the cervical
half, the occlusal half is somewhat flattened and slopes outwards cervically from
the protoconid tip. A faintly developed tuberculum molare is present; the
cervical portion of the protoconid surface projects slightly laterally and the
cervical enamel line dips below the level of this margin on the hypoconid. The
buccal groove is rather narrow, but relatively deep. It courses vertically to end
abruptly about half-way down this surface.
A small area of hypoplastic enamel is present on the buccal surface of the
protoconid, just mesial to the buccal groove.
The principal dimensions of the crown are as follows:
MD diameter MD diameter BLtrigonid — BL talonid
(as measured) (corrected) (as measured) (as measured)
RGN eek) 4 ode 9,4 mm 10,0 mm 73) shoe 8,1 mm
The radicular system comprises broad mesial and distal root plates and a
very low neck. The two plates are directed almost vertically downward,
expanding buccolingually towards their apical ends, and each has two separate
radicular canals. The apical third of each root plate is bifid.
The apical ends of the mesial and distal radiculae of the left tooth are
separated on the buccal side by some 7,3 mm. The mesial root plate of the left
tooth measures approximately 6,5 mm buccolingually at the cervical margin
and 9,2 mm at the apical end. The distance from the cervical line to the buccal
apex of the mesial plate is about 8,8 mm, and the lingual side of the plate
measures some 9,3 mm in length.
Mandibular second deciduous molars
The left and right teeth are present. The left crown and root system are
more complete than those of the right. The cervical half of the buccal surface
and the upper part of the root of the left tooth are broken away.
On the right tooth most of the protoconid and hypoconid have been
broken away, together with much of the distal root plate. Both crowns show
several fine cracks which course across the surfaces in various directions; the
JUVENILE HOMINID SPECIMENS FROM SWARTKRANS 57
right tooth has been affected by this cracking more than the left. In so far as
they are preserved, the crowns are nearly identical in morphological detail.
Viewed from the occlusal aspect, the crown is rectangular in outline. The
five principal cusps are present and well developed. The metaconid is by far the
largest cusp with the hypoconid, protoconid and entoconid nearly equal in size.
The hypoconulid is, by a slim margin, the smallest cusp. In general, the cusps
are rather bulbous in appearance, with narrow and nearly vertically sided
grooves separating them.
Occlusal wear is slight, with all cusps showing enamel wear, though this is
slightest on the entoconid. The other cusps have been reduced in height
somewhat and they show flattened occlusal surfaces. The buccal cusps have
been worn slightly more heavily than the lingual cusps. The tops of the
protoconid, hypoconid, and hypoconulid are worn to a nearly flat, horizontal
plane. Except for a small pit of dentine on the protoconid, there is no dentine
exposure despite the reduction in cuspal height. Interproximal attrition with the
dm,, as noted above, is slight, and there is no contact distally with the M,.
The mesial marginal ridge of the dm, is very thick and, though worn, it
appears to have been relatively high. It continues uninterrupted from in front
of the metaconid across to the protoconid. Behind this ridge the fovea anterior
is represented by an H-shaped groove. The mesial transverse groove is narrow
and relatively shallow, and it is incompletely enclosed behind by short, access-
ory transverse crests from the metaconid and protoconid. A short, narrow
longitudinal groove separates these two crests. The distal transverse groove is
somewhat longer, broader and deeper than the mesial groove, and it is
completely enclosed behind by a very thick, continuous ridge between the back
of the protoconid and the principal crest of the metaconid. The metaconid
displays a broad contact with the hypoconid; the two buccal grooves, which
surround the hypoconid, and the lingual groove, between the metaconid and
entoconid, are arranged in a symmetrical Y-shaped pattern. The mesiobuccal
developmental groove is thus situated mesiad of the level of the lingual groove.
The distal marginal ridge is relatively thick and is uninterrupted in its course.
This ridge is slightly worn but it is apparent that it supported a tiny accessory
cuspulid (the tuberculum sextum) which is represented solely by a faint convex-
ity of the distal crown surface. The cuspulid, despite its small size on the left
tooth, is even smaller and more weakly expressed on the right crown. The
fovea posterior is represented by a relatively deep but narrow crescent-shaped
groove which is continuous with the talonid basin via a deep, narrow groove
between the hypoconulid and entoconid.
The buccal surface has suffered damage. However, it is evident that the
mesiobuccal groove was better developed than the distobuccal groove. The
distal groove is relatively deep but narrow, and extends vertically for about
one-third of the crown height where it terminates rather abruptly.
The lingual surface is somewhat inflated in appearance. It is slightly convex
occlusocervically with a slight cervical enamel prominence at the base of the
58 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
metaconid and a rather marked prominence at the base of the entoconid. The
enamel line continues round underneath the crown for a short distance between
the mesial and distal radiculae. The lingual groove is of moderate depth but
narrow, and continues vertically to the cervical margin. Over the lower third of
its course it is bifid, with a faint accessory groove running parallel to it mesially.
The distal half of the metaconid surface displays a number of minute hypoplas-
tic pits, and these are more numerous and marked near the lingual groove.
MD diameter BL trigonid BL talonid
(as measured) (as measured) (as measured)
Rai. 8h es 12,2 mm 9,7+ mm 9,.8+ mm
RRC ier aces 12,4 mm _ —
The buccolingual diameters recorded here are minimum values; because of
the damage the buccal surface has suffered, it is not possible to estimate
accurately the original dimensions of the trigonid and talonid portions of the
crown.
The root system of the second deciduous molar comprises broad mesial
and distal radicular plates and a very low neck. Because of damage to the
cervical region, the breadth of the plates cannot be measured accurately. The
plates appear to diverge slightly as they course downward. The length of the
buccal side of the mesial plate of the left tooth measures at least 10,5 mm.
Permanent dentition (Figs 8-9)
Mandibular central permanent incisor
The isolated crown of the left central incisor is present. The crown is
complete and well preserved. A very short segment of the developing root is
represented on the mesial and distal aspects of the tooth. The tooth had not yet
erupted at the time of death.
The mesial and distal corners of the incisal edge are slightly rounded. A
large, high mammelon is supported at either extremity, with a much lower
tubercle between the mesial and distal mammelons.
Viewed from the buccal aspect, the crown has a high, tapered outline; the
mesiodistal diameter is considerably greater incisally than cervically. The buccal
surface is slightly convex incisocervically and a cervical enamel prominence is
not present. Numerous faint, horizontal, perikymatous lines cover this face
entirely.
Lingually, a moderate basal prominence is present. A tubercular structure
is not supported by this swollen base. The basal prominence is symmetrically
orientated. The mesial marginal ridge is thin and very faintly expressed; the
distal marginal ridge is slightly better developed. The lingual surface is
flattened.
MD diameter BL diameter Height
(as measured) (as measured) (as measured)
Bee oeeeut 5,1 mm 5,7 mm 10,0 mm
JUVENILE HOMINID SPECIMENS FROM SWARTKRANS 59
Mandibular lateral permanent incisor
The isolated crown oi the leit tooth is present. The crown is well preserved
and nearly complete, with only slight enamel loss to the buccal cervical
and somewhat more severe damage to the base of the lingual side. The
developing root is represented by short segments on the mesial and distal
aspects of the tooth. The tooth had not yet erupted at the time of death.
The crown is somewhat more robust in appearance than that of the central
incisor. The mesial and distal comers of the incisal edge appear rather
angulated with the mammelons at these extremities. The incisal edge is, mn
general, horizontal, and it supports five small mammelons.
Viewed from the buccal aspect, the crown is somewhat rectangular
outline. The mesiodistal breadth across the incisal portion is greater than that
=
Fis. 9. Lingual view of the LC, LL, LI, and Rd, (from left to nght) of SK 852.
Scale m cm.
60 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
across the cervical region of the crown, but the relative difference between
these measurements is not so marked as in the central incisor. The buccal
surface is shghtly convex incisocervically. Very faint perikymatous lines and a
broad but shallow groove are present on this face.
Although the cervical extremity of the lingual surface has been damaged, it
is evident that a shght to moderate basal prominence was present. The basal
swelling does not show tubercles. The mesial marginal ridge is slightly devel-
oped; the distal marginal ridge is more faintly expressed than the mesial.
Between these mdges, the lingual surface is faintly concave both mesiodistally
and incisocervically.
MD diameter BL diameter Height
(as measured) (corrected) (as measured)
| 3) SER es See nr 5,6 mm 6.4 mm 9.9 mm
Mandibular permanent canine
The isolated crown of the left mandibular canine is well preserved and is
nearly complete. The lingual cervical enamel margin has suffered only shghtly
from damage. Mesially, a short, thin sheet of the developing root is present,
but this is not represented on any other part of the tooth. The tooth had not yet
erupted at the time of death.
Viewed from the buccal aspect, the crown is nearly square in appearance;
the mesial corner of the tip is shghtly rounded, while the distal portion slopes
downward for about half of the crown’s height from just behind the centre of
the crown. The tip of the tooth is obtuse; mesially this surface is nearly
horizontal. The buccal surtace is slightly convex occlusocervically as well as
mesiodistally. No evidence of enamel pathology is shown on this face.
Lingually, the cervical prominence is moderate and symmetrical. Lingual
tubercules are not present. The mesial marginal mdge is faintly expressed; it
appears as a low, thin band coursing round from the occlusal surface of the
crown for approximately half of the crown height, where it blends impercept-
ibly with the basal swelling. The distal marginal mdge is moderate; it originates
occlusally approximately in the middle of the distal slope of the crown. This
ridge becomes thickened towards the cervical prominence. A thin, low, vertical
enamel ridge is situated mesiad of the distal marginal mdge, and this vertical
crest originates at the cervical edge and continues cervically for just less than
half of the crown height. The ‘median’ and distal marginal mdges are separated
by a depression which is broader and relatively shallow occlusally, but which
becomes increasingly narrower and deeper as it passes cervically, where it
partially separates the distal mdge from the cervical swelling. The lingual
surface is, for the most part, rather flat.
MD diameter BL diameter Height
(as measured) (as measured) (as measured)
LC 7,3 mm 8.1 mm 9.0 mm
ID SPSOMENS FROM SWARTIERANS 61
ees li ss stwated m &S opt
and_ except for the occlusal surface. oaly the distal surface and the posterior
half of the buccal face are exposed. A narrow crack courses across the tp of the
hhypocomsuial and conimucs veriically over the desta] surface: sheht enamel
dsplaccment has ocomred along tims cack. The root & represented by 2
relatively shori shoei below the cervical marem. and @ s&s evident that the mesial
amd dssial rooi plaics had begun development at ai the time of death. The mght
tooth i represented by a portion of the metacomd and a second picce of the
the nehi Gown iS misses.
Viewed irom the occlusal aspect. the Gown appears to have a rectansular
outime. All five prmopal cusps ate presemi and are well developed The
mctacomd scoms 10 be the largest cusp. Fe i svc by
the protocomd. entocond, hypocomsd. and hypoconulad.
— io have
been moderately well developed. thick and comimuous. Distal to 1, the fowea
amfcnmor i represenicad by a relatively shori_ bul Geep_ tamsverse sroove. The
fowea SS dramed disially by a very narrow, but deep, stoove between the
protocom”d and metacom. An “accessory amiemor fowea, 2s presented by the
dm... t noi shown by tus tooth The prmopal cesi of the metacomd has a
shorn. drstally deflected mdse (a Geiiecime wonkle) which contacts the hypoco-
ma. Dhe meiacomd s more Gsially cloneaie than the protocomd. The imezual
developmental sroove is situated Gistad to the mesiobuccal sroove—and thus
the pumiary occlusal fissure paiiem ss symmetmally Y-shaped. The dsl
maremal midec rs represenied by a small cospuhd (ihe tobercolum sexium)
Winch ss demarcated from the hypoconulhd and eniocomd by shallow. narrow
grooves. The fovea posicnor ts m the fomm of a small bat relatively Geep pit A
Ralrow sroowe beiween the cntocomd and hypocomulkd commects the fovea
postenor with the disiobuoccal sroove.
The postenor part of the buccal surface ss shehily comvex occlesocerwacally-
amd the dssiobuccal sroove s deep bat short. Ii courses vertically for siehily
more than a third of the cown heieht, where i ends m a pi.
The Gamensions of this cown cannot be deiemmmed accurately.
sPnomens SK 8§39/SK 852 comPosiiz
The niehi first and sccond mauillary Geadsous molars of SK $59 and the
aie st. ne ee
lanonships beiween bla ts fcat
eked ac ivcry mood (Fie: 10). and they are very smmular
m them sencral state of wear. Casts were made of the upper and lower scoond
by Gnine (1977). The occlusal surfaces of the casis were exammed by scammme
62 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Fig. 10. Lingual view of the occlusal relationship between the Rdm?
of SK 839 and the Rdm, of SK 852. Scale in cm.
electron microscopy. The types, degree, and orientation of the abrasive scrat-
ches on the two teeth were found to be very similar.
Also, the permanent teeth of the two specimens display degrees of calci-
fication that are compatible with their having belonged to the same individual.
The states of preservation of these fossils, for example the manganese staining
patterns of the teeth, are also similar.
These findings support Wallace’s (1972, 1973, 1978) suggestion that SK 839
and SK 852 represent the maxillary and mandibular remains of a single juvenile
individual.
SPECIMEN SK 1595
This specimen was recovered from the Member 1 breccia during the
1948-52 operations at Swartkrans. It was discovered in 1966 amongst a number
of supposedly non-hominid faunal remains by C. K. Brain, who performed
some preliminary preparation on it. The description on the catalogue card
reads, ‘Fragment of maxilla with a slightly worn M' left and an erupting
incisor?’
Prior to cleaning and restoration, this specimen consisted of a damaged left
upper molar, the tip of a permanent lateral incisor and a small piece of what
appeared to be the incisal edge of an incisor (Fig. 11). Also, a narrow, thin
sheet of maxillary alveolar bone was present round the incisors, and at the back
of the specimen the outline of what appeared to be part of an upper molar
crown was visible in the matrix.
Preparation revealed a very badly damaged and fragmented LI' (Figs
12-13), much of the crown of the LI? (Fig. 12), the mesial part of what is here
considered to be the LM! (Fig. 14), and the distal moiety of what is here
believed to be a slightly worn Ldm? (Fig. 14).
JUVENILE HOMINID SPECIMENS FROM SWARTKRANS 63
Fig. 11. Stereoview of SK 1595 prior to preparation. Compare with Figures 12-14.
Scale in cm.
a
= all
Fig. 12. Lingual view of LI’ and LI* of SK 1595. Scale in cm.
Deciduous dentition (Fig. 14)
Maxillary second deciduous molar
The distal half or more of the crown of the left second deciduous molar is
present. The mesial portion of the crown has been broken away along an
uneven transverse line which courses through the middle of the protocone
lingually, across the distal edge of the paracone buccally. Nothing of the
radicular system remains.
It is evident that all four principal cusps were present originally, and it is
probable that all were well developed. The metacone and hypocone are both
well developed and they are nearly equal in size.
Occlusal wear is slight on the preserved part of the crown. The protocone
is the most heavily worn cusp; it has been reduced in height more than the two
distal cusps, and it shows a large, faintly convex enamel facet. The hypocone
64 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Fig. 13. Buccal view of LI’ of SK 1595.
Scale in cm.
Fig. 14. Occlusal view of the Ldm? and the mesial
portion of the LM’ of SK 1595. Scale in cm.
JUVENILE HOMINID SPECIMENS FROM SWARTKRANS 65
displays a large, flattened enamel facet which slopes downwards mesiobuccally.
The metacone shows the lightest wear of the three cusps, with only a small
enamel facet. Dentine is not exposed. An interproximal attrition facet is not
present on the distal surface of the crown.
Occlusally, the distal trigon crest is moderately thick but it is incised on its
mesial and distal surfaces by a shallow groove. The distal marginal ridge is thick
and complete. It is somewhat lower in its middle but is continuous high on to
the distal aspect of the metacone. Four small cuspules are supported by this
ridge; each cuspule is only faintly demarcated. The talon basin is relatively
large and deep. A deep, narrow, longitudinal groove drains this basin near the
middle of its mesial aspect, and this groove is continuous with the deep, narrow
lingual groove between the protocone and hypocone.
The lingual surface over the hypocone is moderately convex occlusocervi-
cally and, although the cervical margin is damaged, it appears that a cervical
enamel prominence was present. The lingual groove is relatively deep but
narrow, and it courses vertically to the cervical margin. Approximately two-
thirds of the way down the crown the groove is interrupted by a narrow
(1,5 mm thick), horizontal enamel band.
Buccally, the surface is more swollen in appearance than the lingual. The
face of the metacone is moderately convex occlusocervically. The buccal groove
is rather deep and somewhat broader than the lingual. It continues vertically
for about half of the crown height, where it ends abruptly in a deep pit. The pit
is surrounded buccally by a thin, continuous enamel crest from the paratone to
the metacone. Near the distal side of the metacone a short, shallow and
narrow, vertical groove courses from the occlusal margin. This groove partially
demarcates the most buccal of the distal cuspule (= distostyle) from the main
body of the metacone. A few minute hypoplastic pits are shown on the
mesiobuccal surface of the metacone, near the occlusal margin of this surface.
Some hypoplastic mottling is present also on the distal surface of the crown.
The mesiodistal diameter of this crown is estimated to have been between
11,2 and 11,4 mm. The buccolingual diameter measured across the distal parts
of paracone and protocone is some 12,5 mm, the original dimension is judged
to have been perhaps another 0,2 mm greater.
MD diameter BL diameter BL diameter
(estimated) (as measured) (estimated)
WdmMe res fa es. 11,3 mm 12,5 mm 12,7 mm
Permanent dentition (Figs 12-14)
Maxillary central permanent incisor
The incomplete, isolated crown of the left maxillary incisor is represented.
The crown, as preserved, was reconstructed from seven different fragments.
Most of the lingual surface is missing, save for the mesial marginal ridge and a
narrow bit of the incisodistal edge. The mesial surface is nearly complete, but
66 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
the cervical region is damaged. The buccal face is only slightly more complete
than the lingual, where the mesial and incisal parts are present.
The crown is unworn and probably had not yet erupted—at least it had not
yet reached occlusion—at the time of death.
The mesial corner of the incisal edge is squared off, with the incisal and
mesial edges meeting at just slightly more than 90°. The distal corner is
considerably more rounded than the mesial. The incisal edge appears gently
curved mesiodistally. This edge is faintly scalloped, and the mesial part sup-
ports two broad, low mammelons.
Viewed from the buccal aspect, the crown appears to have been rather
square in outline; its mesiodistal diameter is judged to have been only slightly
less cervically than incisally. The buccal face is slightly convex incisocervically.
Fine perikymatous lines are visible over much of the preserved surface.
Lingually, the mesial marginal ridge is only slightly developed. It is
extremely thin and low incisally, and expands somewhat as it courses cervically.
MD diameter BL diameter Height
(as measured)
|S) a See Poet oes 9.0 mm = —
Maxillary lateral permanent incisor
The left maxillary lateral incisor is represented by an isolated, somewhat
damaged crown. The cervical region round the entire periphery of the crown
has suffered enamel loss, this being heaviest distobuccally and lingually. The
crown appears to be fully, or nearly fully, developed, and it is relatively small,
especially when compared to the I’.
The tip of the crown is surmounted by two small mammelon-like tubercles.
Mesial to the tip, the occlusal edge courses only slightly downward to the
mesial corner, which is rather strongly curved. The edge distal to the tubercles
slopes cervically much more strongly, and the distal ‘corner’ is broadly rounded
and lower than the mesial. i
Viewed from the buccal aspect, the crown is almost square in general
outline, but with the distal occlusal ‘corner’ reduced. The buccal surface is
faintly convex occlusocervically and there is no evidence of either perikymatous
or hypoplastic enamel.
Lingually, the cervical region is damaged; the presence, or otherwise, of
the basal prominence cannot be determined. There is no evidence of the
existence of lingual basal tubercles. Both the mesial and distal marginal ridges
are faintly developed; they course round the periphery of the lingual face from
the tip as thin, low enamel ridges. Towards the cervical margin, however, these
ridges become slightly more prominent. The lingual surface is flat.
MD diameter BL diameter Height
(as measured)
[es eae Ae 6,2 mm _ a
JUVENILE HOMINID SPECIMENS FROM SWARTKRANS 67
Maxillary first permanent molar
The left molar is represented by the damaged mesial portion of the crown.
This piece consists of much of the mesial surface, the lingual part of the
paracone, the entire mesial marginal ridge, and the mesial part of the paracone.
The preserved part of the crown is unworn and the tooth is judged to have been
unerupted at the time of death.
The mesial marginal ridge is moderately thick and high. It is continuous,
but is incised by two shallow grooves at the base of the tip of the paracone. A
small cuspule (= epiconule) is demarcated by these grooves. The crest is
expanded distally in its middle, and a small pit is situated atop it in this
position. The fovea anterior is represented by an elongate, irregular and
narrow transverse groove; it is broadest in front of the paracone. The proto-
cone and paracone are separated by a relatively deep, broad groove by which
the fovea anterior appears to be continuous with the trigon basin.
Measurements are not possible.
SPECIMEN SK 2147 (Fig. 15)
There is no catalogue card for this specimen. It was discovered in the
collection, labelled as an isolated lower premolar; it is, in fact, an isolated,
incomplete Ldm'.
Prior to preparation, the crown sat atop, and was partially covered by, a
small piece of typical ‘Pink’, or Member 1, Swartkrans breccia.
The specimen consists of the mesial two-thirds of a moderately worn
crown, with much of the mesiobuccal root present. The distal part of the crown
has been broken away along an irregular transverse line which cuts through the
distal edge of the protocone, and through the lingual extent of the metacone
where it turns sharply mesially to the posterior extent of the paracone. The
crack extends directly lingually from this point along the plane occupied by the
lingual developmental groove. Several narrow cracks traverse the protocone
and the paracone. The cervical portion of the buccal surface is cracked, with
considerable displacement of two rather large pieces of enamel. The mesial face
of the crown has suffered slight enamel loss and cracking. A narrow horizontal
crack traverses the mesial surface of the mesiobuccal root, and the tip of the
lingual part of this root has been damaged near its apex.
The occlusal outline of the crown cannot be determined. The protocone is
a very large cusp; the paracone is well developed also, but considerably smaller
than the protocone. Mesial to the paracone a large mesiostyle (= parastyle or
paraconule) is present. The mesiostyle is separated from the paracone by a
relatively deep, broad groove.
Occlusal wear is moderate. The protocone has been reduced considerably
in height, with a large, nearly flat and slightly lingually sloping enamel facet. A
large, elongate and ovoid-shaped, concave dentine exposure is present in the
middle of the protocone. The buccal side of the crown is less heavily worn; the
68 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
paracone, mesiostyle and mesial marginal ridge all show enamel wear. A small
island of dentine is exposed on the tip of the paracone.
Interproximal attrition, at least mesially, appears to have been moderate.
A large, slightly concave facet for the d° is present at the buccal extremity of
the mesial surface, it measures 2,8 mm buccolingually and 2,5 mm in height.
Occlusally (Fig. 15), the mesial marginal ridge is well developed. It is thick
and relatively high, and extends continuously from the mesiostyle to the
mesiolingual aspect of the protocone. The fovea anterior is represented by a
Fig. 15. Occlusal view of SK 2147 Ldm’.
Scale in cm.
relatively deep, broad groove which is continuous with the incision between the
paracone and mesiostyle. The fovea is enclosed distally by a high, moderately
thick enamel crest between the anterior part of the paracone and the proto-
cone. The trigon basin is represented by a relatively deep and broad \-shaped
groove. The tines of the A encompass part of the buccal aspect of the protocone
between this cusp and the paracone and metacone. The stem of the \ has been
damaged, but it is evident that it represented the buccal developmental groove
between the paracone and metacone.
The lingual surface of the protocone is slightly convex occlusocervically
and a slight cervical enamel prominence is shown.
The cervical portion of the buccal surface has been damaged, but this
portion was seemingly less convex than the lingual face, with a slight cervical
enamel prominence. The occlusal two-thirds of the buccal face is relatively flat.
The buccal groove is missing. A faint groove courses vertically for a short
distance from the occlusal incision between the paracone and the mesiostyle. It
is apparent that there was no tuberculum molare over the mesiocervical aspect
of the buccal surface.
JUVENILE HOMINID SPECIMENS FROM SWARTKRANS 69
MD diameter BL diameter BL diameter
(as measured) (corrected)
Lich eee see sss 9.8 mm 10,0 mm
The mesiobuccal root has a flattened, ovoid outline in cross-section; it is
expanded buccolingually and compressed mesiodistally. The long axis of the
root, in cross-section, runs slightly mesiobuccally-distolingually. The bucco-
lingual diameter measures some 5,3 mm and the mesiodistal some 3,9 mm at
the cervical margin. The root is relatively straight, and it courses rather
markedly mesially from the cervical line to its tip. It diverges buccally some-
what. This root is estimated to have been approximately 8,5 mm long.
DISCUSSION
Four specimens representing the jaws and/or teeth of some three juvenile
hominid individuals from Swartkrans have been prepared and described in
detail. The remains are all derived from Member 1 breccia. These specimens
have added a number of deciduous and permanent teeth to the already sizeable
collection from this site.
Robinson (1956) referred one of these specimens (SK 839) to Paranthro-
pus robustus. Wallace (1972) suggested that SK 839 and SK 852 represent a
single individual, and he included this composite in his hypodigm of Australopi-
thecus robustus from Swartkrans. The results of the present study support
Wallace’s suggestion that SK 839 and SK 852 belonged to a single individual.
SK 1595 was also referred to A. robustus by Wallace (1972) on the basis of the
occlusal wear pattern exhibited by the dm’.
The fourth specimen, SK 2147, was catalogued as an isolated permanent
premolar. The author considers this tooth to be a left dm’, and as such it
represents, to date, the second specimen of this tooth found at Swartkrans. The
other dm’, SK 91, has been referred by both Robinson (1956) and Wallace
(1972) to the ‘robust’ australopithecine taxon. The morphology shown by
SK 2147 is similar to that evinced by SK 91, and the dm’ of SK 2147 is also
referred to the Swartkrans ‘robust’ australopithecine taxon.
An analysis of the morphological and metrical data available for the
collection of deciduous and permanent teeth from Swartkrans is beyond the
scope of the present paper and will be presented elsewhere.
ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS
I am grateful to Drs C. K. Brain and E. S. Vrba (Transvaal Museum) for
permission to prepare and describe specimens in their care. I thank Prof. P. V.
Tobias and Dr T. D. White for reading and constructively criticizing this paper.
Mr A. R. Hughes and Mr H. Thackwray assisted with photography. This work
was supported by a grant from the Senate Research Committee, University of
the Witwatersrand.
70 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
REFERENCES
BRAIN, C. K. 1958. The Transvaal ape-man bearing cave deposits. Transv. Mus. Mem. 11:
1-125.
Brain, C. K. 1976. A re-interpretation of the Swartkrans site and its remains. S. Afr. J. Sci. 72:
141-146.
BRAIN, C. K. 1978. Some aspects of the South African australopithecine sites and their bone
accumulations. Jn: JoLty, C. ed. Early hominids of Africa: 131-161. London: Duckworth.
BRAIN, C. K., VrBA, E. S. & RoBINson, J. T. 1974. A new hominid innominate bone from
Swartkrans. Ann. Transv. Mus. 29: 55-63.
Broom, R. 1949. Another new type of fossil ape-man (Paranthropus crassidens). Nature, Lond.
163: 57.
Broom, R. & Rosinson, J. T. 1949. A new type of fossil man. Nature, Lond. 164: 322-323.
Broom, R. & Rosinson, J. T. 1950. Man contemporaneous with the Swartkrans ape-man. Am.
J. phys. Anthrop. 8: 151-156.
Broom, R. & Rosinson, J. T. 1952. Swartkrans ape-man Paranthropus crassidens. Transv.
Mus. Mem. 6: 1-123.
Burzer, K. W. 1976. Lithostratigraphy of the Swartkrans Formation. S$. Afr. J. Sci. 72:
136-141.
CLARKE, R. J. 1977a. The cranium of the Swartkrans hominid SK 847 and its relevance to
human origins. Unpublished Ph.D. Thesis, University of the Witwatersrand, Johannes-
burg.
CLARKE, R. J. 1977b. A juvenile cranium and some adult teeth of early Homo from Swart-
krans, Transvaal. S. Afr. J. Sci. 73: 46-49.
CLARKE, R. J. & HowE LL, F. C. 1972. Affinities of the Swartkrans 847 hominid cranium. Am.
J. phys. Anthrop. 37: 319-336.
CLARKE, R. J., HOWELL, F. C. & Brain, C. K. 1970. More evidence of an advanced hominid at
Swartkrans. Nature, Lond. 225: 1219-1222.
Cooke, H. B. S. 1963. Pleistocene mammal faunas of Africa. Viking Fd Publ. Anthrop. 36:
65-116.
CookE, H. B. S. 1978. Faunal evidence for the biotic setting of early African hominids. In:
JoLiy, C., ed. Early hominids of Africa: 267-281. London: Duckworth.
GrinE, F. E. 1977. Analysis of early hominid deciduous molar wear by scanning electron
microscopy: a preliminary report. Proc. electron microsc. Soc. sth. Afr. 7: 157-158.
HENDEY, Q. B. 1974. Faunal dating of the late Cenozoic of southern Africa. Quaternary Res.,
N.Y. 4: 149-161.
HowELL, F. C. 1978. Hominidae. In: MaGuio, V. J. & Cooke, H. B.S., eds. Evolution of
African mammals: 154-248. London: Harvard University.
Otson, T. R. 1978. Hominid phylogenetics and the existence of Homo in Member 1 of the
Swartkrans Formation, South Africa. J. hum. Evol. 7: 159-178.
RoBINnson, J. T. 1953a. The nature of Telanthropus capensis. Nature, Lond. 171: 33.
Rosinson, J. T. 1953b. Telanthropus and its phylogenetic significance. Am. J. phys. Anthrop.
11: 445-501.
Rosinson, J. T. 1956. The dentition of the Australopithecinae. Transv. Mus. Mem. 9: 1-179.
Rosinson, J. T. 1961. The australopithecines and their bearing on the origin of man and of
stone-tool making. S. Afr. J. Sci. 57: 3-13.
TosiAs, P. V. 1967. The cranium and maxillary dentition of Australopithecus (Zinjanthropus)
boisei 2. Olduvai Gorge. Cambridge: Cambridge University.
Tosias, P. V. 1968. Middle and early Upper Pleistocene members of the genus Homo in
Africa. In: Kurtu, G. ed., Evolution and Hominisation: 176-194. Stuttgart: Fischer.
TosiAs, P. V. 1978. The earliest Transvaal members of the genus Homo with another look at
some problems of hominid taxonomy and systematics. Z. Morph. Anthrop. 69: 225-265.
Tosias, P. V. & WeLLs, L. H. 1967. South Africa. In: OAKLEY, K. & CAMPBELL, B. eds.
Catalogue of fossil hominids: 49-100. London: British Museum (Natural History).
VrBA, E. S. 1975. Some evidence of chronology and palaeoecology of Sterkfontein, Swartkrans
and Kromdraai from the fossil Bovidae. Nature, Lond. 254: 301-304.
JUVENILE HOMINID SPECIMENS FROM SWARTKRANS TA
WaLLAceE, J. A. 1972. The dentition of the South African early hominids: a study of form and
function. Unpublished Ph.D. Thesis, University of the Witwatersrand, Johannesburg.
WaLtace, J. A. 1973. Molar occlusion in the ape-man (Australopithecus). Am. J. Orthodont.
63: 606-609.
WALLACE, J. A. 1975. Dietary adaptations of Australopithecus and early Homo. In: TuTTLE, R.,
ed. Paleoanthropology, morphology and paleoecology: 203-223. The Hague: Mouton.
WALLACE, J. A. 1978. Evolutionary trends in the early hominid dentition. In: JoLiy, C. ed.
Early hominids of Africa. London: Duckworth.
a
6. SYSTEMATIC papers must conform to the /nternational code of zoological nomenclature
(particularly Articles 22 and 51).
Names of new taxa, combinations, synonyms, etc., when used for the first time, must be
followed by the appropriate Latin (not English) abbreviation, e.g. gen. nov., sp. nov., comb.
nov., syn. nov., etc.
An author’s name when cited must follow the name of the taxon without intervening
punctuation and not be abbreviated; if the year is added, a comma must separate author’s
name and year. The author’s name (and date, if cited) must be placed in parentheses if a
species or subspecies is transferred from its original genus. The name of a subsequent user of
a scientific name must be separated from the scientific name by a colon.
Synonymy arrangement should be according to chronology of names, i.e. all published
scientific names by which the species previously has been designated are listed in chronological
order, with all references to that name following in chronological order, e.g.:
Family Nuculanidae
Nuculana (Lembulus) bicuspidata (Gould, 1845)
Figs 14-15A
Nucula (Leda) bicuspidata Gould, 1845: 37.
Leda plicifera A. Adams, 1856: 50.
Laeda bicuspidata Hanley, 1859: 118, pl. 228 (fig. 73). Sowerby, 1871: pl. 2 (fig. 8a—b).
Nucula largillierti Philippi, 1861: 87.
Leda bicuspidata: Nicklés, 1950: 163, fig. 301; 1955: 110. Barnard, 1964: 234, figs 8-9.
Note punctuation in the above example:
comma separates author’s name and year
“semicolon separates more than one reference by the same author
full stop separates references by different authors
figures of plates are enclosed in parentheses to distinguish them from text-figures
dash, not comma, separates consecutive numbers
Synonymy arrangement according to chronology of bibliographic references, whereby
the year is placed in front of each entry, and the synonym repeated in full for each entry, is
not acceptable.
In describing new species, One specimen must be designated as the holotype; other speci-
mens mentioned in the original description are to be designated paratypes; additional material
not regarded as paratypes should be listed separately. The complete data (registration number,
depository, description of specimen, locality, collector, date) of the holotype and paratypes
must be recorded, e.g.:
Holotype
SAM-—A13535 in the South African Museum, Cape Town. Adult female from mid- tide region, King’s Beach
Port Elizabeth (33°51’S 25°39’E), collected by A. ‘Smith, 15 January 1973.
Note standard form of writing South African Museum registration numbers and date.
7. SPECIAL HOUSE RULES
Capital initial letters
(a) The Figures, Maps and Tables of the paper when referred to in the text
e.g. ‘... the Figure depicting C. namacolus ...’; *. . . in C. namacolus (Fig. 10)...’
- (b) The prefixes of prefixed surnames in all languages, when used in the text, if not preceded
by initials or full names
e.g. Du Toit but A.L.du Toit; Von Huene but F. von Huene
(c) Scientific names, but not their vernacular derivatives
e.g. Therocephalia, but therocephalian
Punctuation should be loose, omitting all not strictly necessary
Reference to the author should be expressed in the third person
Roman numerals should be converted to arabic, except when forming part of the title of a
book or article, such as
‘Revision of the Crustacea. Part VIII. The Amphipoda.’
Specific name must not stand alone, but be preceded by the generic name or its abbreviation
to initial capital letter, provided the same generic name is used consecutively.
Name of new genus or species is not to be included in the title: it should be included in the
abstract, counter to Recommendation 23 of the Code, to meet the requirements of
Biological Abstracts.
F. E. GRINE
DESCRIPTION OF SOME JUVENILE
HOMINID SPECIMENS
FROM SWARTKRANS, TRANSVAAL
RT 3 OCTOBER 1981 ISSN 0303-2515 ©
ANNALS
OF THE SOUTH AFRIC
CAPE TOWN.
INSTRUCTIONS TO AUTHORS
1. MATERIAL should be original and not published elsewhere, in whole or in part.
2. LAYOUT should be as follows:
(a) Centred masthead to consist of
Title: informative but concise, without abbreviations and not including the names of new genera or species
Author’s(s’) name(s)
Address(es) of author(s) (institution where work was carried out)
Number of illustrations (figures, enumerated maps and tables, in this order)
(b) Abstract of not more than 200 words, intelligible to the reader without reference to the text
(c) Table of contents giving hierarchy of headings and subheadings
(d) Introduction
(e) Subject-matter of the paper, divided into sections to correspond with those given in table of contents
(f) Summary, if paper is lengthy
(g) Acknowledgements
(h) References
(i) Abbreviations, where these are numerous
3. MANUSCRIPT, to be submitted in triplicate, should be typewritten and neat, double spaced
with 2,5 cm margins all round. First lines of paragraphs should be indented. Tables and a list of
legends for illustrations should be typed separately, their positions indicated in the text. All
pages should be numbered consecutively.
Major headings of the paper are centred capitals; first subheadings are shouldered small
capitals; second subheadings are shouldered italics; third subheadings are indented, shouldered
italics. Further subdivisions should be avoided, as also enumeration (never roman numerals)
of headings and abbreviations.
Footnotes should be avoided unless they are short and essential.
Only generic and specific names should be underlined to indicate italics; all other marking
up should be left to editor and publisher.
4. ILLUSTRATIONS should be reducible to a size not exceeding 12 « 18 cm (19 cm including
legend); the reduction or enlargement required should be indicated; originals larger than
35 x 47 cm should not be submitted; photographs should be rectangular in shape and final
size. A metric scale should appear with all illustrations, otherwise magnification or reduction
should be given in the legend; if the latter, then the final reduction or enlargement should be
taken into consideration.
All illustrations, whether line drawings or photographs, should be termed figures (plates
are not printed; half-tones will appear in their proper place in the text) and numbered in a
single series. Items of composite figures should be designated by capital letters; lettering of
figures is not set in type and should be in lower-case letters.
The number of the figure should be lightly marked in pencil on the back of each illustration.
5. REFERENCES cited in text and synonymies should all be included in the list at the end of
the paper, using the Harvard System (ibid., idem, loc. cit., op. cit. are not acceptable):
(a) Author’s name and year of publication given in text, e.g.:
‘Smith (1969) describes...’
‘Smith (1969: 36, fig. 16) describes .. .’
‘As described (Smith 1969a, 19695; Jones 1971)’
‘As described (Haughton & Broom 1927)...’
‘As described (Haughton et al. 1927)...’
Note: no comma separating name and year
Dagination indicated by colon, not p.
names of joint authors connected by ampersand
et al. in text for more than two joint authors, but names of all authors given in list of references.
(b) Full references at the end of the paper, arranged alphabetically by names, chronologically
within each name, with suffixes a, b, etc. to the year for more than one paper by the same
author in that year, e.g. Smith (1969a, 19695) and not Smith (1969, 1969a).
For books give title in italics, edition, volume number, place of publication, publisher.
For journal article give title of article, title of journal in italics (abbreviated according to the World list o,
scientific periodicals. 4th ed. London: Butterworths, 1963), series in parentheses, volume number, part
number (only if independently paged) in parentheses, pagination (first and last pages of article).
Examples (note capitalization and punctuation)
BULLOUGH, W. S. 1960. Practical invertebrate anatomy. 2nd ed. London: Macmillan.
FISCHER, P. —-H. 1948. Données sur la résistance et de le vitalité des mollusques. J. Conch., Paris 88: 100-140.
FIsCHER, P.-H., DuvAL, M. & Rarry, A. 1933. Etudes sur les échanges respiratoires des littorines. Archs
Zool. exp. Zen. 74: 627-634.
Koun, A. J. 1960a. Ecological notes on @anus (Mollusca: Gastropoda) in the Trincomalee region of Ceylon.
Ann. Mag. nat. Hist. (13) 2: 309-320.
Konn, A. J. 19606. Spawning behaviour, egg masses and larval development in Conus from the Indian Ocean.
Bull, Bingham oceanogr. Coll. 17 (4): 1-51.
THIELE, J. 1910. Mollusca: B. Polyplacophora, Gastropoda marina, Bivalvia. In: SCHULTZE, L. Zoologische
und anthropologische Ergebnisse einer Forschungsreise im westlichen und zentralen Siid-Afrika 4: 269-270.
Jena: Fischer. Denkschr. med.-naturw. Ges. Jena 16: 269-270.
(continued inside back cover)
ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
ANNALE VAN DIE SUID-AFRIKAANSE MUSEUM
Volume 86 Band
October 1981 Oktober
Part 3 Deel
MOSS
S29
FS B:B.B.9.9)
x
> SS
Youig nov
NOVI
DINOCEPHALIA TYPE MATERIAL
IN THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
(REPTILIA, THERAPSIDA)
By
J. A. VAN DEN HEEVER
KX
Po Ee GRINE
Cape Town Kaapstad
The ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
are issued in parts at irregular intervals as material
becomes available
Obtainable from the South African Museum, P.O. Box 61, Cape Town 8000
Die ANNALE VAN DIE SUID-AFRIKAANSE MUSEUM
word uitgegee in dele op ongereelde tye na gelang van die
beskikbaarheid van stof
Verkrygbaar van die Suid-Afrikaanse Museum, Posbus 61, Kaapstad 8000
OUT: OF PRINT/UIT DRUK
LOGS, 6), AGED, 755, 9, taal), SES, 5, 7-9),
GG, taps), TA), 8, TER 1), 1003),
GED, 57), jash)), ISS), DAO), Mh SIGS), WIG), 38, 5)
EDITOR/REDAKTRISE
Ione Rudner
Copyright enquiries to the South African Museum
Kopieregnavrae aan die Suid-Afrikaanse Museum
ISBN 0 86813 020 6
Printed in South Africa by In Suid-Afrika gedruk deur
The Rustica Press, Pty., Ltd., Die Rustica-pers, Edms., Bpk.,
Court Road, Wynberg, Cape Courtweg, Wynberg, Kaap
DINOCEPHALIA TYPE MATERIAL IN THE SOUTH AFRICAN
MUSEUM (REPTILIA, THERAPSIDA)
By
J.A. VAN DEN HEEVER*
&
F.E. GRINE
South African Museum, Cape Town
[MS accepted 14 May 1981]
ABSTRACT
Brief statements on the preservation of the dinocephalian type specimens, the localities
from which they were recovered, and the collectors responsible are given. The original generic
and/or specific diagnoses are reproduced. All relevant references to each specimen are listed,
together with pertinent comments.
CONTENTS
PAGE
EAT PRO CUETO let Pa ede eg eae hare chau tUnS, ekcty ofa eon Gene 73
Sy Meat atetial tee. secene sty ei Meer nat a tec earteR e esete A Suche 74
amilyeANteOSaUnidae, yesh see eek cel oe ee eis eke 74
Ramilyaiitanosuchidac.. eneai aia: scene acess see Gae oe 85
amily skapimocephalidaes 225 22 /ssciretea! sade eee AB 98
Subfamily, tapmocephalinaes 235-25 -ssse eee esate 3 98
Subfamuly;struthiocephalinaes5.0 44-ee aee te ae o- 99
SubfamuilysRiebeeckosauninaens ee eee ea ee 104
Subfamily Moschopinac sy 94-4ae oe ee ace: 106
RamulysStyracocephalidae 25.245 5. tlitede soe dee Gee oe he bit
PACKNOWICUSCMIETIES cs ec eee. c citer ureaers eee ars Seis a hee eee 112
INCHCTOM COS oe SAG oh aime ete he item ete am ae ar N28 Oe a alee 112
INTRODUCTION
The infra-order Dinocephalia (assuming that this group is monophyletic)
represents a Middle Permian radiation of carnivorous and herbivorous ther-
apsids. In the Tapinocephalus Zone (Kitching 1977) sediments of the Beaufort
Group, Cape Province, South Africa, the dinocephalians form a substantial
part of the dominant therapsid fauna. It is commonly held that the South
African dinocephalians are derived from earlier Russian therapsids (Olson
1962; Boonstra 1969; Tatarinov 1974, 1976).
Since the South African Museum houses the largest collection of dinoce-
phalian type specimens, it was felt that a comprehensive list of this material
would serve a useful purpose. The collection contains some forty-four holotype
* The order of authorship was decided by the flip of a coin.
WS
Ann. S. Afr. Mus. 86 (3), 1981: 73-114.
74 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
and paratype specimens and, in order to present this list of material in a clear
manner, Boonstra’s (1969) familial and subfamilial classifications have been
utilized.
The generic and specific diagnoses included in this paper are taken from
the original diagnosis of each taxon. Those that have been indicated clearly as
diagnoses are reproduced verbatim. In some instances, where the taxonomic
diagnosis was not clearly separated from the descriptive text, the present
authors have scrutinized the description in order to determine which features
were considered by the original author to be diagnostic. However, in all cases
the terminology remains that of the original author.
Most of the localities are represented by farm names, spelt in a variety of
-ways by different workers. In order to avoid confusion, the authors have
followed Kitching (1977) in the spelling of locality names.
TYPE MATERIAL
Family Anteosauridae
Anteosaurus abeli Boonstra, 1952
Holotype
SAM-11296
Material
Fairly complete skull and lower jaw which have been distorted slightly by
shear.
Locality
Kruisrivier, Sutherland.
Collected
Boonstra and Laurenson, 1937.
Generic diagnosis
See Watson (1921) for diagnosis of Anteosaurus.
Specific diagnosis
Skull large and massive; postorbital boss less massive than in genotype
[sic]; jugal boss low to very prominent; bone thickened around pineal foramen
but does not form a clear, circular boss; frontals strongly swollen; tooth-bearing
palatine boss semilunate; premaxillary edge slopes upward in contrast to
genotype [sic]; incisors very long with only some showing slight indication of
lingual step; premaxillae greatly swollen dorsally and clearly demarcated from
maxillae; squamosal moderately flared laterally; dentary strong and very mass-
ive (after Boonstra 1952e: 150).
DINOCEPHALIA TYPE MATERIAL TS
References
Boonstra 1948: 40 (fig.).
Boonstra 1952e: 150-151.
Boonstra 1953a: 26, pl. 1.
Boonstra 1954a: 109, 112-114, 124-125, 144, figs 1-2.
Haughton & Brink 1955: 42.
Piveteau 196la: 84, fig. 11.
Comments
Boonstra (1969) regarded Anteosaurus abeli as a junior synonym of Anteo-
saurus magnificus.
Paratype
SAM-—340
Material
Good skull and part of lower jaw which have been distorted by shear.
Locality
Leeurivier, Beaufort West.
Collected
Haughton, 1916.
References
Boonstra 1952e: 150.
Boonstra 1953a: pl. 3.
Boonstra 1954a: 108, 112-113, 124, 130, 144, fig. 6.
Comments
An isolated symphysis labelled SAM—4340 does not belong to this individ-
ual. There are several unlabelled fragments associated with the specimen which
do not appear to belong to it.
Paratype
SAM-5621
Material
Incomplete, fragmentary skull consisting of part of snout and a portion of
cranial roof.
Locality
Leeurivier, Beaufort West.
76 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Collected
Haughton, 1916.
References
Boonstra 1952e: 150.
Boonstra 1954a: 108, 131, 144.
Paratype
SAM-9123
Material
Weathered and sectioned skull lacking lower jaw; two vertebrae.
Locality
Voélfontein, Prince Albert.
Collected
Boonstra, 1929.
References
Boonstra 1952e: 150.
Boonstra 1954a: 108, 131, 144.
Boonstra 1962: 97-98; fig. 33.
Paratype
SAM-11302
Material
Fairly complete but weathered skull with part of lower jaw.
Locality
Buffelsvlei, Beaufort West.
Collected
Boonstra, 1938.
References
Boonstra 1952e: 150.
Boonstra 1954a: 134-135, 144.
Comments
Boonstra (1954a) placed this specimen in the hypodigm of Anteosaurus
crassifrons.
DINOCEPHALIA TYPE MATERIAL
Paratype
SAM-11929
Material
Imperfect, weathered skull.
Locality
See comments.
Collected
See comments.
References
Boonstra 1952e: 150.
Boonstra 1954a: 109, 135, 144.
Comments
ql
The locality is questionable. In the museum catalogue it is given as
‘unknown, probably near Abrahamskraal, Prince Albert’. Boonstra (1954a:
109) gave the locality as Kruisvlei, Beaufort West, but later in the same paper
he (1954a: 135) referred to the locality as Abrahamskraal, Prince Albert. The
museum catalogue records the collector as ‘unknown’; Boonstra (1954a: 109)
stated that he collected it. Boonstra (1954a) placed this specimen in the
hypodigm of Anteosaurus crassifrons.
Anteosaurus acutirostris Boonstra, 1954
Holotype
SAM-9329
Material
Nearly complete skull and lower jaw.
Locality
Kruisvlei, Beaufort West.
Collected
Boonstra, 1929.
Generic diagnosis
See Watson (1921) for diagnosis of Anteosaurus.
Specific diagnosis
Skull large, maximum length of 675 mm. Snout long, high, narrow,
and
light. Intersquamosal width great (480? mm). Postfrontal boss huge and pro-
78 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
minent. Jugal boss massive, angular boss massive. Fronto-naso-prefrontal swell-
ing very strong with distinct step on to the anterior nasal surface and laterally
slightly overhanging the sides of the skull. Pineal boss low with rounded edges
extending to the occipital edge. Fairly strong upward inclination of premaxillary
edge. Occiput high, fairly wide, very deeply concave with sharp and great
posterior sweep of temporal arches; upper part of temporal fossa roomy
anteroposteriorly. Temporal arch rises above plane of intertemporal surface.
Palate apparently long and narrow. Basis cranu fairly long. Exocipitals fused
with basioccipital to form rounded condyle, which is visible beyond occipital
edge in dorsal view. On both sides 4 upper and 4 lower incisors, 1 canine, 5?
postcanines. (After Boonstra 1954a: 131-132.)
References
Boonstra 1952e: 150.
Boonstra 1953a: pl. 2.
Boonstra 1954a: 108, 113, 131-133, 144, fig. 10.
Haughton & Brink 1955: 42.
Comments
Boonstra (1969) regarded Anteosaurus acutirostris as a junior synonym of
Anteosaurus magnificus.
Anteosaurus crassifrons Boonstra, 1954
Holotype
SAM-11946
Material
Good skull distorted by shear.
Locality
Buffelsvlei, Beaufort West.
Collected
Boonstra and Marais, 1951.
Generic diagnosis
See Watson (1921) for diagnosis of Anteosaurus.
Specific diagnosis
Skull large but short and squat; maximum length 570 mm. Snout short,
high and very wide. Intersquamosal width fairly small (330? mm). Postfrontal
boss fairly massive and prominent. Jugal boss massive. Fronto-naso-prefrontal
swelling very massive with very distinct step on to anterior nasal surface and
DINOCEPHALIA TYPE MATERIAL 79
laterally strongly overhanging sides of skull. Pineal boss rounded, large and
extending on to frontal. Very sharp inclination of premaxillary edge. Occiput
high, fairly wide, deeply concave, with great posterior sweep of temporal
arches. Upper part of temporal fossa roomy in anteroposterior direction.
Temporal arch not rising above plane of intertemporal surface. Palate very
short with massive lateral pterygoid flanges. Basis cranii short, with short
basisphenoid. Exoccipitals fused with basi-occipital to form rounded condyle.
In both premaxillae teeth not preserved but five matrix-filled alveoli shown; in
both maxillae five postcanine roots of greatly varying diameter preserved,
numbers 2 and 5 much smaller than other three. (After Boonstra 1954a:
133-134.)
References
Boonstra 1954a: 109, 113, 133-134, 144, figs 11-13.
Haughton & Brink 1955: 42.
Comments
Boonstra (1969) regarded Anteosaurus crassifrons as a junior synonym of
Anteosaurus magnificus.
Anteosaurus cruentus Boonstra, 1954
Holotype
SAM-11694
Material
Reasonably complete skull without lower jaw.
Locality
Koringplaas, Laingsburg.
Collected
Boonstra and Du Plessis, 1946.
Generic diagnosis
See Watson (1921) for diagnosis of Anteosaurus.
Specific Diagnosis
Skull moderately large, maximum length 565 mm. Snout long, narrow and
fairly low. Intersquamosal width not great (360 mm). Postfrontal boss fairly
strong and prominent. No jugal boss. Fronto-naso-prefrontal swelling small,
passing evenly on to anterior nasal surface. Pineal boss prominent, with sharp
circular border, situated very near occipital edge. Sharp upward inclination of
premaxillary edge. Occiput high and fairly broad, very deeply concave with
80 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
great posterior sweep of temporal arch. Upper part of temporal fossa roomy
anteroposteriorly; temporal arch not rising above very narrow intertemporal
surface. Palate long, with fairly robust lateral pterygoidal flanges. Basis cranii
long, but basisphenoid short. Exoccipitals form large part of dorsolateral
corners of condyle. Alveolar face of premaxilla shows matrix-filled groove
divided in its posterior part by distinct alveoli; appears to have been room for 5
incisors when fully developed. On right side canine root followed by roots of 6
postcanines, but on left only 4 roots with a possible fifth visible. (After
Boonstra 1954a: 139-140.)
References
Boonstra 1953a: 26, pl. 6.
Boonstra 1954a: 109, 112, 114, 124, 139-141, 144, figs 17-20.
Haughton & Brink 1955: 42.
Comments
Boonstra (1953a) referred this speciman to A. minor. Boonstra (1969)
regarded Anteosaurus cruentus as a junior synonym of A. magnificus.
Anteosaurus levops Boonstra, 1954
Holotype
SAM-11492
Material
Badly weathered, incomplete skull without lower jaw.
Locality
Mynhardtskraal, Beaufort West.
Collected
Boonstra and Bothma, 1940.
Generic diagnosis
See Watson (1921) for diagnosis of Anteosaurus.
Specific diagnosis
Skull fairly small, maximum length 485 mm. Snout fairly short, lightly
built, narrow and low. Intersquamosal width relatively large (415 mm). Post-
frontal boss strong and prominent. No jugal boss. Fronto-naso-prefrontal
swelling strong, with distinct step on to anterior nasal surface and laterally
slightly overhanging sides of skull. Pineal boss apparently prominent, reaching
occipital edge. Upward inclination of premaxillary edge moderate. Occipital
fairly low and broad, deeply concave, not vertical; strong posterolateral sweep
DINOCEPHALIA TYPE MATERIAL 81
of temporal arches. Upper part of temporal fossa shortened in anteroposterior
direction; temporal arch rising above plane of narrow intertemporal surface.
Palate long and narrow. Basis cranii fairly short. In right premaxilla parts of
crowns of 3 incisors preserved, but on left there is a matrix-filled groove with
no sign of teeth. (After Boonstra 1954a: 141-142.)
References
Boonstra 1953a: 26.
Boonstra 1954a: 109, 141-142, 144, fig. 21.
Haughton & Brink 1955: 43.
Comments
Boonstra (1953a) considered this skull to be a referred specimen of A.
minor. Boonstra (1969) regarded A. Levops as a junior synonym of A.
magnificus.
Anteosaurus laticeps Boonstra 1954
Holotype
SAM-11592
Material
Incomplete skull with only ventral and occipital surfaces preserved.
Locality
Dikbome, Laingsburg.
Collected
Boonstra and Du Plessis, 1942.
Generic diagnosis
See Watson (1921) for diagnosis of Anteosaurus.
Specific diagnosis
Skull large, maximum length 645? mm. Snout short and very broad.
Intersquamosal width great (522 mm). Occiput low and very broad, shallowly
concave; sweep of temporal arches mostly lateral. Palate long and very broad
with only moderately strong lateral pterygoidal flanges. Basis cranii short, with
very short basisphenoid. Exoccipitals form much of dorsolateral corners of
condyle. Canines very strong and slightly recurved. In right maxilla, stumps of
5 postcanines can be made out whereas on left 5 teeth are preserved with the
probability of another 2, making a total of 7. Postcanines bluntly conical, but
linguolabially compressed with crowns thus oval in cross-section (16 x 11 x 7
mm). (After Boonstra 1954a: 138-139.)
82 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
References
Boonstra 1952e: 150.
Boonstra 1953a: 22.
Boonstra 1954a: 109, 138-139, 144, fig. 16.
Haughton & Brink 1955: 42.
Comments
Boonstra (1952e) made this specimen a paratype of A. abeli. Later he
(1953a) appears to infer that he considers it to be a specimen of Jonkeria sp.
Boonstra (1969) regarded A. laticeps as a junior synonym of A. magnificus.
Anteosaurus major Boonstra, 1954
Holotype
SAM-11293
Material
Good skull, dorsoventrally compressed, lacking snout.
Locality
Boesmansrivier, Beaufort West.
Collected
Boonstra, 1937.
Generic diagnosis
See Watson (1921) for diagnosis of Anteosaurus.
Specific diagnosis
Skull very large, maximum length 805? mm. Snout long, fairly broad and
high. Intersquamosal width very great (612 mm). Postfrontal boss only mod-
erately strong and not very prominent, with postorbital forming posterolateral
part. Low and weak jugal boss. Fronto-naso-prefrontal boss moderate, con-
fluent with anterior nasal surface. Pineal boss low, with rounded edges, situated
some distance from occipital edge. Occiput low and broad, moderately deeply
concave. Sweep of temporal arches more lateral than posterior and upper part
of temporal fossa roomy anteroposteriorly. Temporal arch rises above level of
intertemporal surface. Palate fairly long and broad, with strong and deep
lateral pterygoidal flanges but not so massive as in A. crassifrons. Basis cranii-
long and basisphenoid much longer than in any of the other species. Exoccipi-
tals from dorsolateral corners of condyle. (After Boonstra 1954a: 136-138.)
References
Boonstra 1952e: 150.
Boonstra 1953a: pls 4-5.
DINOCEPHALIA TYPE MATERIAL 83
Boonstra 1954a: 109, 120, 136-138, 144, figs 14-15.
Haughton & Brink 1955: 42.
Comments
Boonstra (1952e) referred to this specimen as a paratype of A. abeli.
Boonstra (1969) synonymized this taxon with Anteosaurus magnificus.
Micranteosaurus parvus Boonstra, 1954
Holotype
SAM-4323
Material
Anterior part of snout, lower jaw, manus, pes, femur, fibula, proximal part
of humerus, radius, coracoid, caudal vertebra.
Locality
Merweville commonage, Beaufort West.
Collected
Haughton, 1917.
Generic diagnosis
Anteosaurid of very small size (after Boonstra 1954b: 156).
Specific diagnosis
As for genus.
References
Boonstra 1954b: 149-156, figs 1-4, pl. 18.
Boonstra 19555: 200, 320-321.
Haughton & Brink 1955: 45.
Von Huene 1956: 287.
Piveteau 196la: 85.
Orlov 1964: 254.
Boonstra 1966: 14, 17-18, 23-25, figs 3, 10.
Boonstra 1969: 33.
Comments
Boonstra (1969) regarded this specimen as a juvenile Anteosaurus
magnificus.
Paranteosaurus primus Boonstra, 1954
Holotype
SAM-11485
84 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Material
Partial, fragmented skull, proximal end of femur, vertebrae.
Locality
Mynhardtskraal, Beaufort West.
Collected
Boonstra, 1940.
Generic diagnosis
‘A medium-sized Anteosaurid [sic] (max. length probably about 570 mm),
with small postfrontal not extending posteriorly, lightly built postorbital bar,
without any sign of a boss-like development in the upper part of the postorbital
bar, dental formula I.3?-4?, C.1, P.C.5’ (Boonstra 1954c: 159).
Specific diagnonis
As for genus.
References
Boonstra 1952e: 150.
Boonstra 1954c: 157-159.
Boonstra 19555: 320, fig. 102e.
Haughton & Brink 1955: 45.
Piveteau 1961a: 85.
Boonstra 1963a: 177, fig. 8G.
Boonstra 1963b: 200, fig. 4A.
Orlov 1964: 254.
Boonstra 1969: 33, 35, 55.
Eccasaurus priscus Broom, 1909
Holotype
SAM-915
Material
Humerus, two imperfect femora, fibula, distal end of tibia, occipital
fragment, tooth, nine weathered vertebrae, rib fragments, nine additional badly
preserved fragments.
Locality
Sandvlakte, Prince Albert.
Collected
Presented by Cairncross.
DINOCEPHALIA TYPE MATERIAL 85
Generic diagnosis
Humerus with well-developed deltopectoral ridge which does not continue
to head (after Broom 1909a: 276).
Specific diagnosis
As for genus.
References
Broom 1909a: 276-277.
Gregory 1926: 235.
Broom 1932: 45, fig. 3c-d.
Boonstra 19556: 188, 321-322, figs 105-106, 107a.
Haughton & Brink 1955: 47.
Romer 1966: 373.
Boonstra 1969: 33.
Comments
Broom (1909a) considered the humerus to be most similar to that of
Procolophon, but felt Eccasaurus to be a primitive diaptosaurian which ‘prob-
ably belongs to a new suborder’. In 1932 he expressed the opinion that
Eccasaurus is undoubtedly a tapinocephaloid and noted that its humerus
resembles, in both morphology and size, that of Moschops. Boonstra (1955b)
considered Eccasaurus to be an anteosaurid, while Romer (1966) placed the
genus in the family Tapinocephalidae. Boonstra (1969) regarded the taxon to
be determinable only to family.
Family Titanosuchidae
Archaeosuchus cairncrossi Broom, 1905
Holotype
SAM-916
Material
Maxilla, weathered and incomplete (side questionable).
Locality
Sandvlakte, Prince Albert.
Collected
Cairncross.
Generic diagnosis
Broom (1905) did not give a diagnosis but commented that the canine
looked titanosuchian. Broom (1932: 18) stated that: ‘The canine is remarkable
86 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
in having a posterior ledge. The molars are relatively small, short conical
teeth.’
Specific diagnosis
As for genus.
References
Broom 1905: 333-335.
Broom 1909b: 287.
Broom 1932: 18, fig. 3J.
Boonstra 1953a: 28.
Haughton & Brink 1955: 46.
Comments
Broom (1905) provisionally placed this taxon in the Therocephalia, but in
1909 he put it in the Dinocephalia. Broom (1932) commented that it was
perhaps representative of a ‘pre-dinocephalian group’. Boonstra (1953a) trans-
ferred this specimen to Titanosuchus and questioned its specific validity. Boon-
stra (1969) noted that the specimen was so poor that it must be regarded as a
nomen dubium.
Dinosphageus haughtoni Broom, 1929
Holotype
SAM-—4343
Material
Humeri, ilia, good skull without lower jaw, scapula, cleithrum, ulna,
ischium, femur, ?fibula, coracoids and vertebrae.
Locality
Welgemoed, Leeu-Gamka, Prince Albert.
Collected
Haughton, 1916.
Generic diagnosis
Vomers form marked median ridge on their posterior two-thirds. Ptery-
goids project much less downward than in Jonkeria. Upper half of humerus
little more in plane of lower half than is the case in humerus of Jonkeria and, as
a result, on side view the deltopectoral crest appears smaller, but this may be
due to crushing. Upper portion of ilium relatively smaller than in Jonkeria.
(After Broom 1929: 31.)
Specific diagnosis
As for genus.
DINOCEPHALIA TYPE MATERIAL 87
References
Broom 1929: 31, figs 17-19.
Broom 1932: 29, fig. 7D.
Boonstra 1953a: 27.
Boonstra 19555: 189, 287-293, figs 75-80.
Haughton & Brink 1955: 44.
Boonstra 1962: 78-80, fig. 18.
Boonstra 19655: 263, fig. 9.
Boonstra 1969: 37.
Comments
Broom (1932) emended the diagnosis. Boonstra (1953a) transferred the
species to Jonkeria. No mention is made in the literature of vertebrae belonging
to the specimen but several vertebrae were found bearing the number
SAM-4343 and probably belong to the specimen.
Jonkeria koupensis Boonstra, 1955
Holotype
SAM-9004
Material
Pelvis lacking ischia; distal two-thirds of ulna.
Locality
Klein Koedoeskop, Beaufort West.
Collected
Boonstra, 1929
Generic diagnosis
See Van Hoepen (1916) for diagnosis of Jonkeria.
Specific diagnosis
Pubo-ischiadic plate probably short (83 per cent of height as recon-
structed); supra-acetabular part of ilium high (264 mm) and anteroposterior
length of iliac blade very short (282 mm), so that height is 93 per cent of length;
anterior iliac process fairly short, but appears shorter than it really is because of
strong anterolateral eversion and it is fairly high; posterior process short and
fairly low, with posteroventral edge moderately strongly folded over to form a
fairly strong iliofibularis ridge on outer face; this ridge is directed obliquely
upward, with its upper end not strongly bulbously thickened; a slight groove on
the inner face of the everted anterior iliac process indicates attachment of rib
anterior to main sacral rib; anteroposteriorly the outer face of iliac blade deeply
88 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
concave. Anteroventral edge of pubis strongly everted, with tuberculum pubis
confluent with thickened part of anteroventral edge, which stretches to median
line where the pubes meet but do not form a real symphysis. Ulna massive with
dorsal lip of sigmoid face developed into massive swelling in its pre-axial part.
(After Boonstra 1955b: 301.)
References
Boonstra 19556: 301, fig. 87.
Boonstra 1969: 38.
Jonkeria parva Boonstra, 1955
Holotype
SAM-9149
Material
Well-preserved right humerus.
Locality
Saairivier, Prince Albert.
Collected
Boonstra, 1929.
Generic diagnosis
See Van Hoepen (1916) for diagnosis of Jonkeria.
Specific diagnosis
Smallest Jonkeria humerus known; length only 312 mm, but it is a very
massive element with both proximal (222 mm) and distal (252 mm) ends very
greatly expanded; shaft very short and bone greatly constricted in waist;
diameters of shaft 84 x 78 mm; deltopectoral crest fairly short and terminates
very far proximal of the plane in which entepicondylar foramen lies; it has a
very massive ventral edge, and terminates as a very thick knob. Caput weak
and its face strap-like, but it forms the most proximal part of the bone;
processus lateralis lies more distal than the caput; processus medialis, as in all
Jonkerias [sic], lies well distal of caput; capitellum very massive and extends
very far proximally along ventral face, with its proximal border lying in a plane
proximal to that in which the entepicondylar foramen lies; posterior to
capitellum there is a deep groove in which the coronoid process moved when
the ulna was flexed; twist of shaft great (30°); lateromedial line distinct with
large, mound-like muscle scar on dorsal surface of shaft; anterior dorsoventral
line very strong and forms prominent ridge; entepicondyle strongly developed
to form a greatly outflaring, thick sheet of bone; ventral opening of entepicon-
DINOCEPHALIA TYPE MATERIAL 89
dylar foramen oval and lies well postaxially, near edge of bone; ectepicondyle
developed as a greatly flaring thin sheet of bone penetrated in its thinner part
near edge by small, round ectepicondylar foramen. (After Boonstra 1955p:
303.)
References
Boonstra 1955b: 192, 303, fig. 89.
Boonstra 1969: 38.
Jonkeria rossouwi Boonstra, 1955
Holotype
SAM-5014
Material
Left scapula, incomplete precoracoid and coracoid, imperfect inter-
clavicle, left humerus, left ulna, left radius, right ilium, left femur, left tibia,
left fibula.
Locality
Abrahamskraal, Prince Albert.
Collected
Haughton per Van der Byl.
Generic diagnosis
See Van Hoepen (1916) for diagnosis of Jonkeria.
Specific diagnosis
Pectoral girdle fairly large and fairly massive; scapula fairly low (height 552
mm) and upper part of blade greatly expanded (width 324 mm), tricipital bulge
very prominent, supraglenoidal edge forms strong raised rim; internal opening
of supracoracoid foramen opens into deep subscapular groove; glenoidal facet
of scapula faces ventroposteriorly but not externally; precoracoid long but low,
foramen pierces bone very obliquely. Coracoid small but massive, with large
glenoidal facet facing well externally.
Interclavicle massive but short (480? mm) with stem wide posteriorly and
with a narrowed waist anteriorly; anterior spatulate end curves upwards very
sharply and has deep groove on outer anterolateral face for reception of
posteroventral edge of clavicle; on dorsal surface of stem these is a strong
medial ridge against which the precoracoids abut.
Humerus fairly short (378 mm in length), but massive with greatly expan-
ded proximal (330 mm) and distal (276? mm) ends; shaft very short, thick and
broad (132 x 84 mm); deltopectoral crest very long and nearly reaches plane in
90 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
which entepicondylar foramen lies; caput broadly oval; processus lateralis lies
well proximally, in same plane as caput, whereas processus medialis lies well
distally; capitellum fairly massive and extends well along ventral face and
nearly reaches plane of entepicondylar foramen; ‘twist’ on shaft fairly small
(15°); lateromedial line fairly strong with muscle scars on dorsal surface of
shaft; anterior dorsoventral line well developed; entepicondyle strong with
ventral opening of foramen large and nearly round; ectepicondyle forms thick
flange pierced by small foramen situated well away from edge of bone.
Ulna pathological but the normal condition would appear to have had a
more slender shaft and weaker coronoid process than in other known species of
Jonkeria.
Radius (length 312 mm) with flange on proximopostaxial corner weak.
Supra-acetabular part of ilium high (288 mm) and relatively short (336
mm) so that height is 87 per cent of length; anterior iliac process relatively
short, but fairly high and strongly everted; posterior process short and fairly
low, with posteroventral edge folded over strongly to form strong vertical ridge,
which is dorsally strongly bulbous, and projects strongly laterally; on inner face
of anterior iliac process no distinct facet is preserved for attachment of rib lying
anterior to main sacral rib.
Femur fairly long (504 mm); fairly broad over external trochanter (264
mm), which is not separated by notch from proximal face; caput fairly thick
(114 mm) and directed much preaxially; shaft broad but flat (156 x 84 mm);
femorotibialis ridge fairly strong; distal facets of femur small and directed much
distally, especially the entepicondyle which lies far distally.
Tibia fairly robust (length 300 mm); proximal face inclined much postax-
ially to correspond with the distally situated postaxial facet of femur.
Fibula fairly slender and long (330 mm). (All after Boonstra 1955b:
303-305, 309.)
References
Broom 1929: 27-29, figs 15-16.
Boonstra 1955b: 303-305, 309, figs 90-97.
Comments
Broom (1929) referred to this specimen as Jonkeria sp. and merely noted
the presence of other elements.
Parascapanodon avifontis Boonstra, 1955
Holotype
SAM-9127
Material
Good precoracoid, clavicle, fibula and femur associated with parts of a
large skull.
DINOCEPHALIA TYPE MATERIAL 91
Locality
Voélfontein, Prince Albert.
Collected
Boonstra, 1929.
Generic diagnosis
‘The generic characters of the pectoral girdle are as described for the
family [Titanosuchidae]’ (Boonstra 1955b: 274), i.e. pectoral girdle large and
massive .. . length of coracoidal plate 62-67 per cent of height. Scapula high
and upper end of blade broad to very broad; scapular head of triceps attached
to sharp ridge or prominent mound. Precoracoid large and massive, coracoid of
medium size but massive. Clavicle large and mediolaterally flattened with
expanded dorsal and ventral ends but waist not greatly constricted, ventral
spatulate end curves inward to fit over outer face of upturned anterolateral
corner of interclavicle; dorsal anterior end greatly thickened and produced
dorsally as a short, strong process which fits into groove on lower end of
cleithrum. Interclavicle large and massive, lateral horns with thickened postero-
lateral edges, anterior to which there is a fairly deep groove to house ventro-
posterior edge of spatulate end of clavicle.
Humerus very large and massive, length 575 mm and ends greatly expan-
ded (proximal 310? mm, distal 312 mm); shaft fairly long but very robust (144 x
142 mm); deltopectoral crest long but terminates well proximal of plane in
which entepicondylar foramen lies; caput very massive but short; processus
medialis lies just a little distally of a plane in which caput lies, capitellum very
strong and massive and extends far along ventral face but does not reach plane
of entepicondylar foramen; twist on shaft large (40°); lateromedial line strong
with massive swelling on dorsal surface of shaft, both epicondyles strongly
developed; ventral opening of entepicondylar foramen large and broadly oval,
ectepicondylar foramen small and situated well away from edge of bone.
Ulna large and massive (length 372 mm, width over coronoid process 200
mm); sigmoid face long, with ventral part broadly rounded; coronoid process
situated far distally and shaft massive, broad and short.
Radius long, robust (length 294 mm) with strong proximopostaxial flange.
Femur very long and massive (length 595 mm); very broad over external
trochanter (300 mm); pre-axial face deeply concave, with caput much pre-
axially directed and massive (diams 215 x 167 mm); external trochanter indis-
tinctly separated by notch from proximal face; shaft fairly long and broad
(breadth 150 mm); wide over massive distal facets; area of origin of femoroti-
bialis forms strong bulging ridge.
Tibia large and massive (length 330-355 mm); cnemial eminence very
massive and continued distally as strong ridge, with deep groove lying post-
axially.
92 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Fibula large and stout (length 330-345 mm). (All after Boonstra 1955b:
266-267, 274, 276.)
Specific diagnosis
As for genus.
References
Boonstra 1955b: 266-267, 274, 276, 278, figs 63-66.
Boonstra 1962: 69, figs 10, 39A.
Comments
The skull is not described, illustrated or considered in the diagnosis.
Boonstra (1969) considered all characters described under the names Titanosu-
chus, Scapanodon, and Parascapanodon as diagnostic of the form Titanosuchus
ferox.
Paratype
SAM-9106
Material
Incomplete scapula, coracoid and precoracoid.
Locality
Veldmansrivier, Prince Albert.
Collected
Boonstra, 1929.
References
Boonstra 1955b: 278, fig. 67.
Paratype
SAM-9163
Material
Good fibula and fair ulna.
Locality
Wakkerstroom (part of Wolwefontein), Prince Albert.
Collected
Boonstra, 1929.
References
Boonstra 1955b: 280, fig. 70a-e.
DINOCEPHALIA TYPE MATERIAL 93
Paratype
SAM-11299
Material
Right tibia and right radius.
Locality
Boesmansrivier, Beaufort West.
Collected
Boonstra, 1938.
References
Boonstra 1955b: 281, fig. 71a-f.
Paratype
SAM-11488
Material
Interclavicle, precoracoids, coracoid, right tibia, right fibula.
Locality
Mynhardtskraal, Beaufort West.
Collected
Boonstra, 1940.
References
Boonstra 19555: 278, figs 68, 69a-f.
Comments
According to the museum catalogue, the locality is Mynhardtskraal, Beau-
fort West. Boonstra (1955) recorded the locality as Voélfontein, Prince Albert.
On both the tibia and fibula the number SAM-—9123 has been scratched out.
SAM-9123 is the paratype of A. abeli, a skull from Voélfontein, Prince Albert.
It would appear, therefore, that Mynhardtskraal is the correct locality.
Paratype
SAM-11881
Material
Humerus.
Locality
Bloukrans, Prince Albert.
94 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Collected
Boonstra, 1948.
References
Boonstra 1955b: 284, fig. 72.
Scapanodon duplessisi Broom, 1904
Holotype
SAM-—769
Material
Three lower jaw fragments.
Locality
Seekoeigat, Prince Albert.
Collected
Presented by Du Plessis.
Generic diagnosis
Two fairly large incisors, very large canine and (at least) eleven molars.
Molars considerably smaller and much flatter than in Titanosuchus. Molars
two-thirds of size of Titanosuchus. Section of deeper part of molar root narrow
oval and becomes flatter as approaches alveolar margin. Supra-alveolar part of
tooth has fair-sized root apparently devoid of enamel, with edges moderately
parallel. In crown the flattening continued to even greater extent. Thickest part
of crown not more than 2,0 mm thick and from centre it thins off towards
edges. Tooth strengthened by being slightly concavoconvex. External surface
not grooved though slightly uneven, no serrations visible at edges. Enamel very
thin (about 0,15 mm). (After Broom 1904: 182-183.)
Specific diagnosis
As for genus.
References
Broom 1904: 182-183.
Broom 1923: 663.
Broom 1932: 30.
Boonstra 1953a: 25, 28.
Haughton & Brink 1955: 46.
Boonstra 1969: 35.
Comments
Broom (1904) described two of the fragments, which belong to the same
lower jaw. The other piece, which has a single root and which may belong to
DINOCEPHALIA TYPE MATERIAL 05
the same individual, was not described. Boonstra (1953a: 25) transferred the
specimen to Titanosuchus but on page 28 regarded it as incertae sedis. Boonstra
(1955a) resurrected Scapanodon on the basis of S. septemfontis. Haughton &
Brink (1955: 46) retained SAM-—769 in Titanosuchus. Boonstra (1969: 35) again
regarded it as Titanosuchus, but considered the cranial features of this taxon to
be indeterminate. He stated (1969: 35) that the humerus could not be distin-
guished from that of Titanosuchus, whilst the skull referred to this genus by
Broom (1923) falls within the limits set by Boonstra for the genus Jonkeria.
Scapanodon septemfontis Boonstra, 1955
Holotype
SAM-S001
Material
Ilium, pubis, femur, humerus, ischium.
Locality
Sewefontein, Prince Albert.
Collected
Haughton, 1917.
Generic diagnosis
See Broom (1904) for diagnosis of Scapanodon.
Specific diagnosis
Humerus large, fairly long (480? mm); deltopectoral crest terminates far
distally but still well away from ventral opening of entepicondylar foramen
(after Boonstra 195556: 271-272). Pelvis and femur as in generic diagnosis, as
emended by Boonstra (19555: 269-270). (See comments.)
References
Broom 1928: 431, figs 4, 5A.
Boonstra 19556: 271-272, figs 60a, 61-62.
Comments
Broom (1904: 182) mentioned several other bones, including two humeri
(SAM-772 and SAM-773) found in the same area as the type of S. duplessisi
(SAM-769).
Boonstra (19555) considered these specimens to belong to the same species
as SAM-769 and based this new species (S. septemfontis) on the different
humeral structure of SAM-5001. Boonstra (19555) emended the generic diag-
nosis to include postcranial elements. Broom (1928) referred SAM-—5001 to
96 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Tapinocephalus atherstoni, while Boonstra (1955b) made it the type of a new
species of Scapanodon, but earlier he (1953a) regarded Scapanodon (as known
from Broom’s S. duplessisi) as a junior synonym of Titanosuchus. Boonstra
(1969), however, regarded Scapanodon as a junior synonym of Titanosuchus
ferox.
Titanosuchus cloetei Broom, 1903
Holotype
SAM-731.
Material
Left anterior part of lower jaw.
Locality
Gamka River, Prince Albert.
Collected
Presented by Cloete.
Generic diagnosis
See Owen (1879) for diagnosis of Titanosuchus.
Specific diagnosis
Differentiated from 7. ferox principally by dental measurements. Incisors
in 7. cloetei appreciably smaller, canine much smaller and rounder. In T. cloetei
4 molars occupy space of 40 mm, each root practically round and about 8,0 mm
in diameter. Another difference is arrangement of anterior molars. In T. ferox
the line of the molars is much on the inside of the large canine, but in T. cloetei
a line drawn along inner sides of molars also forms a tangent to the canine.
Front of jaw also very much squarer in smaller species owing to canine being
relatively further forward. (After Broom 1903: 142-143.)
References
Broom 1903: 142-143.
Broom 1909b: 287.
Haughton 1915): 57.
Broom 19293 11 25.aien 25G-
Broom 1932: 24, fig 6G.
Boonstra 1953a: 27.
Haughton & Brink 1955: 47.
Boonstra 1962: 76-77, fig. 16.
Boonstra 1969: 35.
Kitching 1977: 36.
DINOCEPHALIA TYPE MATERIAL 97
Comments
Broom (1929) transferred the specimen to Jonkeria. Boonstra (1953a)
retained it as Titanosuchus cloetei. Boonstra (1969) noted that the specimen
was determinable only to the family Titanosuchidae.
Titanosuchus dubius Haughton, 1915
Holotype
SAM-2759
Material
Right ramus of lower jaw.
Locality
Platfontein, Prince Albert.
Collected
Haughton, 1913.
Generic diagnosis
See Owen (1879) for diagnosis of Titanosuchus.
Specific diagnosis
Differs from T. cloetei in having a more massive symphysis, in being even
squarer in the front of the jaw, and in the much larger canine and much smaller
molars. Incisors similar in size but set much closer together. Canine narrower
and longer, almost oblong in section with one side more than twice the length
of the other. Molars smaller and circular in section. Line drawn along the inner
side of molars just touches canine and is also tangential to inner surface of the
fourth incisor. (After Haughton 19155: 57.)
References
Haughton 19155: 57.
Broom 1929: 33, fig. 25H.
Broom 1932: 31, fig. 6H.
Boonstra 1953a: 27.
Haughton & Brink 1955: 46.
Boonstra 1962: 77-78, fig. 17.
Comments
Haughton (1915b) considered Titanosuchus to be a therocephalian. Broom
(1929) placed the species in a new genus Dinocynodon. Boonstra (1953a)
retained it as Titanosuchus dubius. Boonstra (1969) stated that the poor
preservation of the type made the taxon identifiable only to the family Titano-
suchidae.
98 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Family Tapinocephalidae
Subfamily Tapinocephalinae
Pelosuchus priscus Broom, 1905
Holotype
SAM-918
Material
Right dentary, partial palate, femur, tibia, coracoid, scapula, rib fragments
and seven vertebrae.
Locality
Bokfontein, Prince Albert.
Collected
Du Plessis and Cairncross.
Generic diagnosis
Jaws differ from those of therocephalians and dinocephalians in that the
teeth cannot be distinguished as incisors, canines and molars. Remains or
sockets of 8 teeth present, and anterior 5 larger than posterior 3; the last 3 do
not seem to have distinct sockets, but are lodged in a groove. Vertebral bodies
biconcave but not deeply concave. In some the transverse processes are very
large and pass upwards and outwards as in some vertebrae of Belodon. In
others the transverse processes pass outward and downward as in pelycosaurs.
Coracoid large. (After Broom 1905: 335-336. )
Specific diagnosis
As for genus.
References
Broom 1905: 335-336.
Broom 1932: 46, fig. 3E-G.
Boonstra 1955b: 186, 199, 216, fig. 7.
Haughton & Brink 1955: 48.
Boonstra 1956: 164-165.
Von Huene 1956: 277.
Orlov 1964: 256.
Boonstra 1969: 42.
Comments
Broom (1905) provisionally placed Pelosuchus as a diaptosaurian, but in
1932 recognized it as a tapinocephalian. Boonstra (1969) proposed Pelosuchus
as a junior synonym of Keratocephalus.
DINOCEPHALIA TYPE MATERIAL 99
Subfamily Struthiocephalinae
Struthiocephalus whaitsi Haughton, 1915
Holotype
SAM-2678
Material
Weathered skull without lower jaw.
Locality
Vivier Siding, Beaufort West.
Collected
Whaits.
Generic diagnosis
‘Skull large; snout relatively long and slender; frontal and temporal regions
not so much elevated above snout as in Tapinocephalus; eyes look forward and
outward; heavy overhanging supraorbital crests; temporal fossae larger than
orbits, eliptical in shape with shorter axis parallel to axis of skull; teeth weak,
undifferentiated and few in number’ (Haughton 1915a: 52).
Specific diagnosis
As for genus.
References
Haughton 1915a: 52-54, pl. 10.
Gregory 1926: 240, fig. 29, table 5.
Broom 1932: 37, fig. 12C.
Boonstra 1951: 341.
Boonstra 1952a: figs 1-2.
Boonstra 19525: 511.
Boonstra 1952d: 248.
Boonstra 1953b: 32, 46-47, 49-51.
Haughton & Brink 1955: 48-49.
Boonstra 1965b: 251.
Comments
Boonstra (1953b) provided emended generic and specific diagnoses of this
taxon. Haughton & Brink’s (1955) generic diagnosis differs from that given
originally by Haughton (1915a). Boonstra (1969) recognized this species as the
only valid species of Struthiocephalus.
Struthiocephalus akraalensis Boonstra, 1952
Holotype
SAM-3719
100 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Material
Good skull without lower jaw.
Locality
Abrahamskraal, Prince Albert.
Collected
Haughton.
Generic diagnosis
See Haughton (1915) for diagnosis of Struthiocephalus.
Specific diagnosis
Compared mainly to S. whaitsi, dorsal surface of parietal wider and not
pinched in but frontal narrower and dorsally excavated; postfrontal and postor-
bital have larger dorsal exposure and squamosal forms a greater part of
post-temporal arch, which is also of considerably stronger build. Much larger
than any of the other described species. Pineal foramen lies further forward;
median occipital ridge narrow and sharp and dorsal portion not broadened;
postorbital bar forms at its junction with dorsal skull surface a strong ridge
parallel to the mid-line and medial to this the surface of frontal and parietal
hollowed out; the surface of the postorbital skull bones is coarse with deep
rugae and crocodile-like pits. (After Boonstra 1952d: 247-248.)
References
Boonstra 1952d: 247-248, figs 1-2.
Boonstra 1952f: 238.
Boonstra 1953b: 32, 50.
Haughton & Brink 1955: 49.
Boonstra 1969: 39.
Comments
With regard to the material, the museum catalogue states ‘skull and
skeleton’, but there are no associated postcrania in the collection and nor are
any referred to in any of Boonstra’s papers. Boonstra (1953b) provided an
emended specific diagnosis and later (Boonstra 1969) proposed S. akraalensis as
a junior synonym of S. whaitsi.
Struthiocephaloides cavifrons Boonstra, 1952
Holotype
SAM-—5607
Material
Skull and scapula.
DINOCEPHALIA TYPE MATERIAL 101
Locality
Lammerkraal, Prince Albert.
Collected
Haughton, 1916.
Generic diagnosis
Mormosaurid with skull similar to Struthiocephalus, but without nasofron-
tal boss and without interorbital postrostral step; moderately wide across the
postorbitals; in dorsal view the postorbitals do not form lateral border of skull
(after Boonstra 1952f: 237, 240).
Specific diagnosis
‘Large; snout fairly high and strong; interorbital part of skull roof concave;
distinct parietal boss; skull widest at level of postorbital arches; pineal foramen
lies far back’ (Boonstra 1952f: 241).
References
Boonstra 1952f: 237-241, figs 1-3.
Boonstra 19535: 48.
Boonstra 19555: 236, fig. 29a—b.
Haughton & Brink 1955: 49.
Boonstra 1969: 39, 55.
Comments
Boonstra (1969) maintained that this was a valid taxon.
Struthiocephaloides duplessisi Boonstra, 1952
Holotype
SAM-11693
Material
Good skull.
Locality
Dikbome, Laingsburg.
Collected
Boonstra, 1946.
Generic diagnosis
See Boonstra (1952f) for diagnosis of Struthiocephaloides.
102 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Specific diagnosis
‘{Skull] small; snout low and weak; interorbital skull roof convex; parietal
boss not distinct; maximum width in region of temporal fossae; pineal foramen
situated far anteriorly’ (Boonstra 1952f: 241).
References
Boonstra 19526: 509-511, figs 1-2.
Boonstra 1952f: 238, 241.
Boonstra 1954b: 32, 45.
Haughton & Brink 1955: 49.
Boonstra 1969: 39, 55.
Comments
Boonstra (1952b) made this specimen the type of Struthiocephalus dupless-
isi sp. nov., and later (1952f) transferred the species to his new genus Stru-
thiocephaloides. Boonstra (1969) considered Struthiocephaloides duplessisi to be
a valid taxon.
Struthionops intermedius Boonstra, 1952
Holotype
SAM-11947
Material
Distorted and somewhat weathered skull without lower jaw.
Locality
See comments.
Collected
Unknown.
Generic diagnosis
Skull fairly lightly built with slight pachyostosis; postorbital arch mod-
erately strong, with no boss-like swelling of its upper part; posterodorsal
circumorbital bones only slightly thickened with little overhanging of orbits;
frontals excluded from orbital border; nasals and frontals only slightly thick-
ened with very slight indication of a nasofrontal swelling; in sagittal plane the
middle part of nasals forms concave dorsal surface and at nasofrontal junction
surface moderately convex; pineal foramen penetrates small but prominent
boss directed somewhat posteriorly; snout fairly long, wide and fairly high;
temporal fossa medium-sized with dorsoventral diameter much greater than
anteroposterior diameter; orbits large; interorbital width large; intertemporal
width fairly large; intertemporal region laterally only slightly pinched in and
without any indication of parietal crest; occiput inclined much anteriorly
dorsoventrally; quadrates apparently only moderately shifted forward; probably
DINOCEPHALIA TYPE MATERIAL 103
14-15 teeth in upper jaw; large frontals and prefrontals; parietals small; large
pineal foramen situated near occipital border; postorbital apparently just meets
squamosal, but parietal forms upper edge of temporal fossa (after Boonstra
1952c: 988-989).
Specific diagnosis
As for genus.
References
Boonstra 1952c: 988-989, figs 1-2.
Boonstra 1952h: 246.
Boonstra 1953b: 48-50, 52-53.
Haughton & Brink 1955: 50.
Von Huene 1956: 277.
Piveteau 1961b: 277.
Boonstra 1963a: 178.
Boonstra 19636: 202, 204, figs 3J, 4K.
Orlov 1964: 258.
Boonstra 1969: 41, fig. 10K.
Comments
While in the museum catalogue the locality is stated to be unknown,
Boonstra (1952c) stated that it was probably recovered in the vicinity of
Abrahamskraal, Prince Albert. Boonstra (1952c) originaliy placed this taxon in
the Mormosauridae, a view which Orlov (1964) also supported. Boonstra
(19535) emended the diagnosis of this taxon. He (1969) considered this to be a
valid taxon.
Struthiocephalellus parvus Boonstra, 1955
Holotype
SAM-5006
Material
Skull, scapula, humerus, ulna, pelvis, femur, proximal portion of tibia,
vertebrae, and several small, unidentified fragments.
Locality
See comments.
Collected
Haughton, 1916-17.
Generic diagnosis
Skull about half size of Struthiocephalus whaitsi. Weak pachyostosis with
postorbital bar relatively slender and post temporal opening roomy; occiput
104 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
fairly upright and quadrate not shifted very far anteriorly; snout moderately
high; no frontonasal boss. Posterior tooth crowns spatulate in outline and
labiolingually compressed. In one or two of the rear crowns there appears to
have been a stronger central cusp with a weaker posterior and anterior cusp as
in Agnosaurus and Rhopalodon.
Cervical vertebrae similar to Moschops and Moschognathus and to those of
the synapsids generally. Proatlas stout. Atlas temnospondylus with paired
neural arch lying on large atlantal intercentrum and odontoid-like pleurocen-
trum. Atlantal intercentrum large with facet for capitulum of atlantal rib. Axial
neural arch halves fused to each other and to pleurocentrum to form holo-
spondylous vertebra. Spine comb-shaped. Axial centrum laterally excavated
below diapophysis with sharp ventral keel. Third intercentrum smaller than its
predecessors. Third cervical vertebra deeply excavated below diapophysis so
that ventrally it shows a sharp keel. Atlantal rib greatly flattened, small bone
with weak shaft, greatly expanded leaf-like tuberculum and much weaker
capitulum. (After Boonstra 1955a: 180-184.)
Specific diagnosis
As for genus.
References
Boonstra 1955a: 180-184, figs 1-3.
Boonstra 19556: 203, 225, 237-238, figs 27c, 29c, 30-33.
Von Huene 1956: 277.
Piveteau 1961b: 277.
Orlov 1964: 258.
Comments
The locality, according to the museum catalogue, is Wilgebosch-Drift,
Beaufort West. Boonstra (1955a, 1955b) gave it as Abrahamskraal, Prince
Albert.
Orlov (1964) placed this taxon into the Mormosauridae. Boonstra (1969)
proposed to synonymize it with Struthiocephalus and recognized this specimen
as a juvenile of S. whaitsi. Boonstra (1969) considered the material assigned to
S. parvus to represent juvenile specimens of Struthiocephalus whaitsi. The
legend to fig. 27c in Boonstra (1955b) erroneously reads Struthiocephalus
instead of Struthiocephalellus.
Subfamily Riebeeckosaurinae
Riebeeckosaurus longirostris Boonstra, 1952
Holotype
SAM-3400
DINOCEPHALIA TYPE MATERIAL 105
Material
Incomplete skull with part of lower jaw, vertebrae and several associated,
unidentified bone fragments.
Locality
Near Vivier Siding, Beaufort West.
Collected
Whaits, 1915.
Generic diagnosis
“Tapinocephalid with large skull, long and quite narrow; snout long,
narrow and quite high; cranial bones quite thickened; postorbital arch very
massive; temporal fossa roomy with dorsoventral diameter much greater than
anteroposterior diameter; intertemporal area very narrow and forms sagittal
crest which curves downwards and backwards; parietal forms part of supratem-
poral edge; occiput very inclined; parietal very small; frontal large, does not
form part of supraorbital border, but reaches supratemporal border; prefrontal
forms supraorbital border; quadrate supported by anteriorly directed process of
quadratojugal; teeth undifferentiated’ (Boonstra 1952h: 248).
Specific diagnosis
As for genus.
References
Boonstra 1952h: 246-249, figs 1-3.
Haughton & Brink 1955: 53.
Von Huene 1956: 277.
Piveteau 1961b: 275.
Boonstra 1963a: 178.
Boonstra 19636: 200, 205, figs 3E, 4F, 6F.
Orlov 1964: 258.
Boonstra 1969: 42, fig. 13.
Boonstra 1971: 21, 33.
Comments
Boonstra (1963) placed this taxon in the subfamily Riebeeckosaurinae and
in 1969 he placed that subfamily within the family Tapinocephalidae. Haughton
& Brink (1955) proposed that the taxon be placed in the family Moschopidae,
while Orlov (1964) considered it to represent the family Mormosauridae.
Boonstra (1969) considered it to be a valid taxon.
106 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Subfamily Moschopinae
Delphinognathus conocephalus Seeley, 1892
Holotype
SAM-713
Material
Incomplete, weathered skull with part of lower jaw.
Locality
Doubtful—perhaps near Beaufort West, according to Seeley (1892).
Collected
?Bain, 1883.
Generic diagnosis
Broad, high and vertical occipital plate; large pineal foramen in middle of
prominent boss (cone) with foramen at level of posterior border of orbit; orbits
placed far back; quadratosquamosal region directed obliquely forward; lower
jaw short and singularly deep posteriorly; occipital plate higher than wide;
temporal fossa relatively small; prefrontal region concave; sub-ovate notch in
inferior margin of posterior margin of posterior part of temporal arch (after
Seeley 1892: 469-475).
Specific diagnosis
As for genus.
References
Seeley 1892: 469-475, figs 1-2.
Broom 1910: 206, fig. 4.
Broom 1914: 135-136.
Gregory 1926: 228-230, 249, fig. 22a, tables I, Ill, IV.
Broom 1932: 44-45, fig. 9K.
Boonstra 1936: 93.
Haughton & Brink 1955: 51.
Von Huene 1956: 277.
Boonstra 1957: 15-17, 19-21, 27, 29, 33, 36—-37, fig. 10.
Boonstra 1963a: 178.
Boonstra 19635: 202, 205, figs 3F, 4G.
Orlov 1964: 258.
Boonstra 1969: 42, 55, fig. 11c.
Tatarinov 1976: 46.
Comments
Seeley’s (1892) diagnosis of this taxon was emended by Broom (1932),
Haughton & Brink (1955) and Boonstra (1957). Gregory (1926) placed the
DINOCEPHALIA TYPE MATERIAL 107
taxon in the subfamily Moschopinae, while Boonstra (1936) and Orlov (1964)
were prepared only to place it in the family Moschopidae. Boonstra (1963)
placed it in the family Tapinocephalidae and in 1969 proposed that the
specimen be regarded as a juvenile of Moschops. Tatarinov (1976) placed the
taxon in the family Delphinognathidae.
Moschosaurus longiceps Haughton, 1915
Holotype
SAM-3015
Material
Good but weathered skull and six vertebrae.
Locality
La-de-da, Beaufort West.
Collected
Haughton, 1914.
Generic diagnosis
Skull long, low and narrow; parietal region slightly elevated but not
tremendously thickened; nares rather far back; orbits in posterior half of skull
and larger than temporal openings; quadrate in plane of middle of orbit; lower
jaw massive; premaxillary teeth large with long anterior and smaller posterior
cusps; postorbital bar comparatively weak; postorbital bone forms large part of
upper border of temporal fossa; pineal foramen large and placed very far back
(after Haughton 1915c: 78-81).
Specific diagnosis
As for genus.
References
Haughton 1915c: 78-81, figs 8-9.
Broom 1923: 663.
Gregory 1926: 227, 241, fig. 21, table V.
Broom 1932: 45, fig. 12D.
Boonstra 1936: 93-95, 97.
Boonstra 1952g: 243-244.
Haughton & Brink 1955: 52-53.
Von Huene 1956: 276, fig. 317.
Boonstra 1955a: 183.
Piveteau 1961b: 277.
Boonstra 1963a: 178, 188.
108 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Boonstra 19635: 199-200, figs 2D, 3D, 4E.
Orlov 1964: 258, fig. 216.
Boonstra 19655: 265, fig. 11.
Boonstra 1969: 39, fig. 10E.
Comments
Haughton (1915) considered this taxon to be titanosuchid, and Broom
(1923) regarded the specimen as an immature titanosuchid. Gregory (1926)
considered the taxon referrable to the family Tapinocephalidae and erected the
subfamily Moschosaurinae to accommodate it. Broom (1932) agreed that it
represents a tapinocephalid as did Boonstra (1936), who erected Gregory’s
subfamily to familial rank, viz, Moschosauridae, and also emended the diagno-
sis of the taxon Moschosaurus longiceps. In 1963, however, Boonstra (1963b)
changed the rank of the family Moschosauridae back to subfamilial status.
Boonstra (19655) proposed to synonymize the taxon with Struthiocephalus, a
view that he maintained later (Boonstra 1969).
Agnosaurus pienaari Boonstra, 1952
Holotype
SAM-11832
Material
Weathered, incomplete skull.
Locality
Lammerkraal, Prince Albert.
Collected
Presented by Pienaar.
Generic diagnosis
‘Moschosaurus-like Tapinocephalid [sic] with slight pachyostosis; large
temporal fossa; snout quite long, high and narrow; quadrate shifted forward
moderately; anterior teeth typical tapinocephaloid but posterior teeth with
spatulate crowns and cylindrical roots’ (Boonstra 1952g: 245).
Specific diagnosis
As for genus.
References
Boonstra 1952g: 242-245, fig. 1.
Boonstra 19535: 52.
Haughton & Brink 1955: 52.
DINOCEPHALIA TYPE MATERIAL 109
Boonstra 1955a: 182-183.
Von Huene 1956: 277.
Piveteau 1961b: 277.
Boonstra 1963a: 178.
Orlov 1964: 258.
Boonstra 1969: 42.
Comments
Orlov (1964) placed this taxon in the family Moschosauridae. Boonstra
(1969) regarded A. pienaari as a junior synonym of Moschops.
Avenantia kruisvleiensis Boonstra, 1952
Holotype
SAM-9166
Material
Nearly complete skull, proximal part of femur, two vertebrae, ?fibula and
two unidentified fragments. See comments.
Locality
Kruisvlei, Beaufort West.
Collected
Boonstra, 1929.
Generic diagnosis
‘Moschopid-like Tapinocephalid [sic], but exoccipital forms part of con-
dyle, narrow intertemporal region, low parietal crest, postorbital meets squa-
mosal in temporal fossa, pineal foramen surrounded by a distinct ridge’
(Boonstra 1952/7: 225).
Specific diagnosis
As for genus.
References
Boonstra 1952h: 248.
Boonstra 19527: 250—255, figs 1-3.
Haughton & Brink 1955: 50.
Boonstra 19555: 258.
Von Huene 1956: 276.
Boonstra 1957: 16-22, 24-28, 33, 35-37, fig. 11.
Boonstra 1963a: 178.
Boonstra 1963b: 202, 205, figs. 3G, 4H.
110 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Orlov 1964: 258.
Boonstra 1969: 42, 55.
Boonstra 1971: 21, 33.
Comments
There is some doubt regarding the postcranial material labelled
SAM-9166. Specimens SAM-—9166 and SAM-—9167 are from the same locality,
and Boonstra (19527) noted that SAM-—9166 is one of a ‘wagon-load of spe-
cimens found partially weathered out in a small area’. The museum catalogue
entry for SAM—9166 notes only ‘skull’; the entry for SAM-—9167 notes ‘ilium,
femur, fibula, vertebrae’. Boonstra (1955b) mistakenly referred to SAM-—9167
as the type of Avenantia kruisvleiensis, and recorded it as having scapula, ilium,
femur, and skull. The museum catalogue entry for SAM—9167, however, does
not refer to a skull. It appears that the postcranial material labelled SAM—9166
may belong instead to SAM-—9167.
Boonstra (1957) provided an emended diagnosis for this taxon. Orlov
(1964) referred it to the family Moschopidae and Boonstra (1969) referred it to
the subfamily Moschopinae as a valid taxon.
Boonstra (1952h) referred to Avenantia kruisvleiensis in an article which
preceded the paper (Boonstra 19527) in which the type description of the taxon
was given. Accordingly, Boonstra’s (1952h) use of the name Avenantia kruis-
vieiensis made it a nomen nudum. However, Avenantia kruisvleiensis was made
available in his second paper (Boonstra 1952i).
Moschops koupensis Boonstra, 1957
Holotype
SAM-11582
Material
Good skull with part of lower jaw.
Locality
Die Krans, Prince Albert.
Collected
Boonstra and Bothma, 1940.
Generic diagnosis
See Broom (1911) for diagnosis of Moschops.
Specific diagnosis
‘(Skull] very wide across parietals with interorbital width 70 per cent of
intertemporal width. Snout relatively narrow. Occipital surface greatly reduced
by overgrowth from above and from the sides. Transverse pterygoidal rami are
strong.’ (Boonstra 1957: 32-33.)
DINOCEPHALIA TYPE MATERIAL 111.
References
Boonstra 1957: 18-19, 21-26, 32-33, figs 5—9.
Boonstra 1969: 42.
Comments
Boonstra (1969) considered this specimen to represent a valid species of
Moschops.
Family Styracocephalidae
Styracocephalus platyrhynchus Haughton, 1929
Holotype
SAM-8936
Material
Incomplete, crushed and badly weathered skull and part of lower jaw.
Locality
Boesmansrivier, Beaufort West.
Collected
Boonstra, 1928.
Generic diagnosis
Most striking features are large backwardly projecting tabular horns,
massiveness of bones in postorbital region, small temporal opening, swollen
cheek-like quadratojugal, and shallowness of snout which is also fairly long and
narrow. Pineal foramen small and situated in middle of low, broad swelling in
middle of parietal surface. Teeth present on pterygoids and palatines. (After
Haughton 1929: 55-57.)
Specific diagnosis
As for genus.
References
Haughton 1929: 55-60, figs 3-5.
Broom 1932: 139, fig. 47A.
Boonstra 1934: 465, 467-470.
Romer 1945: 601.
Haughton & Brink 1955: 54.
Von Huene 1956: 287-288.
Heyler 1961: 127.
Boonstra 1963a: 176-178, 188, figs 2L, 3J, 4H, 12.
1D ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Boonstra 1963b: 196, 199, 206, figs 1, 2, 3C, 4D, 5G, 6G.
Orlov 1964: 267.
Romer 1966: 372.
Boonstra 1969: 44, fig. 14.
Boonstra 1971: 18, 22, 24-26, 33-34, 40, 42, fig. 3.
Boonstra 1972: 316, 321, 325-326, fig. 2.
Tatarinov 1974: 51-52.
Kitching 1977: 33.
Comments
Haughton (1929) referred this taxon to a new suborder, Styracocephalia.
Broom (1932) placed it into another suborder, Burnetiamorpha, and consid-
-ered that the specimen’s affinities were with the Gorgonopsia rather than with
the Dinocephalia. Boonstra (1934) regarded the specimen as a dinocephalian
and maintained it in Haughton’s Styracocephalia. Romer (1945) followed
Broom, however, placing the taxon in the Gorgonopsia and in the family
Burnetiidae (=Burnetiamorpha of Broom). Haughton & Brink (1955) followed
Boonstra (1934) and placed it in the Dinocephalia, using Haughton’s subordinal
classification of Styracocephalia. Heyler (1961) followed Romer (1945), how-
ever, and placed it in the gorgonopsian family Burnetiidae. Von Huene (1956:
287) considered this taxon to belong to the Dinocephalia, but placed it into the
‘Familienkreis u. Familie Burnetiamorpha’. Boonstra (1963a) still considered it
to be a dinocephalian and proposed the new family rank, Styracocephalidae for
its placement. Orlov (1964) regarded it as belonging to the Burnetidae [sic] of
the Gorgonopsoidea, and Romer (1966) re-affirmed his earlier (1945) convic-
tion of its taxonomic placement. Boonstra (1969, 1971) proposed to maintain it
in the family Styracocephalidae, which he regarded in 1972 as belonging to the
Titanosuchia. Tatarinov (1974) considered that the taxon should be placed in
the Burnetiidae of the order ‘Gorgonopia’, whilst Kitching (1977) maintained
that Styracocephalus is a tapinocephalid and should be placed in the subfamily
Tapinocephalinae.
ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS
We wish to thank Dr M.A. Cluver for reading and constructively criticizing
this paper, and Mrs E. Blaeske and Mrs P. Eedes for typing the manuscript.
REFERENCES
Boonstra, L. D. 1934. On an aberrant gorgonopsian Burnetia mirabilis. S. Afr. J. Sci. 31:
462-470.
BoonstrA, L. D. 1936. Some features of the cranial morphology of the tapinocephalid
deinocephalians. Bull. Am. Mus. nat. Hist. 72: 75-98.
BoonstTrA, L. D. 1948. Miljoene jare gelede in die Karoo. Johannesburg: Voortrekkerpers.
Boonstra, L. D. 1951. Kurze Notiz tiber den Schadel der Dinocephalen-Gattung Keratoce-
phalus F. v. Huene. Neues Jb. Geol. Paldont. Mh. 11: 341-343.
DINOCEPHALIA TYPE MATERIAL IL)
BoonstrA, L. D. 1952a. Further observations on the type skull of Struthiocephalus whaitsi. Am.
Mag. nat. Hist. (12) 5: 455-459.
Boonstra, L. D. 1952b. On a new tapinocephalid deinocephalian. Ann. Mag. nat. Hist. (12) 5:
509-511.
Boonstra, L. D. 1952c. A new deinocephalian from the Karroo. Ann. Mag. nat. Hist. (12) 5:
988-989.
Boonstra, L. D. 1952d. ’n Nuwe soort van tapinocephalide deinocephaliér: Struthiocephalus
akraalensis sp. nov. S. Afr. J. Sci. 48: 247-248.
Boonstra, L. D. 1952e. ’n Nuwe titanosuchiérsoort (Anteosaurus abeli). Tydskr. Wet. Kuns 12:
150-151.
Boonstra, L. D. 1952f. Struthiocephaloides: ’n nuwe genus van mormosauride tapinocepha-
liérs. Tydskr. Wet. Kuns 12: 237-241.
BoonstrA, L. D. 1952g. Agnosaurus gen. nov.: ’n nuwe geslag van die deinocephaliérs. Tydskr.
Wet. Kuns 12: 242-245.
Boonstra, L. D. 1952h. ’n Nuwe tapinocephalide, Riebeeckosaurus longrostris gen. et sp. nov.
Tydskr. Wet. Kuns 12: 246-249.
Boonstra, L. D. 19527. ’n Uiters interessante nuwe deinocephaliér, Avenantia kruisvleiensis,
gen. et sp. nov. Tydskr. Wet. Kuns 12: 250-255.
BoonstraA, L. D. 1953a. A suggested clarification of the taxonomic status of the South African
titanosuchians. Ann. S. Afr. Mus. 42: 19-28.
Boonstra, L. D. 1953b. The cranial morphology and taxonomy of the tapinocephalid genus
Struthiocephalus. Ann. S. Afr. Mus. 42: 32-53.
Boonstra, L. D. 1954a. The cranial structure of the titanosuchian: Anteosaurus. Ann. S. Afr.
Mus. 42: 108-148.
BoonstrA, L. D. 19546. The smallest titanosuchid yet recovered from the Karroo. Ann. S. Afr.
Mus. 42: 149-156.
BoonstrA, L. D. 1954c. Paranteosaurus gen. nov.: a titanosuchian reptile. Ann. S. Afr. Mus.
42: 157-159.
Boonstra, L. D. 1955a. Struthiocephallelus: a new deinocephalian. Ann. S. Afr. Mus. 42:
180-184.
Boonstra, L. D. 1955b. The girdles and limbs of the South African Deinocephalia. Ann. S.
Afr. Mus. 42: 185-326.
Boonstra, L. D. 1956. The skull of Tapinocephalus and its near relatives. Ann. S. Afr. Mus.
43: 137-169.
BoonstrA, L. D. 1957. The moschopid skulls in the South African Museum. Ann. S. Afr. Mus.
44: 15-38.
Boonstra, L. D. 1962. The dentition of the titanosuchian dinocephalians. Ann. S. Afr. Mus.
46: 57-112.
Boonstra, L. D. 1963a. Early dichotomies in the therapsids. S. Afr. J. Sci. 59: 176-195.
Boonstra, L. D. 1963b. Diversity within the South African Dinocephalia. S. Afr. J. Sci. 59:
196-206.
BoonstrA, L. D. 1965a. The Russian deinocephalian Deuterosaurus. Ann. S. Afr. Mus. 48:
233-236.
BoonstrA, L. D. 1965b. The skull of Struthiocephalus kitchingi. Ann. S. Afr. Mus. 48: 251-265.
BoonstrA, L. D. 1966. The dinocephalian manus and pes. Ann. S. Afr. Mus. 50: 13-26.
Boonstra, L. D. 1969. The fauna of the Tapinocephalus Zone (Beaufort beds of the Karoo).
Ann. S. Afr. Mus. 56: 1-73.
BoonstrA, L. D. 1971. The early therapsids. Ann. S. Afr. Mus. 59: 17-46.
Boonstra, L. D. 1972. Discard the names Theriodontia and Anomodontia: a new classification
of the Therapsida. Ann. S. Afr. Mus. 59: 315-338.
Broom, R. 1903. On the evidence of a new species of Titanosuchus (T. cloetei). Ann. S. Afr.
Mus. 4: 142-143.
Broom, R. 1904. Notice of a new fossil reptile (Scapanodon duplessisi) from the lower Karoo
beds of Prince Albert. Rec. Albany Mus. 1: 182-183.
Broom, R. 1905. Notice of some new fossil reptiles from the Karoo beds of South Africa. Rec.
Albany Mus. 1: 331-337.
Broom, R. 1909a. Notice of some new South African fossil amphibians and reptiles. Ann. S.
Afr. Mus. 7: 270-278.
114 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Broom, R. 1909b. An attempt to determine the horizons of the fossil vertebrates of the Karoo.
Ann. S. Afr. Mus. 7: 285-289.
Broom, R. 1910. A comparison of the Permian reptiles of North America with those of South
Africa. Bull. Am. Mus. nat. Hist. 28: 197-234.
Broom, R. 1911. On some new South African Permian reptiles. Proc. zool. Soc. Lond. 1911:
1073-1082.
Broom, R. 1914. A further comparison of the South African dinocephalians with the American
pelycosaurs. Bull. Am. Mus. nat. Hist. 33: 135-141.
Broom, R. 1923. On the structure of the skull in the carnivorous deinocephalian reptiles. Proc.
zool. Soc. Lond. 1923: 661-684.
Broom, R. 1928. On Tapinocephalus and two other deinocephalians. Ann. S. Afr. Mus. 22:
427-438.
Broom, R. 1929. On the carnivorous mammal-like reptiles of the family Titanosuchidae. Ann.
Transv. Mus. 13: 9-36.
Broom, R. 1932. The mammal-like reptiles of South Africa and the origin of mammals. London:
H.F. & G. Witherby.
-Grecory, W.K. 1926. The skeleton of Moschops capensis Broom, a dinocephalian reptile from
the Permian of South Africa. Bull. Am. Mus. nat. Hist. 56: 179-252.
Haucuton, S.H. 1915a. On a new dinocephalian from the Gouph. Ann. S. Afr. Mus. 12:
52-54.
Haucuton, S.H. 1915b. On two new therocephalians from the Gouph. Ann. S. Afr. Mus. 12:
55-57.
Haucuton, S.H. 1915c. On a new type of deinocephalian (Moschosaurus longiceps). Ann. S.
Afr. Mus. 12: 78-81.
HauGurton, S.H. 1929. On some new therapsid genera. Ann. S. Afr. Mus. 28: 55-78.
Haucuton, S.H. & Brink, A.S. 1955. A bibliographical list of Reptilia from the Karroo beds
of Africa. Palaeont. afr. 2: 1-187.
HEYLER, D. 1961. Gorgonopsia. In: PIVETEAU, J. ed. Traité de Paléontologie 6: 88-139. Paris:
Masson.
HUuENE, F.R. von, 1956. Paldontologie und Phylogenie der Niedren Tetrapoden. Jena: Gustav
Fischer.
KitcuHinc, J.W. 1977. The distribution of the Karroo vertebrate fauna. Mem. Bernard Price
Inst. Palaeont. Res. Univ. Witwatersrand 1: 1131.
Otson, E.C. 1962. Late Permian terrestrial vertebrates. USA and USSR. Trans Am. phil. Soc.
52: 3-224.
Or.ov, Y.A. 1964. Basis of palaeontology. Moscow: State Science-Technological Publ.
Owen, R. 1879. Description of fragmentary indications of a huge kind of theriodont reptile
(Titanosuchus ferox, Ow.) from Beaufort West, Gouph tract, Cape of Good Hope. Q. J.
geol. Soc. Lond. 35: 189-198.
PIVETEAU, J. 1961a. Anteosauridae. Jn: PIVETEAU, J. ed. Traité de Paléontologie 6: 84-85. Paris:
Masson.
PIVETEAU, J. 1961b. Tapinocephalidae. In: PiveTEau, J. ed. Traité de Paléontologie 6: 274-278.
Paris: Masson.
Romer, A.S. 1945. Vertebrate paleontology. 2nd ed. Chicago: University of Chicago Press.
Romer, A.S. 1966. Vertebrate paleontology. 3rd ed. Chicago: University of Chicago Press.
SEELEY, H.G. 1892. On Delphinognathus conocephalus (Seeley) from the middle Karoo beds,
Cape Colony. Q. J. geol. Soc. Lond. 48: 469-475.
TATARINOV, L.P. 1974. Theriodonts of the USSR. Moscow: NAUKA.
TATARINOV, L.P. 1976. Morphological evolution of the theriodonts and the general problems of
phylogenetics. Moscow: NAUKA.
VAN Hoepen, E.C.N. 1916. A new Karroo reptile. Ann. Transv. Mus. 5 (supl. 3): 217.
Watson, D.M.S. 1921. The bases of classification of the Theriodontia. Proc. zool. Soc. Lond.
1921: 35-98.
6. SYSTEMATIC papers must conform to the International code of zoological nomenclature
(particularly Articles 22 and 51).
Names of new taxa, combinations, synonyms, etc., when used for the first time, must be
followed by the appropriate Latin (not English) abbreviation, e.g. gen. nov., sp. nov., comb.
nov., syn. nov., etc.
An author’s name when cited must follow the name of the taxon without intervening
punctuation and not be abbreviated; if the year is added, a comma must separate author’s
name and year. The author’s name (and date, if cited) must be placed in parentheses if a
species or subspecies is transferred from its original genus. The name of a subsequent user of
a scientific name must be separated from the scientific name by a colon.
Synonymy arrangement should be according to chronology of names, i.e. all published
scientific names by which the species previously has been designated are listed in chronological
order, with all references to that name following in chronological order, e.g.:
Family Nuculanidae
Nuculana (Lembulus) bicuspidata (Gould, 1845)
Figs 14-15A
Nucula (Leda) bicuspidata Gould, 1845: 37.
Leda plicifera A. Adams, 1856: 50.
Laeda bicuspidata Hanley, 1859: 118, pl. 228 (fig. 73). Sowerby, 1871: pl. 2 (fig. 8a—b).
Nucula largillierti Philippi, 1861: 87.
Leda bicuspidata: Nicklés, 1950: 163, fig. 301; 1955: 110. Barnard, 1964: 234, figs 8-9.
Note punctuation in the above example:
- comma separates author’s name and year
semicolon separates more than one reference by the same author
full stop separates references by different authors
figures of plates are enclosed in parentheses to distinguish them from text-figures
dash, not comma, separates consecutive numbers
Synonymy arrangement according to chronology of bibliographic references, whereby
the year is placed in front of each entry, and the synonym repeated in full for each entry, is
“not acceptable.
In describing new species, one specimen must be designated as the holotype; other speci-
mens mentioned in the-original description are to be designated paratypes; additional material
not regarded as paratypes should be listed separately. The complete data (registration number,
depository, description of specimen, locality, collector, date) of the holotype and paratypes
must be recorded, e.g.:
Holotype
SAM-—A13535 in the South African Museum, Cape Town. Adult female from mid-tide region, King’s Beach
Port Elizabeth (33°51’S 25°39’E), collected by A. Smith, 15 January 1973.
Note standard form of writing South African Museum registration numbers and date.
7. SPECIAL HOUSE RULES
Capital initial letters
(a) The Figures, Maps and Tables of the paper when referred to in the text
>] 6
e.g. ‘... the Figure depicting C. namacolus...’; *. ..in C. namacolus (Fig. 10)...’
(b) The prefixes of prefixed surnames in all languages, when used in the text, it not preceded
by initials or full names
e.g. Du Toit but A.L.du Toit; Von Huene but F. von Huene
(c) Scientific names, but not their vernacular derivatives
e.g. Therocephalia, but therocephalian
Punctuation should be loose, omitting all not strictly necessary
Reference to the author should be expressed in the third person
Roman numerals should be converted to arabic, except when forming part of the title of a
book or article, such as
‘Revision of the Crustacea. Part VIII. The Amphipoda.’ Te
Specific name must not stand alone, but be preceded by the generic name or its abbreviation
to initial capital letter, provided the same generic name is used consecutively.
Name of new genus or species is not to be included in the title: it should be included in the
abstract, counter to Recommendation 23 of the Code, to meet the requirements of
Biological Abstracts.
J. A. VAN DEN HEEVER
&
F. E. GRINE
DINOCEPHALIA TYPE MATERIAL
IN THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
(REPTILIA, THERAPSIDA)
OCTOBER 1981 ISSN 0303-2515
H At AY
~f fj j ;
d /
~ ’ . ‘i
ta, keh he
‘OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN
EUM
CAPE TOWN
INSTRUCTIONS TO AUTHORS
1. MATERIAL should be original and not published elsewhere, in whole or in part.
2. LAYOUT should be as follows:
(a) Centred masthead to consist of
Title: informative but concise, without abbreviations and not including the names of new genera or species
Author’s(s’) name(s)
Address(es) of author(s) (institution where work was carried out)
Number of illustrations (figures, enumerated maps and tables, in this order)
(b) Abstract of not more than 200 words, intelligible to the reader without reference to the text
(c) Table of contents giving hierarchy of headings and subheadings
(d) Introduction
(e) Subject-matter of the paper, divided into sections to correspond with those given in table of contents
(f) Summary, if paper is lengthy
(g) Acknowledgements
(h) References
(i) Abbreviations, where these are numerous
3. MANUSCRIPT, to be submitted in triplicate, should be typewritten and neat, double spaced
with 2,5 cm margins all round. First lines of paragraphs should be indented. Tables and a list of
legends for illustrations should be typed separately, their positions indicated in the text. All
pages should be numbered consecutively.
Major headings of the paper are centred capitals; first subheadings are shouldered small
capitals; second subheadings are shouldered italics; third subheadings are indented, shouldered
italics. Further subdivisions should be avoided, as also enumeration (never roman numerals)
of headings and abbreviations.
Footnotes should be avoided unless they are short and essential.
Only generic and specific names should be underlined to indicate italics; all other marking
up should be left to editor and publisher.
4. ILLUSTRATIONS should be reducible to a size not exceeding 12 « 18 cm (19 cm including
legend); the reduction or enlargement required should be indicated; originals larger than
35 x 47 cm should not be submitted; photographs should be rectangular in shape and final
size. A metric scale should appear with all illustrations, otherwise magnification or reduction
should be given in the legend; if the latter, then the final reduction or enlargement should be
taken into consideration.
All illustrations, whether line drawings or photographs, should be termed figures (plates
are not printed; half-tones will appear in their proper place in the text) and numbered in a
single series. Items of composite figures should be designated by capital letters; lettering of
figures is not set in type and should be in lower-case letters.
The number of the figure should be lightly marked in pencil on the back of each illustration.
5. REFERENCES cited in text and synonymies should all be included in the list at the end of
the paper, using the Harvard System (ibid., idem, loc. cit., op. cit. are not acceptable):
(a) Author’s name and year of publication given in text, e.g.:
‘Smith (1969) describes... .’
‘Smith (1969: 36, fig. 16) describes .
“As described (Smith 1969a, 1969b; eon ee
‘As described (Haughton & Broom 1927 Dy
‘As described (Haughton et al. 1927) .
Note: no comma separating name aiid! year
Dagination indicated by colon, not p.
names of joint authors connected by ampersand
- et al. in text for more than two joint authors, but names of all authors given in list of references.
(b) Full references at the end of the paper, arranged alphabetically by names, chronologically
within each name, with suffixes a, b, etc. to the year for more than one paper by the same
author in that year, e.g. Smith (1969a, 19695) and not Smith (1969, 1969a).
For books give title in italics, edition, volume number, place of publication, publisher.
For journal article give title of article, title of journal in italics (abbreviated according to the World list o,
scientific periodicals. 4th ed. London: Butterworths, 1963), series in parentheses, volume number, part
number (only if independently paged) in parentheses, pagination (first and last pages of article).
Examples (note capitalization and punctuation)
BULLOUGH, W. S. 1960. Practical invertebrate anatomy. 2nd ed. London: Macmillan.
FISCHER, P. —H. 1948. Données sur la résistance et de le vitalité des mollusques. J. Conch., Paris 88: 100-140.
FiscHER, P.-H., DuvAL, M. & Rarry, A. 1933. Etudes sur les échanges respiratoires des littorines. Archs
Zool. exp. gen. 74: 627- 634.
Konn, A. J. 1960a. Ecological notes on Conus (Mollusca: Gastropoda) in the Trincomalee region of Ceylon.
Ann. Mag. nat. Hist. (13) 2: 309-320.
Konn, A. J. 1960b. Spawning behaviour, egg masses and larval development in Conus from the Indian Ocean.
Bull. Bingham oceanogr. Coll. 17 (4): 1-51.
THIELE, J. 1910. Mollusca: B. Polyplacophora, Gastropoda marina, Bivalvia. In: SCHULTZE, L. Zoologische
und anthropologische Ergebnisse einer Forschungsreise im westlichen und zentralen Siid-Afrika 4: 269-270.
Jena: Fischer. Denkschr. med.-naturw. Ges. Jena 16: 269-270.
(continued inside back cover)
ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
ANNALE VAN DIE SUID-AFRIKAANSE MUSEUM
Volume 86 Band
October 1981 Oktober
Part 4 Deel
4
o \O”
Ali, sy
UID Novi ©
CRETACEOUS FAUNAS FROM
ZULULAND AND NATAL, SOUTH AFRICA
ADDITIONAL OBSERVATIONS ON THE
AMMONITE SUBFAMILY TEXANITINAE
COLLIGNON, 1948
By
WILLIAM JAMES KENNEDY
HERBERT CHRISTIAN KLINGER
&
HERBERT SUMMESBERGER
Cape Town Kaapstad
The ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
are issued in parts at irregular intervals as material
becomes available
Obtainable from the South African Museum, P.O. Box 61, Cape Town 8000
Die ANNALE VAN DIE SUID-AFRIKAANSE MUSEUM
word uitgegee in dele op ongereelde tye na gelang van die
beskikbaarheid van stof
Verkrygbaar van die Suid-Afrikaanse Museum, Posbus 61, Kaapstad 8000
OUT OF PRINT/UIT DRUK
iL, Aas 5-8), HUD, 4-5, Biot), SEB), S, 79),
GC, tapi) 7a sh 92) 7)e 101-3),
VLD Sag) esa), CES), WO), i, ES). 26), 28, 250)
EDITOR/REDAKTRISE
Ione Rudner
Copyright enquiries to the South African Museum
Kopieregnavrae aan die Suid-Afrikaanse Museum
ISBN 0 86813 025 7
Printed in South Africa by In Suid-Afrika gedruk deur
the Rustica Bressa, Piya, etd: Die Rustica-pers, Edms., Bpk.,
Court Road, Wynberg, Cape Courtweg, Wynberg, Kaap
CRETACEOUS FAUNAS FROM ZULULAND AND NATAL,
SOUTH AFRICA
ADDITIONAL OBSERVATIONS ON THE
AMMONITE SUBFAMILY TEXANITINAE COLLIGNON, 1948
By
WILLIAM JAMES KENNEDY
Geological Collections, University Museum, Oxford
HERBERT CHRISTIAN KLINGER
South African Museum, Cape Town
&
HERBERT SUMMESBERGER
Naturhistorisches Museum, Vienna
(With 27 figures)
[MS accepted 11 June 1981]
ABSTRACT
Data supplementary to the monograph on the ammonite subfamily Texanitinae Collignon,
1948, by Klinger & Kennedy are given. These include a redescription and illustration of the
type material and other Austrian and French specimens of Ammonites serratomarginatus
Redtenbacher, 1873, and Ammonites quinquenodosus Redtenbacher, 1873. New material
permits a study of the intraspecific variation in Reginaites zulu Klinger & Kennedy, 1980, and
the homoeomorphy between it and Plesiotexaniies (P.) stangeri (Baily, 1855). Two micromorph
specimens of Submortoniceras woodsi (Spath, 1921) are homoeomorphic with Protexanites (P.)
bontanti shimizui Matsumoto, 1970, exhibit traces of colour banding, and raise the possibility of
sexual dimorphism in the subfamily Texanitinae.
CONTENTS
PAGE
MMtTOGU CHO MEA ee Oa Meo eee ae el. sah, geben lo 116
I OCAUOMONSMECITIENS Gan ane ae aa ae seo 116
DIMENSIONSLOL SPECIMENS ase eee ee 116
Suture tenmimologyen. ase. eae ee eae os 116
ANT NOUAINON OL CHEMIE, goaecnscascuncoennsonc 116
Systematic palacontologyanna ae sae ane ese IL7/
On Ammonites serratomarginatus Redtenbacher,
1873 and Ammonites quinquenodosus Red-
tenbachen el S/Se irre eee ne re ae 117
Intraspecific variation in Reginaites zulu Klinger
& Kennedy, 1980, and homoeomorphy with
Plesiotexanites (P.) stangeri (Baily, 1855). ... 137
Colour banding in micromorphs of Submortoni-
ceras woodsi (Spath, 1921) and their homoeo-
morphy with Protexanites (P.) bontanti shimi-
Zuieiatsumotow 9/70 tee ee eee eee ae 149
Acknowledgements: 25. 25.4 hos wees gues oe 153,
RE LERET COS NG rico Sines ead a econ tae a rae 153
ALS
Ann. S. Afr. Mus. 86 (4) 1981: 115-155, 27 figs.
116 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
INTRODUCTION
Subsequent to Klinger & Kennedy’s (1980a) monographical description of
the South African representatives of the ammonite subfamily Texanitinae
Collignon, 1948, additional data from South Africa and Europe became avail-
able which are supplementary to the overall account already published. Part of
these were published separately (Klinger & Kennedy 1980b). Although these
data deal with different and remotely related aspects of the subfamily Texaniti-
nae, economic measures deemed it advisable to publish these under one cover
with appropriate subtitles. Authorship according to seniority is given below
each subtitle. Authorship for the whole publication is in alphabetical order.
LOCATION OF SPECIMENS
The following abbreviations are used to indicate the repositories of the
material studied:
FSR Faculté des Sciences, Rennes, France
GBA Geologische Bundesanstalt, Vienna, Austria
LL Oberosterreichisches Landesmuseum, Linz, Austria
NHMW_ Naturhistorisches Museum, Vienna, Austria
NS Haus der Natur, Salzburg, Austria
SAM South African Museum, Cape Town, South Africa
SAS Geological Survey of South Africa, Pretoria
DIMENSIONS OF SPECIMENS
Dimensions of specimens are given in millimetres; abbreviations are as
follows:
D = diameter, Wb = whorl breadth, Wh = whorl height, U = umbilical dia-
meter, R = ribs per whorl, U : E tbs = ratio of umbilical to external tubercles.
Figures in parentheses are dimensions as a percentage of total diameter.
SUTURE TERMINOLOGY
The suture terminology of Wedekind (1916; see Kullmann & Wiedmann
1970 for a recent review) is followed in the present work:
I = internal lobe, U = umbilical lobe, L = lateral lobe, E = external lobe.
ANNOTATION OF ORNAMENT
This follows the scheme presented in Klinger & Kennedy (1980a: 3-4);
tubercles are numbered in ontogenetic sequence from the umbilical wall to the
venter; e.g. umbilical tubercle is (1), lateral tubercle (2), submarginal (3),
marginal (4), and external (5).
CRETACEOUS FAUNAS FROM SOUTH AFRICA £17
SYSTEMATIC PALAEONTOLOGY
ON Ammonites serratomarginatus REDTENBACHER, 1873, AND
Ammonites quinquenodosus REDTENBACHER, 1873.
(By W. J. Kennedy, H. Summesberger & H. C. Klinger)
Revision of the texanitid faunas of the South African Upper Cretaceous
(Klinger & Kennedy 1980a) raised a number of questions, amongst others the
effect of differential preservation and geographic morphological variation in
Ammonites serratomarginatus and Ammonites quinquenodosus, two species
from the Gosau Beds of the Austrian Alps described almost a century ago by
Anton Redtenbacher (1873). It has now proved possible to locate some of the
type material of these two species, as well as a series of other Austrian
specimens.
Paratexanites serratomarginatus (Redtenbacher, 1873)
Figs t=7
Ammonites serrato-marginatus Redtenbacher, 1873: 110, pl. 25 (fig. 2a—d)
Mortoniceras serrato-marginatum (Redtenbacher): De Grossouvre, 1894: 69, pl. 16 (fig. la—b).
Pervinquiére, 1907: 242. Diener, 1925148.
Bevahites (Parabevahites) serrato-marginatus (Redtenbacher): Collignon, 1948: 83(38).
Non Parabevahites serrato-marginatus (Redtenbacher): Collignon, 1966: 76, pl. 486 (figs
1962-1963).
Non Parabevahites cf. serrato-marginatus (Redtenbacher): Collignon, 1966: 80, pl. 488 (figs
1967-1969).
Paratexanites (Parabevahites) serratomarginatus (Redtenbacher): Matsumoto, 1970: 260, pl. 36
(figs 1-3), text-fig. 16. Matsumoto & Hirano, 1976: 337, text-fig. 3.
Paratexanites (Parabevahites) serratomarginatus grossouvrei Matsumoto, 1970: 263.
Paratexanites (Parabevahites) cf. serratomarginatus (Redtenbacher): Kennedy & Kollmann,
1977: 414, pl. 1 (fig. la—c).
Types
Redtenbacher based this species on seven syntypes, all of which have been
traced. NS 6381, the original of Redtenbacher 1873, pl. 25 (fig. 2a—b) is the
lectotype; paralectotypes are NS 6376, 6379, 6387, 6384, 6385, 6387. Four
further specimens may also be part of the type series: NS 18427-18428 (part
and counterpart), NS 18435, LL 26590, and 26598, all from the Coniacian
Gosau Beds of Glanegg, Austria.
Other specimens studied
NHMW 1978/2029/3 from the Coniacian Beds of Glanriedel, Austria, FSR
‘A’, Seunes Collection, FSR 2834 and 2835, all from the Coniacian Craie de
Villedieu of La Ribochére, commune de Couture, Loir-et-Cher, France.
Dimensions
D Wb Wh Wb:Wh U R
NS 6381 45,2 16,2(38) 14,0(33) 1,15 15,0(35) 38-39?
FSR 2834 58,5 = _ = 23,0(39) 21
ESR A’ 723 — 24,5(34) — 29,8(41) 27
118 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Description
The lectotype (Figs 1A—C, 21, 3B) is a small, distorted, composite internal
mould just over 42 mm in diameter.
Coiling is evolute, only 25 per cent of the previous whorl being covered.
The umbilicus is of moderate width (c. 35 per cent of diameter?) with a low,
rounded wall. The whorl section is slightly depressed (due to post-mortem
crushing), with greatest breadth below mid-flank.
Ornament consists of numerous slightly flexed, crowded prorsiradiate ribs,
approximately 40 per whorl. Most arise singly from bullae (1) at the umbilical
shoulder (although a few arise in pairs or are intercalated), and bear small,
weakly clavate submarginal (3) and closely spaced, stronger marginal (4)
tubercles. There are stronger external (5) clavi on either side of a narrow keel
flanked by shallow sulci.
The earliest ontogenetic stages are seen in NS 6384 (Fig. 2G—H) and LL
26598 (Fig. 2A-B). Here, ribbing is again crowded and flexuous, with the
distinctive close spacing of tubercles 3 + 4 visible even at a whorl height of
only 5,5 mm. The former specimen has a compressed whorl section, presum-
ably due to crushing, but reveals a better preserved keel than the lectotype,
and this shows unmistakable undulations corresponding to the external (5)
clavi. This is also seen, but is less prominent, in LL 26598, which differs from
the lectotype in having the submarginal (3) tubercle longer and more pro-
minent than the marginal (4) (Fig. 2A—B). Of the specimens corresponding in
size to the lectotype, NS 18428 (NS 18427 is the counterpart) (Figs 1D, 3C) is
coarser ribbed, with stronger bullae (1) and a greater forward projection to
the ventrolateral ribbing. This is also seen in NS 6379 (Fig. 11). In contrast,
NS 6382 (Figs 1K, 3D), although crushed, is as densely ribbed as the lecto-
type.
Of the larger specimens, NS 6387, is the original of Redtenbacher 1873, pl.
25 (fig. 2C—D). It has a maximum whorl height of 20,5 mm, and appears to be
sparser ribbed than the lectotype, as do all the larger specimens, suggesting
outer whorls were consistently more distantly ribbed than the nuclei (Figs
1F-G, 3A). The ribs are flexuous with the submarginal (3) and marginal (4)
tubercles close together, both clavate, and the former weaker than the latter
(Figs 1G, 3A). The keel is well preserved, and feebly undulose. NS 6376 is
identical, as far as it is preserved (Fig. 1E). In contrast, NS 18453 (Fig. 1H)
shows the submarginal (3) and marginal (4) tubercles to be relatively stronger
in relation to the ribs, with the submarginal (3) far more prominent, although
shorter than the marginal (4). The largest and most ontogenetically advanced
fragment, LL 26590 (Fig. 2C—D) shows a distinctly undulose keel and submar-
ginal (3) and marginal (4) tubercles grouped on a swelling on the ventrolateral
shoulder, with the external (5) clavi seemingly linked by weak ridges, which are
much accentuated by crushing (Fig. 2D).
None of these specimens shows the sutures.
CRETACEOUS FAUNAS FROM SOUTH AFRICA 119
Fig. 1. Paratexanites serratomarginatus (Redtenbacher). A—-C. The lectotype, NS 6381, the
original of Redtenbacher (1873), pl. 25 (fig 2a—b). D. Paralectotype, NS 18428. E. Paralecto-
type, NS 6376. F—G. Paralectotype, NS 6378, the original of Redtenbacher (1873), pl. 25 (fig.
2c—d). H. Paralectotype, NS 18453. I. Paralectotype, NS 6379. J. Paralectotype, NS 6385. K.
Paralectotype, NS 6382. All specimens are from the Coniacian Gosau Beds of Glanegg,
Austria. X 1.
120 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
G H |
Fig. 2. Paratexanites serratomarginatus (Redtenbacher). A—-B. Paralectotype, LL 26598. C—D.
Paralectotype, LL 26590. E-F. FSR 2835. G—H. Paralectotype, NS 6384. I. Lectotype, NS
6381. A-D, G-I are from the Coniacian Gosau Beds of Glanegg, Austria; E-F is from the
Coniacian Craie de Villedieu of La Ribochére, Loir-et-Cher, France. A-B, I X 2; C-D,
E-F x 1; G-H x 4.
CRETACEOUS FAUNAS FROM SOUTH AFRICA 124
Fig. 3. Paratexanites serratomarginatus (Redtenbacher). A. Paralectotype, NS 6387. B. Lecto-
type, NS 6381. C. Paralectotype, NS 18428. D. Paralectotype, NS 6382. All specimens are from
the Coniacian Gosau Beds of Glanegg, Austria. x 2.
122 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Discussion
The above description, based entirely on material from Glanegg, shows
this species to be variable in both density and strength of ornament. A small,
compressed specimen from Glanriedel, Austria, NHMW 1978/2029/3 (Fig. 4),
is comparable to material from Glanegg. De Grossouvre (1894: 69, pl. 16 (fig.
la—b) refigured herein as Fig. 7A—B) described a much larger specimen from
the Craie de Villedieu of La Ribochére, Couture, Loir-et-Cher, France, which
Matsumoto (1970: 263) has designated holotype of the subspecies P. serrato-
marginatus grossouvrei. Matsumoto (1970: 262) differentiated it from the
Austrian form because of the ‘stronger and more rounded inner ventrolateral
G H
Fig. 4. Paratexanites serratomarginatus (Redtenbacher) NHMW 1978/2029/3 from
the Coniacian Gosau Beds of Glanriedel, Austria. A-D Xx 1; E-H x 2.
CRETACEOUS FAUNAS FROM SOUTH AFRICA 123
Fig. 5. Paratexanites serratomarginatus (Redtenbacher). A-C. FSR ‘A’, Seunes Collection.
D-F. FSR 2834. Both specimens from the Coniacian Craie de Villedieu of La Ribochére,
Loir-et-Cher, France. X 1.
124 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
tubercles which are approximated to the outer ones, forming double ventrolat-
eral major protruberances . . . the ventral keel shows weak undulations which
correspond in number to the radial ribs, but in the Alpine species the keel is
continuous and not undulated’. As the description of the Austrian material
shows, the criterion of undulose v. continuous keel is not valid. Equally our
largest and ontogenetically most advanced specimen (Fig. 2C-D) shows the
double protuberance of the holotype of P. serratomarginatus grossouvrei, and
there is such variation in the relative development of submarginal (3) and
marginal (4) tubercles in the Austrian type series that this scarcely seems a
criterion for separation.
The authors figure, however, three smaller French specimens from the
Coniacian part of the Craie de Villedieu of La Ribochére (Figs 2E-F, SA-F, 6)
that show a greater range of variation and more advanced ontogenetic develop-
Us
Fig. 6. Paratexanites serratomarginatus (Redtenbacher). External suture of FSR ‘A’, Seunes
Collection. x 6.
ment than is seen in the Austrian specimens. All are sparser ribbed than the
lectotype, some with only half as many ribs at a somewhat greater diameter,
although there is overlap in rib density with other types. FSR ‘A’ (Fig. SA—C)
is very close indeed to the Austrian type material, but FSR 2835 (Fig. 2E-F) is
a curious, slowly expanding form with fewer ribs, which are more flexuous and
have stronger bullae, with the marginal (4) tubercle very small indeed (Fig.
2E). FSR 2834 (Fig. 5D-F) shows similar features, especially the prominence of
the submarginal (3) tubercle, while the marginal (4) tubercle is almost indistin-
guishable at the beginning of the last whorl, although strengthening towards the
aperture. Given this variation and the overlap between the Austrian and
5
CRETACEOUS FAUNAS FROM SOUTH AFRICA
‘60 x poonpoy *(q-e] “3y) OT ‘Id ‘p6gT o1ANOssoIyH oq Jo Adod ‘soue14 ‘19YD-19-IOT ‘o1gYydoqny eT JO noIpal|iA op
JVI URIORIUOD IY} WIJ ‘OJOUUNSJRI] 1a4ANOssos (1OYeQUa\pIy) SNJOUIsADWOJDAAaS SajluDxXavADg JO ddAjojoy 94, *L “314
126 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
French specimens, we doubt that they merit subspecific separation, although
acknowledging differences in variation range.
Specimens described from Japan by Matsumoto (1970: 260, pl. 36 (figs
1-3), text-fig. 16) fall into P. serratomarginatus as here interpreted. Collignon’s
(1966) specimens have a lateral tubercle and should be referred to Plesiotexan-
ites, while we would continue to refer to the Zululand material (Klinger &
Kennedy 1980a: 59, figs 45-47A) as Paratexanites sp. aff. P. serratomarginatus.
When compared to other ‘Parabevahites’, Paratexanites emscheris
(Schliiter, 1876: 155, pl. 42 (figs 8-10)) has coarser, straighter ribs and umbilical
bullae low on the flank rather than perched on the umbilical shoulder, and
there are other differences as noticed by Matsumoto (1970: 262). Paratexanites
sellardsi Young (1963: 79, pl. 32 (fig. 7), pl. 36 (figs. 3-5), pl. 37 (fig. 1), pl. 39
(fig. 4), pl. 49 (fig. 3), text-fig. 17) is also more coarsely ribbed and robustly
tuberculate.
Occurrence
The type specimens are from Glanegg, Austria. Other ammonites from
this locality (Brinkmann 1935: 2; Kennedy & Summesberger, in preparation)
include Gaudryceras glaneggense (Redtenbacher), Otoscaphites arnaudi (De
Grossouvre), ‘Ammonites’ aberlei Redtenbacher, Gauthiericeras margae
(Schliiter), and Protexanites sp. juv. These suggest a stratigraphic level way
above the base of the Coniacian stage. The species is also recorded from
France, Tunisia and Zululand and, where reliably dated, is also of Coniacian
age.
Texanites quinquenodosus (Redtenbacher, 1873)
Figs 8-16
Ammonites texanus von Hauer (non Roemer, 1852) 1858: 10, pl. 2 (figs 4-6).
Ammonites quinquenodosus Redtenbacher, 1873: 108, pl. 24 (fig. 3a—b).
Mortoniceras texanus Schliter sp.: Zurcher, 1905: 686.
Mortoniceras quinquenodosum (Redtenbacher): Yabe & Shimizu, 1923: 30 (partim).
Mortoniceras quinquenodosusm [lapsus] (Redtenbacher): Diener, 1925: 147 (partim).
?Texanites quinquenodosus var. evoluta Haas, 1942: 18, text-fig. 12.
Texanites quinquenodosus (Redtenbacher): Collignon, 1948: 69, text-fig. 2; 71966: 128, pl. 510
(fig. 2021). Thomel, 1969: 12, pl. G (figs 1-2). Klinger & Kennedy 1980a: 135, figs 102-3.
Texanites (Texanites) quinquenodosus (Redtenbacher): Matsumoto, 1970: 272. Wiedmann,
1979: 48, pl. 7 (figs C-D).
Texanites aff. quinquenodosus (Redtenbacher): Fabre-Taxy, 1963: 17, pl. 1 (fig. 14).
Texanites (Texanites) sp. aff. T. (T.) quinquenodusus (Redtenbacher): Matsumoto, 1970: 273,
pl. 42 (fig. 3a—b), pl. 46 (figs 1-3).
Type
The lectotype is GBA 1873/01/13, the original of Redtenbacher 1873, pl.
24 (fig. 3a—b), from the Santonian Gosau Beds of St Wolfgang, Ischl, Austria.
CRETACEOUS FAUNAS FROM SOUTH AFRICA 127,
Other specimens studied
In addition to the lectotype, the following specimens were available: LL
41/1938, a paralectotype, from the Schneiderwirtsbrticke, Ischl; LL 32 from
Gosau; GBA _ 1873/01/13 (SV 2569), a paralectotype from Gosau; NHMW
1935.11.39, from Grabenbach, Gosau; NHMW 1926.II.2469, from the Nef-
graben, Russbach, Gosau; NHMW 1935.III.40, from Gosau; GBA, an unregis-
tered fragment from Gosau, and a possible paralectotype; NHMW 1935.III.41,
from Gosau; and Bohm Collection from the Nefgraben, Gosau. All specimens
are of Santonian age.
Dimensions
D Wb Wh Wb:Wh U R
NHMW 1935.11.40 118,5 32(27) 40(34) 0,8 51(43) 27
Description
The lectotype (Fig. 8) is a flattened and distorted internal mould with
almost a whorl of body chamber preserved, and a maximum diameter of almost
160 mm. Coiling is very evolute, the inner whorls being exposed to the outer
ventrolateral (4) tubercle, which is housed in a small notch in the umbilical wall
of the succeeding whorl. In the best preserved specimen, NHMW 1935.III.40
(Figs 12-13, 14A), the broad, shallow umbilicus comprises 43 per cent of the
diameter. Uncrushed specimens show the intercostal whorl section to have
been high oval with convergent flanks and a breadth to height ratio of 0,75. The
costal section is also compressed, with the maximum width at the lateral (2)
tubercle, and a breadth to height ratio of 0,87.
Ornament consists of numerous (27-32) straight, simple, recti- to slightly
prorsiradiate ribs. These arise at the umbilical seam, and bear a pointed
umbilical (1) bulla directed into the umbilicus. There are a larger, feebly
clavate lateral (2) tubercle, a larger, clavate submarginal (3) tubercle and a
strong clavate marginal (4) tubercle, and a long external (5) tubercle, which
tends to link with its neighbours into an undulose keel. There is a strong,
faintly undulose siphonal keel flanked by distinct grooves (Fig. 14A-B).
On adult body chambers (e.g. LL 41/1938 (Figs 15-16)), the tubercles
decline and the ribs crowd towards the aperture.
The suture line is quite simple (Fig. 11) with moderately incised elements.
Discussion
Specimens available vary somewhat in strength and number of ribs while,
when shell is preserved, the tubercles are also much sharper than on moulds
during early growth (Figs 9-10), and there are strong transverse growth striae
in adults (Figs 15-16).
Matsumoto (1970: 273, pl. 42 (fig. 3), pl. 46 (figs 1-3)) has described a
series of specimens from the Lower Santonian of Hokkaido, Japan, which
shows developmental stages at much smaller sizes than seen in the Austrian
128 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
SS
SAe:
Fig. 8. Texanites quinquenodosus (Redtenbacher). The lectotype, GBA 1873/01/13, the orig-
inal of Redtenbacher 1873, pl. 24 (fig. 3a) from the Santonian Gosau Beds of St Wolfgang,
! Austria. X 1.
CRETACEOUS FAUNAS FROM SOUTH AFRICA 129
Fig. 9. Texanites quinquenodosus (Redtenbacher). Paralectotype, GBA 1873/01/13 (SV 2569),
the original of Redtenbacher 1873, pl. 24 (fig. 3a—b) from the Santonian Gosau Beds of St
Wolfgang, Austria. A-C x 1; D x 2.
130
ANNALS OF THE
SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
C
Fig. 10. Texanites quinquenodosus (Redtenbacher). A-C. NHMW 1935. III. 41, from the Santonian Gosau Beds of Gosau, Austria. x 1.
CRETACEOUS FAUNAS FROM SOUTH AFRICA 131
Fig. 11. Texanites quinquenodosus (Redtenbacher). External suture of GBA 1873/01/13
(SV2569). x 6.
material. The large specimens from Japan are said to differ from the lectotype
in having the ventral (=external (5)) clavus displaced in front of the outer
ventrolateral, but this is seen to some degree in GBA 1873/01/13 (SV 2569)
(Fig. 9A-B, D), and is probably of limited significance.
Texanites quinquenodosus most closely resembles Texanites collignoni
Klinger & Kennedy, 1980a ( = Texanites oliveti non Blanckenhorn sensu Col-
lignon 1948, 1966; Matsumoto & Ueda 1962; Pop & Szasz 1973; Matsumoto
1978) from the Lower Santonian of Madagascar, Zululand, Japan, Romania,
and possibly North America. The two species have comparable dimensions and
rib densities on the outer whorls, but differ mainly in details of ornamentation.
In T. quinquenodosus tuberculation is distinctly clavate, especially in the early
stages of growth, whereas 7. collignoni has more spinose ornament throughout.
Furthermore, crowding of ribbing and decline of tuberculation towards the
body chamber is not as common in T. collignoni as in T. quinquenodosus.
Given more material with precise stratigraphic data, and taking the effects of
differential preservation and intraspecific variation into account, specific sepa-
ration of the two may prove unnecessary. For the present, however, the clavate
tuberculation in T. quinquenodosus is regarded as being sufficient to separate it
from T. collignoni.
IBZ ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Fig. 12. Texanites quinquenodosus (Redtenbacher). NHMW 1935. III.40, from the Santonian
Gosau Beds of Gosau, Austria. xX 1.
CRETACEOUS FAUNAS FROM SOUTH AFRICA 133
Fig. 13. Texanites quinquenodosus (Redtenbacher). NHMW 1935.III.40, from the Santonian
Gosau Beds of Gosau, Austria. X 1.
134 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
A
B
Fig. 14. Texanites quinquenodosus (Redtenbacher). A. NHMW 1935.III.40, from
the Santonian Gosau Beds of Gosau. B. Paralectotype, LL 41/1938, from
Schneiderwirtsbrticke Ischl. A. X 1; B X 0,75.
CRETACEOUS FAUNAS FROM SOUTH AFRICA 135
Fig. 15. Texanites quinquenodosus (Redtenbacher). Paralectotype LL 41/1938, from the
Santonian Gosau Beds of Schneiderwirtsbriicke, Ischl. x 0,75.
136 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Fig. 16. Texanites quinquenodosus (Redtenbacher). Paralectotype, LL 41/1938, from the
Santonian Gosau Beds of Schneiderwirtsbriicke, Ischl. x 0,75.
CRETACEOUS FAUNAS FROM SOUTH AFRICA ey
Texanites oliveti (Blanckenhorn, 1905), according to the interpretation of
Klinger & Kennedy (1980a), is a distinctly compressed, Upper(?) Santonian
species.
T. quinquenodosus may be separated from Texanites texanus texanus
(Roemer) (see Young 1963: 80, pl. 38 (figs 1-2), pl. 40 (figs 1-3), pl. 41 (fig. 4),
text-figs 21g, 22a, 25d) by its more evolute coiling and denser ribbing; these
also distinguish it from T. texanus twiningi Young (1963: 82, pl. 38 (fig. 5), pl.
39 (fig. 1), pl. 41 (figs 2,5), pl. 48 (fig. 4)). Texanites texanus gallicus Collignon
(1948: 75, pl. 8 (fig. 1-1a); De Grossouvre 1894: 80, pl. 16 (figs 2, 3a—b, 4a—b),
pl. 17 (fig. 1)) is less compressed, and has the inner three rows of tubercles
rounded. In T. texanus hispanicus Collignon (1948: 76, text-fig. 11-1la, pl. 8
(fig. 2-2b)) there are comparable differences, and the lateral tubercle migrates
ventrally until it reaches a mid-flank position.
The Angolan Texanites quinquenodosus evolutus Haas (1942: 18, text-fig.
12) has an umbilical diameter of 53 per cent compared to 43 in the best
preserved Gosau specimen, and can only very doubtfully be referred to
Redtenbacher’s species. Similarly, the specimen described as T. quinquenodo-
sus from Madagascar (Collignon 1966: 128, pl. 510 (fig. 2021)) is a doubtful
representative by virtue of its tighter coiling and more compressed whorl
section.
Occurrence
The Austrian specimens can be dated no more precisely than Santonian in
our present state of knowledge. The species is also recorded from the Lower
Santonian of south-eastern France, Hokkaido (Japan) and, doubtfully, from
the Santonian of Angola and Upper Santonian of Madagascar.
INTRASPECIFIC VARIATION IN Reginaites zulu
KLINGER & KENNEDY, 1980, AND HOMOEOMORPHY WITH
Plesiotexanites (P.) stangeri (BAILY, 1855)
(By H. C. Klinger & W. J. Kennedy)
In the authors’ (Klinger & Kennedy 1980a) description of the South
African representatives of the ammonite subfamily Texanitinae, two new
Species definitely referable to the genus Reginaites Reyment, 1957, were
erected: Reginaites zulu and Reginaites reymenti.
Recent collecting at the type locality of R. zulu yielded additional material
that allows the authors to comment on the intraspecific variation in the species
and firmly to date it as Upper Santonian on the basis of its association with
Inoceramus (Cordiceramus) muelleri Petrascheck. It also demonstrates a strik-
ing homoeomorphy with the partly contemporary (though apparently geogra-
phically separated) species Plesiotexanites (P.) stangeri (Baily, 1855). The
138 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
material further supports the authors’ inclusion of Reginaites in the subfamily
Texanitinae, rather than in the subfamily Peroniceratinae Hyatt, as advocated
by Matsumoto (1965: 238) and Wiedmann (1978: 670).
Reginaites zulu Klinger & Kennedy, 1980
Figs 17-25
Reginaites zulu Klinger & Kennedy, 1980a: 116, figs 90-92, 93A-B, 94.
Types
The holotype by original designation is SAS-H126A/9 from Bed A at
locality 105 on the south-eastern shores of False Bay, Zululand, St Lucia
Formation, Upper Santonian. Paratype SAS—H126A/4 is from the same hori-
zon and locality.
Material
Five specimens, SAM-—PCZ5952-6, all from the same locality and horizon
as the types.
Dimensions
D Wb Wh Wb:Wh U R
PCZ5955 75,0. _-25.03,3) 26,0(34,7) 0,96 — 36,0(48,0) 18
at 134,0 34,0(25,4) 35,0(26,1) 0,97 74.0(55,2) alee
PCZ5953 120,0 — 32,0(26,7) 34,0(28,3) 0,94 ~—-62,0(51,7) 23
H126A/9 140,0 — 38,7(27,6) 40,0(28,6) 0,96 74,0(52,9) 21
PCZ5956 195,0 == 56,0(28,7) — oes i
Description
Coiling is very evolute with an umbilical diameter varying between 48 and
55 per cent, increasing with growth. The, whorl section changes through
ontogeny, being subsquare on the inner whorls, becoming compressed subrect-
angular with a fastigiate venter, and then distinctly compressed with a conspicu-
ous central keel and subordinate lateral keels (Fig. 17A).
None of the specimens has the innermost whorls preserved, but in
SAM-PCZ5953 (Fig. 18) ornament at approximately 40 mm diameter already
consists of pinched umbilical (1) bullae situated at the umbilical edge, and
broad, low, prorsiradiate ribs bearing very large, bullate to clavate elongated
ventrolateral (3 + 4) tubercles situated a little distance away from the umbilical
seam of the succeeding whorl. The venter at this stage is already distinctly
tricarinate, with the central keel strongest. Strength and density of ribbing is
extremely variable, as the Figures show.
Division of the ventrolateral tubercle takes place at varying diameters. In
SAM-PCZ5953 (Fig. 18) definite signs of division are already present at a
diameter of approximately 50 mm, whereas in the holotype this becomes
noticeable only at a diameter of 65 mm (Figs 19-20). With increasing diameter
CRETACEOUS FAUNAS FROM SOUTH AFRICA 139
A B
Fig. 17. A. Reginaites zulu Klinger & Kennedy, 1980, illustrating ontogenetic changes in whorl
section (after Klinger & Kennedy 1980a, fig. 90A). B. Plesiotexanites (P.) stangeri (Baily,
1855) illustrating ontogenetic changes in whorl section (after Matsumoto 1970, text-fig. 23b).
All X 1.
this separation becomes more obvious, resulting in a clavate marginal (4)
tubercle, situated slightly forward of a larger, rounded submarginal (3) tubercle
(Figs 20A-B, 21C—D). Concurrent with division of the ventrolateral tubercle,
all lateral ornament weakens, the ratio of whorl breadth to whorl height
decreases, and the venter becomes distinctly fastigiate. Differences in strength
of ornament and stage at which attenuation takes place is variable.
SAM-PCZ5956 (Fig. 22) shows attenuation of ornament and change in whorl
section to the point where the flanks of the last part of the phragmocone are
smooth. On body chambers (Figs. 21A-B herein) (Klinger & Kennedy 1980a,
fig. 94A-B) lateral ornament is reduced to indistinct broad, low swellings.
140 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Fig. 18. Reginaites zulu Klinger & Kennedy, 1980. SAM—PCZ5953 from locality 105, St Lucia
Formation, Zululand. x 1.
141
CRETACEOUS FAUNAS FROM SOUTH AFRICA
Dp
8
Fig. 19. Reginaites zulu Klinger & Kennedy, 1980. The holotype, SAS—H126/9, from locality
105, St Lucia Formation, Zululand. x 1.
ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
142
The holotype,
Zululand. x 1.
b)
1980
ion
Format
1a
& Kennedy,
St Luc
inger
ty 105,
1
tes zulu Kl
inal
20.
g Reg
SAS-H126/9, from local
Fi
CRETACEOUS FAUNAS FROM SOUTH AFRICA 143
Fig. 21. Reginaites zulu Klinger & Kennedy, 1980. A-B. SAM-—PCZ5952, a body
chamber fragment illustrating total disappearance of ornament. C-D. SAM-PCZ5954
illustrating division of ventrolateral tubercle. Both specimens from locality 105, St Lucia
Formation, Zululand. x 1.
144 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Fig. 22. Reginaites zulu Klinger & Kennedy, 1980. SAM—PCZ5956 illustrating ontogenetic
change in ornament. From locality 105, St Lucia Formation, Zululand. x 0,5.
None of the specimens shows distinct lateral (2) tubercles at any stage of
ontogeny, although SAM-—PCZ5955 (Fig. 23) has faint swellings on the central
part of the ribs on the inner whorls. Preservation is poor, and we cannot
confirm that these are incipient lateral (2) tubercles or not. In only three
specimens are part of the suture exposed: it is rather simple (Fig. 24) but varies
considerably in details and the width of the lateral lobe (L).
Discussion
With only the holotype and a fragment of body chamber of Reginaites zulu
at their disposal, the authors (Klinger & Kennedy 1980a) were initially
CRETACEOUS FAUNAS FROM SOUTH AFRICA 145
impressed by the strong ornament on the inner whorls of the phragmocone and
the lack of ornament on the body chamber, and failed to recognize the
resemblance of the species to Plesiotexanites (P.) stangeri (Baily, 1955). The
new material shows that there is remarkable similarity, and that the two species
may be closer related than previously suspected. (Young 1963: 93 had also
Fig. 23. Reginaites zulu Klinger & Kennedy, 1980. SAM-—PCZ5955, specimen with
sparse costation, comparable with Plesiotexanites (P.) stangeri ‘var. sparsicosta’
Spath. From locality 105, St Lucia Formation, Zululand. x 1.
146 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
->—— =
@ 10
a el
Fig. 24. Reginaites zulu Klinger & Kennedy, 1980. Part of external suture of
SAM-PCZ5956. Millimetre scale bar for size.
commented on similarities between Reginaites durhami Young and Plesiotexan-
ites (P.) stangeri). In addition, this is the largest assemblage of Reginaites
known, most other species being monotypic.
The ontogenies of R. zulu and P. (P.) stangeri are very similar, although
the accompanying changes in ornament and whorl section are much more
strongly expressed in the former. These changes involve development of
tuberculation on the inner whorls, gradual effacement of all ornament on the
outer phragmocone whorls and body chamber, and change in whorl section.
In the very early stages, R. zulu and P. (P.) stangeri differ only in ventral
ornament. R. zulu is distinctly tricarinate, whereas P. (P.) stangeri is unicarin-
ate, with a pair of spirally elongated external (5) tubercles.
In both species the ventrolateral (3 + 4) tubercle, which is situated in the
umbilical seam, is enlarged in Protexanites (Protexanites) fashion in early stages
of growth. At varying diameters this ventrolateral tubercle starts dividing into
two, resulting in a clavate marginal (4) and a generally rounded submarginal (3)
tubercle—the so-called ‘Parabevahites’ stage. The Paratexanites-like stage, in
which total separation of these tubercles takes place, is completed in both
species, generally with the marginal (4) tubercle situated slightly ahead of the
CRETACEOUS FAUNAS FROM SOUTH AFRICA 147
Fig. 25. Plesiotexanites (P.) stangeri (Baily, 1855). Cast of holotype, BMNH C73333, from
Umzamba estuary, Pondoland. x 0,43.
submarginal (3) one. While the separation of the ventrolateral tubercle takes
place in P. (P.) stangeri, a lateral (2) tubercle appears, thus completing the
pentatuberculate Texanites-like stage. The stage of appearance, strength and
persistence of the lateral (2) tubercle in P. (P.) stangeri is very variable. The
lateral tubercle may be faint throughout, or persist only for a short time before
being absorbed into the ribbing. As far as Jateral ornament is concerned, the
only difference between P. (P.) stangeri and R. zulu is the variable appearance
148 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
of a lateral (2) tubercle in the former. The venters, however, remain different
throughout.
Apart from relative strength of ornament at comparable stages of develop-
ment (which may partially be explained by differential preservation), R. zulu
and P. (P.) stangeri show comparable intraspecific variation in density of
ribbing, which has led to the usage of varietal names sparsicosta and densicosta
in the latter species (e.g. Spath 1921: 138, pl. 5 (figs 1-2)). In P. (P.) stangeri
these differences in density of ribbing appear to be restricted mainly to the
inner whorls, whereas in R. zulu they are noticeable to greater diameters.
In both species ornament weakens during ontogeny, although the reduc-
tion is more prominent in R. zulu than in P. (P.) stangeri. The new material
referable to R. zulu (Fig. 22) shows that parts of the phragmocone may already
be devoid of ornament, whereas the body chamber is completely smooth,
except for low, broad, undulating swellings (Fig. 21A-—B herein) (Klinger &
Kennedy 1980a Fig. 94A-B). In P. (P.) stangeri a similar weakening takes
place, but in the holotype the largest specimen as yet obtained of the species,
the body chamber (which consists of one whorl here) still bears faint, though
discernible lateral ornament (Fig. 25).
There are also comparable ontogenetic changes in whorl section (Fig.
17A-B). Both species are initially depressed, quadrate to rectangular, but
whorl height gradually increases over whorl breadth, so that the section is
eventually distinctly compressed. The venter becomes fastigiate in both species,
but in R. zulu this is enhanced by the lateral keels.
Phylogenetic relationships between R. zulu and P. (P.) stangeri are not
clear, but the ontogenetic changes in both species are too similar to consider
them to be entirely those of homoeomorphs. P. (P.) stangeri occurs mainly in
the Upper Santonian of. Pondoland, but has also been recorded from the
Middle Santonian of Madagascar, and Young (1963: 22) even records it as early
as the lowest parts of the Lower Santonian of the Gulf Coast of North
America. R. zulu occurs in Zululand in association with Inoceramus (Cordi-
ceramus) muelleri Petrascheck, but below the first occurrence of Submortoni-
ceras, which places it in the uppermost part of the Santonian. Because of
similarities of ornament on the inner whorls of R. zulu and Plesiotexanites (P.)
matsumotoi Klinger & Kennedy, 1980a, it seems feasible to derive R. zulu from
the latter (probably via Reginaites reymenti Klinger & Kennedy, 1980a) in the
Upper Santonian, rather than directly from P. (P.) stangeri. However, the
parallel changes in ontogenetic development of R. zulu and P. (P.) stangeri are
so striking that we can perhaps trace their ancestry to a common origin
somewhere in the Lower Santonian.
Palaeobiogeographic data should be interpreted with caution on the basis of
this limited material but, to date, the great majority of specimens of P. (P.)
stangeri have been reported from the transgressive shallower water sediments of
the Umzamba Formation, whereas all known specimens of R. zulu have been
found in the deeper water sediments of the St Lucia Formation of Zululand.
CRETACEOUS FAUNAS FROM SOUTH AFRICA 149
Differences between R. zulu and other species of Reginaites were given
earlier (Klinger & Kennedy 1980a), and are here briefly repeated: R. quadri-
tuberculatum Reyment, 1957, R. leei (Reeside, 1927), R. durhami Young, 1963,
R. reymenti Klinger & Kennedy, 1980a, and R. gappi Wiedmann, 1978, all have
a lateral tubercle at some stage. ‘Reymentites’ hatai Matsumoto, 1965, has the
umbilical tubercle displaced on the flanks.
All these data support the authors’ (Klinger & Kennedy 1980a) and
Young’s (1963) views of placing the genus Reginaites in the subfamily Texaniti-
nae, rather than in the subfamily Peroniceratinae.
COLOUR-BANDING IN MICROMORPHS OF Submortoniceras woodsi
(SPATH, 1921) AND THEIR HOMOEOMORPHY WITH Protexanites
(P.) bontanti shimizui Matsumoto, 1970.
(By H. C. Klinger & W. J. Kennedy)
Two small specimens of Submortoniceras woodsi from the Santonian—
Campanian sediments of Kwa-Mbonambi, Zululand (locality 6 of Kennedy &
Klinger 1975: 282) are of interest in showing traces of colour bands in the
preserved part of the shell, and in apparently being adult at diameters well
below those of normal representatives of the species. They also show striking
homoeomorphy with the stratigraphically older Protexanites (P.) bontanti shi-
mizui Matsumoto, 1970.
Submortoniceras woodsi s.\. (Spath, 1921)
Figs 26-27
Submortoniceras woodsi s.|. (Spath): Klinger & Kennedy, 1980a: 242, figs 186-199, 200B (with
synonomy).
Material
SAM-PCZ5957-8 both from an unspecified horizon near the Santonian—
Campanian boundary at Kwa-Mbonambi (locality 6 of Kennedy & Klinger
1975: 282), St Lucia Formation, Zululand.
Dimensions
Wb Wh Wb:Wh U
PCZ5957 46,0 13,5(34,0) 18,5(40,2) 0,73 15,0(32,6)
PCZ5958 48,0 25 (2610) 17,0(35,4) OWS —
(crushed)
Description
Both specimens are less than 50 mm in diameter. PCZ5958 is crushed
dorsoventrally, hence the umbilicus appears much narrower than that of
7595/7.
150 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
E F G
Fig. 26. Submortoniceras woodsi (Spath, 1921). A-D. SAM-PCZ5957. D
without whitening to show parts of colour banding. E-G. SAM-—PCZ5958,
specimen crushed dorsoventrally. Both from locality 6, St Lucia Formation,
Zululand. All x 1.
CRETACEOUS FAUNAS FROM SOUTH AFRICA Si
Fig. 27. Submortoniceras woodsi (Spath, 1921). A. Whorl section of SAM-—PCZ5957 to
illustrate distribution of colour banding, x 1. B. External suture of SAM—PCZ5956, millimetre
scale bar for size.
PCZ5957 (Fig. 26A-—D) shows details of the ontogeny. At 5 mm diameter
the flanks are still completely smooth; at 8 mm diameter umbilical (1) tubercles
and bifurcating ribs are visible on the flanks. At 16 mm diameter weak lateral
(2) and submarginal (3) tubercles appear on the flanks. A full texanitine
complement of 5 rows of tubercles and a median keel is visible at 25 mm
diameter. The lateral (2) and submarginal (3) tubercles, however, are very
weak, mimicking a Protexanites (P.)-like type of ornament. Ornament remains
like this until near the apertural end, where the lateral (2) tubercle becomes
slightly more prominent. The last half-whorl is non-septate and the last few
septa overlap.
Part of the original aragonitic shell material is preserved. The inner shelly
layer is creamy coloured with a reddish tint, whereas the outer layer is more
152 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
brownish. On the outer layer, two darker, sepia-coloured spiral bands are
visible, one near the submarginal (3) tubercle (Fig. 26D). In addition, a distinct
black substance occurs in the ventral area between the opposite rows of
marginal (4) and external (5) tubercles in places. The distribution of colour
bands is shown in Figure 27A.
PCZ5958 (Fig. 26E-G) is not as well preserved, but shows distinct penta-
tuberculate ornament at 25 mm diameter. The lateral (2) and submarginal (3)
tubercles are again weaker than the others. Ornament weakens towards the
later part of the phragmocone, but again becomes stronger on the body
chamber. The last few septa are also crowded.
Discussion
Because of the weak development of the lateral (2) and submarginal (3)
tubercles, and also because of the small size,- these specimens are striking
homoeomorphs of the stratigraphically older Protexanites (P.) bontanti shimizui
Matsumoto, 1970 (compare Matsumoto 1970, pl. 31 (figs 1-2), text-fig. 6; 1971:
147, pl. 23 (fig 4), text-fig 10; Matsumoto & Hirano 1976: 335, pl. 35 (figs 1-4),
text-fig. 2). Close examination, however, clearly shows the pentatuberculate
ornament in the Zululand specimens. The two species also differ considerably
in details of the suture lines (compare Fig. 27B herein with Matsumoto 1970,
text-fig. 6) and cannot be confused with each other. Examination of the suture
lines in the present material suggests closest affinity with the subspecies
Submortoniceras woodsi woodsi as interpreted by Klinger & Kennedy (1980a:
252-3).
Matsumoto (1970: 238) had already commented on the similarity between
Protexanites (P.) bontanti s.1. and some examples of Submortoniceras, e.g. S.
collignoni (Shimizu); the latter a possible synonym of S. woodsi according to
the authors (Klinger & Kennedy 1980a: 238). Matsumoto’s observations are
further enhanced by the present data.
The presence and distribution of the colour bands on the one specimen,
PCZ5957, compares favourably with that described in P. (P.) bontanti shimizui
by Matsumoto & Hirano (1976) and adds to the homoeomorphic resemblance.
Unfortunately, our material is too poorly preserved to add to Matsumoto &
Hirano’s general comments on coloration in Texanitinae, but nevertheless
represents yet another record of coloration in the subfamily.
The ontogenetic changes in ornament and the crowding of the last few
septa suggest that these two specimens represent adult individuals. The ques-
tion that now arises is the relationship of these micromorphs to the more
commonly known large specimens (even the specimen considered as dwarfed
by the authors (Klinger & Kennedy 1980a figs 198, 200B) is gigantic compared
to the present material). If nutritional deficiency were to blame (compare
Boletzky & Wiedmann 1978), the co-occurrence of ‘normally sized’ specimens,
e.g. SAM-PCZ5897 (Klinger & Kennedy 1980a, fig. 192) at 226 mm diameter
at the same locality would be a contradiction. Apart from differences in overall
CRETACEOUS FAUNAS FROM SOUTH “AFRICA 153
size, the present specimens differ from contemporary S$. woodsi only in having
a lower whorl section, as comparison of dimensions shows:
D Wb Wh Wo: Wh U U-E ths
PCZ5897 226.0 74,0(32.7) 92.0(40,7) 0,80 74,0(32.7) 25:34
PCZ5957 46.0 —13,5(34.0) 17,0(35.4) 0.73 15,0(32.6) 26:36
It is possible that we are here dealing with sexual dimorphs, the ‘normally
sized’ specimens being the female (macroconch) and the smaller form the male
(microconch). Apart from the fact that this would be the first suggestion of
sexual dimorphism in the ammonite subfamily Texanitinae, the implications on
the systematics, especially in the genus Submortoniceras, are disturbing. Matsu-
moto (1959) and Klinger & Kennedy (1980a) have illustrated the bewildering
extent of intraspecific variation in Submortoniceras chicoense, and S. woodsi
and §. condamyi respectively. Added to this is a very rapid rate of evolution, as
exemplified by S. woodsi and S. condamyi, which makes it difficult to separate
one chronospecies satisfactorily from another. Should sexual dimorphism be
added to the list of variables in the systematics of the genus Submortoniceras,
global correlation may become even more tenuous than at present.
ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS
We thank Dr F. Stojaspal of the Geologische Bundesanstalt, Vienna; Mag.
A. Sikora of the Haus der Natur, Salzburg; Dr H. Kohl of the Ober@sterreich-
isches Landesmuseum, Linz; Dr J. Louail of the Faculté des Sciences, Paris; Dr
M. K. Howarth and Mr D. Phillips, British Museum (Natural History),
London; and Prof. Dr J. Wiedmann, Tubingen, for allowing us to study
material in their care. We also thank F. and K. Bohm, private collectors in
Salzburg, for allowing us to study their collections.
Assistance from the technical staff of the University Museum, Oxford;
South African Museum, Cape Town; and Institut und Museum fur Geologie
und Palaontologie, Tubingen, is appreciated.
Financial aid to H. C. Klinger from the South African Council for
Scientific and Industrial Research, and, during the tenure of a research fellow-
ship, from the Alexander von Humboldt Foundation, and to W. J. Kennedy
from the National Environment Research Council (Great Britain) is gratefully
acknowledged.
REFERENCES
Batty, W. H. 1855. Description of some Cretaceous Fossils from South Affica, collected by
Capt. Garden of the 45th Regiment. Q. Jl geol. Soc. Lond. 11: 454-465.
Blanckenhorn, M. 1905. Geologie der naheren Umgebung von Jerusalem. Z. dt. Palast. V. 28:
73-120.
Boterzxy, S. V. & WiepMANN, J. 1978. Schulp-Wachstum bei Sepia officinalis in Abhangigkeit
von Okologischen Parametern. Neues Jb. Geol. Palaont. Abh. 157: 103-106.
BRINKMANN, R. 1935. Die Ammoniten der Gosau und des Flysch in den nordostlichen
Ostalpen. Mitt. geol. -palaont. Inst. Univ. Hamburg 15: 1-14.
154 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
CoLLiGnNon, M. 1948. Ammonites néocrétacées du Menabe (Madagascar). 1. Les Texanitidae.
Annls géol. Serv. Min. Madagascar 13: 7-60 (63-116).
CoLLIGNON, M. 1966. Atlas des fossiles caracteristiques de Madagascar (Ammonites) XIV
(Santonien). Tananarive: Service Géologique.
DIENER, C. 1925. Fossilium catalogus 1: Animalia 29, Ammonoidea neocretacea. J Berlin: Junk.
FABRE-TAxy, S. 1963. Faunes du Coniacien et du Santonien de Provence. 1. Les Ammonites du
bassin de Beausset (Var.). Annls Paléont. 49: 1-28(99-126).
GrossouvrE, A. DE. 1894. Recherches sur la Craie supérieure. II. Paléontologie. Les Ammon-
ites de la Craie supérieure. Mém. Carte géol. dét. France 1893: 1-264.
Haas, O. 1942. Some Upper Cretaceous ammonites from Angola. Am. Mus. Novit. 1182:
1-24.
Hauer, F. Von. 1859. Uber die Cephalopoden der Gosauschichten. Beitr. Geol. Ost. 1: 7-14.
KENNEDY, W. J. & KLINGER, H. C. 1975. Cretaceous faunas from Zululand and Natal, South
Africa. Introduction, Stratigraphy. Bull. Br. Mus. nat. Hist. (Geol) 25: 265-315.
KENNEDY, W. J. & KOLLMANN, H. A. 1977. In: KoLiMANn, H. A. ef al. Beitrage zur
Stratigraphie und Sedimentation der Oberkreide des Festlandsockels im ndordlichen
Niederosterreich. Jb. geol. Bundesantst. Wien 120: 401-447.
KLINGER, H. C. & KENNEDY, W. J. 1980a. Cretaceous faunas from Zululand and Natal, South
Africa. The ammonite subfamily Texanitinae Collignon, 1948. Ann. S. Afr. Mus. 80:
1-356.
KLINGER, H. C. & KENNEDY, W. J. 1980b. Cretaceous faunas from Zululand and Natal, South
Africa. A new sextuberculate texanitid. Ann. S. Afr. Mus. 82: 321-331.
KULLMANN, J. & WIEDMANN, J. 1970. Significance of sutures in phylogeny of Ammonoidea.
Paleont. Contr. Univ. Kans. 44: 1-32.
Matsumoto, T. 1959. Upper Cretaceous Ammonites of California. Il. Mem. Fac. Sci. Kyushu
Univ. (D) Special Volume 1: 1-172.
Matsumoto, T. 1965. A Monograph of the Collignoniceratidae from Hokkaido, Part 1. Mem.
Fac. Sci. Kyushu Univ. (D). 16: 1-80.
Matsumoto, T. 1970. A Monograph of the Collignoniceratidae from Hokkaido, Part IV. Mem.
Fac. Sci. Kyushu Univ. (D). 20: 225-304.
Matsumoto, T. 1971. A Monograph of the Collignoniceratidae from Hokkaido, Part V. Mem.
Fac. Sci. Kyushu Univ. (D). 21: 129-162. +
Matsumoto, T. 1978. In: Matsumoto, T. & HARAGucHI, Y. A new Texanitine ammonite from
Hokkaido. Trans. Proc. palaeont. Soc. Japan (N.S.) 110: 306-318.
Matsumoto, T. & Hirano, H. 1976. Colour patterns in some Cretaceous ammonites from
Hokkaido. Trans. Proc. palaeont. Soc. Japan (N.S.) 102: 334-342.
Matsumoto, T. & UsepA, U. 1962. In Ueda, Y. The type Himenoura Group. Mem. Fac. Sci.
Kyushu Univ. (D). 12: 129-178. =
PERVINQUIERE, L. 1907. Etudes de paléontologie tunisienne. 1. Céphalopodes des terrains
secondaires. Mém. Carte géol. Tunis 1907: 1-438.
Pop, G. & Szasz, L. 1973. Santonianul diu reginunea hategului (Carpatii Meridionali). Studii
Cerc. Geol. 18: 463-467.
REDTENBACHER, A. 1873. Die Cephalopodenfauna der Gosauschichten in den nordéstlichen
Alpen. Abh. Geol. Bundesanst. Wien 5: 91-140.
REESIDE, J. B. 1927. Cephalopods of the Eagle Sandstone and related Formations in the
Western Interior of the United States. Prof. Pap. U.S. geol. Surv. 151: 1-87.
REYMENT, R. A. 1957. Uber einige wirbellose Fossilien aus Nigerien und Kamerun, West-
Afrika. Palaeontographica 109: 41-70.
Roemer, F. A. 1852. Die Kreidebildungen von Texas und ihre organischen Einschliisse. Bonn:
Adolph Marcus.
SCHLUTER, C. 1871-76. Die Cephalopoden der oberen deutschen Kreide. Palaeontographica 21:
1-24 (1871), 25-120 (1872), 24: 121-262 (1876).
SpATH, L. F. 1921. On Cretaceous Cephalopoda from Zululand. Ann. S. Afr. Mus. 12:
217-321.
SpaTH, L. F. 1922. On the Senonian ammonite fauna of Pondoland. Trans. R. Soc. S. Afr. 10:
113-147.
THOMEL, G. 1969. Sur quelques ammonites Turoniennes et Sénoniennes nouvelles ou peu
connues. Annls Paléont. 55: 1-11 (108-119).
CRETACEOUS FAUNAS FROM SOUTH AFRICA 155
WEDEKIND, R. 1916. Uber Lobus, Suturallobus und Inzision. Zentbl. Miner. Geol. Paldont.
1916: 185-195.
WIEDMANN, J. 1978. Eine palaogeographisch interessante Ammonitenfaunula aus der alpinen
Gosau (Santon, Becken von Gosau, Oberésterreich). Eclog. geol. Helv. 71/3: 663-765.
WIEDMANN, J. 1979 Jn: HERM, D., KAUFFMAN, E. G. & WIEDMANN, J. The age and depositional
environment of the “Gosau’’-group (Coniacian-Santonian), Brandenberg/Tirol, Austria.
Mitt. bayer. St. Paldont. Hist. Geol. 19: 27-92.
YaBE, H. & Suimizu, H. 1923. A note on the genus Mortoniceras. Jap. J. Geol. Geogr. 2:
27-30.
Younc, K. 1963. Upper Cretaceous ammonites from the Gulf Coast of the United States.
Univ. Tex. Publs 6304: 1-373.
ZuRcHER, P. 1905. Communication. Bull. Soc. géol. Fr. 5: 686.
wr i
t
}
As
6. SYSTEMATIC papers must conform to the International code of zoological nomenclature
(particularly Articles 22 and 51).
Names of new taxa, combinations, synonyms, etc., when used for the first time, must be
followed by the appropriate Latin (not English) abbreviation, e.g. gen. nov., sp. nov., comb.
nov., syn. nov., etc.
An author’s name when cited must follow the name of the taxon without intervening
punctuation and not be abbreviated; if the year is added, a comma must separate author’s
name and year. The author’s name (and date, if cited) must be placed in parentheses if a
species or subspecies is transferred from its original genus. The name of a subsequent user of
a scientific name must be separated from the scientific name by a colon.
Synonymy arrangement should be according to chronology of names, i.e. all published
scientific names by which the species previously has been designated are listed in chronological
order, with all references to that name following in chronological order, e.g.:
Family Nuculanidae
Nuculana (Lembulus) bicuspidata (Gould, 1845)
Figs 14-15A
Nucula (Leda) bicuspidata Gould, 1845: 37.
Leda plicifera A. Adams, 1856: 50.
Laeda bicuspidata Hanley, 1859: 118, pl. 228 (fig. 73). Sowerby, 1871: pl. 2 (fig. 8a—b).
Nucula largillierti Philippi, 1861: 87.
Leda bicuspidata: Nicklés, 1950: 163, fig. 301; 1955: 110. Barnard, 1964: 234, figs 8-9.
Note punctuation in the above example:
comma separates author’s name and year
“semicolon separates more than one reference by the same author
full stop separates references by different authors
figures of plates are enclosed in parentheses to distinguish them from text-figures
dash, not comma, separates consecutive numbers
Synonymy arrangement according to chronology of bibliographic references, whereby
the year is placed in front of each entry, and the synonym repeated in full for each entry, is
not acceptable.
In describing new species, one specimen must be designated as the holotype; other speci-
mens mentioned in the original description are to be designated paratypes; additional material
not regarded as paratypes should be listed separately. The complete data (registration number,
depository, description of specimen, locality, collector, date) of the holotype and paratypes
must be recorded, e.g.:
Holotype
SAM-—A13535 in the South African Museum, Cape Town. Adult female from mid- tide region, King’s Beach
Port Elizabeth (33°51’S 25°39’E), collected by A. ‘Smith, 15 January 1973.
Note standard form of writing South African Museum registration numbers and date.
7. SPECIAL HOUSE RULES
Capital initial letters
(a) The Figures, Maps and Tables of the paper when referred to in the text
e.g. *... the Figure depicting C. namacolus ...’; *. .. in C. namacolus (Fig. 10)...’
-(b) The prefixes of prefixed surnames in all languages, when used in the text, if not preceded
by initials or full names
e.g. Du Toit but A.L.du Toit; Von Huene but F. von Huene
(c) Scientific names, but not their vernacular derivatives
e.g. Therocephalia, but therocephalian
Punctuation should be loose, omitting all not strictly necessary
Reference to the author should be expressed in the third person
Roman’ numerals should be converted to arabic, except when forming part of the title of a
book or article, such as
‘Revision of the Crustacea. Part VIII. The Amphipoda.’
Specific name must not stand alone, but be preceded by the generic name or its abbreviation
to initial capital letter, provided the same generic name is used consecutively.
Name of new genus or species is not to be included in the title: it should be included in the
abstract, counter to Recommendation 23 of the Code, to meet the requirements of
Biological Abstracts.
WILLIAM JAMES KENNEDY
HERBERT CHRISTIAN KLINGER
&
HERBERT SUMMESBERGER
CRETACEOUS FAUNAS FROM
ZULULAND AND NATAL, SOUTH AFRICA
ADDITIONAL OBSERVATIONS ON THE
AMMONITE SUBFAMILY TEXANITINAE
COLLIGNON, 1948
OCTOBER 1981 | ISSN 0303-2515
CAPE TOWN
INSTRUCTIONS TO AUTHORS
1. MATERIAL should be original and not published elsewhere, in whole or in part.
2. LAYOUT should be as follows:
(a) Centred masthead to consist of
Title: informative but concise, without abbreviations and not including the names of new genera or species
Author’s(s’) name(s)
Address(es) of author(s) (institution where work was carried out)
Number of illustrations (figures, enumerated maps and tables, in this order)
(b) Abstract of not more than 200 words, intelligible to the reader without reference to the text
(c) Table of contents giving hierarchy of headings and subheadings
(d) Introduction
(e) Subject-matter of the paper, divided into sections to correspond with those given in table of contents
(f) Summary, if paper is lengthy
(g) Acknowledgements
(h) References
(Gi) Abbreviations, where these are numerous
3. MANUSCRIPT, to be submitted in triplicate, should be typewritten and neat, double spaced
with 2,5 cm margins all round. First lines of paragraphs should be indented. Tables and a list of
legends for illustrations should be typed separately, their positions indicated in the text. All
pages should be numbered consecutively.
Major headings of the paper are centred capitals; first subheadings are shouldered small
capitals; second subheadings are shouldered italics; third subheadings are indented, shouldered
italics. Further subdivisions should be avoided, as also enumeration (never roman numerals)
of headings and abbreviations.
Footnotes should be avoided unless they are short and essential.
Only generic and specific names should be underlined to indicate italics; all other marking
up should be left to editor and publisher.
4. ILLUSTRATIONS should be reducible to a size not exceeding 12 « 18 cm (19 cm including
legend); the reduction or enlargement required should be indicated; originals larger than
35 x 47 cm should not be submitted; photographs should be rectangular in shape and final
size. A metric scale should appear with all illustrations, otherwise magnification or reduction
should be given in the legend; if the latter, then the final reduction or enlargement should be
taken into consideration.
All illustrations, whether line drawings or photographs, should be termed figures (plates
are not printed; half-tones will appear in their proper place in the text) and numbered in a
single series. Items of composite figures should be designated by capital letters; lettering of
figures is not set in type and should be in lower-case letters.
The number of the figure should be lightly marked in pencil on the back of each illustration.
5. REFERENCES cited in text and synonymies should all be included in the list at the end of
the paper, using the Harvard System (ibid., idem, loc. cit., op. cit. are not acceptable):
(a) Author’s name and year of publication given in text, e.g.:
‘Smith (1969) describes .. .”
‘Smith (1969: 36, fig. 16) describes...’
‘As described (Smith 1969a, 1969b; Jones 1971)’
‘As described (Haughton & Broom 1927)...’
‘As described (Haughton et al. 1927)...’
Note: no comma separating name and year
Dagination indicated by colon, not p.
names of joint authors connected by ampersand
et al. in text for more than two joint authors, but names of all authors given in list of references.
(b) Full references at the end of the paper, arranged alphabetically by names, chronologically
within each name, with suffixes a, b, etc. to the year for more than one paper by the same
author in that year, e.g. Smith (1969a, 19695) and not Smith (1969, 1969a).
For books give title in italics, edition, volume number, place of publication, publisher.
For journal article give title of article, title of journal in italics (abbreviated according to the World list o,
scientific periodicals. 4th ed. London: Butterworths, 1963), series in parentheses, volume number, part
number (only if independently paged) in parentheses, pagination (first and last pages of article).
Examples (note capitalization and punctuation)
BULLOUGH, W. S. 1960. Practical invertebrate anatomy. 2nd ed. London: Macmillan.
FISCHER, P.—H. 1948. Données sur la résistance et de le vitalité des mollusques. J. Conch., Paris 88: 100-140.
FiscHER, P.-H., DuvaL, M. & Rarry, A. 1933. Etudes sur les échanges respiratoires des littorines. Archs
Zool. exp. gén. 74: 627-634. \
Konn, A. J. 1960a. Ecological notes on Conus (Mollusca: Gastropoda) in the Trincomalee region of Ceylon.
Ann. Mag. nat. Hist. (13) 2: 309-320.
Konn, A. J. 19606. Spawning behaviour, egg masses and larval development in Conus from the Indian Ocean.
Bull. Bingham oceanogr. Coll. 17 (4): 1-51.
THEELE, J. 1910. Mollusca: B. Polyplacophora, Gastropoda marina, Bivalvia. In: SCHULTZE, L. Zoologische
und anthropologische Ergebnisse einer Forschungsreise im westlichen und zentralen Siid-Afrika 4: 269-270.
Jena: Fischer. Denkschr. med.-naturw. Ges. Jena 16: 269-270.
(continued inside back cover)
ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
ANNALE VAN DIE SUID-AFRIKAANSE MUSEUM
Volume 86 Band
October 1981 Oktober
Part 5 Deel
cee
TRESS
S VVVIWT
SS
S
OCCLUSAL MORPHOLOGY
OF THE MANDIBULAR PERMANENT MOLARS
OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN NEGRO AND
THE KALAHARI SAN (BUSHMAN)
By
EG RENE
Cape Town Kaapstad
The ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
are issued in parts at irregular intervals as material
becomes available
Obtainable from the South African Museum, P.O. Box 61, Cape Town 8000
Die ANNALE VAN DIE SUID-AFRIKAANSE MUSEUM
word uitgegee in dele op ongereelde tye na gelang van die
beskikbaarheid van stof
Verkrygbaar van die Suid-Afrikaanse Museum, Posbus 61, Kaapstad 8000
OUT OF PRINT/UIT DRUK
iy DCE}, S39), 30D, ESS Stn), SEBS, TD),
BCG =o), LO SCE WOES)
WGD, 5 Tico), SCS), 2), 2, G3), 226), 33, 450)
EDITOR/REDAKTRISE
Ione Rudner
Copyright enquiries to the South African Museum
Kopieregnavrae aan die Suid-Afrikaanse Museum
ISBN 0 86813 023 0
Printed in South Africa by In Suid-Afrika gedruk deur
The Rustica Press, Pty., Ltd., Die Rustica-pers, Edms., Bpk.,
Court Road, Wynberg, Cape Courtweg, Wynberg, Kaap
OCCLUSAL MORPHOLOGY OF THE MANDIBULAR PERMANENT
MOLARS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN NEGRO AND THE
KALAHARI SAN (BUSHMAN)
By
F, E. GRINE
South African Museum, Cape Town
(With 8 figures and 26 tables)
[MS accepted 2 July 1981]
ABSTRACT
A number of morphological crown variants are investigated. These features include the
principal cusp number, the tuberculum sextum and tuberculum intermedium, the configura-
tion of the primary occlusal pattern, the mesial and distal foveae, the deflecting wrinkle, and
the appearance of the occlusal enamel. The definitions and the various methods employed in
the classification of these characters are reviewed. The amount and degree of significant
sexual dimorphism of these crown variants are low in both the San and Negro. Significant
interpopulation differences in these features are more common. The fovea anterior and
tuberculum sextum appear to be the most useful discriminatory characters, while the second
molar displays the greatest number of significant differences between the San and Negro.
A characterization of the lower molar morphology of the San and Negro is provided. Paired
chi-square evaluations of various characters showed most to be independent of one another.
The dental data provided here for the San and the South African Negro are compatible with,
and to some degree corroborate what is known about, the interrelationships of these peoples
from non-dental morphological and genetic data.
CONTENTS
PAGE
Introduction 4 : : : : : ; 5 oo lS8
Material and methods ; : ~~ SS
Definition and classification of morphological features ge OPA
Principal cusp number . : , ; ; : é Pe G2
Tuberculum sextum . : : : ; : : 5 AOS
Tuberculum intermedium . ; ; ; é ‘ . 163
Primary occlusal pattern. j : : : . 164
Deflecting wrinkle . : ; F : : : : . 168
Fovea anterior and posterior : : 5 ; : sof 170
Enamel wrinkling . ; : : : ; : : 5 LIZ
Results : , : A ; : 5 3 : : 5 ke
Discussion . : : : P : ‘ 5 : 5 NEY
Sexual dimorphism : : ; 5 . 199
Characteristics of San and Negro molars ‘ : : . 200
Occlusal morphological interrelationships : 202
Biological interrelationships of the South African Negro
and the Kalahari San . ; : : ; : 4.) 203
Summary . : ‘ A 5 ; ; ; ; 5 730
Acknowledgements ; : : ‘ , : : 5 . 208
References . : : ; : 5 : : ‘ : = 209
157
Ann. S. Afr. Mus. 86 (5), 1981: 157-215, 8 figs, 26 tables.
158 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
INTRODUCTION
The human mandibular molar presents a number of features that are of
importance in both anthropological and palaeoanthropological contexts. These
occlusal characters have been recorded extensively in both recent and fossil
representatives of hominid populations, and they have been used to quantify
both interracial and population differences as well as evolutionary trends.
Amongst the numerous minor morphological variants that can be examined,
several have been shown to have considerable theoretical potential as anthro-
pological markers. These features are: (i) the principal cusp number, (ii) the
presence or absence of the tuberculum sextum, (iii) the presence or absence of
the tuberculum intermedium, (iv) the form of the primary occlusal pattern,
-(v) the presence or absence of a deflecting wrinkle, (vi) the presence or absence
of the mesial and distal foveae, and (vii) the appearance of the enamel (smooth
or crenulate).
The purpose of this paper is to provide information on the morphology
of the lower permanent molars of two populations, the South African Negro
and the Kalahari San (Bushman), for which the majority of these characters
have heretofore not been recorded. Previous investigations of these populations
have been restricted to the detailing of cusp number (Shaw 1927; Drennan 1929;
Oranje 1934) or of the primary cusp and groove pattern (Kiernberger 1955;
Van Reenen 1966; Jacobson 1967). Morris (1970) presented data on the fre-
quency of the metaconid deflecting wrinkle on the first molars only.
Although these characters have been described and documented exten-
sively in the literature, there remains a fundamental lack of consensus amongst
workers on the classification and interpretation of several of these features.
This lack of agreement presents one of the major obstacles which preclude
comparisons between results reported in the various studies of these features
in recent human populations.
Thus, in addition to providing information on the morphology of the
South African Negro and San lower molar, the problems of definition and
classification of these characters will also be considered in the hope that a
workable series of models might be developed.
MATERIAL AND METHODS
The dentitions examined are drawn from the Khoisanoid and Negroid
populations of southern Africa. The Negroid sample comprises skulls of South
African Bantu-speaking Negroes housed in the Raymond A. Dart Collection
of Human Skeletons, Department of Anatomy, University of the Witwaters-
rand. The skeletal material housed in this collection has been prepared from
dissection-hall subjects and, thus, the sex of each individual is known and the
tribal group is known for most. The Negro mandibles examined here were
drawn from the following tribal groups: Natal Nguni (Zulu and Swazi), Cape
Neguni (Xhosa and Pondo), Sotho (Sotho and Tswana), and Shangana—Tonga
PERMANENT MOLARS OF NEGRO AND SAN 159
(Shangaan and Tonga). The major group only (e.g. Natal Nguni, Sotho) was
recorded for each individual because De Villiers (1968) has shown through
analyses of skull variability that there are no distinguishing intertribal
differences.
Although some of the material housed in the Raymond A. Dart Collection
is probably derived from individuals who lived on the Witwatersrand for
perhaps their entire lives, or at least prior to their deaths, some (or their parents)
had moved to the Witwatersrand from their ‘traditional’ tribal areas. The
geographical distribution of the tribal groups from which material was selected
for study is shown in Figure 1. The numbers of individuals derived from each
group are recorded in Table 1. A total of 506 Negro dentitions (353 male and
153 female) was examined.
The term San, rather than Bushman, is used in this study as the former
is taken to denote a biological entity whereas the latter refers more precisely
SOUTH WEST AFRICA
NAMIBIA
BOTSWANA
HaSsonacea
eecce RBeooGanod
eeeecee; . eee SoS
eecccce
Wsccasosaee
Nooes6e6ac
ecco
eecce
eeocccce
eccccor
eocee oP s000ce
Areeccccece
eecccccce
eee
®@-eece
eececce
eececeo
e
aoe oe
~#aaeanegee
S22GS
a Ps “7 >
SOUTH AFRICA
oop
Oks
mefls -
&
Nan
ae
SSS
CWA
TH,
Fig. 1. Distribution of the South African Negro population groups sampled in the present
study. 1—Natal Nguni, 2.—Cape Nguni, 3—Sotho, 4—Shangana—Tonga (adapted from
Lawton 1967).
160 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
to the linguistic and ethnological practices of these people (Jenkins & Tobias
1977; Tobias 1978).
TABLE 1
Number of Negro and San individuals examined.
Population Tribal or linguistic group Male Female Total
Negro Natal Nguni : : ; ; : : 111 60 171
Cape Nguni . 3 : ; ‘ ; : 90 34 124
SOMO) a wee ec ke Dean 99 55 154
Venda . : ; 3 : : ; , Dil 3 24
Shangana—Tonga : ‘ 3 ; : 32 y 34
353 154 507
San Nharo . : : : P ‘ ; : 16 14 30
G/wi_. Ree ey Am san |” alas 6 3 9
‘Tshu-Khwe’ cee eke gaa emma 8 y 10
kx ?ao// %€T : : : 5 : : 5 5 10
IXOOtr tee et Pa ee ee IS) 2) 36
Unspecified . : ; : : k ; 66 64 130
116 109 7 DI5)
The San sample is comprised of plaster casts made from impressions of
living subjects taken by Van Reenen and his co-workers on three separate trips
to the Kalahari in 1958, 1959, and 1964 (Van Reenen 1966). The sex of each
individual is known, and the ‘tribal’ group was recorded for a number of the
subjects.
The San populations recorded are drawn from the Northern, Central and
Southern Bush linguistic groups. The Nharo and G/wi form a homogeneous
linguistic group which Bleek (1927) termed the Central Bush language group. —
Westphal (1963) renamed this unit the Tshu-Khwe linguistic family. Some ten
individuals (eight males and two females) were recorded in the field notes as
‘Tshu-Khwe’, and although this is not properly a ‘tribal group’ it is indicated
in Table | as a population. The #kx%ao//€i belong to the Northern Bush
(Bleek 1927) or Zhu (Westphal 1963) language group, and the !x66 are con-
sidered to belong to the Southern Bush language group.* The numbers of
individuals recorded for the various ‘tribal’ or linguistic groups are presented
in Table |. This information was not available for most of the material examined.
A total of 225 casts of San dentitions (116 males and 109 females) was
examined.
The San casts were made at a number of different localities in Botswana.
These places are located, for the most part, over the western side of that country
(Fig. 2), and they comprised private farms, small settlements dominated by a
trading store, and areas around boreholes. Van Reenen (1964) lists some
thirteen different places at which San dentitions were examined.
* Thanks to A. Traill (Dept. of Linguistics, University of the Witwatersrand) for these
spellings — Editor.
PERMANENT MOLARS OF NEGRO AND SAN 161
For each individual only a single tooth, usually the left, of any one tooth
type (i.e. M,, M. or Mg) was examined. Thus, throughout, where reference is
made to number (N) this refers to both number of teeth and number of indi-
ZIMBABWE
SOUTH WEST AFRICA/
NAMIBIA
ees REPUBLIC
; DEKAR | OF
GHANZI ° SUNNYSIDE
ne BOTSWANA
» © TAKATSHWANE
\. @ LONE TREE
SOUTH AFRICA
Fig. 2. Areas from which most of the San, whose dental casts were examined, were derived.
viduals. In each instance only those teeth that were undamaged and not
obviously diseased were examined. Berry (1976) has shown that most minor
dental variants are destroyed by wear, and, therefore, only those teeth that had
suffered minimal abrasion or attrition were included. Not every individual
examined presented a full dental complement.
Data were recorded on coded sheets and then transferred to computer
punch cards. The data were then processed and ‘cleaned’ via the OSIRIS
programs package, and analysed via the SPSS programs package (Nie ef al.
1975).
162 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
DEFINITION AND CLASSIFICATION OF
MORPHOLOGICAL FEATURES
PRINCIPAL CUSP NUMBER
The protoconid, metaconid, hypoconid, entoconid, and hypoconulid are
the principal cusps. The criterion accepted here for the presence of a cusp was
that it represented a distinct entity, demarcated by deep grooves from adjacent
cusps. The number of cusps present were recorded. No attempt was made to
quantify the sizes of the cusps. A survey of the literature indicated this mode
of notation to be the most widely used; a much smaller number of authors have
recorded ‘half-sized’ cusps (Drennan 1929; Snyder et al. 1969; Corruccini
1972), and an even smaller number have utilized either Hrdlicka’s (1910) or
Janzer’s (1927) notation schemes for scoring reduced cuspal size (Goldstein
1931; Kiernberger 1955). Neither Hrdli¢ka’s nor Janzer’s method of counting
Fig. 3. Drawing of a generalized mandibular left molar showing some of
the features examined in this study. e—entoconid, h—hypoconid,
hl—hypoconulid, m—metaconid, p—protoconid, pm—postmetaconulid,
ti—tuberculum intermedium, ts—tuberculum sextum.
PERMANENT MOLARS OF NEGRO AND SAN 163
cusps differentiates between the principal cusps and the secondary cuspulids
(e.g. tuberculum sextum and intermedium). Thus, data presented by authors
who followed either of these two systems are not directly comparable with the
results of studies in which secondary cuspulids have been recorded independently
of the principal cusp number.
TUBERCULUM SEXTUM
This is an occasional cuspulid situated between the entoconid and the hypo-
conulid (Fig. 3). Selenka (1898) first proposed the name tuberculum accessorium
posteriore internum for such a structure. Hellman (1928) proposed that it be
referred to as the C6, and Bennejeant (1936) named it the tuberculum sextum.
Matsuda (1961), Turner & Hanihara (1977), Turner & Swindler (1978), and
Turner et al. (1969) in the literature accompanying their ‘Cusp 6’ Plaque, have
referred to this cuspulid as the entoconulid. However, the entoconulid, or pre-
entoconulid of MacIntyre (1966) is located on the entocristid, which is mesial
of the tip of the entoconid (Van Valen 1966; Szalay 1969; Hershkovitz 1971),
whereas the tuberculum sextum is situated distal to the entoconid. Thus, the
tuberculum sextum is the homologue of the postentoconulid of the mammalian
molar (Hershkovitz 1971).
In some studies the size of this cuspulid relative to the size of the hypo-
conulid has been recorded (e.g. Turner 1970, 1976, 1979; Turner & Hanihara
1977; Turner & Swindler 1978). In the present analysis the absence or presence
only of the tuberculum sextum was recorded, and its size gradients were not
considered. This feature was regarded as present only if a separate cuspal tip
was discernible, bounded by distinct grooves separating it from both the ento-
conid and hypoconulid. Thus, the tooth classified as category 1 on Turner et al.
(1969) ‘Cusp 6’ Plaque would have been regarded here as showing absence of
this cuspulid.
TUBERCULUM INTERMEDIUM
This occasional cuspulid is located between the metaconid and the ento-
conid (Fig. 3). Selenka (1898) recorded the presence of this feature on some
pongid lower molars and proposed the name tuberculum accessorium mediale
internum for it. Schwalbe (1916) and Hellman (1928) referred to this structure
respectively as the tuberculum intermedium and the C7. These latter two names
are the most frequently encountered in the anthropological literature. Robin-
son (1956), in his description of the South African australopithecine teeth,
referred to this tubercle as the lingual or median lingual accessory cusp.
As pointed out by Jorgensen (1956), it is difficult to ascertain whether
various authors who have reported data on this cuspulid have referred, in all
cases, to the same structure. The main reason for this ambiguity appears to be
the presence in some teeth of two distinct cuspulids between the metaconid
164 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
and entoconid. In such teeth the problem is to determine which of these struc-
tures is homologous with the tuberculum intermedium.
The cuspulid that lies directly distal to the tip of the metaconid (Fig. 3)
has been referred to as the metastylid (Osborn 1888; MacIntyre 1966; Van
Valen 1966; Szalay 1969), the tuberculum internum accessorius anterius
(Remane 1960), the postmetaconulid (Hershkovitz 1971), and the metaconulid
(Turner 1970, 1979; Turner & Hanihara 1977; Turner & Swindler 1978; Turner
et al. 1970).
The cuspulid that is situated directly mesial to the tip of the entoconid
has been called the entostylid (Osborn 1888), the tuberculum internum acces-
sorium posterius (Remane 1960), the pre-entoconulid (MacIntyre 1966) and
the entoconulid (Van Valen 1966; Szalay 1969; Hershkovitz 1971).
Selenka (1898), in his description of the tuberculum accessorium mediale
internum, states that it is usually separated from the metaconid by only a
shallow groove, it seldom appears as a part of the entoconid, and that in excep-
tional cases it shows no continuity with either the metaconid or entoconid.
Most workers have stated either explicitly, or indicated in their illustrations
of the tuberculum intermedium, that they consider this cuspulid to be homo-
logous with the postmetaconulid (Bennejeant 1936; Jorgensen 1956; Robinson
1956; Hanihara 1961; Hanihara & Minamidate 1965; Hershkovitz 1971;
Matsuda 1961; Turner & Hanihara 1977; Suzuki & Sakai 1956c, 1973). How-
ever, Turner et al. (1970) depict an entoconulid (more precisely a swollen mesial
entoconid crest) as a Type 1A development of the tuberculum intermedium in
their ‘Cusp 7’ Plaque.
In a previous study (Grine 1978), a number of teeth were found to possess
both a well-defined tuberculum intermedium and a distinct postmetaconulid.
In addition, this study revealed a number of molars in which both the mesial
crest of the entoconid and the distal aspect of the metaconid were enlarged and
separated from the tips of the cusps. Because of this the author cannot subscribe
with full confidence to the homology of the tuberculum intermedium with the
postmetaconulid.
In the present study the presence of a tuberculum intermedium was recog-
nized only where a distinct cuspulid was present between, and well-separated
from, both the metaconid and entoconid. Thus, the teeth displayed in Turner
et al. (1969) ‘Cusp 7’ Plaque categories 2, 3 and 4 and in Hanihara’s (1961)
Plaque D9 categories 2 and 3 are recognized as possessing a tuberculum inter-
medium. No attempt was made to quantify the size of this cuspulid.
PRIMARY OCCLUSAL PATTERN
The Dryopothecus pattern of the lower molar was first defined and described
by Gregory (1916). The concept and diagnosis of this pattern were expanded
upon by Gregory (1926a, 1934) and Gregory & Hellman (19265). The definition
of the pattern eventually included the presence of (i) five principal cusps, (ii) a
PERMANENT MOLARS OF NEGRO AND SAN 165
symmetrical arrangement of the grooves surrounding the hypoconid forming
the tines and the groove between the metaconid and entoconid forming the
stem of a Y, and (ili) a broad basal contact of the metaconid and hypoconid.
Gregory (1926a, 19265) noted that in man the symmetrical arrangement
characteristic of the Dryopithecus molar has been replaced by a ‘cruciform’ or
‘+ pattern’ where ‘with the crowding forward of the entoconid, the transverse
sulcus in front of the entoconid has been brought nearly in line with the trans-
verse sulcus between the protoconid and hypoconid’ (1962a: 423).
Gregory & Hellman (1926a, 1926b) added that the metaconid—hypoconid
contact of the Dryopithecus pattern had been lost in the human molar and had
been replaced by a protoconid—entoconid contact, which they considered to be
a feature of the ‘cruciform’ or ‘+ pattern’.
Hellman (1928) presented a formal scoring scheme and set of definitions
by which the occlusal pattern of the lower molar could be classified. He recog-
nized four distinct types: Y5, +5, (4 (or Y4), and +4 (Fig. 4). Reference to
Figure 4 indicates that a + pattern was considered by him to possess either a
protoconid-entoconid contact (Fig. 4C) or a true cruciform point contact
(Fig. 4D). Hellman’s (1928) occlusal pattern types were determined according
to the arrangement of the lingual and mesiobuccal grooves rather than by the
type of cuspal contact exhibited by a tooth. A number of workers have utilized
this system of classification.
Weidenreich (1937) considered that the cruciform (true point contact of
the metaconid, protoconid, hypoconid and entoconid) and _ protoconid—
entoconid contacts should be regarded as two distinct types. He proposed the
Fig. 4. Left lower molars showing Hellman’s criteria for the classification
of the primary occlusal pattern (after Hellman 1928: 165, fig. 7).
166 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
name ‘reversed Dryopithecus pattern’ for the protoconid—entoconid contact
(Weidenreich 1937: 96). However, Weidenreich’s suggestion remained unheeded
until Senyurek (19525), in a study of the ancient inhabitants of Alaca Héyiik,
noticed that several lower molars in his sample exhibited a protoconid—ento-
conid contact. He also regarded this as a significant deviation from both the
cruciform and Dryopithecus patterns, and he proposed to call this ‘deviant
plan .. . the protoconid—entoconid connection’ (19526: 184). It was not until
1955, though, when Jorgensen described the protoconid—entoconid contact as
an ‘X pattern’, that the differentiation of Hellman’s + pattern into two distinct
morphological entities became widely accepted by students of human dentition.
Jorgensen (1955) recognized three types of lower molar pattern: the Y pattern,
characterized by a metaconid—hypoconid contact; the + pattern, defined by a
point contact of the protoconid, metaconid, hypoconid and entoconid; and the
X pattern (Fig. 5). Thus, whereas Hellman’s (1928) scheme employed the
Mesial
Mesial
Alesial
Fig. 5. Right lower molars showing Jorgensen’s
criteria for the classification of the primary
occlusal pattern. A. Y pattern. B. + pattern.
C. X pattern. These standards were used in the
present study (after Jorgensen 1955: 197, fig. 1).
PERMANENT MOLARS OF NEGRO AND SAN 167
Fig. 6. Left mandibular third molars showing the H pattern.
A. H pattern with metaconid, protoconid and hypoconid
contacting at a point. B. H pattern with metaconid and hypo-
conid separated by the protoconid.
relationships of the mesiobuccal and lingual grooves, Jorgensen’s (1955) molar
types were defined on the basis of cuspal contact.
Variants other than Jorgensen’s (1955) three categories are encountered.
Senyurek (1952a), for example, noted a single molar (M;) amongst the Chalco-
lithic and Copper age dentitions from Anatolia in which the protoconid crest
was so well developed as to effect contact with the base of the hypoconulid.
168 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
The present author has found another interesting variant of cuspal contact
in some South African Negro and San lower molars (Grine 1978). In this
variant the entoconid is prevented by a grossly enlarged tuberculum inter-
medium from making contact with either the protoconid or metaconid (Fig. 6).
The presence of an enlarged tuberculum intermedium does not necessarily affect
the relationships of the protoconid, metaconid and hypoconid, in which case
a Y pattern is expressed. However, teeth in which these three cusps contact
at a point (Fig. 6A), or in which the metaconid and hypoconid are separated
by the protoconid (Fig. 6B), cannot be classified as possessing a conventional
+ or X pattern. A new category, designated by the letter ‘H’, was proposed
for the classification of crowns exhibiting these latter variants (Grine 1978).
In the present study the cuspal relationships of molars were classified as
Y, +, X (Jorgensen 1955), or H. It must be stressed that the Y pattern, as used
here, is not synonymous with the Dryopithecus pattern.
Also, the principal cusp number and the primary occlusal pattern were
scored separately. Studies of these two characters have shown them to be
unrelated (Jorgensen 1955; Garn et al. 1966a, 1966b; Devoto & Cigliano 1970;
Devoto et al. 1970) or only very slightly related within individual teeth (Rosen-
zweig & Zilberman 1969).
DEFLECTING WRINKLE
Weidenreich (1937) noted that the dispositions of the crests of the principal
cusps may affect the expression of the primary occlusal pattern. He pointed
out that on the RM, of the Heidelberg (Mauer) mandible while the mesio-
buccal and lingual grooves form a straight transverse fissure, ‘the metaconid is
in contact with the hypoconid by means of a special wrinkle crossing the
intersection of the furrows’ (Weidenreich 1937: 90). In his description of a LM,
of Gigantopithecus blacki, Weidenreich noted a similar structure where ‘the
metaconid has a large, well-defined median wrinkle (dw, Plate 10) which emerges
from the tip, extends in the direction of the protoconid, and there forms a right
angle distally. It transverses the groove between the protoconid and hypoconid
and meets the mesial wrinkle of the entoconid approximately in the centre of
the occlusal surface . . .” (Weidenreich 1945: 71-72). (Weidenreich’s (1945)
plate 10 is reproduced here in Figure 7.) He (1945: 84) proposed the name
‘deflecting wrinkle’ for this structure.
A number of studies have been made of this feature in modern human
populations (Hanihara 1956, 1963, 1966, 1970; Hanihara et al. 1964, 1975;
Suzuki & Sakai 19566; Morris 1970; Turner 1976, 1979; Turner & Hanihara
1977: Turner & Swindler 1978; Axelsson & Kirveskari 1977). Perhaps even
more than any other occlusal feature, the deflecting wrinkle has been subjected
to widely disparate schemes of classification.
Hanihara (1961, Plaque D 10) presented a model for the classification of
the deflecting wrinkle in which two types were recognized: (i) the central meta-
PERMANENT MOLARS OF NEGRO AND SAN 169
Fig. 7. Left lower molar of Gigantopithecus blacki
showing the deflected metaconid crest (dw) which
Weidenreich named the deflecting wrinkle (after
Weidenreich 1945, pl. 10 (fig. b1)).
conid crest was ‘very well developed in its thickness’ (shown by the dm, of his
Plaque) and (ii) as shown by the M, of his Plaque, the metaconid crest exhibited
a true deflecting wrinkle (true in the sense that this feature was defined by
Weidenreich). Hanihara (1961: 42) stated that ‘the well-developed central
ridge seems to be homologous with one which is described as a deflecting
wrinkle by Weidenreich’. The crests are, in themselves, homologous, but a
straight, well-developed crest is not a deflecting wrinkle. Following Hanihara’s
mistaken identification of a straight metaconid crest as a deflecting wrinkle,
a number of workers (e.g. Hanihara et al. 1975; Morris 1970; Turner 1976,
1979; Turner & Swindler 1978; Axelsson & Kirveskari 1977) have either
developed or followed classifications in which a thick, straight metaconid
ridge is erroneously recognized as a manifestation of a deflecting wrinkle.
170 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
An essential feature of the deflecting wrinkle, as defined originally by
Weidenreich (1945), is that the metaconid crest courses towards the proto-
conid and is deflected distally in mid-course. Although Weidenreich described
this feature as traversing the longitudinal groove between the hypoconid and
entoconid, a deflected crest may be foreshortened so that it does not emerge
from between the protoconid and metaconid. Therefore, it is proposed that the
deflecting wrinkle be defined as a crest in which the terminal portion, through
strong angulation, comes to be orientated along a different axis from the
proximal portion. Thus, a deflecting wrinkle may be described as occurring
in relation to any of the principal cusps. On this definition a thick, or well-
developed, straight cuspal ridge is not recognized as a deflecting wrinkle.
In the present study, the metaconid was examined for evidence of a
deflecting wrinkle. The main crest of this cusp was classified as either (i) absent,
(ii) straight and weakly developed, (iii) straight and strongly developed,
(iv) deflected, or (v) represented by a distinct accessory cuspulid.
FOVEA ANTERIOR AND POSTERIOR
The fovea anterior is probably homologous with the trigonid basin
(Hrdlicka 1924; Weidenreich 1937; Hershkovitz 1971). The name fovea anterior
appears to have been proposed by Selenka (1898). Hrdli¢ka (1924) referred to
this feature as the precuspidal fossa and Van Valen (1966) proposed to call it
the pre-fossid. Elsewhere, the author (Grine 198la—d) has used the names
fovea anterior and trigonid basin interchangeably.
In the present study the presence or absence of this fossid was recorded.
No distinction of the various configurations assumed by the fovea anterior
(Sakura 1979) was made.
The fovea posterior, as named by Selenka (1898) occupies the distal or
distolingual corner of the occlusal surface. Hrdlicka (1924) referred to this
feature as the post-cuspidal basin, but elsewhere in the same paper he used this
term in reference to the talonid basin. Van Valen (1966) called this basin the
post-fossid, while Hershkovitz (1971) preferred the term post-talonid basin
or fossid.
Biggerstaff (1968, 1975) utilized the presence or absence of the fovea
posterior in combination with the principal cusp number for classifying the
lower molar. He recognized three categories of crowns: (i) four-cusped, (ii) five-
cusped without a fovea posterior, and (iii) five-cusped with a fovea posterior.
It is not clear why Biggerstaff did not recognize a subdivision of four-cusped
teeth, namely with or without a fovea posterior. In the course of the present
study a number of four-cusped molars with or without a distal fossid were
encountered. Hence, Biggerstaff’s (1968, 1975) classification cannot be accepted
as complete.
The absence or presence of the fovea posterior was recorded here, and
no attempt was made to classify the shape or size of the fossid.
PERMANENT MOLARS OF NEGRO AND SAN 171
Fig. 8. Lower right permanent molars showing the presence (A)
and absence (B) of what was regarded as crenulate enamel in the
present study.
yD ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
ENAMEL WRINKLING
The smoothness or crenulation of occlusal enamel has been considered
by relatively few workers in studies of recent human dentitions (Pedersen 1949;
Senyurek 19525; Kiernberger 1955; Jacob 1967), although the phylogenetic
significance of crenulate enamel was the subject of debate in the earlier literature
(e.g. Selenka 1898; De Terra 1905; Gregory 1922; Abel 1931; Adloff 1937,
1938; Weidenreich 1937; Gregory et al. 1938).
The paucity of population studies on crenulate enamel is understandable for
two reasons: (1) it does not appear possible to classify objectively different
degrees of enamel folding, and (ii) enamel wrinkling can be studied only on
teeth with either no wear or only minimal wear. Moreover, the genetic factors
influencing the expression of these wrinkles are uncertain (Biggerstaff 1968),
especially in view of the findings by Ockerse (1943), Malherbe & Ockerse (1944),
and Moller (1965, 1967) that cuspal height and relief are inversely proportional
to the amount of fluorine intake in humans. These workers found that in areas
with relatively high fluorine content in the drinking-water, the teeth of residents
exhibited low, smooth cusps and shallow, broad primary grooves.
Pedersen (1949) recorded the presence of wrinkled enamel in the dentition
of the east Greenland Eskimo and provided exampies of what he regarded as
crenulate enamel (Pedersen 1949, plate 14, figs 77-78). The Ms; which Pedersen
illustrated in his figure 77 is not regarded as crenulate by the present author,
but the M, pictured in his figure 78 is considered as such. The difference between
crenulate and non-crenulate crowns, as classified here, centres around the
degree of development of secondary cuspal crests. Each principal cusp may
possess one or more cristids which may be variously represented and delineated.
The presence of well-defined secondary cuspal cristids and other subsidiary
crests (Fig. 8A) was regarded here as an expression of crenulate enamel.
In the present study the absence or presence of crenulate enamel (Fig. 8)
was noted in those molars that had suffered only minimal wear. No attempt
was made to classify the different degrees of expression of these accessory
cristids.
RESULTS
The frequencies of the principal cusp numbers of the permanent lower
molars of the South African Negro and Kalahari San are given in Table 2. No
significant sexual differences exist in either racial group in the expression of
cusp number on any of the mandibular teeth.
The expression of cusp numbers on the first and third molars of the San
and South African Negro are essentially similar. About 99,0 per cent of San
and Negro first molars are five-cusped. Approximately 80,0 per cent of San
and Negro third molars have five cusps. There is a striking difference between
these two populations in the number of cusps on the second molar. Whereas
the Negro M, shows an almost equal expression of either five or four cusps,
the San tooth exhibits five cusps in a high proportion of cases.
PERMANENT MOLARS OF NEGRO AND SAN 173
TABLE 2
Lower molar cusp number of South African Negro and San.
Cusp M, M, M;
Population Sex no. N Ws N Za N Vi
MeetOw. S.C Male 5 242 = 99.2 136. 45:0 236 . 78.4
4 2 0,8 166 55,0 61 20,3
3 — — — o- 4 3
Female 5 100 98,0 58 54,7 Ti 80,7
4 2 2,0 48 45,3 17 19,3
3 — — — — — —
Combined 5 342 ©9988 194 47,6 307 += 78,9
4 4 ie? 214". S24 qa, 201
3 — _ —_ — 4 1,0
San . ( Male 5 62 100,0 42 80,8 30 = 78,9
4 — — 100, 3192 years ALTE
3 Bee. ae = sa ae ee.
Female 5 70 98,6 38. 760 34 = 82,9
4 1 1,4 12%. 24:0 7 i/o
3 a uate ae fe ae she
Combined 5 32. 992 80 § 78,4 64 ~#81,0
4 1 0,8 22 D6 15 19,0
3 =e age = cae pae2
TABLE 3
Comparison of lower molar cusp numbers of South African Negro and San reported in the
literature. Percentage frequencies. Sexes combined.
Population Tooth 5 cusps 4 cusps 3 cusps Reference
DOBDGD | Sr By 99,2 0,8 Jacobson 1967
98,8 2 — Present study
M, 55,1 44,9 — Shaw 1927
33,6 66,4 — Jacobson 1967
47,6 52,4 — Present study
M; 66,4 33,0 0,6 Jacobson 1967
78,9 20,1 1,0 Present study
San 5 a a i a M, 100,0 — — Drennan 1929
100,0 — —_— Oranje 1934
100,0 — — Kiernberger 1955
100,0 — — Van Reenen 1966
99,2 0,8 — Present study
M, 25,0 75,0 — Shaw 1927
92,5 TES — Drennan 1929
100,0 — — Oranje 1934
44,4 55,6 — Kiernberger 1955
82,4 es — Van Reenen 1966
78,4 21,6 — Present study
M3; 86,0 14,0 — Drennan 1929
100,0 — — Oranje 1934
95,0 5,0 — Kiernberger 1955
59,1 40,9 — Van Reenen 1966
81,0 19,0 — Present study
174 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
The difference in cuspal number on the M, was found to be significant
between the Negro and San males (X? = 22,66; p < 0,005), Negro and San
females (X? = 6,50; p < 0,025) and between the sexually pooled Negro and
San samples (X? = 31,30; p < 0,005).
Shaw (1927) reported frequencies for the cusp number of the San M,
which are almost exactly the opposite of the frequencies recorded here (Table 3).
Oranje (1934) stated that all mandibular molars of the San are characterized
by five cusps. Unfortunately, neither Shaw nor Oranje stated the provenance
of the specimens that they regarded as San. Drennan (1929) recorded cusp
number in the dentition of a supposed San population, the remains of which
were exhumed in November 1926 from graves near Colesberg, Cape Province
(Table 3). Slome (1929) studied the same skeletal remains and noted that ‘these
skeletons are the remains of what are supposed to have been Cape Bush people,
who died during the smallpox epidemic of 1866. . . . The skeletons from these
graves seem to belong to a somewhat mixed group of individuals. Many of them
are good Bush types, quite like the Kalahari Bushman... a few are Bantu [sic]
in type and there may be Hottentot types. It is possible that skeleton 29 had
some European blood’ (Slome 1929: 33-34). Nevertheless, Drennan (1929)
included every individual in his ‘San’ sample. Kiernberger (1955), too, recorded
the cusp number for a group of Khoisanoid skulls that had been collected in
the Kalahari by Poch in 1907-1909. Kiernberger (1955) classified the lower
molars according to Janzer’s (1927) method, and thus she did not record cusp
number directly. The cusp numbers of the lower molars in her sample can be
determined from her data, however, and these are presented in Table 3. The
percentage frequencies presented in Table 3 are not the same as those which
Kiernberger (1955: 30) reported in her text, as the figures quoted by her are
derived from her total sample, which included a range of people variously
recorded as ‘Korana, Hottentotten-Buschmannmischlung, Neger-Buschmann-
mischlung’. Her data also often includes both teeth of any one type from a
single individual.
The percentage frequencies of lower molar cusp number recorded here
for the Negro and San (Table 2) are comparable with those reported in the more
recent surveys of Negro and San dentitions (Table 3), except that there is a
disparity between the frequencies reported by Van Reenen (1966) and the
present author for cusp number on the San M,: the same material was examined
by both authors. It is possible that this discrepancy is the result of interobserver
differences in counting cusps, but it is also possible that the disparity is the
result of the author’s recomputation of Van Reenen’s (1966) data.
Lower molar cusp numbers in the South African Negro, the Kalahari San
and other human populations are presented in Tables 4-6. The human first
mandibular molar tends to be five-cusped, and the impression gained from
Table 4 is that, despite the disparities sometimes evident in the frequencies
recorded for single populations, the incidence of five-cusped first molars in the
South African Negro and San is relatively high. The second mandibular tends
PERMANENT MOLARS OF NEGRO AND SAN E75
TABLE 4
Percentage frequencies of cusp number of lower first permanent molar reported for various
human populations. Sexes combined.
Group Population 5 cusps 4 cusps Reference
Mongoloid Amerindian . . . 100,0 Brewer-Carias et al. 1976
95,6 44 Perzigian 1976
73,4 26,6 Campusano ef al. 1972
100,0 — Dahlberg 1949
89,0 11,0 Devoto & Cigliana 1970
90,0 10,0 Devoto & Perrotto 1972
100,0 — Goaz & Miller 1966
99,3 0.6 Goldstein 1948
80,0 20,0 Hooton 1930
91,3 8,7 Lavelle 1971
100,0 — Leigh 1937
99,4 0,6 Nelson 1938
98,5 i FE Snyder ef al. 1969
Eskimoid . 95,6 45 Goldstein 1931
100,0 — Moorrees 1957
97,7 12 Pedersen 1949
Chinese 100,0 — Hellman 1928
93,2 6,8 Lavelle 1971
Japanese . 91,5 8,5 Matsuda 1961
98,0 2,0 Suzuki & Sakai 1957
99,9 0,0 Turner 1979
Ainu 95,6 44 Suzuki & Sakai 1957
96,8 a Ss Turner 1979
Hawaiian . 98,0 2,0 Chappel 1927
99.0 1,0 Katich & Turner 1975
Easter Island . E 96,0 4.0 Turner & Scott 1976
Wanese -. - 100,0 — Harris et al. 1975
Australoid Austral. Aborigine 97,0 3,0 Campbell 1925
100,0 — Hellman 1928
100,0 — Lavelle 1971
Melanesian Naisoi 80,8 19,2 Bailet et a/. 1968
Naisoi & Kw Oio . 79,0 21,0 Sofaer et al. 1972
New Britain 96,3 3,7 Dahlberg 1961
100,0 0,0 Turner & Swindler 1978
Caucasoid European . 82,5 BES Berry 1976
78,2 2AS Brabant & Twiesselman 1964
84,5 152 Brabant 1971
89.0 11,0 Hellman 1928
83,0 17,0 Hellman 1928
89.4 10.6 Jorgensen 1955
95,0 5,0 Lavelle 1971
American . 86,0 10,0 Dahlberg 1949
89.0 11,0 Hellman 1928
87,0 13,0 Hellman 1928
Yemeni 85.0 15,0 Rosenzweig & Zilberman 1967
Cochini 78,0 22,0 Rosenzweig & Zilberman 1967
Bedouin 83.6 16,4 Rosenzweig & Zilberman 1969
Samaritans 94.3 a | Rosenzweig ef a/. 1969
Tristan da Cunha 88.4 11,6 Thomsen 1955
Negroid Ugandan . 99,7 0,2 Barnes 1969
West African . 99,0 1,0 Hellman 1928
91,7 8,3 Lavelle 1971
East African . 95,1 49 Chagula 1960
South African 98.8 1,2 Present study
West Indian . 82.0 18,0 Lavelle 1971
American Negro . 99.0 1,0 Hellman 1928
Khoisanoid San 99.2 0.8 Present study
Note that the rows do not in all cases equal 100 per cent.
176
ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
TABLE 5
Percentage frequencies of cusp number of lower second permanent molar reported for various
human populations. Sexes combined.
Group
Mongoloid
Australoid
Melanesian
Caucasoid
Negroid
Khoisanoid
Population
Amerindian
Eskimoid .
Chinese
Japanese
Ainu
Hawaiian .
Easter Island .
Yapese
Polynesia .
Austral. Aborigine
Naisoi
New Britain .
Melanesian
European .
American .
Yemeni
Cochini
Bedouin
Samaritans :
Tristan da Cunha
Egyptian .
Indian
Ugandan. .
West African .
East African .
South African
West Indian .
American Deere
San
84,9
39,1
92,4
71,0
62,0
66,6
72,0
Dimi
32,0
45,9
10,1
63,0
32,6
50,5
52,0
34,9
45,5
24,3
76,8
46,0
77,0
76,6
43,0
55,5
60,9
19,0
20,4
28,8
68,6
42,4
21,0
Ne
w 2)
»
—
vise
r I -B 00 90 ON 00
SO OMNNUOOC CO
Vv ewe we & | | i}
~)
v
NBENNN SE
v
Ww
SPN MOAN DAR AN
ROBDHDOORKAGWAOO
~
oo
S cusps 4 cusps
Oo
OM
—
BN 00 SO NI N10 B NON 00 W 2.5 SO NI
ARON OOPFOWOW OAo
v
N
ve
a
~
NOS Naar Oi (Nee Nee ND
ANBBAWONDAAIN W
v
52,4
75,6
70,0
21,6
3 cusps
3,4
8,3
0,0
0,0
Note that the rows do not in alle cases equal 100 per cent.
Reference
Brewer-Carias et al. 1976
Campusano et al. 1972
Corruccini 1972
Dahlberg 1949
Devoto & Cigliano 1970
Devoto & Perrotto 1972
Goaz & Miller 1966
Goldstein 1948
Hellman 1928
Hooton 1930
Lavelle 1971
Leigh 1937
Nelson 1938
Perzigian 1976
Snyder et al. 1969
Sofaer, Niswander et al. 1972
Sofaer, Niswander ef al. 1972
Sofaer, Niswander et al. 1972
Sullivan 1920
Hrdligka 1909
Hrdli¢ka 1909
Goldstein 1931
Hellman 1928
Moorrees 1957
Pedersen 1949
Hellman 1928
Lavelle 1971
Matsuda 1961
Turner 1979
Turner & Hanihara 1977
Chappel 1927
Katich & Turner 1975
Turner & Scott 1976
Harris et al. 1975
Suzuki & Sakai 1973
Campbell 1925
Hellman 1928
Lavelle 1971
Bailit et al. 1968
Turner & Swindler 1978
Dahlberg 1961
Sofaer, Maclean et al. 1972
Berry 1976
Brabant 1971
Brabant & Twiesselman 1964
Jorgensen 1955
Lavelle 1971
Hellman 1928
Rosenzweig & Zilberman 1967
Rosenzweig & Zilberman 1967
Rosenzweig & Zilberman 1969
Rosenzweig et al. 1969
Thomsen 1955
Leigh 1934
Sullivan 1920
Barnes 1969
Hellman 1928
Lavelle 1971
Chagula 1960
Present study
Lavelle 1971
Hellman 1928
Present study
PERMANENT MOLARS OF NEGRO AND SAN 177
TABLE 6
Percentage frequencies of cusp number of lower third permanent molar reported for various
human populations. Sexes combined.
Group Population 5 cusps 4cusps 3 cusps Reference
Mongoloid Amerindian . . 80,1 19,5 Corruccini 1972
80,0 ? v Devoto & Cigliano 1970
83,3 16,6 Devoto & Perrotto 1972
62,1 37,9 Goaz & Miller 1966
51,0 49,0 Leigh 1937
59,4 40,6 Nelson 1938
72,6 27,4 Perzigian 1976
38,5 61,5 Hooton 1930
75,0 24,0 Hellman 1928
99,3 0,6 Goldstein 1948
58,0 42,0 Lavelle 1971
Eskimoid. . . 75,0 25,0 Moorrees 1957
88,9 11,1 Pedersen 1949
52,0 48,0 Hellman 1928
89,9 10,2 Goldstein 1948
Chinese... 42,0 58,0 Lavelle 1971
50,0 50,0 Hellman 1928
Japanese = = = | 87,5 25) Turner 1979
Aimtese 225) 3-4. OAT 35,3 Turner & Hanihara 1977
Hawaiian. . . 86,0 14,0 Chappel 1927
67,0 33,0 Katich & Turner 1975
Easter Island. . 80,0 20,0 Turner & Scott 1976
Yapese 100,0 0,0 Harris et al. 1975
Australoid Austral. Aborigine 73,0 27,0 Campbell 1925
86,0 14,0 Hellman 1928
63,6 36,4 Lavelle 1971
Melanesian Naisoi Hates x 9 S80 42,0 Bailit et al. 1968
New Britain . . 80,0 20,0 Dahlberg 1961
84,4 15,6 Turner & Swindler 1978
Caucasoid European. . . 60,0 39,8 Brabant 1971
52,0 47,0 0,9 Brabant & Twiesselman 1964
60,6 39,4 Jorgensen 1955
35,7 64,3 Lavelle 1971
American . . 38,0 62,0 Hellman 1928
Tristan da Cunha 71,4 28,5 Thomsen 1955
Egyptian . 37,0 57,0 h Leigh 1934
Negroid Ugandan . 60,0 40,0 Barnes 1969
West African . 79,0 20,0 Hellman 1928
61,1 38,9 Lavelle 1971
East African . 58,9 40,7 0,4 Chagula 1960
South African 78,9 20,1 1,0 Present study
West Indian . 63,6 36,4 Lavelle 1971
American Negro. 67,0 33,0 Hellman 1928
Khoisanoid San .. . 81,0 19,0 0,0 Present study
Note that the rows do not in all cases equal 100 per cent.
to be four-cusped (Table 5), and here, too, the incidences of five-cusped second
molars in the South African Negro and San are relatively high. The third
molar tends to be five cusped in recent human populations, and once again the
incidences of five-cusped third molars in the South African Negro and Kalahari
178 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
San appear to be relatively high (Table 6) by comparison with other human
populations.
The frequencies of the various occlusal patterns on the permanent lower
molars of the South African Negro and Kalahari San are presented in Table 7.
Chi-square analyses revealed that no significant sexual differences exist in
either population group in the expression of the primary occlusal pattern on
any of the lower molar types. In the Negro the female tends to have a Y pattern
(i.e. a metaconid—hypoconid contact) more often than the male on all molars.
The San female tends to evince a Y pattern on the M, somewhat more often
than the male, while the frequencies of this pattern on the second and third
molars are slightly higher in the San male.
. The expression of cuspal contact patterns on the first and third molars of
the San and Negro are essentially similar. The San tends to possess a Y pattern
more often on the M, and the Negro shows a slightly higher frequency of the
+ pattern on the M, and X pattern on the Ms. The interracial differences in
occlusal pattern configuration on the first and third molars are not statistically
significant. However, the difference in primary occlusal pattern expression
on the M, was found to be statistically significant between Negro and San
males (X? = 22,82; p < 0,005), Negro and San females (X? = 6,68; p < 0,01
with X and Y pattern cells only), and between the sexually pooled San and
TABLE 7
Lower molar primary occlusal patterns of South African Negro and San.
Cusp M, M, M;
Population Sex pattern N A N Y, N Yes
Negro Male ¥ 195 79,9 GS 2225 AQ Asks
ae 44 =18,0 205— = {6709 L120 3S
xX 5 2,0 29 9,6 138 46,0
H — — — — 10 3,3
Female . Y. oy 38).7/ 29 eee: 12” 14.0
+ i) 13,3 70 66,6 37 A320
xX 3 Soll Ul 6,6 34) 3S
H —- — — — 3 3
Combined . XC PT ASA) OT 2338 52. is
= S7/ 16,7 DiS ONE: 149 38,6
xX 8 2,3 36 8,8 172 44,6
H — — — — 13 3,4
San Male ye 57 83,9 Di S12) 9 231
+ I@ iG. 24 46,2 14-3658
xX — — 1 1,9 14. 3638
H — — — = 1 2,6
Female . Y 66) > 93.0 25 50,0 7 17.
= 5 7,0 24 48,0 17» sags
xX — — 1 2,0 15 36%
H — = = = 2 4,9
Combined . Y ISS S35 7/ See SiO) 16. > 202
a 15 11,3 48 47,0 31 392
xX — 2 2,0 29-3637
H — — = = 3 3,8
PERMANENT MOLARS OF NEGRO AND SAN 179
Negro samples (X? = 31,16; p < 0,005). The San possesses a Y pattern on the
second molar in a significantly higher percentage of cases than the Negro, while
the Negro molar more often shows a cruciform (+) type of cuspal contact
(Table 7). There is also a striking difference between these two racial groups in
the number of cusps on this molar.
In both the San and the Negro the first molars show the highest frequencies
of the Y pattern with the second and third molars showing progressively lower
frequencies of this pattern. The second molars of both populations show an
increased frequency in the + pattern over the first molars, while the third
molars evince a X pattern more often than the second (or first) molars.
The H pattern was encountered only on the third molars of both popula-
tions. The frequency of expression of this variant pattern is low and almost
identical in the San (3,8 per cent) and the Negro (3,4 per cent).
Van Reenen (1966) and Jacobson (1967) have reported data on the fre-
quencies of the primary occlusal pattern in San and South African Negro
populations respectively. Although neither stated the scheme by which they
classified the occlusal pattern, it is apparent from Jacobson’s illustrations and,
since they recognized only the Y and + patterns, that Hellman’s (1928) standard
was employed by both. The frequencies reported by them are compared with
the incidences of Y and + (where + consists of combined + and X pattern
frequencies) recorded in the present study in Table 8. Both Van Reenen (1966)
and Jacobson (1967) recorded higher frequencies of the Y pattern on the M,,
and lower frequencies of this pattern on the M, and M, for the San and Negro
than the frequencies reported here. In no instance, however, are the incidences
reported by Van Reenen (1966), Jacobson (1967), and the present author
markedly different.
*
TABLE 8
Percentage incidence of primary occlusal patterns of lower permanent molars recorded for
Negroid and Khoisanoid populations. Sexes combined.
M, M, M;
Population ts yA = iV IF Reference
Bieondan= 2 |. . = 83,8 16,2 32.5) ORS 19,2 80,8 Barnes 1969
Bast African. . ...: 86,9 13,1 ALVIS WTB 2ST IIT Chagula 1960
West African . . . 100,00 — 2910, 70 23,0 76,0 Hellman 1928
Sos hS9 250 SO 30,6 69,4 Lavelle 1971
SouemAtmican . ... 89,8 10,2 123 87 Ut LIAS Jacobson 1967
Pete i 1 SiO) 190 23,8 16,2 15558655 Present study
Pechicais, < <2. «+ ~ 99,0 1.0 DLO SO Oe 93:0 Hellman 1928
Miestindian . << . . 83,6 16,4 30,0 70,0 32,4 67,6 Lavelle 1971
Kalahnatr san... . 981 1,9 525586755 13,6 86,4 Van Reenen 1966
** S37) ts 51,0 49,0 202 1938 Present study
*Frequencies of + pattern obtained by combining data for + and X patterns for comparison.
Comparison of the data for the South African Negro and San with various
Negro populations (Table 8) indicates that the first and third molars of both
the San and South African Negro and the second molars of the South African
180 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Negro are similar to other Negro populations in the relative frequency of
occlusal pattern expression. The M, of the San, according to the present data,
tends to have a Y pattern more often than do any of the Negro populations.
According to Van Reenen’s (1966) results, the frequency of the Y pattern on
the M, of the San is higher than in all other Negro populations except the Teso
of Uganda (Barnes 1969).
Kiernberger (1955) examined the occlusal surface pattern of the Khoi-
sanoid lower molar, but she utilized Janzer’s (1927) method of classification.
Janzer (1927) recognized three different occlusal types, the foundation of each
being cusp number and occlusal outline. Although Kiernberger (1955: 25)
states that “in die dritte Gruppe der unteren . . . Molaren geh6ren diejenigen,
TABLE 9
Percentage frequencies of primary occlusal patterns of lower first permanent molar reported
for various human populations. Sexes combined. These authors have followed Hellman’s
(1928) method.
Group Population Y = Reference
Mongoloid AMenringiani ea eee 73,4 26,6 Campusano et al. 1972
100,0 — Hellman 1928
63,0 37,0 Corruccini 1972
99,4 0,6 Dahlberg 1949
69,3 30,6 Goldstein 1948
88,4 11,6 Lavelle 1971
88,6 11,4 Nelson 1938
84,0 16,0 Snyder et al. 1969
Jase! 4 4 5 < 91,1 9,0 Goldstein 1948
97,0 3,0 Hellman 1928
41,4 58,6 Moorrees 1957
94,7 4,1 Pedersen 1949
GhineSée is) ont oe ee 92,4 7,6 Lavelle 1971
100,0 — Hellman #928
Australoid Austral. Aborigine . . 100,0 — Hellman 1928
Ofel 2,3 Lavelle 1971
Melanesian Melanesian. . . . 96,8 3,2 Dahlberg 1961
60,1 39,8 Lombardi 1975
Caucasoid EUhOpedit. nen 46,0 Spi Brabant 1971
85,0 15,0 Brabant & Twiesselmann 1964
79,0 21,0 Lavelle 1971
PONTING 5 8 92,0 4,0 Dahlberg 1949
94,0 6,0 Hellman 1928
Yenre ya Seen a 53,0 47,0 Rosenzweig & Zilberman 1967
Cochin.) Vie eS: 57,0 43,0 Rosenzweig & Zilberman 1967
Bedouink. ~. @.o . = 70,4 29,6 Rosenzweig & Zilberman 1969
Samaritans). 4) 472 87,1 12,9 Rosenzweig et al. 1969
Tristan da Cunha . . 74,7 PS) Si Thomsen 1955
Negroid EasteAtnical.. aaa 86,9 13,1 Chagula 1960
West Africa. . . . 100,0 — Hellman 1928
86,1 13,9 Lavelle 1971
SouthyAtiricas = en ae 89,8 10,2 Jacobson 1967
American Negro. . 99,0 1,0 Hellman 1928
West Indian. . . . 83,6 16,4 Lavelle 1971
Khoisanoid= “San? -i2= 2 0) 3 a 98,1 1,9 Van Reenen 1966
Note that the rows do not in all cases equal 100 per cent.
PERMANENT MOLARS OF NEGRO AND SAN 18]
TABLE 10
Percentage frequencies of primary occlusal patterns of lower first permanent molar
reported for various human populations. Sexes combined. These authors have followed
Jorgensen’s (1955) method.
Group Population ¥ == 4 Reference
Mongoloid Amermdian <: . . d,6 29,4 19,0 Brewer-Carias et al. 1976
65,0 35,0 0,0 Devoto & Cigliano 1970
69,2 DBM EL Goaz & Miller 1966
Z 14,2 2 Sofaer et al. 1972
Chinese See eee is ? ? 4,1 Turner 1976
Japaneser= 2° 7 = y7iles 22,9 5,8 Matsuda 1961
? k 6,6 Turner 1976
70,7 227 Gof Suzuki & Sakai 1957
L 1k Se Turner 1976
88,9 7,9 32 Turner 1979
ASHES he ea 2) 593.4 33 333 Turner & Hanihara 1977
56,5 34,8 8,7 Suzuki & Sakai 1957
Relvnesian .. 4 =] 2 82.4 1283 3,3 Suzuki & Sakai 1973
85,0 ? 2 Turner & Scott 1976
Hawaiian . . . . -890 ? Katich & Turner 1975
Wanese? aft 2 8s 730 ? L Harris et al. 1975
Melanesian Melanesian) .*.. ? 33,0 ? Sofaer et al. 1972
INGISOlas) ses 2 (SAD 45,1 0,0 Bailit et al. 1968
INewsBritain. <9 .2-.. 9207 73 0,0 Turner & Swindler 1978
Caucasoid EBEODEAN uae =. 4» 9959 34,6 9,9 Berry 1976
69,2 1357 EZ! Jorgensen 1955
69,2 18,1 27 Jorgensen 1955
American... = «+. 298 59,7 10,5 Takehisa 1957
Negroid Weandan, .. .. =. .: ~ $3.8 16,2 o Barnes 1969
South Africa: : «. « 82,0 16,7 2S Present study
Maeisanoid Sait: . .:. . » .~. 88,7 L3 0,0 Present study
die vier Hocker besitzen und deren Furchen Kreutzf6rming angeordnet sind’,
the alignment of the mesiobuccal and lingual grooves, rather than cuspal
contact, appears to be the basis for the cruciform (Kreutzf6rming) pattern.
Thus, Kiernberger’s data on the occlusal morphology of the Khoisanoid lower
molar do not seem to be comparable with the primary occlusal pattern data
recorded here.
The majority of authors who have reported frequencies of primary occlusal
patterns for different human populations have utilized either Hellman’s (1928)
or Jorgensen’s (1955) methods of classification. As pointed out above, these
two systems are not directly comparable in all instances as Hellman’s + type
includes both the + and X patterns of Jorgensen. The data presented by various
authors for different populations are tabulated in Tables 9-14, according to the
classificatory method employed by each author. Several workers have created
and/or utilized methods of classification that are either slight modifications of,
or completely different from, either the Hellman or Jorgensen systems. It is
essential that these various classifications be recognized as distinct when one
attempts to compare data on different population groups recorded by various
authors. Numerous workers have, nevertheless, compiled rather extensive
182 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
tables of reported occlusal pattern frequencies in which the incomparability
of much of the reported data has been ignored (e.g. one list included studies
that had used variously Hellman’s (1928), Jorgensen’s (1955), and Steslicka’s
(1948) categories).
Tables 9-14 indicate that the human first permanent molar tends usually
to have a Y pattern, while the second and third molars evince the + or X
pattern more frequently than the Y. In those studies that considered the X
pattern, the Ms possesses the highest frequency, the M, a somewhat lower,
and the M, the lowest frequency of this pattern (Tables 10, 12, 14). It is evident
also that, in general, the expression of the primary occlusal pattern is more
variable than the principal cusp number for each molar type.
Examination of Tables 9-14 indicates that, while there is a considerable
degree of intragroup variability in the frequencies of expression reported
TABLE 11
Percentage frequencies of primary occlusal patterns of lower second permanent molar reported
for various human populations. Sexes combined. These authors have followed Hellman’s (1928)
method.
Group Population Y ae Reference
Mongoloid Amerindian ene 39,1 60,9 Campusano et al. 1972
4,5 95,5 Corruccini 1972
3,0 97,0 Dahlberg 1949
4,9 95,1 Goldstein 1948
1,0 99,0 Hellman 1928
5,8 94,2 Lavelle 1971
9,6 90,4 Nelson 1938
38,5 61,5 Snyder et al. 1969
Eskimoid Si, eae 15,8 84,3 Goldstein 1948
13,0 87,0 Hellman 1928
0,0 100,0 Moorrees 1957
24,3 76,6 Pedersen 1949
Chinese 2 |: hae: 0,0 100,0 Hellman 1928
15,6 84,4 Lavelle 1971
Australoid Austral. Aborigine. . 5,0 95,0 Hellman 1928
pel 77,3 Lavelle 1971
Melanesian Melanesian. .. . 12,8 87,2 Dahlberg 1961
Caucasoid Europedie ee 33,1 66,6 Brabant 1971
9,5 90,5 Brabant & Twiesselman 1964
Teal 92,9 Lavelle 1971
American a 84,6. 32 5,0 95,0 Hellman 1928
YEMEN 5 cise 9,0 91,0 Rosenzweig & Zilberman 1967
Gochinil< -% . 4 47: 5,0 95,0 Rosenzweig & Zilberman 1969
Bedouin. 920-2 2% 7,0 93,0 Rosenzweig & Zilberman 1969
Samanritam 7).° 29°22. 12,6 87,4 Rosenzweig et al. 1969
Tristan da Cunha . . 7,9 92,1 Thomsen 1955
Negroid East African . . . 20,2 79,8 Chagula 1960
West African’ = 5°". 29,0 71,0 Hellman 1928
1» 20 75,0 Lavelle 1971
South African . . . 12,3 87,7 Jacobson 1967
AIMebICae 2) 7 eae 6 27,0 73,0 Hellman 1928
West Indians.) 5 25>. 713010 70,0 Lavelle 1971
Khorsanoid>” VSan 7 sn oe 32,5 67,5 Van Reenen 1966
PERMANENT MOLARS OF NEGRO AND SAN 183
TABLE 12
Percentage frequencies of primary occlusal patterns of lower second permanent molar
reported for various human populations. Sexes combined. These authors have followed
Jorgensen’s (1955) method.
Group Population iG = X Reference
Mongoloid Amerindian o . « - 5,6 34,8 59,6 Brewer-Carias et al. 1976
— 45,0 55,0 Devoto & Cigliano 1970
OW 53,3 36,0 Goaz & Miller 1966
Japanesen we aa.) 4,2 41,0 54,7 Matsuda 1961
aS 44,2 S13 Suzuki & Sakai 1956a
SHA5) 28,8 39,7 Turner 1979
NII eee 2 ea FATS 32,1 56,6 Turner & Hanihara 1977
Polynesian. . . . 11,0 ? 2 Turner & Scott 1976
10,1 38,0 51,9 Suzuki & Sakai 1973
Hawaiian 2) =... 2050 v ? Katich & Turner 1975
Nielanesiam’ " Naisoi . . . . . ~*~ 13,1 86,9 — Bailit et al. 1968
New Britain... 8,1 67,6 24,3 Turner & Swindler 1978
Melanesian . . . ? 80,0 2 Sofaer, Maclean ef al.
1972
Caucasoid European 2) .) -.) 1429 54,6 30,5 Berry 1976
16,7 26,8 56,6 Jorgensen 1955
14,3 Died 58,5 Jorgensen 1955
American... Lo. 42,1 57,9 Takehisa 1957
Negroid Weandanvesn 8. 12. 32.5 60,0 WS Barnes 1969
SouthyAirican,. . =. 623.8 67,4 8,8 Present study
Kinoisanoids “Sam... . .. . ..: 31,0 47,0 2,0 Present study
(e.g. frequencies for the Y pattern on the M, of Mongoloid peoples range
between 41,4-100,0 per cent), overall the Australoid peoples tend to possess
the highest frequencies of Y-patterned first molars followed closely by the
San and the Negro. The Caucasoid populations that have been examined tend
to show the lowest frequencies of the Y pattern on the M,. Conversely, the
Caucasoid populations tend to display the highest frequencies of + patterns
and/or X patterns on the first mandibular molars.
The percentage frequencies of Y patterns on second molars that have been
recorded for various human populations range from total absence to 51,0 per
cent (Tables 11-12). Van Reenen (1966) recorded that 32,5 per cent of San M,’s
possess a Y pattern, while the present author found 51,0 per cent of these molars
to be Y patterned. The latter figure represents the highest incidence recorded
for any human population, and Van Reenen’s figure is amongst the highest of
recorded frequencies (Tables 11-12). It appears, therefore, that the Y pattern
is Shown more frequently on the M, of the San than on this tooth in most other
human populations. Whereas the Melanesian and Australoid peoples tend to
possess the highest frequencies of Y-patterned first molars, the second molars
of the populations appear to show relatively low frequencies of Y pattern
expression. There seems to be little difference in the incidence of Y pattern
expression on the M, amongst the Mongoloid, Australoid, Caucasoid, and
Negroid populations (Tables 11-12).
184 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Whereas the San tends to have the Y pattern relatively frequently on the
M, and M,, the incidences of this pattern on the Mg as reported by both Van
Reenen (1966) and the present author are amongst the lower recorded for
other human populations (Tables 13-14). The frequencies of Y-patterned
M,’s in the South African Negro recorded by both Jacobson (1967) and the
author are the lowest recorded for any other Negroid population with the excep-
tion of the American Negro (Tables 13-14). The frequencies of Y-patterned
third molars in the Melanesian and Australoid populations are amongst the
lower percentage incidences recorded for recent human populations.
However, comparison of only that data recorded by authors who used
Jorgensen’s (1955) method of crown classification (Table 14) indicates that
the San Mg, shows a Y pattern more frequently than in any other population
(the Teso of Uganda and the Ainu show comparable frequencies though), and
that the frequency of X-patterned M,’s in this population is one of the lowest
recorded to date.
Chi-square evaluation of cuspal number and primary occlusal patterns on
the lower molars of the South African Negro and San revealed that the two are
dependent variables only on the M, of the Negro male (X? = 6,47; p = 0,04)
TABLE 13
Percentage frequencies of primary occlusal patterns of lower third permanent molar reported
for various human populations. Sexes Combined. These authors have followed
Hellman’s (1928) method.
Group Population Y =F Reference
Mongoloid Amerindian. .. . Ul! 92,3 Corruccini 1972
29,0 71,0 Dahlberg 1949
18,7 81,4 Goldstein 1948
5,0 94,0 Hellman 1928
18,8 78,2 Lavelle 1971
13,2 86,8 Nelson 1938
Eskimoideis cee 20,4 79,7 Goldstein 1948
— 100,0 Hellman 1928
— 100,0 Moorrees 1957
23,8 76,2 Pedersen 1949
ChineSse'sc- 24 Sgt OA 38 — 100,0 Hellman 1928
43,4 56,6 Lavelle 1971
Australoid Austral. Aborigine. . 14,0 86,0 Hellman 1928
18,2 81,8 Lavelle 1971
Melanesian Melanesian. . . . 16,6 83,4 Dahlberg 1961
Caucasoid European . «i. . 43,4 56,4 Brabant 1971
30,4 69,5 Brabant & Twiesselman 1964
6,8 93,2 Lavelle 1971
American «) @s 50% 4,0 96,0 Hellman 1928
Tristan da Cunha . . 71,4 28,5 Thomsen 1955
Negroid East African... 20,3 79,7 Chagula 1960
West African... 23,0 76,0 Hellman 1928
30,6 69,4 Lavelle 1971
South African... 7,4 92,6 Jacobson 1967
AINenICaN) 9h) ayo 4 7,0 93,0 Hellman 1928
West Indian te hea) 32,4 67,6 Lavelle 1971
Khoisanoid’) «Sant. Fie ee 13,6 86,4 Van Reenen 1966
PERMANENT MOLARS OF NEGRO AND SAN 185
TABLE 14
Percentage frequencies of primary occlusal patterns of lower third permanent molar
reported for various human populations. Sexes combined. These authors have followed
Jorgensen’s (1955) method.
Group Population Y + X References
Mongoloid Amerindian . . . 6,9 48,2 44,8 Goaz & Miller 1966
0,0 0,0 100,0 Devoto & Perrotto 1972
Japanesea ae ee | MES 13,7 74,5 Turner 1979
PANITIUG Ses Coe eS La S5i/ Tel Turner & Hanihara 1977
Melanesian IN@ISOMe fo ee aa 81,0 11,9 Bailit et al, 1968
New Britain... 0,0 222 77,8 Turner & Swindler 1978
Caucasoid European a). 2) 2 2 1059 A 76,9 Jorgensen 1955
ie? 17,5 Ws Jorgensen 1955
Negroid Weandan- . . =. . 19,2 46,1 34,3 Barnes 1969
South African. . . 13,5 38,6 44,6 Present study
Khotsanoid Sane eeesies a: 3h 320.2 39,2 S17) Present study
and on the M, of the Negro female (X? = 15,24; p = 0,005). No evidence of
variable dependence was found for any of the other Negro molars, nor were
cusp number and occlusal pattern found to be dependent in any case in the
San. Studies of these two features on the lower molars of other human popu-
lations have also found them to be unrelated (Jorgensen 1955; Garn et al.
1966a, 19666; Devoto & Cigliano 1970; Devoto et al. 1970) or only very slightly
related within individuals (Rosenzweig & Zilberman 1969).
Nevertheless, numerous workers have recorded the cusp number and
occlusal pattern together (e.g. Y5, Y4, +5, +4, etc.). In order to facilitate
comparisons with the results presented in such studies, the frequencies of cusp
number-occlusal pattern ‘complements’ on the South African Negro and San
lower molars are presented in Table 15.
The first molars of both the Negro male and female most frequently evince a
Y5 pattern. This is true also of the San first molar. The third molars of both
the Negro and San males show an XS pattern most frequently, while the third
molars of the Negro and San females exhibit most commonly a +5 pattern.
However, in the sexually pooled samples the Negro M, is found to display most
frequently an X5 pattern (because of the larger sample of male molars) but the
San M, is found to evince a +5 pattern most often.
Both the Negro male and female show a +4 pattern most frequently on
the second molar (Table 15). The San male has a Y5 pattern most commonly,
but this frequency is only slightly higher than that for the +5 pattern. The YS
and +5 patterns occur with the same frequency on the second molars of the
San female, and both these patterns are more common than any other. In the
sexually pooled San sample the Y5 pattern is found most frequently on the
second molar, with the +5 pattern encountered in only a slightly lower per-
centage of cases.
The incidences of metaconid deflecting wrinkles (as this feature is here
defined) on the lower molars of the South African Negro and San are presented
in Table 16.
ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
186
worn FTNoTFTNN TH TH THN TH THTH
Seth Kh Oe ett ch K Oe td KK
‘Ou udsajjod
dsny dsny
uDS' 1ADYDIDY OABIN] UDALL YINos
‘ues LIeYR[ey pue OIBONY ULOTIPY YINOG oy} JO UsJO}Jed [edsno pue Joquinu dsno IejOUT JIOMO'T
C] alavy
pourquioy
o[ewo.y
' Ie
xas’
PERMANENT MOLARS OF NEGRO AND SAN 187
TABLE 16
Metaconid crest morphology of lower permanent molars of the South African Negro and
Kalahari San.
Population Absent Weak Stron Deflected Cuspuli
and sex Tooth IN = IN 9h, No INCE le N Ss
Negro
RABIES M, ES 6:3 13307 1249-1 38 15,9 0 0,0
M, 120) 40-2 isi sle9 14 48 Oe 7A 0) 0:0
M; 122 41,8 143 49,0 14 4,8 | i O38
Remale =. . M, De DAY) Slee 56" 5616 26) 2633 0 0,0
M,; 41 39,4 3529 ee eT 0 0,0 VY OG)
M; 37 42,0 43 48,9 3) 3.4 Dee! 0 0,0
Combined. . M, ii 0 88 26,1 168 49,9 64 19,0 0 0,0
M, 161 40,8 206 52,2 apy NAS, Gy) ales YW OW
M; 159 41,8 186 49,0 L745 17 4,4 103
San
Migiepa. 4 . M, 0 0,0 13, 2120 36 58,1 13 20,9 0 0,0
M, 2-39 39 76,5 8 15,7 PH By) 0-050
M; 7 18,4 23 60,5 7 18,4 2G 0 0,0
bemaie . . M, O7010 7 10 46 67,6 Sa 0 0,0
M, 4 8,2 BY2" (Sp ES: 10 20,4 a ull 0 010
M; 8 21,6 24 64,9 Dar Bye 3) teal OF O:0
Combined. . M, 0” O00 20 15,4 82 63,1 Pes PANES) 0 0,0
M; 6 6,0 Te Wy 18 18,0 55,0 0 0,0
M; 1577 20:0 47 62,7 Bey) Au 5.3 0 10:0
No significant sexual difference in the expression of metaconid cristid
morphology is shown by the San, and in the Negro no statistically significant
sexual difference in metaconid cristid morphology is shown on the second and
third molars. On the first permanent molar, however, the Negro female shows
a significantly higher frequency of deflecting wrinkles than does the male
Ve 452: p < 0,05).
In both the Negro and the San the principal cristid of the metaconid of
the first molar is most commonly well developed and straight. The main meta-
conid cristids of the second and third molars of both populations are most
frequently weakly developed and are not deflected (Table 16).
The frequency of deflected metaconid cristids in both sexes of both popu-
lations is considerably higher on the first molar than on either the second or
third molars. In the Negro (both sexes) and in the San female the metaconid
crest of the second molar is deflected somewhat less frequently than on the
third molar. In the San male the frequency of deflecting wrinkles on the M, is
slightly higher than on the Ms. In the sexually pooled San sample the second
and third molars show nearly identical frequencies of deflected metaconid
cristids.
There is no significant difference between the San male and the Negro
male in the frequencies of deflecting wrinkles on any of the lower molars, nor
is there any significant difference between the San female and Negro female
frequencies on the first and third molars. However, whereas no Negro female
M, was found to possess a deflecting wrinkle, this feature was expressed on
188 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
some 6,1 per cent of San female second molars (X? = 6,49; p < 0,025). Com-
parisons of sexually pooled data indicates that no significant difference exists
between the South African Negro and the Kalahari San in the frequency of
expression of deflecting wrinkles on either the first or third molars. The San
possesses a deflecting wrinkle on the second molar in a significantly higher
percentage of cases on the second mandibular molar (X? = 4,45; p < 0,05).
Morris (1970) noted that the presence of a metaconid deflecting wrinkle
may effect a metaconid—hypoconid contact. In the Negro male a deflecting
wrinkle and a metaconid—hypoconid contact (Y pattern) were found together
in only 16,2 per cent of first molars, 1,5 per cent of second molars, and 7,7 per
cent of third molars. These two features were found together on the first,
second and third molars of the Negro female in 24,4 per cent, 0,0 per cent, and
8,3 per cent of cases respectively. In the San male they were encountered
together on 21,2 per cent of first, 7,4 per cent of second, and 0,0 per cent of
third molars. The incidences of concomitant expression of these two characters
in the San female molars are similar to the frequencies encountered on the
San male teeth. Suzuki & Sakai (19655), in a study of the deflecting wrinkle
on the first lower molars of recent Japanese, recorded that this character was
present in 49,3 per cent of male and 23,8 per cent of female teeth exhibiting a
Y pattern.
It is clear that there is no interdependence of the deflecting wrinkle and the
Y pattern on the lower molars of the South African Negro and the San. How-
ever, aS pointed out above, Morris (1970), amongst others (e.g. Hanihara 1961 ;
Hanihara et al. 1975; Turner & Hanihara 1977; Turner 1976, 1979; Turner &
Swindler 1978), has erroneously identified a strongly developed, straight meta-
conid crest as a deflecting wrinkle. A highly significant (p < 0,005) relationship
between occlusal pattern and metaconid crest morphology was found on all
the lower molars of both sexes of the Negro and San, but the Y pattern (a meta-
conid—hypoconid contact) was found to be dependent upon the presence of a
large, straight metaconid crest.
Reported frequencies of deflecting wrinkles on the lower molars of various
human populations are tabulated in Table 17. It is apparent that the majority
of authors have classified both straight, well-developed metaconid crests and
truly deflected cristids as deflecting wrinkles.
Morris (1970) reported that 46,3 per cent of South African Negro and
78,5 per cent of San first molars show a deflecting wrinkle. By combining
straight, well-developed crests and deflected metaconid cristids into a single
category —‘deflecting wrinkle’-—as advocated by Morris (1970) and others,
some 68,9 per cent of Negro and 84,6 per cent of San first molars examined by
the present author were found to evince this feature (Table 17). The figures
(combined) are somewhat, albeit insignificantly, higher than those reported by
Morris (1970) for the same populations. Comparison of the results obtained
by authors who have followed this method of classification (Table 17: fre-
quencies preceded by x) reveals that only the Amerindian (Morris 1970),
PERMANENT MOLARS OF NEGRO AND SAN 189
Chinese (Turner 1976), and Wajin (Hanihara ef al. 1975) show a ‘deflecting
wrinkle’ on the first molar more commonly than does the South African Negro.
Only the Chinese (Turner 1976) show a higher frequency of this character than
the San on the M,.
TABLE 17
Incidence of metaconid deflecting wrinkle on lower permanent molars reported for various
human populations. Sexes combined.
Group Population M, M, M; Reference
Mongoloid Amerindian * 74,8 Morris 1970
Japanese 29,6 Hanihara ef al. 1964
23,4 Suzuki & Sakai 19565
z SEG Turner 1976
= 54,2 0,0 0,0 Turner 1976, 1979
Ainu e Sl Turner 1976
= Sil 10,7 3,6 Turner & Hanihara 1977
Chinese 2 87,5 Turner 1976
Wajin = 71,6 Hanihara et al. 1975
Melanesian New Britain * 60,0 5,4 0,0 Turner & Swindler 1978
Caucasoid European * 34,2 Axelsson & Kirveskari 1977
South African* 7,0 Morris 1970
Indian eS Morris 1970
Negroid South African* 46,3 Morris 1970
. 68,9 al 8,9 Present study
19,0 15 4,4 Present study
Khoisanoid San = 78,5 Morris 1970
84,6 23,0 17,3 Present study
PS 5,0 5,3 Present study
* Frequencies include straight, well-developed metaconid crest as well as true deflecting
wrinkles.
If one considers only those studies in which a truly deflected metaconid
crest has been classified as a deflecting wrinkle, the Negro and San frequencies
of this character are considerably lower (19,0 and 21,5 per cent respectively),
as are the incidences reported for Mongoloid peoples (Suzuki & Sakai 1956b;
Hanihara et al. 1964) (Table 17 herein). The frequencies of true deflecting
wrinkles on the first lower molars of the South African Negro and San are
only slightly lower than those reported for Japanese populations.
It has been suggested (Hanihara 1963, 1966, 1967, 1968a, 19685, 1970;
Hanihara et a/. 1964) that the deflecting wrinkle be included in the ‘Mongoloid
dental complex’ of both the deciduous and permanent teeth. From the foregoing
it is apparent that, regardless of whether a straight, strongly developed meta-
conid crest and a deflected crest or only a truly deflected metaconid crest is
classified as a deflecting wrinkle, the frequencies of this feature on the San and
Negro molars are within the range of frequencies recorded for Mongoloid
peoples. Axelsson & Kirveskari (1977) have suggested that the inclusion of the
deflecting wrinkle in the ‘Mongoloid dental complex’ be re-evaluated. It is
evident that the racially diagnostic value of this feature in itself is doubtful,
190 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
but it forms only part of the ‘Mongoloid dental complex’ as defined by Hanihara.
More particularly, this complex consists of concomitantly high expressions of
(1) shovelled incisors, (ii) tuberculum intermedium on the dm, and M,,
(iii) tuberculum sextum on the dmz, (iv) protostylid on the dmg, (v) plagioconule
(metaconule) on the dm?, and (vi) deflecting wrinkle on the dm, and M,. The
high frequencies of one of these characters (e.g. a deflecting wrinkle) in non-
Mongoloid populations does not necessarily detract from its significance as a
part of a complex of other features.
The frequencies of the tuberculum sextum recorded for the permanent
lower molars of the South African Negro and San are presented in Table 18.
No significant sexual dimorphism in the possession of this accessory cuspulid
is present in either the San or Negro samples examined.
TABLE 18
Incidence of tuberculum sextum on lower permanent molars of the
South African Negro and Kalahari San.
M, M, Ms;
Population Sex N V/A N o/s N Vs
Negro Maller es. 9). 12 52 sy Syl 58 19,9
Remale 9%. 6 §66,4 y, 1,9 19° 2251
Combined. . es SS) iy 4,3 77 204
San Malate ek. 10 16,4 6 14,3 6 20,7
Female ~.. . 10 15,4 Sl 14 38,9
Combined. . 20 15,9 a se2 20 30,8
While the Negro and San males show a tuberculum sextum on the third
molars in a nearly identical percentage of cases, the San male possesses this
cuspulid significantly more frequently on the first molar (X? = 8,83; p < 0,005)
and the second molar (X? = 5,29; p < 0,025). The San female tends to possess
a tuberculum sextum more frequently than the Negro female on all three
mandibular molars and, while the occurrences are not significantly different on
the first and third molars, the San female has this cuspulid in a significantly
higher frequency on the second molar (X? = 6,75; p < 0,01). Comparison of
the sexually pooled data reveals that the San shows a significantly higher
incidence of the tuberculum sextum on the first molar (X? = 12,72; p < 0,005)
and second molar (X? = 10,11; p < 0,005). The San also tends to show this
cuspulid more frequently than the Negro on the third molar, but the difference
in this instance was found to be statistically not significant.
Jacobson (1967) recorded the frequency of a tuberculum sextum on the
permanent lower molars of the South African Negro, but he did not mention
the criteria by which he classified this cuspulid. His figures for the occurrence
of the tuberculum sextum in this population are consistently (albeit insignifi-
cantly) lower than those in this study for all the molars. The differences amongst
these figures may reflect different sample sizes, different methods of classifi-
PERMANENT MOLARS OF NEGRO AND SAN 191
cation, or the fact that Jacobson (1967) scored teeth from both sides of the
same jaw in a number of instances. Kiernberger (1955) recorded the presence
of this cuspulid in her Khoisanoid sample, but she did not differentiate between
it and the tuberculum intermedium. She combined the occurrence of either
one or both into a single molar classification.
Frequencies of the tuberculum sextum recorded by other workers for the
lower molars of various human populations are presented in Table 19. This
TABLE 19
Percentage frequencies of tuberculum sextum on permanent lower molars reported for various
human populations. Sexes combined.
Group Population M, M, Ms; Reference
Mongoloid Amerindian . . 49,0 14,5 Brewer-Carias et al. 1976
6,0 16,0 32,0 Hellman 1928
3.3 2,6 4,8 Nelson 1938
Bskimoid) .« . . 1,0 20,0 28,0 Hellman 1928
72 10,3 16,0 Pedersen 1949
Chinese ie ea. 0,0 0,0 0,0 Hellman 1928
31,0 Turner 1976
wapanese = = —. Dare dl Hanihara 1970
18,4 Suzuki & Sakai 1957
5,6 1,6 Takehisa 1957
25,3 Turner 1976
58,0 Turner 1976
58,0 14,0 Die Turner 1979
PMU ewe cory ae. 17,8 Hanihara 1970
PANT) Suzuki & Sakai 1957
29,8 Turner 1976
25,8 8,5 9,1 Turner & Hanihara 1977
Polynesian. . . 54,5 30,0 50,0 Suzuki & Sakai 1973
Hawatian ..: : . 43,0 2,0 4,0 Katich & Turner 1975
Easter Island . . 19,0 9,0 14,0 Turner & Scott 1976
NIADESEs a 8 710 77,0 80,0 Harris ef al. 1975
Australoid Austral. Aborigine 8,0 43,0 54,0 Hellman 1928
Melanesian Melanesian ae 9,0 5,0 9,0 Dahlberg 1961
New Britain... 325 9,8 24,2 Turner & Swindler 1978
Caucasoid European 2 2% 17,0 10,9 Axelsson & Kirveskari 1979
INMEHCAN ©. *-2> <2 0,0 0,0 3,0 Hellman 1928
0,0 0,0 Takehisa 1957
Negroid East African... 6,6 0,3 2,0 Chagula 1960
West African... 3,0 6,0 16,0 Hellman 1928
South African. . 5) 4,3 20,4 Present study
AMIMETICANL 5 osc. =: 2,0 8,0 33,0 Hellman 1928
Kboranoid San. . . . .- 15,9" 12 30,8 Present study
table does not include all the references for recent human samples as some
workers have combined the presence of a tuberculum sextum and a tuberculum
intermedium into a single category (e.g. Goldstein 1931; Berry 1976). Others
have recorded the presence of cusp numbers over five but have not stated
whether the tuberculum sextum was, indeed, always the sixth cusp (e.g. Gold-
stein 1948; Thomsen 1955; Matsuda 1961; Brabant & Tweisselmann 1964;
192 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Devoto & Cigliano 1970; Brabant 1971; Devoto & Perrotto 1972; Perzigian
1976).
Examination of Table 19 indicates that the first lower molars of the South
African Negro possess a tuberculum sextum about as often as the M,’s of the
east African Negro and slightly more frequently than the molars of the west
African Negroes. The frequency of the presence of the tuberculum sextum on
Negro first molars tends to be relatively low. The San first molars exhibit this
cuspulid more frequently than do the Negro teeth. Whereas Hellman (1928)
and Takehisa (1957) recorded a complete absence of this cuspulid in their
American Caucasoid first molar samples, Axelsson & Kirveskari (1979) reported
that 17,0 per cent of Icelandic Caucasoids examined by them possessed a tuber-
culum sextum on the first molar. Sometimes dramatic differences in the
frequency of the tuberculum sextum on the first lower molars of various Mongo-
loid peoples have been recorded (Table 19). However, the incidences of this
cuspulid in a number of Mongoloid populations are considerably higher than
those recorded for Negroid, Khoisanoid, Caucasoid, Australoid, and Melanesian
peoples.
Generally, it appears that the first molars of Negroid, Khoisanoid,
Caucasoid, and Australoid peoples show a relatively low incidence of accessory
distal cuspulids, the Melanesians tend to have a somewhat higher incidence of
this feature, while the tuberculum sextum appears to be present most commonly
on the first molars of Mongoloid populations. The same interpopulational
differences tend to exist with regard to the incidence of this cuspulid on the
second permanent molars, the most notable exception being the Australoid
peoples, who have this feature relatively frequently on this tooth. With regard
to the third mandibular molar, the Caucasoid populations tend to exhibit a
tuberculum sextum less frequently than most others and, again, the incidence
of this cuspulid on the M, is greater in Mongoloid populations than in others.
It would appear that there is no consistent relationship between the fre-
quency of accessory distal cuspulids on the first, second and third molars within
populations. That is, a tuberculum sextum appears to occur in declining order
of frequency on M,-M,-Msg respectively about as often as on M,—-M,—-M,
respectively (Table 19). However, in all population studies in which all three
molar types were examined, the third molar was found to possess a tuberculum
sextum more commonly than the second molar. Although the third molar
shows a higher frequency of five cusps than does the second molar, this can
hardly be related to the higher incidences of tubercula sextum in the third
molar, as the first molar, which shows the highest frequency of five cusps, has
a tuberculum sextum in a higher percentage of cases than the M, in about the
same number of populations in which the second molar shows this cuspulid
more frequently than the M, (Table 19).
The South African Negro and San both show the tuberculum sextum most
frequently on the third molar, followed in descending order by the first and
second molars respectively. Of the other three Negro populations examined
PERMANENT MOLARS OF NEGRO AND SAN 193
(Table 19), two (west African and American) have molar frequency orders of
the tuberculum sextum of M;-M,—M,, while the third (east African) has a molar
frequency order of M,-M,—Mg.
The frequencies of the tuberculum intermedium recorded for the South
African Negro and Kalahari San are given in Table 20. The Negro female
shows this accessory lingual cuspulid more frequently than the Negro male
on all three molars. The San female tends to have a tuberculum intermedium
more often than the San male on the first molar but less frequently than the
male on the third molar. However, the sexual differences in both populations
are slight and not statistically significant.
TABLE 20
Incidence of tuberculum intermedium on lower permanent molars of the
South African Negro and Kalahari San.
M, M, M;
Population Sex N yf N Ss N Ys
Negro Males ase hie 32, tsa 4 ies 30 ~=10,0
Remale, 42°95 ~: iS 1728 2 1,9 2" 21356
Combined — - .. S0 1455 6 128) 42 10,8
San Males 2 so .. ee 7 0 0,0 3 7,9
Female 2. = . he; 2255 0 0,0 De 4,9
GCombmed © =" = 2 205 O.=-0:0 5 6,3
The South African Negro shows a tuberculum intermedium less frequently
on the first molar but more frequently on the third molar than does the San.
Only 1,5 per cent of Negro second molars were found to show this cuspulid,
while no San M, evinced a tuberculum intermedium. The frequency differences
on all molars amongst these two populations are slight and not statistically
significant.
Jacobson (1967) recorded the presence of the tuberculum intermedium
for the South African Negro and, although he gave no indication of the criteria
used in the recording of this feature, his data are similar to those reported here.
Jacobson’s frequencies are, however, consistently (albeit slightly) larger than
those given here. These discrepancies are probably due to the fact that different
classificatory standards may have been employed, and also that Jacobson (1967)
counted teeth rather than individuals.
In her study of Khoisan teeth, Kiernberger (1955) recorded the frequencies
of accessory cusps on the lower molars, but did not differentiate between the
tuberculum sextum and tuberculum intermedium. Rather, she regarded the
presence of either one or both on a molar as constituting a single crown category.
Numerous workers have, like Kiernberger (1955), recorded the presence
of additional cuspulids and have not separated the tuberculum intermedium
and the tuberculum sextum (Hrdli¢ka 1910; Janzer 1927; Rosenzweig & Zilber-
man 1967, 1969; Sofaer, MacLean & Bailit 1972; Sofaer et al. 1972; Berry 1976).
Frequencies of the tuberculum intermedium recorded for the permanent
lower molars of various human populations are tabulated in Table 21. A
194 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
TABLE 21
Percentage frequencies of tuberculum intermedium on permanent lower molars reported for
various human populations. Sexes combined.
Group Population M, M, M; Reference
Mongoloid Amerindian: 4... 6,6 0,0 2,0 Nelson 1938
0,0 0,0 6,0 Hellman 1928
Eskimoid . .. . 0,0 0,0 0,0 Hellman 1928
0,0 0,7 0,0 Pedersen 1949
Chinese Se Ae 0,0 5,0 0,0 Hellman 1928
12,0 8,0 De Terra 1905
11,8 Turner 1976
Japanese... 6,7 Hanihara 1970
0,3 Suzuki & Sakai 1957
sil 0,2 Suzuki & Sakai 1956c
6,7 Turner 1976
1a) Turner 1976
58,0 14,0 DAES Turner 1979
ARI oP ie ee 4,3 Hanihara 1970
0,0 Suzuki & Sakai 1957
4,3 Turner 1976
4,3 0,0 2,9 Turner & Hanihara 1977
Polynesian. . . 23,0 14,0 17,0 Turner & Scott 1976
7,0 1,1 Suzuki & Sakai 1973
Hawaiian... 15,0 7,0 3,0 Katich & Turner 1975
Yapese..ar 31,0 12,0 20,0 Harris et al. 1975
Australoid Austral. Aborigine 0,0 0,0 0,0 Hellman 1928
6,3 De Terra 1905
Melanesian Melanesian bis 9,0 5,0 9,0 Dahlberg 1961
Papuam ss cy. 20,0 De Terra 1905
New Britain... 10,9 0,0 8,8 Turner & Swindler 1978
Caucasoid European. Les) 1,0 2,6 De Terra 1905
155 Ded Axelsson & Kirveskari 1979
American . . . 3,0 2,0 0,0 Hellman 1928
Negroid West African . . 2,0 5,0 6,0 Hellman 1928
South African. . 14,5 1S 10,8 Present study
American... 22,0 4,0 13,0 Hellman 1928
Khoisanoid Soi ee Sie 20,3 0,0 6,3 Present study
Note that the percentage frequencies recorded for the San and South African Negro are not
strictly comparable with the results of a number of these studies because different definitions
of cuspal presence were used.
number of workers whose data are presented in Table 21 regarded a post-
metaconulid, an entoconulid and/or a large, separate median lingual cuspulid
as a tuberculum intermedium. Had the present author also subscribed to the
recognition of all three these features, instead of only the third, as a tuber-
culum intermedium it is certain that the percentage frequencies would have
been higher than those presented in Table 20. Even so, the incidences of the
cuspulid on the first molars of the San and South African Negro are compara-
tively high. Of the twenty-nine populations in which first molars have been
examined for this feature (Table 21), six have higher frequencies than the South
African Negro (Japanese of Turner 1979; Polynesians of Turner & Scott 1976;
Hawaiians of Katich & Turner 1975; Yapese of Harris et al. 1975; Icelandic
Caucasoids of Axelsson & Kirveskari 1979; American Negroes of Hellman
PERMANENT MOLARS OF NEGRO AND SAN 195
1928). Of these populations, only four have a greater percentage incidence
than the San (Japanese of Turner 1979; Polynesians of Turner & Scott 1976;
Yapese of Harris et al. 1975; American Negroes of Hellman 1928). It should
be noted that there are rather dramatic differences amongst the frequencies of
M, cuspulids reported for Jomon Japanese by Turner (1979) and other Japanese
populations, between the frequencies reported for Polynesians by Turner &
Scott (1976) and Suzuki & Sakai (1973), and between the Icelandic Caucasoids
(Axelsson & Kirveskari 1979) and other European and American Caucasoid
populations. It is possible that the frequencies recorded by Turner (1979),
Turner & Scott (1976), Harris et al. (1975), and Axelsson & Kirveskari (1979)
are inflated because of the classificatory criteria employed by them.
The incidences and frequencies of the presence of a fovea anterior on the
lower molars of the San and South African Negro are presented in Table 22.
TABLE 22
Incidence of fovea anterior on lower permanent molars of the
South African Negro and Kalahari San.
M, M, M;
Population Sex N vps N Wa N vA
Negro Males “5 >. 148 69,8 oy Sikes 144 50,0
Female’ =< ... 62 69,7 69 67,6 D4 6355
Gombined ~- . ~210 (69'8 236076054 198 53,1
San Male = 2 SF. oy ON? 41 82,0 12° “35,3
nemale aan 43 76,8 Po OA 123553
Combined... 95 84,1 68). 72,3 DAY 3553
The first molars of the Negro male and female show this feature in an almost
identical percentage of cases and, while the female possesses a fovea anterior
on the second molar more commonly than does the male, this difference is
statistically insignificant. The frequency of this fossid on the third molar is
significantly greater in the Negro female (X? = 4,82; p < 0,05) than in the
male. On the other hand, the fova anterior is present on the first and second
molars significantly more frequently (X? = 4,40; p < 0,05 and X? = 4,98;
p < 0,05 respectively) in the San male than in the San female. While a signifi-
cant degree of sexual dimorphism in the presence of this fossid is apparent in
the third molars of the Negro, both sexes of the San show the same frequency
of the fovea anterior on the wisdom teeth. In all instances where significant
sexual dimorphism was apparent, the differences were barely significant.
The fovea anterior and cusp number were found to be independent variables
on all three molars of the San, on the first molars of the Negro and on the
third molars of the Negro female. These two features were found to be dependent
on the second molars of the Negro male (X? = 4,19; p = 0,04) and the Negro
female (X? = 7,92; p = 0,005) and on the third molars of the Negro male
(X? = 12,22; p = 0,002). In these latter three instances the fovea anterior
tends to be present on five cusped teeth and absent on molars with only four
cusps.
196 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
The San male possesses a fovea anterior significantly more frequently
than the Negro male on both the first (X? = 10,80; p < 0,005) and second
(X? = 10,54; p < 0,005) molars. The San male shows this fossid less frequently
than the Negro male on the third molar, but this difference is not statistically
significant.
The Negro female possesses a fovea anterior less commonly than the
San female on the first molar but more frequently on the second molar; these
differences are slight, however, and are statistically insignificant. The Negro
female displays this fossid more frequently than the San female on the third
molar (X? = 7,84; p < 0,01).
Notwithstanding the sexual dimorphism apparent in the expression of
the trigonid basin in both the San and Negro, the data were pooled for purposes
of overall comparison (Table 22). The San displays a fovea anterior signifi-
cantly more frequently than does the Negro on both the first (X? = 8,67;
p < 0,005) and second (X? = 4,65; p < 0,05) mandibular molars. Conversely,
the Negro possesses this mesial fossid significantly more frequently than the
San on the third molar (X? = 7,28; p < 0,01).
In both populations, and in both sexes of these populations the first molar
shows the highest frequency of mesial fossids, following in decreasing order of
commonality by the second and third molars respectively.
The incidences and frequencies of the fovea posterior on the mandibular
molars of the South African Negro and Kalahari San are presented in Table 23.
No significant sexual dimorphism in the presentation of this character on any
of the molars was found within either the San or Negro samples.
TABLE 23
Incidence of fovea posterior on lower permanent molars of the
South African Negro and Kalahari San.
M, M, M;
Population Sex N We N Yes N A
Negro Maller nae 29 Bi N27 47 16,3
emalens eae 19 21,3 15 14,3 My 17/4!
Combined . . AS males 5206 sl3ell 62 16,6
San Maes eee es ee 11 20,4 3 Tol 0 0,0
inemales ae 10 19,2 4 10,0 1s
Combined. . Die lO8S le 4285 1 1)
The San male shows the distal fossid more frequently than the Negro male
on the first molar, while the Negro male possesses a fovea posterior more
commonly on the second molar; these differences are slight and not statistically
significant. The Negro male displays a fovea posterior significantly more
frequently than does the San male on the third molar (X? = 5,56; p < 0,025).
The San female displays this distal fossid less frequently than does the
Negro female on all three molars; the differences with regard to the first and
second molars are slight and statistically insignificant. The Negro female fre-
quency is significantly higher on the third molar (X? = 4,79; p < 0,05).
PERMANENT MOLARS OF NEGRO AND SAN 197
Comparison of the sexually pooled data (Table 23) indicates that, while
the San tends to show a fovea posterior more commonly than the Negro on
the first molar, the Negro has a higher frequency of this fossid on the second.
These differences are slight and not statistically significant. The Negro possesses
a significantly higher frequency of the fovea posterior than does the San on
the third molar (X? = 10,19; p < 0,005).
Chi-square evaluation of the fovea posterior and cusp number revealed
these two features to be independent on all three molars of both sexes of the
San and Negro.
It is apparent that the fovea anterior is considerably more common than
the fovea posterior on all lower molars of the San and Negro (cf. Tables 22-23).
Biggerstaff (1968) recommended that the combination of the presence or
absence of the fovea posterior and cuspal number was a more useful criterion
for the classification of lower molars than the traditional occlusal patterns.
In a study of dental casts of 199 pairs of like-sexed twins he (Biggerstaff 1975)
found that males had a significantly higher frequency of molars with five cusps
and fovea posterior (his ‘5fd’ type) than did females. In the present samples of
Negro and San molars, however, females possess a higher frequency of ‘5fd’
molars, except for the Negro Mg, and the San Mg, in which instances the female
frequencies are slightly lower than those exhibited by the male. It has been
shown that cusp number and the fovea posterior are independent variables
(at least on the Negro and San molars). In addition, both sexes of the San and
Negro exhibited four-cusped molars with the fovea posterior. Thus, Bigger-
staff’s (1968, 1975) method of crown classification appears to be incomplete,
and even if complete it would serve no more useful purpose than the classi-
fication of molars according to the ‘traditional’ cusp-groove pattern
relationships.
It has been claimed that ‘the tuberculum sextum probably appears most
frequently on five-cusped teeth having a distal fovea and distal marginal ridge’
(Biggerstaff 1968: 444). Quite the contrary is evident in the Negro and San
lower molars. In the majority of cases the tuberculum sextum and the fovea
posterior do not occur together on the same tooth, probably because a tuber-
culum sextum (especially a large cuspulid) obliterates the distal fossid by filling
up the distolingual corner of the crown (Robinson 1956).
The presence of crenulate or wrinkled enamel was recorded here for the
lower molars of the South African Negro and San (Table 24).
In the Negro, the female shows a higher frequency of crenulate enamel
than does the male on all three molars. The degree of sexual dimorphism in
enamel appearance on the first and second molars is slight and the differences
are not statistically significant. In the third molar, however, the frequency of
crenulate enamel in females is significantly greater than that in males
Ce NOS: pp =< 0,005).
The San male shows crenulate enamel more commonly than the San female
on the first molar, but on the second and third molars the female tends to
198 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
TABLE 24
Incidence of crenulate enamel on lower permanent molars of the
South African Negro and Kalahari San.
M, M, M;
Population Sex N WA N vA N Yep
Negro Mae He - oa 11 4,5 13 4,3 60 19,9
Female 7 6,9 8 Tes) 32 36,4
Combined... 18 54 21 5,1 92 23,6
San Wale a San ours yy 3,3 1 2,1 3 8,6
Hemale 1 1,8 1 Deh 3 9,4
Combined... 3 2,6 Z, 2,4 6 §869,0
possess crenulate enamel more frequently. The sexual differences amongst the
lower molars of the San are slight and statistically insignificant.
The Negro male tends to possess wrinkled enamel more frequently than
the San male on all three mandibular molars, but in no instance was the differ-
ence in frequency between them found to be statistically significant. The Negro
female shows crenulate enamel more commonly than the San female on all
molars, and while the differences in frequency on the first and second molars
are insignificant, in the third lower molar the Negro female incidence is sig-
nificantly greater than that of the San female (X? = 8,27; p < 0,005). Thus,
the Negro tends to possess crenulate enamel more commonly than does the
San on all three permanent mandibular molars. The Negro frequencies are only
slightly higher than those of the San for the first and second molars, and in
these instances the sexually pooled population differences are not statistically
significant. The third molar of the Negro is crenulate in appearance con-
siderably more often than is this tooth in the San, and here the differences in
frequencies are statistically significant (X? = 7,23; p < 0,01).
Crenulate enamel on the lower molars of both the San and Negro appears
to be more common on the third molar than on either of the mesial two molars.
In both populations the expression of crenulate enamel by the first and second
molars is nearly of the same frequency.
Due to the inherent difficulty of objectively classifying crenulate enamel,
the number of observations of this feature recorded for recent human teeth is
understandably low. Jacob (1967) stated that he believed enamel wrinkling to
be a characteristic feature of Mongoloid dentitions. Kiernberger (1955: 31)
maintained that ‘das wichtigste Charakteristikum des Khoisanidenzahnes ist
die von Adloff festgestellte Schmelzrunzelung der Molarenkrone’. The fre-
quencies recorded here for the San molars certainly do not support Kiernberger’s
statement; rather, they imply quite the contrary.
Pedersen (1949: 103) recorded that ‘pronounced wrinkles on the occlusal
surfaces were seen in seven out of twenty lower third molars in the skulls [a fre-
quency of 35,0 per cent—cf. Negro female incidence] and in many cases of the
living Eskimo’. He noted also that these wrinkles were absent on all first and
second molars examined by him, but that the wear shown by these teeth had
probably eradicated any trace of enamel wrinkles.
PERMANENT MOLARS OF NEGRO AND SAN 199
It is evident that smooth occlusal enamel is characteristic of the lower
molars of the San, and of the first and second molars of the South African
Negro. The third molar of the Negro (especially of the female) tends to show a
higher incidence of secondary and tertiary enamel cristids, but even here the
incidence cannot be considered to be high.
DISCUSSION
SEXUAL DIMORPHISM
Significant sexual dimorphism in the morphology of the permanent man-
dibular molars is relatively low in both the San and the South African Negro.
Such dimorphism is expressed in only three of the eight features examined:
the deflecting wrinkle, the fovea anterior, and the presence of crenulate enamel
(Table 25). The incidences of metaconid deflecting wrinkles were significantly
dimorphic on only the first molar of the Negro, while the incidences of crenulate
enamel were found to be significantly different on only the third molar of the
Negro. Significant sexual dimorphism is expressed most commonly with regard
to the fovea anterior. The sexual incidences of this feature are significantly
different on the first and second molars of the San and on the third molars
of the Negro. Of the five instances of significant sexual dimorphism found in
the Negro and San molars (Table 25) the sexual differences were barely signifi-
cant in four. A highly significant degree of sexual dimorphism is shown only by
the incidence of crenulate enamel on the Negro third molars. However, crenulate
enamel is very difficult to classify objectively ; enamel wrinkles may be obliterated
by slight wear, and the genetic factors influencing the expression of these wrinkles
may be easily overshadowed by environmental factors such as dietary fluorine
intake, disease, and nutritional status.
TABLE 25
Summary of morphological features in which significant sexual
dimorphism was demonstrated in the South African Negro and
Kalahari San.
M, M, M;
Character Negro San Negro San Negro San
1 soe) ee LER ieee a
2 ae ae SOS ghee re es
3 =a ea ag eee yeas
4 Sey eee cay gies eee
5 b — _— —_—- —
6 _— b — pb b —
7 sla A cae =S ety ae
8 —_—- — —- — a
a—significant difference at p < 0,005;
b—significant difference at p < 0,05.
Characters: 1—principal cusp number; 2—tuberculum sextum;
3—tuberculum intermedium; 4—primary occlusal pattern;
5—deflecting wrinkle; 6—fovea anterior; 7—fovea posterior;
8—crenulate enamel.
200 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Thus, there is a rather low incidence and degree of sexual dimorphism in
the features examined here on the lower permanent molars of the South African
Negro and Kalahari San. The dimorphism shown by these populations is
comparable to, or perhaps slightly less than, that described for the permanent
mandibular molars of other population groups. De Villiers (1958) examined
the expression of sexual dimorphism in some sixty-seven non-metrical features
of the South African Negro skull. She found that significant sexual differences
are manifest in only fourteen of these features, and that sexual dimorphism is
largely associated with the face and jaws and it is most pronounced in man-
dibular characters. De Villiers (1968) concluded that the amount of sexual
dimorphism displayed in the skull of the South African Negro is comparable
to, or slightly less than, that shown by other groups.
CHARACTERISTICS OF SAN AND NEGRO MOLARS
While both the incidence and degree of sexual dimorphism within the
San and Negro molars appear to be rather low, the significant differences in
the morphological characters of the three mandibular molars amongst these
two populations are more common (Table 26). Thus, seven of eight morpho-
logical features examined show significant interpopulational differences variously
on one or more of the permanent molars. Two features (fovea posterior and
crenulate enamel) have significant interpopulational differences on the third
molar only, one feature (fovea anterior) shows significant San—Negro differences
on all three molars, one character (tuberculum sextum) is significantly different
on the first and second molars, and some three non-metrical features (principal
cusp number, primary occlusal pattern, and deflecting wrinkle) show significant
interpopulational differences on only the second molar. Of the ten instances of
significant interpopulational differences encountered, only two (deflecting
wrinkle and fovea anterior on the M,) were found to be barely significant
statistically (Table 26).
In the first molar only two of eight features show significant differences of
incidence between the San and Negro, three features on the third molar display
such differences while five characters show significant populational differences
on the second molar. Thus, the fovea anterior and the tuberculum sextum
appear to be respectively the first and second most useful discriminatory
characters of the mandibular molars, while the second molar seems to display
the greatest number of differences between the San and South African Negro
populations (Table 26).
On the basis of the foregoing analyses a general characterization of the
morphology of the permanent mandibular molars of the San and South African
Negro may be summarized. In view of the relatively low degree of sexual
dimorphism apparent in the features examined, the characterizations presented
here refer to sexually pooled population samples and sexual differences are
enumerated only in those instances where they proved to be statistically signifi-
PERMANENT MOLARS OF NEGRO AND SAN 201
TABLE 26
Summary of morphological features in which
significant (sexually pooled) population
differences amongst the South African Negro
and Kalahari San were demonstrated.
Character M, M, M;
1 a —
DD a a oo
3 aus Lhe as.
4 — a _
5 == c —
6 a c b
7 — a
8 — — b
a—significant difference at p < 0,005;
b—significant difference at p < 0,01;
c—significant difference at p < 0,05.
Characters: 1—principal cusp number;
2—tuberculum sextum; 3—tuberculum inter-
medium; 4—primary occlusal pattern;
5—deflecting wrinkle; 6—fovea anterior;
7—fovea posterior; 8—crenulate enamel.
cant. Lest these characterizations of lower molar morphology be viewed as
typological, the frequencies of each trait are alluded to by the use of terms such
as ‘almost always’, ‘usually’ and ‘generally’. Arbitrarily defined frequency limits
have been assigned to these terms as they are used here; thus, ‘almost always’
indicates a frequency between 90-100 per cent, ‘usually’ indicates a frequency
between 80-90 per cent, and ‘generally’ refers to an incidence of between
70-80 per cent.
FIRST PERMANENT MOLAR
Negro: almost always five-cusped; tuberculum sextum usually to almost
always absent; tuberculum intermedium usually absent; primary occlusal
pattern generally to usually in the form of a Y; metaconid cristid generally
either straight and strongly or straight and weakly developed in male and
commonly strongly developed in female with deflecting wrinkle usually absent
in the male and generally absent in the female; fovea anterior generally present;
fovea posterior usually absent; occlusal surface enamel usually to almost
always smooth.
San: almost always five-cusped; tuberculum sextum usually absent but present
significantly more often than in the Negro; tuberculum intermedium generally
or usually absent; primary occlusal pattern usually in the form of a Y; meta-
conid cristid generally either straight and strongly or straight and weakly
developed with deflecting wrinkle generally to usually absent; fovea anterior
almost always present in the male and generally present in the female and
present significantly more often than in the Negro; fovea posterior generally to
usually absent; occlusal surface enamel almost always smooth.
202 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
SECOND PERMANENT MOLAR
Negro: almost equally five or four-cusped; tuberculum sextum almost always
absent; tuberculum intermedium almost always absent; primary occlusal
pattern more commonly in the form of a +; metaconid cristid usually either
weakly developed or absent with a deflecting wrinkle almost always absent;
fovea anterior somewhat more commonly present than absent; fovea posterior
usually absent; occlusal enamel usually to almost always smooth.
San; generally five-cusped, and significantly more frequently than in the Negro;
tuberculum sextum usually absent but present significantly more frequently
than in the Negro; tuberculum intermedium almost always absent; primary
occlusal pattern almost equally in the form of either a Y or +, but significantly
more frequently in the form of a Y than in the Negro; metaconid cristid generally
straight and weakly developed and deflecting wrinkle usually to almost always
absent, and with a significantly higher frequency of weak crests and a signifi-
cantly lower incidence of deflecting wrinkles than in the Negro; fovea anterior
usually present in the male and only somewhat more commonly present than
absent in the female, present significantly more frequently than in the Negro;
fovea posterior usually absent; occlusal enamel almost always smooth.
THIRD PERMANENT MOLAR
Negro; generally to usually five-cusped; tuberculum sextum generally to usually
absent; tuberculum intermedium usuall absent; primary occlusal pattern
usually in the form of either a + or an X, with almost equal frequencies of
both; metaconid cristid almost always either weakly developed or absent,
with almost equal frequencies of both expressions; fovea anterior either present
or absent with almost equal frequency in the male and somewhat more com-
monly present in the female; fovea posterior usually absent; occlusal enamel
generally smooth.
San: generally to usually five-cusped; tuberculum sextum more commonly to
generally absent; tuberculum intermedium usually absent; primary occlusal
pattern generally either in the form of a + or an X with almost equal frequen-
cies of both and, as in the Negro, with only a slightly lower incidence of the
Y pattern; metaconid cristid usually either weakly developed or absent and,
as in the Negro, a deflecting wrinkle is usually to almost always absent; fovea
anterior more commonly absent than present and present significantly less
frequently than in the Negro; occlusal enamel usually smooth, and crenulate
in appearance significantly less frequently than in the Negro.
OCCLUSAL MORPHOLOGICAL INTERRELATIONSHIPS
Almost all of the features examined here show the same intermolar inci-
dence relationships (e.g. a given character is most commonly expressed on the
M,, less frequently shown by the M, and least commonly evinced by the Ms)
in both the San and Negro. In both populations the five principal cusps, the
PERMANENT MOLARS OF NEGRO AND SAN 203
metaconid deflecting wrinkle and the tuberculum intermedium are most com-
monly shown by the first molar, followed in decreasing order of frequency by
the third and second molars respectively (i.e. frequencies M, > M, > M.,).
The fovea anterior and the Y pattern are expressed most frequently by the
first molar, followed in decreasing incidences by the second and third molars
respectively (i.e. M, > M, > Ms). Conversely, the tuberculum sextum and the
X pattern are shown most commonly by the third molar, followed in decreasing
order of frequency by the second and first molars _ respectively
(i.e. M; > M, > M,). In both the San and the Negro the H pattern is evinced
only on third molars. Crenulate enamel is displayed most frequently on this
tooth with considerably lower, and almost equal, frequencies shown by the
first and second molars. The + pattern is shown most frequently by the second
molars, while the third and first molars show decreasing frequencies of this
pattern (i.e. M, > Ms; > M,). With respect to the fovea posterior, however,
this character shows a frequency relationship in the South African Negro of
M, > M, > M, and in the San of M, > M, > Ms.
On all three molars of both the Negro and the San the fovea anterior is
present more often than the fovea posterior. Also, in both populations, while
the tuberculum intermedium is shown more frequently than the tuberculum
sextum on the first molar, on the second and third molars the tuberculum
sextum is present considerably more frequently than the tuberculum
intermedium.
Paired chi-square evaluations of interdependence have been performed
for most of the characters examined. In these evaluations either no inter-
dependence or sometimes barely significant levels of dependence were found.
Thus, in both the San and the South African Negro the principal cusp number
and primary groove pattern appear to have a sometimes low level of dependence,
but generally these two characters seem to be independent. The primary occlusal
pattern appears to be independent of metaconid cristid morphology, and in
particular, the Y pattern and the deflecting wrinkle are not dependent. The
presence of neither the fovea posterior nor the fovea anterior is dependent upon
principal cusp number. Similarly, the presence of crenulate occlusal enamel is
independent of principal cuspal number on the lower molars of the San and
South African Negro. Thus, until the type of genetic control over the expression
of lower molar dental variants has been established, it would seem that each
of these features should be categorized separately. That is, classificatory schemes
that combine two or more characters (e.g. Y-5, +-4, X-5, 5fd, etc.) should not
be used in odontological studies.
BIOLOGICAL INTERRELATIONSHIPS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN NEGRO AND THE
KALAHARI SAN
The term ‘Koisan’ (or, as it is usually spelt, Khoisan) was proposed by
Schultze-Jena (1928: 211) ‘als gemeinsamer Rassenname fiir Hottentotten und
Buschmanner’. The name Khoisan is most commonly used today in a generic
204 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
sense to include the Khoi (Hottentots) and the San (Bushmen). The biological
interrelationship of the Khoisan (and especially the San) and African Negroes
have been the subject of considerable study. Until about the middle of the
present century, most workers were concerned with producing a classification
or taxonomy of African peoples, and these workers generally expounded a
typological approach to the problems of interrelationship definition. No useful
purpose would be served here by reviewing these past polemics. More recently,
studies of the Khoisan and Negro peoples have been based upon an examination
of the limits of phenotypic variability of gross morphological features in these
populations. Amongst the constellation of features thus examined a few of the
more notable that serve to characterize the San are: mesometriocranial and
pentaganoid cranium; mesoproscopic face and euryene upper face; ortho-
gnathism; mesochonch orbits; brachystaphaline palate; small postglenoid
tubercles; faint glabella and weak supraciliary ridges; nasal bones highly
obtusely angulated (De Villiers 1968); frontal processes of the maxillae highly
obtusely angulated (Grine 1979); skin showing a lower mean reflectance and
therefore lighter in colour than that of the Negro (Weiner et al. 1964); head
hair tending to consist of tightly spiralled tufts; small, commonly lobeless ears
with overrolled helices; relatively small stature (Tobias 1955-6, 1960, 1966:
Singer & Weiner 1963); steatomeria and steatopygia (De Villiers 1961; Krut
& Singer 1963); marked and nearly universal macronymphia (De Villiers
1961); ithyphally (Drury & Drennan 1926); fewer dermatoglyphic whorls and
more arches; and high frequency of palmer patterns in areas II-IV (Tobias
1961). Tobias (1972), Nurse & Jenkins (1977), and Singer (1978) have compiled
somewhat more extensive lists of gross morphological features that tend to
characterize the San and delineate them from other African groups. Most,
if not all, of the foregoing characters are probably polygenic and have complex
modes of inheritance. In addition, the relationship between genotype and
phenotype in not a few of these characters is made more complex by the modi-
fying influences of the environment. Consequently, the assessment of these
characters as genetic markers is extremely difficult.
Since the sixties the Khoisan and Negro peoples of southern Africa have
been the subject of a number of genetic studies (Tobias 1966, 1972; Nurse &
Jenkins 1977). The essential genetic unity of sub-Saharan Africa has been
shown by these studies. More particularly, the strong genetic affinities of the
South African Negro with the Negro populations of west and central Africa
have been stressed (Tobias 1972). Although these genetic studies have demon-
strated that the Khoisan peoples have more in common genetically with Negroes
than either group has with non-African peoples, a number of differences between
the San and Negro have been detected.
The Abantu phenotype was first characterized by Brain (1966) and thus
named because he believed it to be characteristic of the South African Bantu-
speaking Negro. Jenkins (1974) has shown this allele to be much commoner
in the San (and Khoi) than in the southern African Negro and, because of its
PERMANENT MOLARS OF NEGRO AND SAN 205
virtual absence in Negroes to the north, he has postulated that the 42" red
cell antigen is primarily a Khoisan character that has been acquired secon-
darily by Negro peoples in their southward migrations. Similarly, the Duffy
red cell antigen, Fy, occurs with high frequency in the Khoisan, while Negroes
often lack any Duffy antigen (Nurse & Jenkins 1977). Nurse & Jenkins (1977)
have proposed that the Fy* gene has been acquired by the southern African
Negro from the Khoisan. Jenkins & Corfield (1972) have claimed that the acid
phosphatase allele, P’, is almost certainly a Khoisan marker, and it has been
proposed that this gene was similarly acquired by the Negroes in the course of
their southward migrations (Nurse & Jenkins 1977). However, Santachiarra-
Benerecetti et al. (1977) and Ojkutu et al. (1977) reported P! frequencies of 0,17
and 0,05 in the Babinga Pygmies and the Yorba of Nigeria respectively, and,
as such, this allele may not be a very useful marker in this context. Transferrin
D,, a f-globulin variant, seems to represent an essentially San character in
southern Africa, and its presence in southern African Negroes has been ascribed
to San admixture (Nurse & Jenkins 1977).
In a survey of the distribution of variants of the 6-phosphogluconate
dehydrogenase (6PGD) red cell enzyme in southern Africa, Jenkins & Nurse
(1974) found that the PG D¢ allele is not often present in San populations. They
proposed that its presence in the San is an indication of Negro admixture.
Glucose-6-phosphate dehydrogenase (G6PD) deficiency has been shown to be
much less common in the San than in Negro populations (Charlton & Bothwell
1961). However, both of the characteristically Negro variants have been identi-
fied in the San, and this has been ascribed to Negro admixture (Nurse & Jenkins
OTT):
The Gm system of serum protein polymorphisms appears to be one of
the most useful so far discovered for the elucidation of anthropological prob-
lems in southern Africa (Nurse & Jenkins 1977). The Gm>-* haplotype appears
to be characteristic of the Negro, and the Gm!'8 (and to a lesser degree the
Gm?!) haplotype is common amongst the San peoples, while Gm1-® is rare
and Gm?! is virtually absent in other sub-Saharan African populations (Jenkins
& Steinberg 1966; Jenkins et al. 1970; Steinberg et al. 1975).
Only a few of the apparent genetic differences found so far among the
San and Negro are mentioned above (see Tobias 1972; Nurse & Jenkins 1977).
It appears that while some alleles are characteristically San (or Khoisan)
(e.g. Abantu, acid phosphatase P', Fy®, Gm'-!8) others are characteristic of the
Negro (e.g. peptidase Pep*?, Gm!->»°). Furthermore, the frequency distributions
of these various genes amongst the San and Negro populations seem to indicate
a certain amount of genetic exchange between the two groups. The quantity
of genetic exchange is difficult to ascertain because of uncertainties about the
part played by drift or selection in the attainment of the frequencies of certain
alleles in the San and Negro. For example, the transferrin D, variant, which is
frequently found amongst the San and less commonly shown by the southern
African Negro, has been shown to be electrophoretically and chemically
206 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
identical to that found among Australian aborigines (Krik et al. 1964; Wang
et al. 1967). The San also manifest, in common with the Australian aborigines,
low or absent frequencies of S in the MNSs Henshaw system and the occasional
presence of adults with the Lewis Le (a+b-+) phenotype (Nurse & Jenkins
1977). These similarities may reflect parallel adaptations to the selective pressures
imposed by similar environments and modes of life.
How do the results obtained from the present study of the occlusal mor-
phology of the permanent lower molars of the San and the South African
Negro compare with the results of other morphological and genetic studies
on these people?
Comparative data on the principal cusp numbers, the primary occlusal
patterns, the tuberculum sextum and tuberculum intermedium for other African
-and New World Negro populations have been recorded (see Tables 4—6, 8-14,
19, 21). Data for the frequencies of the tuberculum sextum and tuberculum
intermedium are available for relatively few non-South African Negro popu-
lations. The South African Negro frequencies for the tuberculum sextum on
all three molars fall within the frequency ranges for other Negro populations
(Table 19) and the South African Negro frequencies for the tuberculum inter-
medium on the first and third molars fall between the frequencies shown by
the west African and American Negro populations. The South African Negro
very rarely shows a tuberculum intermedium on the second molar; this frequency
is lower than that of any other Negro population and closely approximates the
San incidence (Table 21).
Considerably more comparative Negro data are available for principal
cusp number and primary occlusal pattern frequencies. The frequency of
five-cusped first mandibular molars in the South African Negro is amongst
the highest recorded for Negro populations and closely approximates the
San frequency (Table 4). Although the incidence of five-cusped second per-
manent molars in the South African Negro (47,6 per cent) is significantly lower
than the San incidence (78,4 per cent), frequency for the South African Negro
is considerably higher than for any other Negro population so far examined
(Table 5). It is possible that the relatively high frequency of five-cusped second
molars in the South African Negro is due to a certain amount of San admixture.
Similarly, the San and South African Negro show comparatively high frequen-
cies of five-cusped third mandibular molars. Only Hellman’s (1928) west African
population shows an incidence comparable with that of the South African
Negro (Table 6).
On the other hand, the South African Negro possesses the lowest frequency
of the Y pattern on the first molar of any Negro population so far studied
(Tables 9-10). The San shows a higher (albeit insignificantly so) incidence of
this pattern than the South African Negro on the first mandibular molar, and
the San incidence is thus closer to those shown by non-South African Negroes
than it is to the South African Negro frequency. Similarly, the South African
Negro shows a significantly lower frequency of the Y pattern on the second
PERMANENT MOLARS OF NEGRO AND SAN 207
mandibular molar than does the San, and the incidences of almost all other
Negro populations are higher than that of the South African Negro and thus
closer to the San frequency (Tables 11-12).
Thus, in certain features of the lower molars (e.g. principal cusp number,
and perhaps, the tuberculum intermedium on the M,) the San and South African
Negro seem to display frequencies that are more similar to each other than
either is to most non-southern African Negroes. And this is evident despite
the fact that in some of these instances (e.g. principal cusp number on the M,)
the San and South African Negro frequencies are significantly different. In
other characters (e.g. the primary occlusal pattern), however, the South African
Negro frequencies appear to be further removed from those of the San than the
incidences shown by other Negro populations.
As discussed previously for each character, the San and other African
(Negro) populations generally show frequencies more in common compared
with the differences that separate Subsaharan Africans from most other racial
constellations.
Thus, the results of the present study on the mandibular molar morphology
of the San and South African Negro are compatible with, and to some degree
corroborate, the conclusions reached by others who have examined gross
morphological and gentic features of these peoples (e.g. De Villiers 1968;
Rightmire 1970; Tobias 1972; Nurse & Jenkins 1977). Although there is
evidence that at least some dental features are monogenic, the modification by
environmental factors of the genetic control over the expression of these dental
traits and the degree to which these variants are selectively affected by wear
and disease are far from completely understood. Because of these problems,
Berry (1976) has questioned the practical value of minor crown variants in
anthropological studies. Nevertheless, when used in conjunction with the
results of studies on other gross morphological features and the results of
genetic studies on the people in question, dental traits seem to convey informa-
tion as reliable as that gained from other, non-dental characters.
Perhaps the most serious drawback to the anthropological usefulness of
dental traits is the question of the usefulness, for comparative purposes, of data
published by different workers in view of the inter-observer differences in the
scoring of dental variants.
SUMMARY
A series of morphological characters of the permanent mandibular molars
of the South African Negro and Kalahari San have been investigated. These
features include the principal cusp number, the presence or absence of the
tuberculum sextum and tuberculum intermedium, the form of the primary
occlusal pattern, the presence or absence of a deflecting wrinkle and the mesial
and distal foveae, and the appearance of the occlusal enamel. The definitions
and various methods employed in the classification of these characters are
reviewed.
208 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Significant sexual dimorphism in the morphology of the mandibular
molars is relatively low in both the Sand and Negro. Such dimorphism is
expressed variously by these populations in only three of the eight features
examined (i.e. the deflecting wrinkle, the fovea anterior and the presence of
crenulate enamel), and even then sexual dimorphism is not expressed on all
three molars for these three features.
While there is a low incidence and degree of sexual dimorphism in the
features examined, significant populational differences amongst the San and
Negro are more common. The fovea anterior and the tuberculum sextum
appear to be respectively the first and second most useful discriminatory
characters, while the second molar displays the greatest number of significant
differences between the San and the Negro. A characterization of the lower
molar morphology of the San and Negro is provided.
Paired chi-square evaluations of interdependence have been performed for
most of the characters examined. Most of the features were found to be inde-
pendent of one another. Principal cusp number and primary occlusal pattern
appear to have a sometimes low level of dependence in the Negro, but in most
instances these two characters seem to be independent. No relationship is evident
between the presence of a deflecting wrinkle and the presence of a Y occlusal
pattern.
The biological differences and similarities of the San and Negro as deter-
mined by both gross morphological and genetic studies are reviewed. A number
of morphological and genetic features that may be considered characteristic of
the San are found in varying frequencies in South African Negro populations.
It is generally assumed that ‘hybridization’ has brought some of the ‘San alleles’
into the gene pool of the southern African Negro. Furthermore, it is postulated
by most workers that these San characteristics were acquired secondarily by the
Negro in the course of their southward migrations. In certain of the dental
features examined here the San and South African Negro frequencies appear
to be more similar to one another compared with frequencies shown by other
Negro populations. Thus, the dental data presented here for the San and South
African Negro are compatible with, and to some degree corroborate, what is
known about the interrelationships of these peoples from non-dental morpho-
logical and genetic data.
Perhaps the most serious drawback to the anthropological usefulness of
dental traits is the question of the comparative usefulness of data published by
different workers in view of the inter-observer differences in scoring these traits.
ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS
The dental casts and associated field records of the San were made available
to me through the generosity of Professor J. F. van Reenen. Permission to
examine the material in the Raymond A. Dart Collection was granted by
Professor P. V. Tobias. Most of the calculations were made using the I.B.M.
PERMANENT MOLARS OF NEGRO AND SAN 209
360/175, Computer Centre, University of the Witwatersrand. I thank Professors
T. Jenkins, P. V. Tobias and A. J. Perzigian for reading the various drafts of
this manuscript and for their invaluable comments and advice.
REFERENCES
ABEL, W. 1931. Kritische Untersuchungen tiber Australopithecus africanus Dart. Gegenbaurs
morph. Jb. 65: 539-640.
Aptorr, P. 1937. Uber die primitiven und die sogenannten ‘pithekoiden’ Merkmale im
Gebiss des recenten und fossilen Menschen und ihre Bedeutung. Z. Anat. Entwgesch.,
Leipzig 107: 68-82.
ADLOFF, P. 1938. Das Gebiss von Sinanthropus pekinensis. Z. Morph. Anthrop. 37: 490-537.
AXELSSON, G. & KIRVESKARI, P. 1977. The deflecting wrinkle on the teeth of Icelanders and
the Mongoloid dental complex. Am. J. phys. Anthrop. 47: 321-324.
AXELSSON, G. & KIRVESKARI, P. 1979. Sixth and seventh cusp on lower molar teeth of Ice-
landers. Am. J. phys. Anthrop. 51: 79-82.
BaliitT, H. L., Dewitt, S. J. & LEIGH, R. A. 1968. The size and morphology of the Nasioi
dentition. Am. J. phys. Anthrop. 28: 271-288.
Barnes, D. S. 1969. Tooth morphology and other aspects of the Teso dentition. Am. J. phys.
Anthrop. 30: 183-194.
BENNEJEANT, C. 1936. Anomalies et variations dentaires chez les Primates. Paris: Clermont-
Ferrand.
Berry, A. C. 1976. The anthropological value of minor variants of the dental crown. Am. J.
phys. Anthrop. 45: 257-268.
Beynon, A. D. 1971. The dentition of the Afghan Tajik. Jn: DAHLBERG, A. A. ed. Dental
morphology and evolution: 271-282. Chicago: University of Chicago Press.
BIGGERSTAFF, R. H. 1968. On the groove configuration of mandibular molars: the unreliability
of the ‘Dryopithecus pattern’ and a new method for classifying mandibular molars.
Am. J. phys. Anthrop. 29: 441-444.
BIGGERSTAFF, R. H. 1975. Cusp size, sexual dimorphism, and heritability of cusp size in twins.
Am. J. phys. Anthrop. 42: 127-140.
BLEEK, D. F. 1927. The distribution of Bushman languages in South Africa. Festscrift Meinhof.
Hamburg: L. Friederichsen.
BRABANT, H. 1965. Observations sur l’evolution de la denture temporaire humaine en Europe
occidentale. Bull. Grpmt. int. Rech. scient. Stomat. 8: 235-302.
BRABANT, H. 1971. The human dentition during the Megalithic era. In: DAHLBERG, A. A. ed.
Dental morphology and evolution: 283-297. Chicago: University of Chicago Press.
BRABANT, H. & TWEISSELMANN, F. 1964. Observations sur l’evolution de la denture permanente
humaine en Europe occidentale. Bull. Grpmt. int. Rech. scient. Stomat. 7: 11-84.
BRAIN, P. 1966. Subgroups of A in the South African Bantu. Vox Sang. 11: 686-698.
BREWER-CARIAS, C., LEBLANC, S. & NEEL, J. 1976. Genetic structure of a tribal population,
the Yanomama Indians. XIII. Dental microdifferentiation. Am. J. phys. Anthrop. 44:
5-14.
BROTHWELL, D. R. 1967. Some problems and objectives related to the study of dental varia-
tion in human populations. J. dent. Res. 46: 938-941.
CAIDEN, J, D, 1972. Dental variation in man. Jn: WASHBURN, S. & DOLHINOwW, R. C. eds.
Perspectives on human evolution: 199-222. New York: Holt, Rinehart & Winston.
CAMPBELL, T. D. 1925. Dentition and palate of Australian Aboriginal. Publs Keith Sheridan
Fdn. Med. Res. 1: 1-123.
CAMPUSANO, C., FIGUEROA, H., LAzo, B., PINTO-CISTERNAS, J. & SALINAS, C. 1972. Some
dental traits of Diaguitas Indian skulls. Am. J. phys. Anthrop. 36: 139-142.
CHAGULA, W. K. 1960. The cusps on the mandibular molars of East Africans. Am. J. phys.
Anthrop. 18: 83-90.
CHAPPEL, H. G. 1927. Jaws and teeth of ancient Hawaiians. Mem. B. P. Bishop Mus. 9: 1-20.
CHARLTON, R. W. & BOTHWELL, T. H. 1961. Primaquine sensitive red cells in various races in
southern Africa. Br. med. J. 41: 941-944.
210 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
CoRRUCCINI, R. S. 1972. The biological relationships of some prehistoric and historic Pueblo
populations. Am. J. phys. Anthrop. 37: 373-388.
DAHLBERG, A. A. 1949. The dentition of the American Indian. In: LAUGHLIN, W. S. ed.
Papers on the physical anthropology of the American Indian: 138-176. New York: Viking
Fund.
DAHLBERG, A. A. 1961. Relationship of tooth size to cusp number and groove conformation
of occlusal surface patterns of lower molar teeth. J. dent. Res. 40: 34-38.
DAHLBERG, A. A. 1963. Analysis of the American Indian dentition. In: BROTHWELL, D. R. ed.
Dental anthropology: 149-177. London: Pergamon.
DE TERRA, M. 1905. Beitrdge zu einer Odontographie der Menschenrassen. Berlin: Berlinische
Verlags.
DE VivutErRs, H. 1961. The tablier and steatopygia in Kalahari Bushwomen. S. Afr. J. Sci. 57:
223-227.
DE VILuiers, H. 1968. The skull of the South African Negro: a biometrical and morphological
study. Johannesburg: Witwatersrand University Press.
DeEvoTo, F. C. & CIGLIANO, E. 1970. Morphology of the permanent molars in pre-Columbian
population of Santa Rosa de Tastil (Salta, Argentina). J. dent. Res. 49: 997.
DevotTo, F. C. & PERROTTO, B. M. 1972. Groove pattern and cusp number of mandibular
molars from Tastilian Indians. J. dent. Res. 51: 205.
DevoTo, F. C., PERROTTO, B. M. & Estraco, V. 1970. Molar occlusal pattern of the con-
temporary population of San Antonio de Los Cobres and Cobres (Argentina, Salta) and
Sey and Susgues (Argentina, Jujay). J. dent. Res. 49: 997-998.
DRENNAN, M. R. 1929. The dentition of a Bushman tribe. Ann. S. Afr. Mus. 24: 61-87.
Drury, J. & DRENNAN, M. R. 1926. The pudendal parts of the South African Bush race.
S. Afr. med. J, 22: 113-117.
ERDBRINK, D. P. 1965. A quantification of the Dryopithecus and other lower molar patterns
in man and some of the apes. Z. Morph. Anthrop. 57: 70-108.
FriscH, J. E. 1965. Trends in the evolution of the hominoid dentition. Biblthea. primatol. 3:
1-130.
GARN, S. M., DAHLBERG, A. A., Lewis, A. B. & KEREWSKyY, R. S. 1966a. Cusp number,
occlusal groove pattern and human taxonomy. Nature, Lond. 210: 224-225.
GARN, S. M., DAHLBERG, A. A., Lewis, A. B. & KEREWSKY, R. S. 196656. Groove pattern,
cusp number and tooth size. J. dent. Res. 45: 970.
Goaz, P. W. & MILLER, M. C. 1966. A preliminary description of the dental morphology
of the Peruvian Indian. J. dent. Res. 45: 106-119.
GOLDSTEIN, M. S. 1931. The cusps in the mandibular molar teeth of the Eskimo. Am. J. phys.
Anthrop. 16: 215-235.
GOLDSTEIN, M. S. 1948. Dentition of Indian crania from Texas. Am. J. phys. Anthrop. 6: 63-84.
GreGcory, W. K. 1916. Studies on the evolution of the Primates. Bull. Am. Mus. nat. Hist. 35:
239-355.
Grecory, W. K. 1922. The origin and evolution of the human dentition. Baltimore: Williams
& Wilkins.
Grecory, W. K. 1926a. Palaeontology of the human dentition. Ten structural stages in the
evolution of the cheek teeth. Am. J. phys. Anthrop. 9: 401-426.
GREGORY, W. K. 1926b. Some critical stages in the evolution of the human dental apparatus.
J. dent. Res. 6: 71-100.
Grecory, W. K. 1934. Man’s place among the anthropoids. London: Oxford University Press.
GREGORY, W. K. & HELLMAN, M. 1926a. The dentition of Dryopithecus and the origin of man,
Anthrop. Pap. Am. Mus. nat. Hist. 28: 1-128.
GREGORY, W. K. & HELLMAN, M. 1926b. Palaeontology of the human dentition. Part I.
The crown patterns of fossil and recent human molar teeth their meaning. Int. J. Orthod.,
Oral Surg., Radiog. 12: 1027-1037.
GREGORY, W. K., HELLMAN, M. & Lewis, G. E. 1938. Fossil anthropoids of the Yale-Cam-
bridge India expedition of 1935. Publ. Carneg. Instn 495: 1-27.
GRINE, F. E. 1978. Occlusal morphology of the lower molars of the South African Negro and
San (Bushman). J. Anat. 126: 667.
GRINE, F. E. 1979. Report on two infant skeletons and an adult metatarsal excavated from
Diana’s Vow. Occ. pap. natn. Mus. Rhod. (A) 4: 141-145.
PERMANENT MOLARS OF NEGRO AND SAN Di
GRINE, F. E. 198la. A new composite juvenile specimen of Australopithecus (Mammalia,
Primates) from Member IV, Sterkfontein Formation, Transvaal. Ann. S. Afr. Mus. 84:
169-201.
GRINE, F. E. 19815. Description of some juvenile hominid specimens from Swartkrans,
Transvaal. Ann. S. Afr. Mus. 86: 43-71.
GRINE, F. E. 1981c. A new juvenile hominid (Mammalia, Primates) from Member III, Krom-
draai Formation, Transvaal, South Africa. Ann. Transv. Mus. (in press).
GRINE, F. E. 1981d. Note on a new hominid specimen from Member III, Kromdraai Forma-
tion, Transvaal. Ann. Transv. Mus. (in press).
HANIHARA, K. 1956. Studies on the deciduous dentition of the Japanese and Japanese—
American hybrids. III. Deciduous lower molars. J. anthrop. Soc. Nippon 64: 95-116.
HANIHARA, K. 1961. Criteria for classification of crown characteristics of the human deciduous
dentition. J. anthrop. Soc. Nippon 69: 27-45.
HANIHARA, K. 1963. Crown characters of the deciduous dentition of the Japanese-American
hybrids. Jn; BROTHWELL, D. R. ed. Dental anthropology: 105-124. London: Pergamon.
HANIHARA, K. 1966. Mongoloid dental complex in the deciduous dentition. J. anthrop. Soc.
Nippon 74: 61-72.
HANIHARA, K. 1967. Racial characteristics of the dentition. J. dent. Res. 46: 923-926.
HANIHARA, K. 1968a. Mongoloid dental complex in the permanent dentition. Proc. VIII
Int. Congr. anthrop. ethnol. Sci. 1: 298-300.
HANIHARA, K. 19685. Morphological pattern of the deciduous dentition in the Japanese-
American hybrids. J. anthrop. Soc. Nippon 76: 114-121.
HANIHARA, K. 1970. Mongoloid dental complex in the deciduous dentition with special
reference to the Ainu. J. anthrop. Soc. Nippon 78: 3-17.
HANIHARA, K. & MINAMIDATE, T. 1965. Tuberculum accessorium mediale internum in the
human deciduous lower second molars. J. anthrop. Soc. Nippon 73: 9-19.
HANIHARA, K., KUWASHIMA, T. & SAKAO, N. 1964. The ‘deflecting wrinkle’ on the lower molars
of recent man. J. anthrop. Soc. Nippon 72: 1-8.
HANIHARA, K., MASUDA, T., TANAKA, T. & TAMADA, M. 1975. Comparative studies of den-
tition. Jn: WATENABE, S., KONDO, S. & MATSUNAGA, E. eds. JIBP Synthesis. Part 3
Anthropological and genetic studies of the Ainu: 256-264. Tokyo: University of Tokyo
Press.
Harris, E. F., TURNER, C. G. & UNDERWOOD, J. H. 1975. Dental morphology of living
Yap Islanders, Micronesia. Peopling of the Pacific III. Archaeol. phys. Anthrop. Oceania
10: 218-234.
HELLMAN, M. 1928. Racial characters in the human dentition. Part I. A racial distribution
of the Dryopithecus pattern and its modifications in the lower molar teeth of man. Proc.
Am. phil. Soc. 67: 157-174.
HERSHKOVITZ, P. 1971. Basic crown patterns and cusp homologies of mammalian teeth. Jn:
DAHLBERG, A. A. ed. Dental morphology and evolution: 95-150. Chicago: University of
Chicago Press.
Hooton, E. A. 1930. The Indians of Pecos Pueblo: a study of their skeletal remains. New Haven:
Yale University Press.
Hrpouicka, A. 1909. Skeletal remains from Arkansas and Louisiana. J. Acad. Nat. Sci.,
Philadelphia 14: 209-231.
HrpuicKA, A. 1910. Anthropology of the Eskimo. Anthrop. Pap. Am. Mus. nat. Hist. 5: 1-25.
Hrpb.icKa, A. 1924. New data on the teeth of early man and certain fossil European apes.
Am. J. phys. Anthrop. 7: 109-132.
JAcosB, T. 1967. Racial identification of Bronze Age human dentitions from Bali, Indonesia.
J. dent. Res. 5 (suppl.): 903-910.
JACOBSON, A. 1967. The Bantu dentition: a morphological and metrical study of the teeth,
jaws and bony palate of several large groups of South African Bantu-speaking Negroids.
Unpublished Ph.D. Thesis, University of the Witwatersrand, Johannesburg.
JANZER, O. 1927. Die Zahne der Neu-Pommern. Ein Beitrag zur Anthropologie der Neu-
Pommern, und zur Odontographie der Menschenrassen. Vjschr. Zahnheilk. 2: 1-123.
JENKINS, T. 1974. Blood group A°2"t¥ population and family studies. Vox Sang. 26: 537-550.
JENKINS, T. & CORFIELD, V. 1972. The red cell acid phosphatase polymorphism in southern
Africa: population data and studies on the R, RA and RB phenotypes. Ann. hum. Genet. 35:
379-391.
Diy ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
JENKINS, T. & Nurse, G. T. 1974. The red cell 6-phosphogluconate dehydrogenase poly-
morphism in certain southern African populations with first report of a new phenotype.
Ann. hum. Genet. 38: 19-29.
JENKINS, T. & STEINBERG, A. G. 1966. Some serum protein polymorphisms in Kalahari
Bushmen and Bantu: gamma globulins, haptoglobins and transferrins. Am. J. hum. Genet.
18: 399-407.
JENKINS, T. & Tosias, P. V. 1977. Nomenclature of population groups in southern Africa.
Afr. Stud. 36: 49-55.
JENKINS, T., BLECHER, S. R., SMITH, A. N. & ANDERSON, C. G. 1968. Some hereditary red cell
traits in Kalahari Bushmen and Bantu: hemoglobins, glucose-6-phosphate dehydrogenase
deficiency, and blood groups. Am. J. hum. Genet. 20: 229-309.
JENKINS, T., ZOUTENDYK, A. & STEINBERG, A. G. 1970. Gammaglobulin groups (Gm and Inv)
of various southern African populations. Am. J. phys. Anthrop. 32: 197-218.
JORGENSEN, K. D. 1955. The Dryopithecus pattern in recent Danes and Dutchmen. J. dent.
Res. 34: 195-208.
JORGENSEN, K. D. 1956. The deciduous dentition: a descriptive and comparative odonto-
logical study. Acta Odont. Scand. 14 (suppl. 20): 1-209.
KaTICH, J. F. & TURNER, C. G. 1975. The dentition of prehistoric Hawaiians and the question
of New World origins of Polynesians. Actas XLI Congr. Internacional de Americanistas,
Mexico City, 1974, 1: 192-207.
KIERNBERGER, A. 1955. Morphologische Untersuchungen am Gebiss und den Zahnen der
Buschmann-Hottentotten Gruppe. Sber. Ost. Akad. Wiss. (ser. A) 10: 1-38.
Kirk, R. L., PARKER, W. C. & BEARN, A. G. 1964. The distribution of transferrin variants D,
and Dgyj in various populations. Acta genet. 14: 41-S1.
KrutT, L. H. & SINGER, R. 1963. Steatopygia. Am. J. phys. Anthrop. 21: 181-187.
LAVELLE, C. 1971. Mandibular molar tooth configurations in different racial groups. J. dent.
Res. 50: 1353.
Lawton, A. C. 1967. Bantu pottery of southern Africa. Ann. S. Afr. Mus. 49: 1-440.
LEIGH, R. W. 1934. Notes on the somatology and pathology of ancient Egypt. Univ. Calif.
Publ. Am. Archeol. Ethnol. 34: 1-54.
LEIGH, R. W. 1937. Dental morphology and pathology in pre-Spanish Peru. Am. J. phys.
Anthrop. 22: 267-296.
LOMBARDI, A. V. 1975. Tooth size associations of three morphologic dental traits in a Mela-
nesian population. J. dent. Res. 54: 239-243.
MACINTYRE, G. T. 1966. The Miacidae (Mammalia, Carnivora). Part I. The systematics of
Ictidopappus and Protictis. Bull. Am. Mus. nat. Hist. 131: 115-210.
MALHERBE, M. & OckKERSE, T. 1944. Dental caries in a high and low incidence area in South
Africa. A study of possible contributory factors with special reference to diet. S. Afr.
J. med. Sci. 9: 75-88.
MatTsuDA, T. 1961. Studies on the Dryopithecus pattern of Japanese residing in Hokuriku
district. Folia Anat. Jap. 37: 317-330.
Mo c ter, I. J. 1965. Dental fluorose og caries. Copenhagen: Rhodos.
MOL er, I. J. 1967. Influence of microelements on the morphology of the teeth. J. dent. Res.
46: 933-937.
Moorrees, C. F. A. 1950. The dentition as a criterion of race with special reference to the
Aleut. J. dent. Res. 30: 815-821.
Moorrees, C. F. A. 1957. The Aleut dentition: a correlative study of dental characteristics
in an Eskimoid people. Cambridge: Harvard University Press.
Morais, D. H. 1970. On deflecting wrinkles and the Dryopithecus pattern in human mandibular
molars. Am. J. phys. Anthrop. 32: 97-104.
NELSON, C. T. 1938. The teeth of the Indians of Pecos Pueblo. Am. J. phys. Anthrop. 23:
261-293.
Nig, N. H., Hut, C. H., JENKINS, J. G., STEINBRENNER, K. & BENT, D. H. 1975. Statistical
package for the social sciences. 2nd ed. New York: McGraw-Hill.
Nurse, G. T. & JENKINS, T. 1977. Health and the hunter-gatherer: biomedical studies on the
hunting and gathering populations of southern Africa. Monographs in human genetics 8:
1-126. Basel: S. Karger.
OckeErRSE, T. 1943. The chemical composition of enamel and dentin in high and low caries
areas in South Africa. J. dent. Res. 22: 441-446.
PERMANENT MOLARS OF NEGRO AND SAN 213
OskuTu, R. O., Nurse, G. T. & JENKINS, T. 1977. Red cell enzyme polymorphism in the
Yoruba. Hum. Hered. 27: 444-453.
ORANJE, P. 1934. The dentition of the Bush race. S. Afr. J. Sci. 31: 576.
OsBorn, H. F. 1888. The nomenclature of mammalian molar cusps. Am. Nat. 22: 926-928.
PEDERSEN, P. O. 1949. The East Greenland Eskimo dentition: numerical variations and anatomy,
a contribution to comparative ethnic odontography. Copenhagen: C. A. Reitzels.
PERZIGIAN, A. J. 1976. The dentition of the Indian Knoll skeletal population: odontometrics
and cusp number. Am. J. phys. Anthrop. 44: 113-122.
REMANE, A. 1952. Der vordere Pramolar (P3) von Australopithecus prometheus und die mor-
phologische Stellung des Australopithecinengebisses. Z. Morph. Anthrop. 43: 288-310.
REMANE, A. 1960. Zahne und Gebiss. Jn: HOFer, A., SCHULTZ, A. H. & Starck, D. eds.
Primatologia 3: 637-846.
RIGHTMIRE, G. P. 1970. Bushman, Hottentot and Negro crania studied by distance and dis-
crimination. Am. J. phys. Anthrop. 33: 169-196.
ROBINSON, J. T. 1956. The dentition of the Australopithecinae. Mem. Transy. Mus. 9: 1-179.
ROSENZWEIG, K. A. & ZILBERMAN, Y. 1967. Dental morphology of Jews from Yemen and
Cochin. Am. J. phys. Anthrop. 26: 15-22.
ROSENZWEIG, K. A. & ZILBERMAN, Y. 1969. Dentition of the Bedouin of Israel. II. Morphology.
Am. J. phys. Anthrop. 31: 199-204.
ROSENZWEIG, K. A., MAss, E. & SMITH, P. 1969. La denture des Samaritans. Bull. Grpmt int.
Rech. scient. Stomat. 12: 95-106.
SAKURA, H. 1979. Variations of fovea anterior in lower molars among some fossil and recent
hominids. Bull. natn. sci. Mus. Tokyo (D, Anthrop.) 5: 1-11.
SANTACHIARA-BENERECETTI, A. S., RANZANI, G. N. & ANTONINI, G. 1977. Studies on African
pygmies. V. Red cell acid phosphatase polymorphism in Babinga pygmies — high frequency
of ACPR allele. Am. J. hum. Genet. 29: 635-638.
SCHULTZE-JENA, L. 1928. Zur Kenntnis des KOrpers der Hottentotten und Buschmdnner.
Jenaische Denkschriften 17: 147-228.
SCHWALBE, G. 1916. Uber den fossilen Affen Oreopithecus bambolii. Z. Morph. Anthrop. 19:
149-254.
SELENKA, E. 1898. Rassen, Schadel und Bezahnung des Orangutan. Menschenaffen 1: 1-91.
SENYUREK, M. S. 1952a. The dentition of the Chalcolithic and Copper Age inhabitants of
Anatolia. Part I. A morphological study of the permanent lower molars of the Chalco-
lithic and Copper Age inhabitants of Anatolia. Revue Fac. Lang., Hist., Geogr., Univ.
Ankara 10: 57-77.
SENYUREK, M. S. 19526. A study of the dentition of the ancient inhabitants of Alaca Héyiik.
Belletin 16: 153-224.
SHAw, J. C. M. 1927. Cusp development on the second lower molar of the Bantu and Bush-
man. Am. J. phys. Anthrop. 11: 97-100.
SINGER, R. 1978. The biology of the San. Jn: Tostas, P. V. ed. The Bushmen: San hunters and
herders of southern Africa: 115-129. Cape Town: Human & Rousseau.
SINGER, R. & WEINER, J. S. 1963. Biological aspects of some indigenous African populations.
SWest. J. Anthrop. 19: 162-176.
SKARYD, S. M. 1971. Trends in the evolution of the pongid dentition. Am. J. phys. Anthrop. 35:
223-240.
SLoME, D. 1929. The osteology of a Bushman tribe. Ann. S. Afr. Mus. 24: 33-60.
SNYDER, R. G., DAHLBERG, A. A., SNOW, C. C. & DAHLBERG, T. 1969. Trait analysis of the
dentition of the Tarahumara Indians and Mestizos of the Sierra Madre Occidental,
Mexico. Am. J. phys. Anthrop. 31: 65-76.
SOFAER, J. A., MACLEAN, C. J. & BaiLit, H. L. 1972. Heredity and morphological variation
in early and late developing human teeth of the same morphological class. Archs oral
Biol. 17: 811-816.
SOFAER, J. A., NISWANDER, J. D., MACLEAN, C. J. & WORKMAN, P. L. 1972. Population
studies on southwestern Indian tribes. V. Tooth morphology as an indicator of biological
distance. Am. J. phys. Anthrop. 37: 357-366.
STEINBERG, A. G., JENKINS, T., NURSE, G. T. & HARPENDING, H. C. 1975. Gamma globulin
groups on the Khoisan peoples of southern Africa: evidence for polymorphism for a
Gm?» >, 33, 14,21 haplotype among the San. Am. J. hum. Genet. 27: 528-542.
214 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
STESLICKA, W. 1948. Wzor dryopitekoidalny na molarach Zuchwy u czlowieka. Annls Univ.
Mari. Curie-Sklodowska 3: 195-222.
SULLIVAN, L. R. 1920. Differences in the pattern of the second lower molar tooth. Am. J. phys.
Anthrop. 3: 25.
SUZUKI, M. & SAkal, T. 1956a. On the *Dryopithecus pattern’ in recent Japanese. J. anthrop.
Soc. Nippon 64: 87-94.
SUZUKI, M. & Sakal, T. 19565. On the ‘deflecting wrinkle’ in recent Japanese. J. anthrop. Soc.
Nippon 65: 49-53.
SUZUKI, M. & SAKAI, T. 1956c. On the ‘tuberculum accessorium mediale internum’ in recent
Japanese. J. anthrop. Soc. Nippon 64: 95-107.
SUZUKI, M. & SAKAI, T. 1957. The living Sakhalin Ainu dentition. Anthrop. Rep. 18: 303-346.
SuZuUKI, M. & SAKAI, T. 1973. Occlusal surface morphology of lower molars and the second
deciduous molars among the living Polynesians. Am. J. phys. Anthrop. 39: 305-316.
SZALAY, F. S. 1969. Mixodectidae, Microsyopidae and the insectivore-primate transition.
Bull. Am. Mus. nat. Hist. 140: 193-330.
SZLACHETKO, K. 1959. Investigations on the morphology of the human deciduous dentition.
Acta Fac. Rerum nat., Univ. Comen., Bratisl. 3: 247-279.
TAKEHISA, S. 1957. Anatomical and anthropological studies on the teeth of American white
races and Japanese. Shika Gakuho 57: 1-41.
THOMSEN, S. 1955. Dental morphology and occlusion in the people of Tristan da Cunha. Oslo:
Det Norske Videnkaps-Akadem1i.
Tosias, P. V. 1955-6. Les Bochimans Auen et Naron de Ghanzi. Contribution a l’étude des
“Anciens Jaunes’ sud-africains. I-IV. Anthropologie 59: 235-252, 429-462; 60: 22-52,
268-289.
TosiAs, P. V. 1960. Bushman hunter—gatherers: a study in human ecology. In: Davies, D. H. S.
ed. Ecological studies in southern Africa: 67-86. The Haag: W. Junk.
TosiAs, P. V. 1961. Fingerprints and palmer prints of Kalahari Bushmen. S. Afr. J. Sci. 57:
333-345,
TosIAs, P. V. 1966. The peoples of Africa south of the Sahara. Jn: BAKER, P. T. & WEINER, J. S.
eds. The biology of human adaptability: 111-200. Oxford: Clarendon Press.
TosiAs, P. V. 1971. Human skeletal remains from the Cave of Hearths, Makapansgat, Northern
Transvaal. Am. J. phys. Anthrop. 34: 335-368.
Tosias, P. V. 1972. Recent human biological studies in southern Africa, with special reference
to Negroes and Khoisans. Trans. R. Soc. S. Afr. 40: 109-133.
Tosias. P. V. 1978. Introduction to the Bushmen or San. Jn: Tostas, P. V. ed. The Bushmen:
San hunters and herders of southern Africa: 1-15. Cape Town: Human & Rousseau.
TURNER, C. G. 1970. New classifications of non-metrical dental variation. Am. J. phys. Anthrop.
33: 144-145.
TURNER, C. G. 1976. Dental evidence on the origin of the Ainu and Japanese. Science 193:
911-913.
TURNER, C. G. 1979. Dental anthropological indications of agriculture among the Jomon
people of central Japan. X. Peopling of the Pacific. Am. J. phys. Anthrop. 51: 619-636.
TURNER, C. G. & HANIHARA, K. 1977, Additional features of the Ainu dentition. V. Peopling
of the Pacific. Am. J. phys. Anthrop. 46: 13-24.
TURNER, C. G. & ScoTT, G. R. 1976. The dentition of living Easter Islanders, eastern Poly-
nesia. Peopling of the Pacific. I. In: DAHLBERG, A. A. & GRABER, T. A. eds. Orofacial
growth and development: 45-84. Chicago: Aldine.
TURNER, C. G. & SWINDLER, D. R. 1978. The dentition of New Britain West Nakanai Mela-
nesians. VIII. Peopling of the Pacific. Am. J. phys. Anthrop. 49: 361-372.
TURNER, C. G., Scott, G. R. & LARSEN, M. 1970. Mandibular molar cusp 7 plaque and
definitions of variations. Dep. Anthrop., Arizona State University, Tempe, Arizona.
(Roneoed.)
TURNER, C. G., Scott, G. R. & Rose, T. A. 1969. Mandibular molar cusp 6 plaque and
definitions of variation. Dept. Anthrop., Arizona State University, Tempe, Arizona.
(Roneoed.)
VAN REENEN, J. F. 1964. Dentition, jaws and palate of the Kalahari Bushmen. J. dent. Ass.
S. Afr. 19: 1-37.
VAN REENEN, J. F. 1966. Dental features of a low-caries primitive population. J. dent. Res. 45:
703-713.
PERMANENT MOLARS OF NEGRO AND SAN 2US5
VAN VALEN, L. 1966. Deltatheridia, a new order of mammals. Bull. Am. Mus. nat. Hist. 132:
1-126.
VON KOENIGSWALD, G. H. R. 1952. Gigantopithecus blacki von Koenigswald, a giant fossil
hominoid from the Pleistocene of South China. Anthrop. Pap. Am. Mus. nat. Hist. 43:
295-325.
WANG, A. C., SUTTON, H. E. & Scott, I. D. 1967. Transferrin D,: identity in Australian
aborigines and American Negroes. Science 156: 936-937.
WEIDENREICH, F. 1937. The dentition of Sinanthropus pekinensis: a comparative odontography
of the hominids. Palaeont. sin. (n.s. D, 1) 101: 1-180 & 1-120.
WEIDENREICH, F. 1945. Giant early man from Java and south China. Anthrop. Pap. Am. Mus.
nat Hist. 40: 1-134.
WEINER, J. S., AINSWORTH HARRISON, G. SINGER, R., HARRIS, R, & Jop., W. 1964. Skin
colour in southern Africa. Hum. Biol. 36: 294-307.
WESTPHAL, E. O. 1963. The linguistic prehistory of southern Africa: Bush, Kwadi, Hottentot
and Bantu linguistic relationships. Africa 33: 237-265.
re _ ie re,
hs .
= y ;
&
3) i
i
1,
F
he
i
,
Bi
A
‘
\ )
7 i f
a
4 ,
"a
-
i,
ae an
4: :
; , ;
ie erry,
6. SYSTEMATIC papers must conform to the International code of zoological nomenclature
(particularly Articles 22 and 51).
Names of new taxa, combinations, synonyms, etc., when used for the first time, must be
followed by the appropriate Latin (not English) abbreviation, e.g. gen. nov., sp. nov., comb.
nov., Syn. nov., etc.
‘An author’s name when cited must follow the name of the taxon without intervening
punctuation and not be abbreviated; if the year is added, a comma must separate author’s
name and year. The author’s name ‘(and date, if cited) must be placed in parentheses if a
species or subspecies is transferred from its original genus. The name of a subsequent user of
a scientific name must be separated from the scientific name by a colon.
Synonymy arrangement should be according to chronology of names, i.e. all published
scientific names by which the species previously has been designated are listed in chronological
order, with all references to that name following in chronological order, e.g.:
Family Nuculanidae
Nuculana (Lembulus) bicuspidata (Gould, 1845)
Figs 14-15A
Nucula (Leda) bicuspidata Gould, 1845: 37.
Leda plicifera A. Adams, 1856: 50.
Laeda bicuspidata Hanley, 1859: 118, pl. 228 (fig. 73). Sowerby, 1871: pl. 2 (fig. 8a—b).
Nucula largillierti Philippi, 1861: 87.
Leda bicuspidata: Nicklés, 1950: 163, fig. 301; 1955: 110. Barnard, 1964: 234, figs 8-9.
Note punctuation in the above example:
comma separates author’s name and year
semicolon separates more than one reference by the same author
full stop separates references by different authors
figures of plates are enclosed in parentheses to distinguish them from text-figures
dash, not comma, separates consecutive numbers
Synonymy arrangement according to chronology of bibliographic references, whereby
the year is placed in front of each entry, and the synonym repeated in full for each entry, is
~ not acceptable.
In describing new species, one specimen must be designated as the holotype; other speci-
mens mentioned in the original description are to be designated paratypes; additional material
not regarded as paratypes should be listed separately. The complete data (registration number,
depository, description of specimen, locality, collector, date) of the holotype and paratypes
must be recorded, e.g.:
Holotype
SAM-—A13535 in the South African Museum, Cape Town. Adult female from mid-tide region, King’s Beach
Port Elizabeth (33°51’S 25°39’E), collected by A. Smith, 15 January 1973.
Note standard form of writing South African Museum registration numbers and date.
7. SPECIAL HOUSE RULES
Capital initial letters
(a) The Figures, Maps and Tables of the paper when referred to in the text
b]
e.g. ‘... the Figure depicting C. namacolus ...’; *. . . in C. namacolus (Fig. 10)...’
(b) The prefixes of prefixed surnames in all languages, when used in the text, if not preceded
by initials or full names
e.g. Du Toit but A.L.du Toit; Von Huene but F. von Huene
(c) Scientific names, but not their vernacular derivatives
e.g. Therocephalia, but therocephalian
Punctuation should be loose, omitting all not strictly necessary
Reference to the author should be expressed in the third person
Roman numerals should be converted to arabic, except when forming part of the title of a
book or article, such as
“Revision of the Crustacea. Part VIII. The Amphipoda.’
Specific name must not stand alone, but be preceded by the generic name or its abbreviation
-to initial capital letter, provided the same generic name is used consecutively.
Name of new genus or species is not to be included in the title: it should be included in the
abstract, counter to Recommendation 23 of the Code, to meet the requirements of
Biological Abstracts.
F. E. GREENE
OCCLUSAL MORPHOLOGY
OF THE MANDIBULAR PERMANENT MOLARS
OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN NEGRO AND
THE KALAHARI SAN (BUSHMAN)
OH
ie |
$67X \RT 6 DECEMBER 1981 _ ISSN 0303-2515
oe |
FEB 171982
~~ _LIBRARIES
a ~~ MUSEUM —
CAPE TOWN.
INSTRUCTIONS TO AUTHORS
1. MATERIAL should be original and not published elsewhere, in whole or in part.
2. LAYOUT should be as follows:
(a) Centred masthead to consist of
Title: informative but concise, without abbreviations and not including the names of new genera or species
Author’s(s’) name(s)
Address(es) of author(s) (institution where work was carried out)
Number of illustrations (figures, enumerated maps and tables, in this order)
(b) Abstract of not more than 200 words, intelligible to the reader without reference to the text
(c) Table of contents giving hierarchy of headings and subheadings
(d) Introduction
(e) Subject-matter of the paper, divided into sections to correspond with those given in table of contents
(f) Summary, if paper is lengthy
(g) Acknowledgements
(h) References
(i) Abbreviations, where these are numerous
3. MANUSCRIPT, to be submitted in triplicate, should be typewritten and neat, double spaced
with 2,5 cm margins all round. First lines of paragraphs should be indented. Tables and a list of
legends for illustrations should be typed separately, their positions indicated in the text. All
pages should be numbered consecutively.
Major headings of the paper are centred capitals; first subheadings are shouldered small
capitals; second subheadings are shouldered italics; third subheadings are indented, shouldered
italics. Further subdivisions should be avoided, as also enumeration (never roman numerals)
of headings and abbreviations.
Footnotes should be avoided unless they are short and essential.
Only generic and specific names should be underlined to indicate italics; all other marking
up should be left to editor and publisher.
4. ILLUSTRATIONS should be reducible to a size not exceeding 12 « 18 cm (19 cm including
legend); the reduction or enlargement required should be indicated; originals larger than
°35 x 47 cm should not be submitted; photographs should be rectangular in shape and final
size. A metric scale should appear with all illustrations, otherwise magnification or reduction
should be given in the legend; if the latter, then the final reduction or enlargement should be
taken into consideration.
All illustrations, whether line drawings or photographs, should be termed figures (plates
are not printed; half-tones will appear in their proper place in the text) and numbered in a
single series. Items of composite figures should be designated by capital letters; lettering of
figures is not set in type and should be in lower-case letters.
The number of the figure should be lightly marked in pencil on the back of each illustration.
5. REFERENCES cited in text and synonymies should all be included in the list at the end of
the paper, using the Harvard System (ibid., idem, loc. cit., op. cit. are not acceptable):
(a) Author’s name and year of publication given in text, e.g.:
‘Smith (1969) describes .. .’
‘Smith (1969: 36, fig. 16) describes... .’
‘As described (Smith 1969a, 19695; Jones 1971)’
‘As described (Haughton & Broom 1927)...’
‘As described (Haughton et al. 1927)...’
Note: no comma separating name and year
Dagination indicated by colon, not p.
names of joint authors connected by ampersand
et al. in text for more than two joint authors, but names of all authors given in list of references.
(b) Full references at the end of the paper, arranged alphabetically by names, chronologically
within each name, with suffixes a, b, etc. to the year for more than one paper by the same
author in that year, e.g. Smith (1969a, 19695) and not Smith (1969, 1969a).
For books give title in italics, edition, volume number, place of publication, publisher.
For journal article give title of article, title of journal in italics (abbreviated according to the World list o,
scientific periodicals. 4th ed. London: Butterworths, 1963), series in parentheses, volume number, part
number (only if independently paged) in parentheses, pagination (first and last pages of article).
Examples (note capitalization and punctuation)
BULLOUGH, W. S. 1960. Practical invertebrate anatomy. 2nd ed. London: Macmillan.
FISCHER, P.—H. 1948. Données sur la résistance et de le vitalité des mollusques. J. Conch., Paris 88: 100-140.
FIscHER, P.-H., DuvAL, M. & Rarry, A. 1933. Etudes sur les échanges respiratoires des littorines. Archs
Zool. exp. gén. 74: 627-634. \
Konn, A. J. 1960a. Ecological notes on Conus (Mollusca: Gastropoda) in the Trincomalee region of Ceylon.
Ann. Mag. nat. Hist. (13) 2: 309-320.
Konn, A. J. 19606. Spawning behaviour, egg masses and larval development in Conus from the Indian Ocean.
Bull. Bingham oceanogr. Coll. 17 (4): 1-51.
THIELE, J. 1910. Mollusca: B. Polyplacophora, Gastropoda marina, Bivalvia. In: SCHULTZE, L. Zoologische
und anthropologische Ergebnisse einer Forschungsreise im westlichen und zentralen Siid-Afrika 4: 269-270.
Jena: Fischer. Denkschr. med.-naturw. Ges. Jena 16: 269-270.
(continued inside back cover)
ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
ANNALE VAN DIE SUID-AFRIKAANSE MUSEUM
Volume 86 #Band
December 1981 Desember
Part 6 Deel
A HYENA-ACCUMULATED BONE
ASSEMBLAGE FROM LATE HOLOCENE
DEPOSITS AT DEELPAN, ORANGE FREE STATE
By
L2 SCOT
&
Re-G KEBIN
Cape Town Kaapstad
The ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
are issued in parts at irregular intervals as material
becomes available
Obtainable from the South African Museum, P.O. Box 61, Cape Town 8000
Die ANNALE VAN DIE SUID-AFRIKAANSE MUSEUM
word uitgegee in dele op ongereelde tye na gelang van die
beskikbaarheid van stof
Verkrygbaar van die Suid-Afrikaanse Museum, Posbus 61, Kaapstad 8000
OUT OF PRINT/UIT DRUK
IL GES, S83), HOLD, 4-8, & tani), SS, S, EO,
GA, to), CD), B TOD, , HOES,
GED, SW, ejay), ICS), WO), M7, BES), 32G), 33, ZO
EDITOR/REDAKTRISE
Ione Rudner
Copyright enquiries to the South African Museum
Kopieregnavrae aan die Suid-Afrikaanse Museum
ISBN 0 86813 027 3
Printed in South Africa by In Suid-Afrika gedruk deur
The Rustica Press, Pty., Ltd., Die Rustica-pers, Edms., Bpk.,
Court Road, Wynberg, Cape Courtweg, Wynberg, Kaap
A HYENA-ACCUMULATED BONE ASSEMBLAGE FROM LATE
HOLOCENE DEPOSITS AT DEELPAN, ORANGE FREE STATE
By
Louis SCOTT
Institute for Environmental Sciences,
University of the Orange Free State
&
RICHARD G. KLEIN
Department of Anthropology, University of Chicago
(With 3 figures and 2 tables)
[MS accepted 5 August 1981]
ABSTRACT
Late Holocene sands fringing Deelpan, Western Orange Free State, have yielded a sample
of bones derived from steenbok, springbok, black wildebeest, blesbok, quagga or Burchell’s
zebra, caracal or serval, slender mongoose, clawless otter, black-backed jackal, and eagle or
hawk, as well as coprolites of a hyena. The composition of the fauna is in keeping with pollen
evidence that highveld vegetation prevailed at the time the bones accumulated. The absence of
artefacts and porcupine gnaw marks, in combination with the hyena coprolites and two bones
almost certainly damaged by hyena teeth, indicate that hyenas were responsible for the bone
accumulation. Like other hyena-accumulated samples, the Deelpan one differs from human
(archaeological) samples in the relatively high number of carnivore individuals represented and
in the tendency for the ratio of postcranial to cranial bones to increase with the size of the
species involved.
CONTENTS
PAGE
INtROGUCHIOMare es ces Verte ose ee cia ae a ae AG,
SE Uti tN ot ae ch oem ee UN ee a MORI Ries eet ee tages 218
Contextof the: boneassemblageh sa) 2554-45 555s eae 219
sine bonevassemblagec iia as he ae eek Sessu sere 220
AXCKnOWledSements) 24. eines ee eee ee ee 226
INCLETENM CES Heke sss ea se esi acne eos cakes, SP Ae ee 226
INTRODUCTION
In the course of a multidisciplinary investigation into the history and origin
of pans in the Orange Free State, Scott recovered an assemblage of bones from
unconsolidated sandy deposits on the eastern margin of Deelpan (Honing
Kopje Pan) (approximately 29°11’S 25°45'E), between Bloemfontein and
Petrusburg (Fig. 1). Artefacts were absent, and nine associated coprolites,
together with damage marks on two of the bones, point to hyenas as the bone
collectors. In this brief report, Scott describes the setting and sedimentary
217
Ann. S. Afr. Mus. 86 (6), 1981: 217-227, 3 figs, 2 tables.
218 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
to Petrusburg
o Bloemfontein
B
Fig. 1. Left: The location of the Deelpan fossil site within South Africa. Right: A schematic
plan of Deelpan, showing the distribution of the sandy deposits on its southern and eastern
margins and the points (Deelpan A and B) where bones were recovered.
context of the bone assemblage, while Klein discusses its implications for
distinguishing hyena bone accumulations from human (archaeological) ones. In
a future paper, K. W. Butzer (University of Chicago) will analyse a suite of
sediment samples from the site, with the goal of elucidating its climatic and
environmental history.
SETTING
Deelpan is typical of the numerous pans or playas that dot the plains of the
western Orange Free State (De Bruiyn 1971, 1972; Le Roux 1978). The pans
are thought to result from the interaction of bedrock geology, slope, salt
concentration, chemical weathering, seasonal climate, and animal activity, the
combined effect of which is to foster deflation. The prevailing westerly winds
then build sand-dunes along the south-eastern and eastern margins of most
pans in the region (De Bruiyn 1971, 1972).
The open plains of the Orange Free State are underlain by typical Karoo
sedimentary rocks intruded by dolerites that form rocky hills (‘koppies’).
Annual precipitation in the Deelpan area is less than 500 mm. The vegetation
belongs to the so-called False Upper Karoo (Acocks 1953, veld type 36),
comprising grassland with a high proportion of Karoo shrubs, especially Com-
positae. Woody species such as Olea africana, Rhus lancea, and Rhus erosa
occur on dolerite ‘koppies’. The pan floor of approximately 6,5 km? does not
support any vegetation and consists of clays rich in carbonates and other salts
HYENA-ACCUMULATED BONE ASSEMBLAGE 219
concentrated on the surface through evaporation. During most of the year, the
pan is dry, except for the south-western portion where perennial springs occur.
However, during especially rainy years, water may fill the pan to a depth of 2 m
and remain for a year or more. When filled, the pan attracts countless numbers
of water-birds. In prehistoric times, it probably also attracted large numbers of
antelopes and other animals. Artefacts found along the margins of Deelpan and
various Other pans in the region point to frequent visits by prehistoric man
(Butzer et al. 1973; Butzer 1974; Horowitz et al. 1978).
CONTEXT OF THE BONE ASSEMBLAGE
As at many western Free State pans, unconsolidated Quaternary deposits
at Deelpan occur along its southern and eastern margins. Recent erosion of
these deposits has allowed recognition of a three-part sedimentary sequence
(from top to bottom): 1, more than 2 m of semi-compacted sands, exhibiting
distinct stratification in places; 2, approximately 1 m of semi-compacted, non-
stratified sands, especially obvious in the southernmost exposures; and 3, more
than 3 m of compact, calcareous clayey sands. The bones described here came
from near the bottom of the uppermost unit (1). Only traces of bones were
found in the two lower units, along with occasional mollusc shells and frag-
ments of ostrich egg-shell.
Within the uppermost sedimentary unit, bones were found at the same
level in two distinct concentrations, labelled A and B, approximately 3 m apart.
At point B, a subtle colour difference suggests the bones lie in a pocket roughly
30 cm across within the loose sands. It seems likely that the pocket is the
cross-section of an ancient burrow, quite possibly part of a system also
including the bone occurrence at A. This hypothesis can be checked only by
excavation, which may also lead to the recovery of bones in the sands between
A and B. The present bone collection consists totally of pieces that were
eroding out of the sections at A and B or had already eroded out and were
lying on the pediment below.
Preliminary observations indicate that the sedimentary sequence observed
at Deelpan also characterizes the unconsolidated sediments found at most
isolated pans in the western Orange Free State. The similarity almost certainly
reflects a common response to past climatic change. Horowitz et al. (1978) have
described an especially similar sequence at Voigtspost Pan, approximately
40 km west of Deelpan. The specific palaeoclimatic events involved at Voigts-
post remain to be worked out, but comparison to Deelpan is still informative.
Particularly pertinent are *C determinations of 6350 +75 B.P. (Pta — 1520)
and 1220 + 50B.P. (Pta — 1483) on ostrich egg-shell fragments from
sediments at Voigtspost equivalent to Deelpan sedimentary units 3 and 1
respectively. The dates indicate that the visible sedimentary sequences at
Voigtspost and Deelpan date from the Holocene, while the bone assemblage
from Deelpan A and B is probably of late Holocene age.
220 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Limited palynological evidence from Voigtspost suggests that the middle
unit (equivalent to unit 2 at Deelpan) was deposited under slightly moister
conditions than the underlying and overlying sediments (equivalent to units 3
and 1 at Deelpan). However, the pollen spectra imply basically highveld
vegetation throughout the sequence. The pollen from the uppermost sands at
Voigtspost, equivalent to the bone-bearing unit at Deelpan, comprises 2%
Gramineae, 43% Chenopodiaceae, 11% Compositae, 30% spores of Riccia and
Ophioglossum, and traces of other plants. Pollens were not found in the
equivalent Deelpan sediments, but 90% of the pollen found in coprolites
accompanying the Deelpan bones derived from Gramineae. The difference
probably reflects the differing nature of sediments and coprolites as pollen
traps, plus the fact that the pollen in the Voigtspost samples was probably
deposited over a relatively long period in the halophytic environment of the
pan shore. Like the Voigtspost pollen, that in the Deelpan coprolites almost
certainly reflects essentially highveld vegetation.
THE BONE ASSEMBLAGE
Since there is every likelihood that the bones from Deelpan A and B were
accumulated at the same time by the same agency, they have been treated here
as a single assemblage. The bones are relatively fresh looking, with no apparent
mineralization, in keeping with their probable late Holocene age. Fragmenta-
tion 1s minimal and nearly every piece was immediately identifiable to skeletal
part and species.
The species represented are listed in Table 1, which also presents the
number of bones assigned to each and the minimum number of individuals
from which the bones derive. The skeletal parts by which each species is
represented are listed in Table 2. The ungulate species present are the classic,
historic inhabitants of the highveld, and their occurrence is thus totally in
keeping with pollen evidence that highveld vegetation prevailed at the time the
TABLE 1
The number of identifiable bones: the minimum number of individuals by which various species
are represented in the bone assemblage from Deelpan A and B.
Steenbok (Raphicerus campesins) @ 1 sere eee eee Sane nee 1/1
Springbok) (Anidorcas marsupials) meaner eee ae: oe eae eee 48/3
black wildebeest (Connochacites enow)r) ener ee ee ee eee 24/4
blesboks(Damaliscus doncaster os te: ine pene iar eo eae ne aie v2
quagga or Burchell’s zebra (Equus quagga or E. burchelli)................. 1/1
Caracal or serval (Kelisicanacal Or asenval) sn en eee eee 3/1
hyena (Hyacnidac gensetsp-wimdet.) =e one eee ee a no ee 9 coprolites
slender mongoose (Henpestesisanguineus) 2. 458s 4 eee ae 1/1
clawless otter:(Alomy%Capensts) ans cis.ch enya cao Ne wioe aye eG 2/1
black-backed jackalli(Ganisimesomelas) a. sone is a ie ae 6/2
eagle or hawk (Accipitridae gen. et sp. indet.) ................-0..- 00 eee 2/1
Mepel|
HYENA-ACCUMULATED BONE ASSEMBLAGE
V/I I/II W/E JOGO 00000000N sosuvyjeyd
L/T I/I L/I Doouogodn DOO OOO sjesieye}oul
/Z O.8 0.0 bao oO sjesie} Joyo
V/I bo UDO oOO DON OW winoursjeo
VI VI SooubovuDponoo ad snyjeserse
coodd00D DOU DDD Omo eyjaved
V/I Z/¢ 600060000 60 0.010000 60 6.0 viqn
L/I aapis) felkoleey (eo otiloccutentenelerteltelice Bultic)!
V/I L/I LI Oo Ooo OO lsu Gsbr0 9} euUTWIOUUT
L/I ZT p/p Z/S Glo ot 0.0 GO ODD sjedieorjou
VI L/I GOaggonoonodbo0 000 sjedieo
L/I Wik B1d10 0-0 040-0) 0 0100.0. Cd. 2080.0 euyn
2/7 Z/¢ Z/P 5160 010" 01010 0.00 0.00070 snipes
1/1 Wt mn E/E Zig Se ea snroumny
L/I Z/¢ Goancoooon ad ond 000 vindeos
Wiha on eed Se squ
WiG¥st kee et ee ee IPIQIJIOA [BpNned
ooo 00.0 OVIGIIJIOA [BIOVS
Aeceaencateed OBIGIIOA Jequin]
ma! 1/2 Wits 2 2 i See IVIQIIOA D19eIOY}
W ip) ee eee sjeorarao 10410
Z/Z hat ehnencscunova: sixe
UI i ee Se cert sepe
7/7 L/Z L/I Zip he a aetna d]qIpuew
UZ ae cee eyxeus
VI ee Febonbasabeann: gjewi9y
tie gjeul
Se es oS jopuoy
pie jeyort iano — esoo8uom ~—- FPA es as yoqss{q ysooqepyim yoqsutds yoquadys
/ayseo jyeoeres =—seddenb
‘gq pue v uedjs0q Wor euney oy) UI UOXe) Jod yUOWIIA JeJO;Oys Jod s[eNprIAIpU! Jo JoquINU WiNUITUTU 9Y}/souOg s[QeyNHUspt Jo Joquinu oy
(ACOCKAD
222
ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
bones accumulated. The species composition is also totally consistent with a
late Holocene age. The complete absence of domestic stock (cattle and/or
sheep and goats) further suggests that the bones antedate European settlement
of the area, beginning in the middle part of the last century. It is possible that
domestic stock were introduced to the area even earlier by indigenous Khoi
1
oR
ae
ny:
iD S
ag A
“L a
if
fin ?
Si Sty
sa YS
“esr:
Eee (f
BY ye
+
a MAY, iy
f De
2
a 3
Sy
3A,
BS]
th
y:
aU
7
2
a
bd)
~
-
RS
re
¢
ef
2.
Damaliscus dorcas
Hyaenid
coprolites
(12,39; 8,4g)
ZT a ae
CM
Fig. 2. Left: A blesbok ulna from Deelpan A displaying punctate depressions probably caused
by the canines of a hyena. Right: Hyena coprolites from Deelpan A.
HYENA-ACCUMULATED BONE ASSEMBLAGE 223
Connochaetes gnou
DEELPAN
Fig. 3. A black wildebeest distal metacarpal from Deelpan A exhibiting damage to the outer
table that was probably caused by hyena chewing.
224 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
herders or Iron Age mixed farmers, but Deelpan lies in a relatively dry region
where both archaeological and historic records suggest that prehistoric occupa-
tion was largely, if not exclusively limited to hunter—-gatherers (Maggs 1976).
In southern Africa, there are three potential accumulators of bones at a
site such as Deelpan. Two—people and porcupines (Hystrix africaeaustralis )}—
are ruled out by the absence of their telltale signs—artefacts and gnaw marks
respectively. The third—hyenas—are clearly indicated by the presence of their
coprolites (9 in total) and of two ungulate bones with what are almost certainly
damage marks from carnivore teeth (Figs 2-3).
Both the brown hyena (Hyaena brunnea) and the spotted hyena (Crocuta
crocuta) occurred in the region of Deelpan historically, and both are known to
accumulate bones in dens or lairs, including abandoned aardvark burrows or
Other subterranean cavities of sufficient size. It is such burrows, now filled in or
collapsed, that may well be represented at Deelpan. The brown form is the
more prodigious bone collector of the two, largely because it brings food back
to its young, while the spotted form does not. The two species also differ in the
kinds of animals that they most frequently eat. The brown hyena feeds much
more often on species springbok-size and smaller, reflecting its general incom-
petence as a hunter and its inability to retain the carcasses of larger animals
when other large predators—scavengers are also present. (See Sutcliffe (1970),
Kruuk (1972), Bearder (1977), Mills (1978a), Mills & Mills (1977), and Hen-
schel et al. (1979) for information on the spotted hyena; Mills (1973, 1978D),
Mills & Mills (1977), Skinner (1976), and Owens & Owens (1978, 1979) for
data on the brown hyena.)
Tables 1 and 2 show that springbok is the most common species at Deelpan
in terms of the number of identifiable bones, while black wildebeest is most
common in terms of the minimum number of individuals represented. In
combination with the fact that the relative abundance of these species in the
ancient Deelpan environment remains unknown and perhaps unknowable, this
means that the species frequencies in the present sample do not help to
establish which hyena accumulated the bones. Perhaps ultimately this question
will be resolved, if it becomes possible to identify the coprolites to species.
Whichever hyena is responsible, the Deelpan assemblage contrasts with
hominid (archaeological) bone assemblages in two important respects:
1. The relative abundance of carnivores. In minimum individual terms,
carnivores constitute 31% of the animals in the Deelpan sample, while there is
no archaeological sample in Africa in which the comparable figure has been
found to exceed 13%. The contrast probably reflects the fact that hyenas
(especially the brown species) interact with other carnivores (especially jackals)
much more frequently than hunter-gatherers do.
2. At Deelpan, there is a clear tendency for larger species to be relatively
better represented by postcranial bones than by cranial ones. In archaeological
assemblages, there is no such trend, and the cranial:postcranial ratio does not
seem to be related to the size of the species concerned. The contrast probably
HYENA-ACCUMULATED BONE ASSEMBLAGE 225
reflects the fact that hyenas find it far more difficult to transport the skulls of
large animals than people do, while both kinds of bone accumulators find
postcranial bones about equally portable.
Klein has found that the same features characterize fossil bone assem-
blages collected by hyenas at other sites in southern Africa, particularly
Swartklip 1 (Hendey & Hendey 1968; Klein 1975), Equus Cave (Beaumont &
Shackley pers. comm.; Klein in preparation), and the Elandsfontein ‘Bone
Circle’ (Inskeep & Hendey 1966; Klein unpub.). These other samples are all
much larger than the Deelpan one, and the fact that the features are still clear
at Deelpan is thus a measure of the strength of the pattern they represent.
One feature that might be expected to characterize hyena accumulations
would be a large number of bones obviously damaged by the animals’ teeth. In
fact, such bones are relatively rare not only at Deelpan but also in the other
fossil assemblages mentioned above and apparently in assemblages from dens
where living hyenas were observed, though precise figures on damaged bones
from such dens are generally lacking. (The bones found at active dens are
discussed in some of the papers on hyena feeding and foraging cited above.)
The implication of this is that, where there is doubt as to the human or hyenid
origin of a particular bone assemblage, principal reliance will probably have to
be placed on relatively subtle features such as the abundance of carnivores or
the nature of the relationship between species size and cranial:postcranial bone
representation.
In southern Africa, the most important bone assemblages whose origins
remain problematic are certainly those from the various australopithecine caves
in the Transvaal. The question is basically whether the bones were brought to
the caves by the australopithecines, as argued particularly by Dart (1957a,
1957b) or perhaps by a carnivore, as discussed particularly by Brain (1980,
1981). A priori, in considering the possibility that hyenas were involved, it
might seem most reasonable to attack the problem by analysing bones from
recent hyena dens. However, the samples from such dens tend to be very small,
while the dens themselves are mostly in marginal or degraded environments.
Often, many of the bones present come from domesticated species. Further-
more, especially in the case of the brown hyena, which has become compara-
tively rare, it is unlikely that there are very many dens left to be sampled. All
this means that the study of the fossil collections is essential both to establish a
convincing pattern of differences between hyena and hominid assemblages and
to maintain reasonable control over environmental and ecological variables in
exploring the origins of assemblages such as those from the australopithecine
caves.
Klein (1975) has already argued that there are marked similarities between
the bone assemblage from Swartklip (and by extension from Deelpan and other
hyena-accumulated samples) on the one hand and the bone assemblage from
Makapansgat on the other, as partially described by Dart (1957a, 1957b) and
Wells & Cooke (1956). Some fresh data on the Makapansgat carnivores
226 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
presented by Collings et al. (1975) suggest, in fact, that the bone accumulation
at Makapansgat, at least from the so-called ‘Grey Breccia’ (Member 3 of
Partridge 1979), probably owes its origin largely, if not entirely, to the ancestral
striped hyena, Hyaena hyaena makapani. Ultimately, it should prove possible
to reach reasonable closure on this issue through the analysis of more assem-
blages such as the one from Deelpan and through more detailed study of the
Makapansgat collection.
ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS
We thank G. R. de Villiers for permission to visit Deelpan, R. Verhoeven
for his help in the fieldwork, K. W. Butzer for his advice on the study of the
Orange Free State pans, G. Avery for identifying the bird bones from Deelpan,
K. Allwarden for drawing Deelpan bones and coprolites, the National Science
Foundation for financial support to Klein, and the South African Museum for
providing facilities for the study and permanent storage of the Deelpan faunal
collection.
REFERENCES
Acocks, J. P. H. 1953. Veld types of South Africa. Mem. Bot. Surv. S. Afr. 40: 1-128.
BEARDER, S. K. 1977. Feeding habits of spotted hyaenas in a woodland habitat. E. Afr. Wildl.
J. 15: 263-280.
BRAIN, C. K. 1980. Some criteria for the recognition of bone-collecting agencies in African
caves. In: Behrensmeyer, A. K. & Hill, A. P. eds. Fossils in the making: 107-130.
Chicago: University of Chicago Press.
BRAIN, C. K. 1981. The hunters or the hunted: an introduction to African cave taphonomy.
Chicago: University of Chicago Press.
Bruyn, H. DE 1971. ’n Geologiese studie van die panne in die Westelike Oranje-Vrystaat.
Unpublished M.Sc. thesis, University of the Orange Free State.
Brutyn, H. De 1972. Pans in the western Orange Free State. Ann. geol. Surv. 9: 121-124.
Butzer, K. W. 1974. Geo-archaeological interpretation of Acheulian calc-pan sites at Doorn-
laagte and Rooidam (Kimberley, South Africa). J. archaeol. Sci. 1: 1-25.
ButTzer, K. W., Fock, G. J., STUCKENRATH, R. & ZiLcH, A. 1973. Palaeohydrology of Late
Pleistocene Lake Alexandersfontein, Kimberley, South Africa. Nature, Lond. 243:
328-330.
CoLLinGs, G. E., CRUIKSHANK, A. R. I., MaGuire, J. M. & RANDALL, R. M. 1975. Recent
faunal studies at Makapansgat Limeworks, Transvaal, South Africa. Ann. S. Afr. Mus. 71:
153-165.
Dart, R. A. 1957a. The Makapansgat australopithecine osteodontokeratic culture. Jn: Clark,
J. D. ed. Proceedings of the Third Pan-African Congress of Prehistory (Livingstone, 1955):
161-171. London: Chatto & Windus.
Dart, R. A. 1957b. The osteodontokeratic culture of Australopithecus prometheus. Transv.
Mus. Mem. 10: 1-105.
HENDEY, Q. B. & HENDEy, H. 1968. New Quaternary fossil sites near Swartklip, Cape
Province. Ann. S. Afr. Mus. 52: 43-73.
HENSCHEL, J. R., TILSON, B. & VON BLotINitTz, F. 1979. Implications of a spotted hyaena bone
assemblage in the Namib Desert. S. Afr. archaeol. Bull. 24: 127-131.
Horowitz, A., SAMPSON, C. G., Scott, L. & VOGEL, J. C. 1978. Analysis of the Voigtspost
Site, O.F.S. S. Afr. archaeol. Bull. 33: 152-159.
INSKEEP, R. R. & HENDEY, Q. B. 1966. An interesting association of bones from the
Elandsfontein fossil site. In: Actes du Ve Congres Panafricain de Prehistoire et de l Etude
du Quaternaire: 109-124. Tenerife: Museo Arqueologico.
HYENA-ACCUMULATED BONE ASSEMBLAGE DF,
KLEIN, R. G. 1975. Paleoanthropological implications of the non-archeological bone assem-
blage from Swartklip 1, southwestern Cape Province, South Africa. Quaternary Res. 5:
275-288.
Kruuk, H. 1972. The spotted hyena. Chicago: University of Chicago Press.
LE Roux, J. S. 1978. The origin and distribution of pans in the Orange Free State. §. Afr.
Geograaf. 6: 167-176.
Macs, T. M. O’C. 1976. Iron Age communities of the southern highveld. Occ. Publ. Natal.
Mus. 2: 1-326.
Mitts, M. G. L. 1973. The brown hyaena. Afr. Wildl. 27: 150-153.
Mitts, M. G. L. 1978a. The comparative socio-ecology of the Hyaenidae. Carnivore 1: 1-6.
Mitts, M. G. L. 19785. Foraging behaviour of the brown hyaena (Hyaena brunnea, Thunberg,
1820) in the southern Kalahari. Z. Tierpsychol. 48: 113-141.
Mitts, M. G. L. & Mitts, M. E. J. 1977. An analysis of bones collected at hyaena breeding
dens in the Gemsbok National Parks (Mammalia: Carnivora). Ann. Transv. Mus. 30:
145-155.
Owens, M. J. & Owens, D. D. 1978. Feeding ecology and its influence on social organization
in brown hyaenas (Hyaena brunnea, Thunberg) of the Central Kalahari Desert. E. Afr.
Wildl. J. 16: 113-135.
Owens, M. J. & Owens, D. D. 1979. The secret society of the brown hyaenas. Afr. Wildl. 33:
26-29.
PARTRIDGE, T. C. 1979. Re-appraisal of lithostratigraphy of Makapansgat Limeworks hominid
site. Nature, Lond. 279: 484-488.
SKINNER, J. D. 1976. Ecology of the brown hyaena Hyaena brunnea in the Transvaal with a
distribution map for southern Africa. S. Afr. J. Sci. 72: 262-269.
SuTcLiFFE, A. J. 1970. Spotted hyaena: crusher, gnawer, digester, and collector of bones.
Nature, Lond. 227: 1110-1113.
WELLs, L. H. & Cooke, H. B. S. 1956. Fossil Bovidae from the Limeworks Quarry,
Makapansgat, Potgietersrus. Palaeont. afr. 4: 1-55.
i” pee a ee. a a i a |) ae 7
7 ™ ame gee Bsc < nan 7 Pee. 1¥
ii Sioa ee Es a “3 ;
} tai ; 7 ek = re a
; ; { ; a a 2s 7
: = 5 . iad , Leo
: .
; ~ 4 - 7 a *. e
E 4 m ' _—:
vA i ir > a
- 1 ah ' oe :
ot ea Pa ee? ©
bs 0 Peay i oe eee
| az
1 s a - :
¢ ¥ a > oa cay ney
7 S Se a is
iz ;
n A hes
‘ 7 th - % on : .
; f
b { on cate
ane 5 oe Da i
i
i
at
1 ’
= ,
mi i
: _
i
zt
ne .
, , ’ } a
|
~ u :
i
\
x‘ rs ie
: : t
py (
7 ‘
;
é
; i
an
as
Sa
F i
ps
; i
=
“i
‘
ie ; 1
. 4 (
} -
1 f ~
‘4 I, ;
Ve , ~
a
* a) =
2
( :
y 9
. ,
\ .
= .
: -%
ren Y
=
ei t
6. SYSTEMATIC papers must conform to the International code of zoological nomenclature
(particularly Articles 22 and S51).
Names of new taxa, combinations, synonyms, etc., when used for the first time, must be
followed by the appropriate Latin (not English) abbreviation, e.g. gen. nov., sp. nov., comb.
nov., Syn. nov., etc.
‘An author’s name when cited must follow the name of the taxon without intervening
punctuation and not be abbreviated; if the year is added, a comma must separate author’s
name and year. The author’s name ‘(and date, if cited) must be placed in parentheses if a
species or subspecies is transferred from its original genus. The name of a subsequent user of
a scientific name must be separated from the scientific name by a colon.
Synonymy arrangement should be according to chronology of names, i.e. all published
scientific names by which the species previously has been designated are listed in chronological
order, with all references to that name following in chronological order, e.g.:
Family Nuculanidae
Nuculana (Lembulus) bicuspidata (Gould, 1845)
Figs 14-15A
Nucula (Leda) bicuspidata Gould, 1845: 37.
Leda plicifera A. Adams, 1856: 50.
Laeda bicuspidata Hanley, 1859: 118, pl. 228 (fig. 73). Sowerby, 1871: pl. 2 (fig. 8a—b).
Nucula largillierti Philippi, 1861: 87.
Leda bicuspidata: Nicklés, 1950: 163, fig. 301; 1955: 110. Barnard, 1964: 234, figs 8-9.
Wore punctuation in the above example:
comma separates author’s name and year
semicolon separates more than one reference by the same author
full stop separates references by different authors
figures of plates are enclosed in parentheses to distinguish them from text-figures
dash, not comma, separates consecutive numbers
Synonymy arrangement according to chronology of bibliographic references, whereby
the year is placed in front of each entry, and the synonym repeated in full for each entry, is
~ not acceptable.
In describing new species, one specimen must be designated as the holotype; other speci-
mens mentioned in the original description are to be designated paratypes; additional material
not regarded as paratypes should be listed separately. The complete data (registration number,
depository, description of specimen, locality, collector, date) of the holotype and paratypes
must be recorded, e.g.:
Holotype
SAM-—A13535 in the South African Museum, Cape Town. Adult female from mid-tide region, King’s Beach
Port Elizabeth (33°51’S 25°39’E), collected by A. Smith, 15 January 1973.
Note standard form of writing South African Museum registration numbers and date.
7. SPECIAL HOUSE RULES
Capital initial letters
(a) The Figures, Maps and Tables of the paper when referred to in the text
e.g. *... the Figure depicting C. namacolus ...’; *. . . in C. namacolus (Fig. 10)...
(b) The prefixes of prefixed surnames in all languages, when used in the text, if not preceded
by initials or full names
e.g. Du Toit but A.L.du Toit; Von Huene but F. von Huene
(c) Scientific names, but not their vernacular derivatives
e.g. Therocephalia, but therocephalian
Punctuation should be loose, omitting all not strictly necessary
Reference to the author should be expressed in the third person
Roman numerals should be converted to arabic, except when forming part of the title of a
book or article, such as
‘Revision of the Crustacea. Part VIII. The Amphipoda.’
Specific name must not stand alone, but be preceded by the generic name or its abbreviation
to initial capital letter, provided the same generic name is used consecutively.
Name of new genus or species is not to be included in the title: it should be included in the
abstract, counter to Recommendation 23 of the Code, to meet the requirements of
Biological Abstracts.
L. SCOTT
&
R. G. KLEIN
A HYENA-ACCUMULATED BONE
ASSEMBLAGE FROM LATE HOLOCENE
DEPOSITS AT DEELPAN, ORANGE FREE STATE
DECEMBER 1981 ISSN 0303-2515
At \ SO Nians A a
FEB 17 1982
LIBRARIES
ANNALS
OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN
“MUSEUM
CAPE TOWN
INSTRUCTIONS TO AUTHORS
1. MATERIAL should be original and not published elsewhere, in whole or in part.
2. LAYOUT should be as follows:
(a) Centred masthead to consist of
Title: informative but concise, without abbreviations and not including the names of new genera or species
Author’s(s’) name(s)
Address(es) of author(s) (institution where work was carried out)
Number of illustrations (figures, enumerated maps and tables, in this order)
(b) Abstract of not more than 200 words, intelligible to the reader without reference to the text
(c) Table of contents giving hierarchy of headings and subheadings
(d) Introduction :
(e) Subject-matter of the paper, divided into sections to correspond with those given in table of contents
(f) Summary, if paper is lengthy
(g) Acknowledgements
(h) References
(i) Abbreviations, where these are numerous
3. MANUSCRIPT, to be submitted in triplicate, should be typewritten and neat, double spaced
with 2,5 cm margins all round. First lines of paragraphs should be indented. Tables and a list of
legends for illustrations should be typed separately, their positions indicated in the text. All
pages should be numbered consecutively.
Major headings of the paper are centred capitals; first subheadings are shouldered small
capitals; second subheadings are shouldered italics; third subheadings are indented, shouldered
italics. Further subdivisions should be avoided, as also enumeration (never roman numerals)
of headings and abbreviations.
Footnotes should be avoided unless they are short and essential.
Only generic and specific names should be underlined to indicate italics; all other marking
up should be left to editor and publisher.
4. ILLUSTRATIONS should be reducible to a size not exceeding 12 x 18 cm (19 cm including
legend); the reduction or enlargement required should be indicated; originals larger than
35 x 47 cm should not be submitted; photographs should be rectangular in shape and final
size. A metric scale should appear with all illustrations, otherwise magnification or reduction
should be given in the legend; if the latter, then the final reduction or enlargement should be
taken into consideration.
All illustrations, whether line drawings or photographs, should be termed figures (plates
are not printed; half-tones will appear in their proper place in the text) and numbered in a
single series. Items of composite figures should be designated by capital letters; lettering of
figures is not set in type and should be in lower-case letters.
The number of the figure should be lightly marked in pencil on the back of each illustration.
5. REFERENCES cited in text and synonymies should all be included in the list at the end of
the paper, using the Harvard System (ibid., idem, loc. cit., op. cit. are not acceptable):
(a) Author’s name and year of publication given in text, e.g.:
‘Smith (1969) describes .. .’
‘Smith (1969: 36, fig. 16) describes...’
“As described (Smith 1969a, 1969b; Jones 1971)’
‘As described (Haughton & Broom 1927)...’
‘As described (Haughton et al. 1927)...’
Note: no comma separating name and year
Dagination indicated by colon, not p.
names of joint authors connected by ampersand
- et al. in text for more than two joint authors, but names of all authors given in list of references.
(b) Full references at the end of the paper, arranged alphabetically by names, chronologically
within each name, with suffixes a, b, etc. to the year for more than one paper by the same
author in that year, e.g. Smith (1969a, 19695) and not Smith (1969, 1969a).
For books give title in italics, edition, volume number, place of publication, publisher.
For journal article give title of article, title of journal in italics (abbreviated according to the World list o,
scientific periodicals. 4th ed. London: Butterworths, 1963), series in parentheses, volume number, part
number (only if independently paged) in parentheses, pagination (first and last pages of article).
Examples (note capitalization and punctuation)
BULLOUGH, W. S. 1960. Practical invertebrate anatomy. 2nd ed. London: Macmillan.
FISCHER, P.—H. 1948. Données sur la résistance et de le vitalité des mollusques. J. Conch., Paris 88: 100-140.
Fiscuer, P.-H., DuvAL, M. & Rarry, A. 1933. Etudes sur les échanges respiratoires des littorines. Archs
Zool. exp. gén. 74: 627-634.
Konn, A. J. 1960a. Ecological notes on Conus (Mollusca: Gastropoda) in the Trincomalee region of Ceylon.
Ann. Mag. nat. Hist. (13) 2: 309-320.
Konn, A. J. 19606. Spawning behaviour, egg masses and larval development in Conus from the Indian Ocean.
Bull. Bingham oceanogr. Coll. 17 (4): 1-51.
THIELE, J. 1910. Mollusca: B. Polyplacophora, Gastropoda marina, Bivalvia. In: SCHULTZE, L. Zoologische
und anthropologische Ergebnisse einer Forschungsreise im westlichen und zentralen Siid-Afrika 4: 269-270.
Jena: Fischer. Denkschr. med.-naturw. Ges. Jena 16: 269-270.
(continued inside back cover)
ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
ANNALE VAN DIE SUID-AFRIKAANSE MUSEUM
Volume 86 }#Band
December 1981 Desember
Part 1 Deel
RELATIVE SIZES OF THE
MAXILLARY DECIDUOUS CANINE AND
CENTRAL INCISOR TEETH
IN THE KALAHARI SAN (BUSHMAN)
AND SOUTH AFRICAN NEGRO
By
Fe] GRINE
Cape Town Kaapstad
The ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
are issued in parts at irregular intervals as material
becomes available
Obtainable from the South African Museum, P.O. Box 61, Cape Town 8000
Die ANNALE VAN DIE SUID-AFRIKAANSE MUSEUM
word uitgegee in dele op ongereelde tye na gelang van die
beskikbaarheid van stof
Verkrygbaar van die Suid-Afrikaanse Museum, Posbus 61, Kaapstad 8000
OUT OF PRINT/UIT DRUK
LAGS SS Glew, AS isso), Ses), 5, 7D),
GGL, waa), SOD), &, CD, Ty TOS),
1IC=2, 5) 7) tp.i.)) 15425), 242). 27) 31G23).1326), 33, 4500)
EDITOR/REDAKTRISE
Ione Rudner
Copyright enquiries to the South African Museum
Kopieregnavrae aan die Suid-Afrikaanse Museum
ISBN 0 86813 026 5
Printed in South Africa by In Suid-Afrika gedruk deur
The Rustica Press, Pty., Ltd., Die Rustica-pers, Edms., Bpk.,
Court Road, Wynberg, Cape Courtweg, Wynberg, Kaap
RELATIVE SIZES OF THE MAXILLARY DECIDUOUS CANINE AND
CENTRAL INCISOR TEETH IN THE KALAHARI SAN (BUSHMAN)
AND SOUTH AFRICAN NEGRO
By
E> EE. GRINE
South African Museum, Cape Town
(With | figure and 9 tables)
[MS accepted 26 August 1981]
ABSTRACT
The mean canine-incisor index of the San is low (i.e. the San tend to possess relatively
small canines), while the average Negro index is high. The Negro mean index value is rather
high compared to values computed for other human groups, while the San index is one of
the lowest recorded for any population. The canine-—incisor index, in conjunction with other
dental and osteological features, may prove to be useful in the identification of human (par-
ticularly immature) remains from African, and especially southern African, archaeological
sites.
CONTENTS
PAGE
Introduction : : 2 229
Material é A i ; 230
Methods. : : : 231
Results : : : : D352
Discussion . : : ; 240
Summary . : : ; 242
Acknowledgements . si 248
References . f : é 243
INTRODUCTION
In the course of a study of the milk teeth of Japanese and American popu-
lations and their offspring, Hanihara (1955) noted a difference in the relative
sizes of the maxillary deciduous canines among Japanese, ‘Japanese-American
White hybrid’ and ‘Japanese-American Negro hybrid’ samples. With the
accumulation of more comparative material, Hanihara (1966) later proposed
the relative size of the upper milk canine to be a racial character of the dentition.
He compared the size of the maxillary deciduous canine (d°) with that of the
maxillary deciduous central incisor (di!) to compute what he termed the ‘canine
breadth index’. This index was calculated by the simple formula:
MD d
Raiviard:
where MD d° is the mesiodistal diameter of the canine and MD di! is the
corresponding dimension of the incisor. Hanihara observed that in most
Caucasoid population samples the mean index value exceeded 105,0 per cent,
pad)
] x 100
Ann. S. Afr. Mus. 86 (7), 1981: 229-245, 1 fig., 9 tables.
230 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
while in other groups (e.g. Mongoloid, Negroid, and Australoid) the average
index had a value of around 100,0 per cent. A relatively high ‘canine breadth
index’ was considered by Hanithara (1967, 1968, 1970) to constitute part of
what he called the ‘Caucasoid dental complex’ including also several other
features such as a high frequency of the Carabelli trait on the dm? and a low
frequency of incisor shovelling.
Although Hanihara (1955, 1966, 1967, 1968, 1970) directly recorded
indices and calculated average index values from previously published dimen-
sional data for several different racial samples, no data are at present available
for southern African Negro and Khoisan populations save for the tooth
dimensions recorded by Abel (1933). Hanihara (1966: table 5) computed an
index from Abel’s data and considered this index as a value for the ‘Bantu’.
However, Abel’s data are derived from a mixed sample of Khoi (Hottentot),
San (Bushman), and Negro crania, and as such these data are not representative
of a homogenous population. (The term ‘Bantu’ refers to the family of languages
spoken by southern African Negro peoples and not to a biological group,
although the term is often used erroneously in biological contexts.) The present
paper records this index of relative d° size for the South African Negro and
Kalahari San derived from the author’s unpublished dental measurements on
samples drawn from these populations.
Note should be made of the term ‘breadth’ as used by Hanihara (1966)
in his ‘canine breadth index’. The term ‘breadth’ has been used by various
authors in reference to either the mesiodistal or the buccolingual (=labiolingual)
diameters of tooth crowns (see Moorrees 1957, Tobias 1967, and Lunt 1969
for complete discussions of this terminological problem). In order to avoid
confusion by the use of the term ‘breadth’ in reference to an index calculated
from mesiodistal diameters, Hanihara’s ‘canine breadth index’ is probably
better referred to by another name. In this paper it will be referred to as the
‘mesiodistal canine-incisor index’.
MATERIAL
The material examined in this study is drawn from the Khoisan and
Negro population groups of southern Africa. The Negro sample comprises
crania of South African Bantu-speaking Negroes housed in_ the
Raymond A. Dart Collection of Human Skeletons, Department of Anatomy,
University of the Witwatersrand, Johannesburg, and also by plaster casts
made from the impressions of the teeth and dental arches of living Natal Nguni
children. Because of the high incidences of damaged, lost, and diseased teeth
in the available Negro samples, only six male and six female subjects were
found in which both the di! and d©° could be measured.
The term ‘San’ is used in this study to denote a biological population,
whereas the name ‘Bushman’ refers more precisely to the ethnological and
linguistic practices of these peoples (Jenkins & Tobias 1977). The San sample
TEETH IN SAN AND NEGRO 231
is composed entirely of plaster casts made from the impressions of the teeth
and jaws of living subjects. The casts were made by J. F. van Reenen and his
co-workers on three expeditions to the Kalahari Desert in 1958, 1959, and 1964.
Both the dit and d© were measurable on some thirty-four male and twenty-four
female specimens.
METHODS
To measure the diameters of the teeth a sliding vernier caliper equipped
with a dial was used. The points of the caliper were tapered and sharpened in
order to enable them to be inserted into the interdental embrasures between
teeth in the jaw. The mesiodistal crown diameters of the di! and d¢ were recorded
to the nearest 0,1 mm.
Several different methods have been defined and used in the measurement
of mesiodistal crown diameter (Hrdlitka 1923; Campbell 1925; Martin 1928;
Remane 1930; Shaw 1931; Pedersen 1949; Selmer-Olsen 1949; Robinson 1956;
Moorrees 1957; Korenhof 1960; Goose 1963; Jacobson 1967; Tobias 1967;
Lunt 1969). The determination of the mesiodistal diameters of the di! and d°
employed here was made according to Tobias’s (1967) definition of this dimen-
sion. That is, the mesiodistal diameter was measured as the distance between
two parallel lines perpendicular to the mesiodistal axial plane of the tooth and
tangential to the most mesial and distal points of the crown. Moreover these
points lay along a line parallel to the occlusal plane. This measurement is,
accordingly, not dependent upon the position of the tooth in the dental arch
and the termini do not necessarily correspond to the points of interstitial
contact.
Interproximal attrition may have an appreciable effect on the mesiodistal
diameter of a tooth crown. In those instances where attritional reduction of
tooth material was slight, and the amount of loss could be estimated with a
reasonable degree of accuracy, the mesiodistal measurement was corrected so
that it approximated the unworn diameter. For teeth that were heavily worn,
and for which mensurable correction was more a ‘guesstimate’ than a reason-
able estimate, a dimension was not recorded.
The mesiodistal diameters of the di! and d© were recorded and the canine-
incisor index was calculated separately for each individual according to the
formula given above. Only a single incisor and a single canine (usually the left?
were measured for each individual. The data was processed by a shortened
version of the OSIRIS programme, and the computation of statistics was
performed using the SPSS programmes package (Nie et al. 1975).
Except for the indices recorded by Hanihara for sexually pooled samples
of Japanese, Amerindians (Pima), Alaskan Eskimos, American Caucasoids,
American Negroes, ‘Japanese-American White hybrids’ and ‘Japanese-
American Negro hybrids’ (1966: table 2), all the indices for comparative
populations used in this paper were calculated from reported means of mesio-
232 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
distal diameters of the di! and d°. It should be noted that a mean index and an
index of means computed for a single population sample will not necessarily
be the same. For example, the canine-incisor index of San males calculated as
an average of individual indicial values (a mean index) 1s 97,8 per cent (Table 1),
while the index computed from the mean di! and d° dimensions (an index of
means) 1s some 98,2 per cent (Table 3). Nevertheless, the different values obtained
by these two methods of calculation appear to be similar enough to permit
comparison of the present results with the indices computed from the mean
crown diameters recorded for other population groups.
RESULTS
The canine-incisor indices obtained for the Kalahari San and South
African Negro samples are recorded in Table |. It is immediately apparent that
on average the San possesses a relatively smaller maxillary deciduous canine
TABLE |
Canine-incisor indices of the Kalahari San and South African Negro.
Population sample Sample range
Sanpmale a: a. sa. wt ee 90,0-113,3
Samulemales y sao 2 ec ote 89,2-109,5
San male-- female << . .-. 89,2-113,3
INGprOmmaless cao Sy uae 7 eee 100,0-122,4
INGgRO Teme ne 91,6-113,6
Negro male + female . . . 91,6-122,4
N—sample size; X —sample mean; SE~—standard error of the mean;
SD—standard deviation; CV—coefficient of variation (SD/X(100)).
than does the South African Negro. All San sample means fall below 100,0 per
cent, while all Negro means fall above 100,0 per cent. Individual index values
for all samples, except the Negro male, range from below to above 100,0 per
cent.
Despite the small sizes of the Negro male and female samples, F analyses
of variance revealed no apparent significant differences in the index value
distributions amongst these and the other samples considered here. Statistical
testing of the means of the various samples, notwithstanding the small sizes of
some, was considered justified. The results of these comparisons are given in
Table 2.
The mean index values of the San male and female samples are nearly
the same (Table 1) and, as expected, this slight difference was found to be not
statistically significant. The mean index value of the Negro male sample is
somewhat higher than that of the Negro female sample (Table 1), but this
mean difference was also found to be not statistically significant. Thus no
apparent sexual differences are shown by the San and Negro samples in the
TEETH IN SAN AND NEGRO 235
TABLE 2
Statistical comparison of mean canine-incisor index values amongst
the Kalahari San and South African Negro samples.
Sample comparisons Significance
San male—San female
Negro male—Negro female
San male—Negro male . . . p < 0,005
San female—Negro female ... —
San—Negro (pooled samples) . p < 0,001
df—degrees of freedom.
TABLE 3
Canine-incisor indices computed for different populations. Males.
Population (mm) | (mm) Reference
MONGOLOID a
J2GANESE: 1S ee 6,63 6,75 101,8 Ono 1960
JADEMESS 2 Reece 6,70 6,70 100,0 Hanihara 1976
Amenndian (Pima) . . . 6,86 UMS 104,2 Hanihara 1976
CAUCASOID
| RSUUNETENOE oe 6,72 6,99 104,0 Boboc 1965
Byte , |) iin 6,46 6,78 105,0 Clinch 1963
SWWEGISN: 5 Soll tn 6,60 7,04 106,7 Seipel 1946
INOntheAmernican . °. . .. 6,40 6,76 105,9 Black 1978
INonthneAmentcan 6. 6,40 6,80 106,3 Hanihara 1976
INOKtheAMenIcam ... . .. 6,55 6,88 105,0 Moorrees 1959
North American
AUSTRALOID
Australian Aborigine . ... i385 7,41
Australian Aborigine... 7,40 ee
Australian Aborigine. ... V3) UBS
Naisoi Bee:
NEGROID
AAMenMICAMUNESTO. . . =. ; 6,03 6,86
South African Negro. ...
South African Negro. ... 6,47 7,08
KHOISANOID
Kalahari San
Kalahari San
MIXED SAMPLE
Tristanite
105,4 Meredith & Knott 1968
100,8 Margetts & Brown 1978
101,6 Barrett, Brown & Luke 1963
100,6 Hanihara 1976
99,0 Bailit, De Witt & Leigh 1968
Hanihara 1976
Present study?
Grine unpublished? +
Present study?
Grine unpublished? +
Thomsen 1955
+ —mean of individual index values (mean index);
++ —index calculated from mean dimensions of di! and d° (index of means).
canine-incisor index. Hanihara (1955, 1966) found no significant sexual differ-
ences in the index values of any of the populations measured by him.
The Negro male displays, on average, a higher canine-incisor index than
does the San male, and comparison of these mean values indicated this differ-
234 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
ence to be statistically significant (Table 2: ‘t? = —3,27; p < 0,005). The mean
indicial value of the Negro female is higher than that of the San female; but
comparison of these values indicated the difference to be not statistically
significant, where a value of p < 0,05 was considered to represent significance.
As would be expected from the foregoing the mean index value of the sexually
pooled Negro sample is higher than the average value obtained for the pooled
San sample (Table 1). Comparison of the pooled means (Table 2) indicated
the Negro value to be significantly higher than that of the San (‘t? = —3,50;
p= O00):
The mean canine-incisor indices of the San and Negro male samples are
compared with indices computed for male samples of other population groups
in Table 3. It appears that while Caucasoid males display a relatively high
index with values ranging from 104,0 to 106,7 per cent, Australoid males
show a relatively low index with values ranging from 99,0 to 101,6 per cent.
Males of the three Mongoloid populations recorded (Table 3) appear to show
index values intermediate between the Australoid and Caucasoid values.
TABLE 4
Canine-incisor indices computed for different populations. Females.
MD di!| MD d& | Index
(mm) | (mm) We
MONGOLOID
JAPANESE ak Ae Re ae mere 6,57
JapameSsea an) =
Reference
Ono 1960
Hanihara 1976
Amerindian (Pima) . ... 6,82 Hanihara 1976
CAUCASOID
Rumanian a ae 5k? 6,52 Boboc 1965
BiitiSht 52 Pyseh ies se Rei 6,31 6,61 Clinch 1963
SwediSinge: ka 27 08 Us tee, 6,56 6,93 Seipel 1946
INoneheAinenicane yo) ee 6,52 6,66 Black 1978
North American, 998)5) 2a ae 6,40 6,76 Hanihara 1976
North American: 2 2) 5) 6,44 6,67 Moorrees 1959
INonéheAmencanhe = | ole ae 37 Meredith & Knott 1968
AUSTRALOID
Australian Aborigine . . . 7,20 Margetts & Brown 1978
Australian Aborigine. . . V2 Barrett, Brown & Luke 1963
Hanihara 1976
Bailit, De Witt & Leigh 1968
Australian Aborigine. . . UBS
IN@ISOIT | (i eee? el 8 Ta oe 6,71
NEGROID
North American Negro . . 6,54
South African Negro . :
South African Negro. . . 6,58
KHOISANOID
Kalahari San
Kalahari San
MIXED SAMPLE
Tristanite
Hanihara 1976
Present studyt
Grine unpublished? +
Present studyt
Grine unpublished? t
Thomsen 1955
+ —mean of individual index values (mean index);
++ —index calculated from mean dimensions of di? and d°¢ (index of means).
TEETH IN SAN AND NEGRO DBS
Interestingly, the American Negro and South African Negro males possess
the highest canine-incisor indices of any of the population groups compared,
with values of 113,8 and 107,0 per cent (or 109,4 depending upon the mode of
calculation) respectively. The index value of the San male, 97,8 per cent (or
98,2 depending upon the mode of calculation) is lower than that of any other
male sample save the Tristanites.
Comparison of the mean index values recorded for the San and Negro
female samples with the indices of means calculated for other female popu-
lations (Table 4) reveals a pattern of distribution similar to that described for
males. The mean index of the South African Negro female (102,9°%) falls
within the range shown by Caucasoid female samples, whereas the South African
Negro female index of means has a value of 100,8 per cent. The latter value is
almost identical to that of the mixed Tristanite population, 1s lower than any
Caucasoid or Mongoloid female value recorded, but 1s slightly larger than the
values obtained for Australoid female samples. Only the Naisoi female index
of means is lower than the mean index of the San female (98,0°,), but the
index value obtained from the mean tooth dimensions of the San female (96,9 °, )
is lower than that recorded for any other population. Generally speaking, it
appears that for most groups the mean female index value is somewhat lower
than the average male index value.
The canine-incisor index of the sexually pooled South African Negro
sample (105,0 or 104,3°. depending upon the mode of calculation) is higher
than that recorded for any Mongoloid or Australoid population, and falls
within the ranges obtained for Caucasoids and established for other Negro
populations (Table 5). The South African Negro index is considerably higher
than that calculated for a sample of Liberian Negroes. It is also higher than the
two index values recorded by Hanihara (1955, 1966) for ‘Japanese-American
Negro hybrids’, and the index value calculated from Abel’s (1933) data for a
mixed sample of San, Khoi, and Negro individuals. The mean index, as well as
the index of the means calculated for the South African Negro, are nearly the
Same as the mean index value recorded by Hanihara (1966, 1970) for the
American Negro, but they are somewhat lower than the index values for
American Negroes recorded elsewhere by Hanihara (1967) and computed from
his 1976 data.
The San indicial value (either 97,9 or 97,6°.) is lower than any recorded
for a Caucasoid sample (Table 5). The San values are lower also than most
obtained for Mongoloid populations, although they are approached by the
values calculated for the Ainu (Hanihara 1970) and the Japanese sample
measured by Arai (1937). The San values bracket the index value obtained by
Hanthara (1955) for a Japanese sample. The San values are lower than those
obtained for some Australoid populations, but are almost the same as the
value calculated for the Naisoi, while the Australian Aboriginal index calculated
from Campbell’s (1925) data is lower. The Tristanite index value is also close
to the San values. The San index values are lower than any recorded for a
236 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
TABLE 5
Canine-incisor indices reported or calculated for different populations.
Sexually pooled samples.
MD d°¢ | Index
Population
MONGOLOID
JAMWANESE. sea ee ete a eas Hanihara 1955
NapaneSee 45 we ee ees be 6,60 6,71 101,7 Ono 1960*
JaWAMESE: 45, We ew en ee 6,64 6,60 99,4 Arai 1937
Japanese 101,0 Hanihara 1966, 1970
JADAMESE? Fee oe era ees 101,5 Hanihara 1967
ValpaneSe: "gar peeve eae es 6,62 6,66 100,6 Hanihara 1976*
Ainu Sees ec a ec Seen see? 99,5 Hanihara 1970
Amerindian (Pima) . . . 103,3 Hanihara 1966, 1970
Amerindian (Pima) . .. . 6,84 7,08 103,5 Hanihara 1976
Amerindian (GKAH). .. . 6,28 6,37 101,4 Sciulli 1977
Amerindian (PH) . : 6,42 6,44 100,3 Sciulli 1977
Alaskan Eskimo 100,3 Hanihara 1966, 1970
Aleut Eskimo 100,0 Hanihara 1966
CAUCASOID
Rumanian 6,62 6,86 103,6 Boboc 1965*
Belgian medieval 6,33 6,85 108,2 Mydlarz 1964
European 6,10 6,70 109,8 Brabant 1965
Polish 6,40 6,90 107,8 Szlachetko 1959
British 6,30 6,60 104,8 Dolamore 1908
British 6,39 6,70 104,9 Clinch 1963
Swedish . 6,58 6,99 106,2 Seipel 1946*
Aran Islander . 6,30 6,80 107,9 Dockrell 1956
North American 6,50 7,00 OVE Black 1897
North American 6,46 6,72 104,0 Black 1978*
North American 6,40 6,78 105,9 Hanihara 1976*
North American 6,50 6,90 106,2 Jones 1947
North American 6,50 6,78 104,3 Moorrees 1959*
North American 6,55 6,82 104,1 Kramer & Ireland 1959
North American 108,2 Hanihara 1966, 1970
North American 106,3 Hanihara 1967
North American 6,39 6,77 106,0 Meredith & Knott 1968
North American 6,40 6,80 106,3 Raak 1950
AUSTRALOID
Australian Aborigine... 7,28 3! 100,4 Margetts & Brown 1978*
Australian Aborigine . . . 35 Ye 101,0 Barrett, Brown & Luke 1963
Australian Aborigine. .. 7,30 Wo 322 100,3 Hanihara 1976*
Australian Aborigine. .. 7,80 7,50 96,2 Campbell 1925
INAISO li tees ak were se 8 Oni 6,64 98,1 Bailit, De Witt & Leigh 1968’
NEGROID
AmericanNesro) % a8) 2 - 104,9 Hanihara 1966, 1970
AIMEGICAT INGSTOM sn) 5) menue 107,8 Hanihara 1967
American Neeior 4 eas |: 6,29 6,88 109,4 Hanihara 1976*
EibenanyNecron 7 an 6,85 6,79 99,1 Moss & Chase 1966
South African Negro. .. 105,0 Present studyt
South African Negro. . . 6,53 6,59 104,3 Grine unpublishedt +
KHOISANOID
KalaharcSan' 22°. 0. eae 97,9 Present studyt
Kalahariesan’.. 8, aa. 6,75 6,59 97,6 Grine unpublished? 7
TEETH IN SAN AND NEGRO 237
TABLE 5 (continued)
MD di!| MD d¢ | Index Rewerence
(mm) | (mm) WA |
MIXED SAMPLES
Japanese-Caucasoid . . . Hanihara 1955
Japanese-Caucasoid . . . Hanihara 1966
WapaMnese-Neero . . . . Hanihara 1955
Japanese-Neeto - . « = : Hanihara 1966
San-Khoi-Negro .. .. . 6,60 6,60 Abel 1933
Ministamite, 2 . . =. . . 6,51 6,44 Thomsen 1955
In those instances where no MD diameters for di! and d° are given, the index value was
reported directly. *—index values calculated from averaged mean diameters of di’ and d°
and are not the averages of male and female indices given in Tables 3 and 4. +—mean of
individual index values (mean index); +{—index calculated from the mean dimensions of
di! and d°¢ (index of means).
Negro population, although they are approximated by the values calculated
for Liberian Negroes and a sample of ‘Japanese-American Negro hybrids’
examined by Hanihara (1955).
Thus the mean mesiodistal canine-incisor index value of the South African
Negro appears to be relatively high, while that of the San seems to be relatively
low compared with the values obtained for other human population samples.
Hanihara (1955, 1966) recorded the frequencies of individuals from several
populations in whom the d° was larger than the di’ (index values equal to or
greater than 100,1°%) and in whom the d° was smaller than or equal to the
size of the di! (index values of x—100,0°%). He (1966) recorded that the American
Caucasoid sample had a higher frequency of individuals in whom the d° was
mesiodistally larger than the di! than did any of the other population samples
examined by him.
The percentage frequencies of individuals with relatively small canines
(index values of x-100,0°%) and relatively large canines (index values of 100,1—x)
in the South African Negro and San samples are recorded in Table 6. While
no significant sexual differences in frequency distributions within the San and
Negro samples were found (Table 7), it is readily apparent that, whereas the
TABLE 6
Numbers and frequencies of individuals in the South African Negro and
Kalahari San samples in whom the deciduous canine is smaller than, and/or
equal to, or larger than the central deciduous incisor.
Index value x-100,0% Index value 100,1-x %
Population sample
San male
San female . oe
San—male + female .
Negro male :
INesro female...
Negro—male + female
238 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
TABLE 7
Chi-square evaluation of distribution of index values above
and below 100,0 per cent amongst the San and South African
Negro.
Sample comparisons significance
San male—San female. . . . —
Negro male— Negro female
San male—Negro male . . . p < 0,01
San female—Negro female . . —
San—Negro (pooled samples) . p < 0,001
TABLE 8
-Comparison of frequencies of Kalahari San and South African Negro individuals with large
or small canine-incisor indices with frequencies reported for other populations.
Sexually pooled samples.
5
Index value 100,1—x
DAY Hanihara 19
Hanihara 1966
Hanihara 1966
Hanihara 1966
Hanihara 1966
Hanihara 1966
Present study
Amerindian (Pima) .
Eskimo (Alaskan)
American—Caucasoid
American Negro
South African Negro
Kalahari San Present study
Japanese—Caucasoid Hanihara 1955
Japanese—Negro Soc: 13 Hanihara 1955
Numbers of individuals for other populations calculated from data presented by Hanihara
(1966: table 4).
majority of San individuals have relatively small deciduous canines, the majority
of Negro individuals have relatively large canines. Chi-square evaluations of
the frequencies shown by the San and Negro samples revealed the difference
between San and Negro males to be significant (x? = 7,25; p < 0,01), while
the difference among the San and Negro females appeared to be not statistically
significant. The distributional differences among the sexually pooled San and
Negro samples were found to be highly significant (x? = 9,74; p < 0,001).
While some 75,0 per cent of Negro individuals examined have maxillary decidu-
ous canines that are mesiodistally larger than the maxillary deciduous central
incisors, almost three-quarters of San individuals have incisors that are not as
large as, or larger than, the canines.
The frequency distributions of relative canine size in the sexually pooled
San and Negro samples are compared in Table 8 with these distributions for
other populations as recorded by Hanihara (1955, 1966). It would appear that
in Mongoloid peoples the percentage frequency of individuals with relatively
large canines tends to be consistently lower than the corresponding frequencies
TEETH IN SAN AND NEGRO 239
of Negro individuals. The Caucasoid sample studied by Hanihara (1966) has
the highest frequency of individuals in whom the d° is larger than the di’.
Comparison of the South African Negro frequency distributions with those of
other populations (Table 9) indicated the differences to be not statistically
significant, except in the case of Hanihara’s (1955) Japanese sample. However,
the frequency distributions of Hanihara’s (1955, 1966) two Japanese samples
are also significantly different. Thus, the percentage frequency of South African
Negro individuals with relatively large canines is comparable to that in the
other population groups sampled.
The San, however, shows a distributional pattern which is markedly
different from that found in any other population, save Hanihara’s (1955)
Japanese sample, for which these frequencies have been recorded (Table 8).
Comparison of the distribution frequencies encountered in the San sample
with the frequencies recorded for other populations indicated the San distri-
bution to be significantly different in each case except for Hanihara’s (1955)
Japanese sample (Table 9). The percentage of San individuals in whom the d°
TABLE 9
Chi-square evaluation of distribution of individual index
values above and below 100,0 per cent amongst the San,
South African Negro, and other populations.
Sexually pooled samples.
Comparative population x2 significance
KALAHARI SAN COMPARISONS
Japanese (Hanihara 1955)... 0,48 —
Japanese (Hanihara 1966). . . 11,14 p < 0,001
Amenindianio se ns 18,55 p < 0,001
FISISIMORee (GRR os Pe 6,70 () KOLO |
@aqucasordis 9s. sack ao: 21,18 p < 0,001
EN INSHCIO ING TO) 5 10,26 p < 0,01
Japanese-Caucasoid . . . . 12,19 p < 0,001
JEVORINESSSINISA) 5 5 6 6 6 4,58 p < 0,05
SOUTH AFRICAN NEGRO COMPARISONS
Japanese (Hanihara 1955)... 13,08 p < 0,001
Japanese (Hanihara 1966). . . 1,92 —
AMmennGgiane Geri kerr Ae 6 0,64 os
IS KAUN Og My tale ak ida wR oe 0,35 —
CaMeaSOrd ine wes BG eS My ee 1,00 _
JNO INGYR) 5 6 » 2 4 0,08 —
Japanese-Caucasoid . . . . 0,85 _—
Japanese-Negro .... . 1,78 —
is larger than the di! is markedly smaller than this frequency recorded for any
other population group, except the Japanese studied by Hanihara (1955).
Apart from the fact that the Japanese sample examined by Hanihara in 1955
240 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
is about half as large as that studied by him in 1966, Hanihara has not provided
an explanation for the significant differences in frequency distributions between
these two samples.
DISCUSSION
Hanihara (1966, 1967, 1968, 1970) proposed that a relatively high canine—
incisor index (i.e. values of about 105,0°% and over) was distinctive of Cauca-
soid peoples and formed part of the ‘Caucasoid dental complex’. Comparisons
of canine-incisor indices for a larger series of population samples appear to
support Hanihara’s statements that Caucasoids tend to have higher mean
index values than most other groups. Australoid peoples generally have lower
mean indicial values, while Mongoloid populations tend to show intermediate
values.
The canine-incisor index of the South African Negro 1s relatively high.
In all three sets of comparisons (male, female, and sexually pooled samples)
the mean Negro values fell within the observed Caucasoid ranges.
The canine-incisor index of the Kalahari San is, on average, rather low.
In all three sets of comparisons the mean San values were found to be among
the lowest computed for all populations.
Index values obtained for the American Negro tend to be high, falling
within or even above observed Caucasoid mean ranges, and Hanihara (1967,
1970) has ascribed this to genetic admixture with American Caucasoids.
Interestingly, while the canine—incisor index values of the South African Negro
are also high, falling within the observed Caucasoid mean ranges but generally
below the mean American Negro values, the index computed for the Liberian
Negro is considerably lower than that shown by the South African Negro
sample. Unfortunately, the data presented by Moss & Chase (1966) for Liberian
Negroes and those given here for South African Negroes are the only measure-
ments available at present for African Negro populations. More data will have
to be accumulated for other African Negro samples before the rather marked
difference in index values between the Liberian and South African Negroes
can be explained adequately.
Perhaps the most striking features to emerge from this study are (1) the
marked difference between the mean canine-incisor index values shown by
the San and South African Negro populations, and (ii) the marked difference
in the frequency distributions of individual index values among these samples.
The tendency towards a low mesiodistal canine-incisor index may be
added to the list of osteological (De Villiers 1968; Grine 1979), somatic (Drury
& Drennan 1926; Tobias 1955-1956, 1960, 1961, 1966; De Villiers 1961;
Singer & Weiner 1963; Weiner et al. 1964), dental (Van Reenen 1961, 1964,
1966; Van Reenen & Dreyer 1963; Grine 1978, 1981), and genetic (Tobias 1972;
Nurse & Jenkins 1977) features that characterize the San and serve to differen-
tiate them from other African Negroid groups.
24]
TEETH IN SAN AND NEGRO
(dS I + X URS) s’cOT PUR (GS I — X O1BON) Z'L6 USEMJ9q PUB MOTIq
‘QAOQE SON|LA XOPUI YIM S[VNPIAIPU! OIBINY puke ues JO SaIdUaNbaJ JUISoIdal SOINSY 9dVjUIIIIg “XIPUI JOSIOUI—OUIUBDS [LISIPOISAW 9Y} JO UOIBIAIP
Pplepueys suo
SiG
+
SUBSLU PUB SUBaLU ‘sosUeI sj]dWes OIBZONY UBdIIJW YINOS pue ues psjood Ajjenxas 9y} JO UO!}eJUSSaIda1 DeWURIZRIG
SANIVA XSONI
OCI ll Oll SOl OO| G6 06 G8
S005 els Ve ‘8 —>
een ara FAAS ol, [G-———>
gE0! ZL6
‘| ‘314
ODay
UPS
olan
ues
DAD ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
The mesiodistal canine-incisor index may serve as a useful tool to aid
in the identification of human population samples from African, and especially
southern African, archaeological sites. The racial identification of immature
remains from such contexts is often difficult (Grine 1979) and it is in this regard
that the canine-incisor index would appear to be of particular use. The dis-
criminant reliability of this index, as with all other metrical and non-metrical
characters of the dentition and skeleton, would be enhanced in circumstances
where the population sample in question is of at least moderate size. Unfortu-
nately, however, human remains from archaeological sites are often few in
number.
In the identification of individual specimens, comparative sample ranges
of a measurement are commonly used. There is a considerable degree of overlap
in individual canine-incisor index values among the San and South African
- Negro (Figure |, Table 1). Thus according to the data derived from the present
samples of these two populations, a child with an index value of between
91,6 and 113,3 per cent could belong to either group. However, even if only one
standard deviation on either side of the mean is used rather than the entire
sample range, the utility of the mesiodistal canine—incisor index is noticeably
increased. |
For the present samples the upper extreme of one standard deviation of
the San mean 1s a value of 103,75 per cent and the lower extreme of one standard
deviation of the Negro mean is 97,21 (Fig. 1). Some 51,7 per cent of individuals
comprising the San sample show index values below 97,21, while 50,0 per cent
of Negro individuals examined have indicial values above 103,75.
SUMMARY
The relative mesiodistal diameters of the d¢ and di! in samples of Kalahari
San and South African Negro populations are investigated. The San tends to
have a low canine-incisor index (i.e. the canines tend to be relatively small),
while the Negro generally possesses a high canine-incisor index (i.e. the canines
tend to be relatively large). Generally, Caucasoid samples have relatively high
index values (Hanihara 1966, 1967, 1968, 1970), Australoid populations show
relatively low values, and the indices of Mongoloid populations tend to be
intermediate between these two extremes. The South African and American
Negro index values but not the Liberian Negro index value are comparable to
those displayed by Caucasoid samples. The mean San index is among the
lowest computed for any human population.
The mean index values as well as the frequency distributions of individual
index values are markedly different between the San and South African Negro.
These differences are most apparent between the male and sexually pooled
samples.
Used in conjunction with other dental and osteological features, the mesio-
distal canine-incisor index may prove to be a useful tool in the identification
TEETH IN SAN AND NEGRO 243
of human population samples from African, and especially southern African,
archaeological sites. This index would appear to be particularly useful in the
analysis of immature human remains.
ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS
I thank Prof. J. F. van Reenen for permission to examine the casts of the
Kalahari San, Prof. P. V. Tobias for permission to examine material in the
Raymond A. Dart skeletal collection, and Dr C. Catterick for making casts
of Nata! Nguni children available to me. My thanks go to Profs P. V. Tobias,
H. de Villiers, and R. Klein for reading this paper and for their constructive
comments. Mrs P. Eedes typed the manuscript.
REFERENCES
ABEL, W. 1933. Zahne und Kiefer in ihrem Wechselbeziehungen bei Buschmannern, Hotten-
totten, Negern und deren Bastarden. Z. Morph. Anthrop. 31: 314-361.
ARAI, T. 1937. Intercorrelations between mesiodistal and buccolingual diameters in the
deciduous and permanent teeth. J. Jap. dent. Soc. 77: 176-185.
BaiLit, H. L., DE Witt, S. J. & LEIGH, R. A. 1968. The size and morphology of the Naisoi
dentition. Am. J. phys. Anthrop. 28: 271-288.
BARRETT, M., BROWN, T. & LUKE, J. 1963. Dental observations on Australian Aborigines:
mesiodistal crown diameters of deciduous teeth. Aust. dent. J. 8: 299-302.
BLACK, G. V. 1897. Descriptive anatomy of the human teeth. Philadelphia: S. S. White Dental
Mfg.
BLACK, T. K. 1978. Sexual dimorphism in the tooth-crown diameters of the deciduous teeth.
Am. J. phys. Anthrop. 48: 77-82.
Bosoc, G. 1965. Studiu statistic si citera consideratii asupra latimii dintilor temorari si definitivi.
Stomatologia 12: 345-354.
BRABANT, H. 1965. Observations sur |’evolution de la denture temporaire humaine en Europe
occidentale. Bull. Grpmt int. Rech. scient. Stomat. 8: 235-302.
CAMPBELL, T. D. 1925. Dentition and palate of the Australian Aboriginal. Publs Keith Sheridan
Fdn med. Res. 1: 1-123.
CLINCH, L. M. 1963. A longitudinal study of the mesiodistal crown diameters of the deciduous
teeth and their permanent successors. Europ. orthod. Soc. Rep. 39: 202-215.
De Vicuiers, H. 1961. The tablier and steatopygia in Kalahari Bushwomen. S. Afr. J. Sci. 57:
223-227.
De ViLuErs, H. 1968. The skull of the South African Negro: a biometrical and morphological
study. Johannesburg: Witwatersrand University Press.
DOocKRELL, R. B. 1956. Tooth size in Irish (Aran Island) families. Europ. orthod. Soc. Rep. 32:
200-216.
DoLamore, W. H. 1908. The relation of the deciduous to the permanent teeth. Gaz. R. dent.
Hosp. 1908: 144-156.
Drury, D. H. & DRENNAN, M. R. 1926. The pudendal parts of the South African Bush race.
S. Afr. med. J. 22: 113-117.
Goose, D. H. 1963. Dental measurement: an assessment of its value in anthropological
studies. Jn: BROTHWELL, D. R., ed. Dental anthropology: 125-148. London: Pergamon.
GRINE, F. E. 1978. Occlusal morphology of the lower molars of the South African Negro and
San (Bushman). J. Anat. 126: 667.
GRINE, F. E. 1979. Report on two infant skeletons and an adult metatarsal excavated from
Diana’s Vow. Occ. Pap. natn. Mus. Rhod. (A) 4: 141-145.
GRINE, F. E. 1981. Occlusal morphology of the mandibular permanent molars of the South
African Negro and the Kalahari San (Bushman). Ann. S. Afr. Mus. 86: 157-215.
HANIHARA, K. 1955. Studies on the deciduous dentition of the Japanese and the Japanese—
American hybrids. II. Deciduous canines. J. anthrop. Soc. Nippon 64: 63-82.
244 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
HANIHARA, K. 1966. Relative size of the deciduous upper canine —a new racial character in
the dentition. J. anthrop. Soc. Nippon 74: 9-17.
HANIHARA, K. 1967. Racial characters in the dentition. J. dent. Res. 46: 923-926.
HANIHARA, K. 1968. Morphological pattern of the deciduous dentition in the Japanese—
American hybrids. J. anthrop. Soc. Nippon 76: 114-121.
HANIHARA, K. 1970. Mongoloid dental complex in the deciduous dentition with special
reference to the dentition of the Ainu. J. anthrop. Soc. Nippon 78: 3-17.
HANIHARA, K. 1976. Statistical and comparative studies of the Australian aboriginal dentition.
Bull. Univ. Mus. Tokyo 11: 1-57.
Hrb.ickA, A. 1923. Variation in the dimensions of lower molars in man and anthropoid apes.
Am. J. phys. Anthrop. 16: 123-166.
JACOBSON, A. 1967. The Bantu dentition: a morphological and metrical study of the teeth,
the jaws and the bony palate of several large groups of South African Bantu-speaking
Negroids. Unpublished Ph.D. thesis, University of the Witwatersrand.
JENKINS, T. & TosiAs, P. V. 1977. Nomenclature of population groups in southern Africa.
Afr. Stud. 36: 49-55.
Jones, H. G. 1947. The primary dentition in Homo sapiens and the search for primitive features.
Am. J. phys. Anthrop. 5: 251-282.
KorENHOF, C. A. W. 1960. Morphogenetical aspects of the human upper molar. Utrecht:
Uitgeversmaatschappij Neerlandia.
KRAMER, W. S. & IRELAND, R. 1959. Measurements of the primary teeth. J. Dent. Child. 26:
252-261.
Lunt, D. A. 1969. An odontometric study of mediaeval Danes. Acta odont. Scand. 27
(suppl. 55): 1-173.
Marcetts, B. & Brown, T. 1978. Crown diameters of the deciduous teeth in Australian
aboriginals. Am. J. phys. Anthrop. 48: 493-S02.
MartTIN, R. 1928. Lehrbuch der Anthropologie. Part 11. 2nd ed. Jena: Gustav Fischer.
MEREDITH, H. V. & Knott, V. B. 1968. Coronal breadth of human primary anterior teeth.
Am. J. phys. Anthrop. 28: 49-64.
Moorregs, C. F. A. 1957. The Aleut dentition. Cambridge (Mass.): Harvard University Press.
Moorregs, C. F. A. 1959. The dentition of the growing child: a longitudinal study of dental
development between 3 and 18 years of age. Cambridge (Mass.): Harvard University Press.
Moss, M. L. & CHAsE, P. S. 1966. Morphology of Liberian Negro deciduous teeth. I. Odonto-
metry. Am. J. phys. Anthrop. 24: 215-230.
MyYDLARZ, A. 1964. Observations sur les dimensions de dents temporaires d’age Médieéval.
Bull. Grpmt int. Rech. scient. Stomat. 7: 121-141.
Nig, N. H., Hut, C. H., JENKINS, J. G., STEINBRENNER, K. & BENT, D. H. 1975. Statistical
package for the social sciences. 2nd ed. New York: McGraw-Hill.
Nurse, G. T. & JENKINS, T. 1977. Health and the hunter-gatherer: biomedical studies on the
hunting and gathering populations of southern Africa. Monographs in human genetics 8:
1-126. Basle: S. Karger.
Ono, H. 1960. Mesiodistal diameters of primary and permanent teeth and their correlation
in the arch. J. Jap. stomat. Soc. 27; 221-234.
PEDERSEN, P. O. 1949. The East Greenland Eskimo dentition. Copenhagen: C. A. Reitzels.
RAAK, K. D. 1950. The mesio-distal diameter of the deciduous teeth. Unpublished M.S. thesis,
University of lowa, Iowa City.
REMANE, A. 1930. Zur Messtechnik der Primatanzahne. Jn: ABERHALDEN, E., ed. Handbuch
der biologischen Arbeitsmethoden 7: 609-635.
RosInson, J. T. 1956. The dentition of the Australopithecinae. Mem. Transv. Mus. 9: 1-179.
ScIuLLI, P. W. 1977. A descriptive and comparative study of the deciduous dentition of
prehistoric Ohio Valley Amerindians. Am. J. phys. Anthrop. 47: 71-80.
SEIPEL, C. 1946. Variation in tooth position: a metric study of variation and adaptation in
the deciduous and permanent dentitions. Swed. dent. J. 39 (suppl.): 1-176.
SELMER-OLSEN, R. 1949. An odontological study of the Norwegian Lapps. Skrif. norske
Vidensk-Akad. mat.-nat. Kl. 3: 1-167.
SHAw, J. C. M. 1931. The teeth, the bony palate and the mandible in Bantu races in South Africa.
London: J. Bale, Sons and Danielsson.
SINGER, R. & WEINER, J. S. 1963. Biological aspects of some indigenous African populations.
S West. J. Anthrop. 19: 168-176.
TEETH IN SAN AND NEGRO 245
SZLACHETKO, K. 1959. Investigations on the morphology of the human deciduous dentition.
Acta Fac. Rerum nat. Univ. comen., Bratisl. 3: 247-279.
THOMSEN, S. 1955. Dental morphology and occlusion in the people of Tristan da Cunha. Oslo:
Norske Videnkaps-Akademi.
Tosias, P. V. 1955-56. Les Bochimans Auen et Naron de Ghanzi. Contribution a l’étude des
‘Anciens Jaunes’ sud-africains. I-IV. Anthropologie 59: 235-252, 429-461, 60: 22-52,
268-289.
Tosias, P. V. 1960. Bushman hunter—gatherers: a study in human ecology. Jn: Davies, D. H. S..,
ed. Ecological studies in southern Africa: 67-86. The Hague: W. Junk.
Tosias, P. V. 1961. Fingerprints and palmar prints of Kalahari Bushmen. S. Afr. J. Sci. 57:
333-345.
Tosias, P. V. 1966. The peoples of Africa south of the Sahara. Jn: BAKER, D. T. and
WEINER, J. S., eds. The biology of human adaptability: 111-200. Oxford: Clarendon Press.
Tosias, P. V. 1967. The cranium and maxillary dentition of Australopithecus (Zinjanthropus)
boisei. Olduvai Gorge 2. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.
Tosias, P. V. 1972. Recent human biological studies in southern Africa, with special reference
to the Negroes and Khoisans. Trans. R. Soc. S. Afr. 40: 109-133.
VAN REENEN, J. F. 1961. The use of the concept of tooth material as an indication of tooth
size in a group of Kalahari Bushmen. S. Afr. J. Sci. 57: 347-352.
VAN REENEN, J. F. 1964. Dentition, jaws and palate of the Kalahari Bushmen. J. dent. Assoc.
S. Afr. 19: 1-37.
VAN REENEN, J. F. 1966. Dental features of a low caries primitive population. J. dent. Res. 45
(suppl. 1): 703-713.
VAN REENEN, J. F. & Dreyer, C. J. 1963. The relationship between tooth material and the
supporting structures of the teeth in a group of Kalahari Bushmen: a comparative study.
J. dent. Assoc. S. Afr. 18: 474-479.
WEINER, J. S., AINSWORTH HARRISON, G., SINGER, R., HARRIS, R. & Jopp, W. 1964. Skin
colour in southern Africa. Hum. Biol. 36: 294-307.
6. SYSTEMATIC papers must conform to the International code of zoological nomenclature
(particularly Articles 22 and 51).
Names of new taxa, combinations, synonyms, etc., when used for the first time, must be
followed by the appropriate Latin (not English) abbreviation, e.g. gen. nov., sp. nov., comb.
nov., syn. nov., etc.
An author’s name when cited must follow the name of the taxon without intervening
punctuation and not be abbreviated; if the year is added, a comma must separate author’s
name and year. The author’s name (and date, if cited) must be placed in parentheses if a
species or subspecies is transferred from its original genus. The name of a subsequent user of
a scientific name must be separated from the scientific name by a colon.
Synonymy arrangement should be according to chronology of names, i.e. all published
scientific names by which the species previously has been designated are listed in chronological
order, with all references to that name following in chronological order, e.g.:
Family Nuculanidae
Nuculana (Lembulus) bicuspidata (Gould, 1845)
Figs 14-15A
Nucula (Leda) bicuspidata Gould, 1845: 37.
Leda plicifera A. Adams, 1856: 50.
Laeda bicuspidata Hanley, 1859: 118, pl. 228 (fig. 73). Sowerby, 1871: pl. 2 (fig. 8a—b).
Nucula largillierti Philippi, 1861: 87.
Leda bicuspidata: Nicklés, 1950: 163, fig. 301; 1955: 110. Barnard, 1964: 234, figs 8-9.
Note punctuation in the above example:
comma separates author’s name and year
“semicolon separates more than one reference by the same author
full stop separates references by different authors
figures of plates are enclosed in parentheses to distinguish them from text-figures
dash, not comma, separates consecutive numbers
Synonymy arrangement according to chronology of bibliographic references, whereby
the year is placed in front of each entry, and the synonym repeated in full for each entry, is
not acceptable.
In describing new species, one specimen must be designated as the holotype; other speci-
mens mentioned in the original description are to be designated paratypes; additional material
not regarded as paratypes should be listed separately. The complete data (registration number,
depository, description of specimen, locality, collector, date) of the holotype and paratypes
must be recorded, e.g.:
Holotype
SAM-—A13535 in the South African Museum, Cape Town. Adult female from mid- tide region, King’s Beach
Port Elizabeth (33°51’S 25°39’E), collected by A. Smith, 15 January 1973.
Note standard form of writing South African Museum registration numbers and date.
7. SPECIAL HOUSE RULES
Capital initial letters
(a) The Figures, Maps and Tables of the paper when referred to in the text
6
e.g. *... the Figure depicting C. namacolus ...’; *. ..in C. namacolus (Fig. 10)...
(b) The prefixes of prefixed surnames in all languages, when used in the text, if not preceded
by initials or full names
e.g. Du Toit but A.L.du Toit; Von Huene but F. von Huene
(c) Scientific names, but not their vernacular derivatives
e.g. Therocephalia, but therocephalian
Punctuation should be loose, omitting all not strictly necessary
Reference to the author should be expressed in the third person
Roman numerals should be converted to arabic, except when forming part of the title of a
book or article, such as
‘Revision of the Crustacea. Part VIII. The Amphipoda.’
Specific name must not stand alone, but be preceded by the generic name or its abbreviation
to initial capital letter, provided the same generic name is used consecutively.
Name of new genus or species is not to be included in the title: it should be included in the
abstract, counter to Recommendation 23 of the Code, to meet the requirements of
Biological Abstracts.
F. E. GRINE
RELATIVE SIZES OF THE
MAXILLARY DECIDUOUS CANINE AND
CENTRAL INCISOR TEETH
IN THE KALAHARI SAN (BUSHMAN)
AND SOUTH AFRICAN NEGRO
MAY 1982 | ISSN 0303-2515
On NAW
JUL 4 4 1982
LIBRARIES 4
OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN -
MUSEUM |
CAPE TOWN
INSTRUCTIONS TO AUTHORS
1. MATERIAL should be original and not published elsewhere, in whole or in part.
2. LAYOUT should be as follows:
(a) Centred masthead to consist of
Title: informative but concise, without abbreviations and not including the names of new genera or species
Author’s(s’) name(s)
Address(es) of author(s) (institution where work was carried out)
Number of illustrations (figures, enumerated maps and tables, in this order)
(b) Abstract of not more than 200 words, intelligible to the reader without reference to the text
(c) Table of contents giving hierarchy of headings and subheadings
(d) Introduction
(e) Subject-matter of the paper, divided into sections to correspond with those given in table of contents
(f) Summary, if paper is lengthy
(g) Acknowledgements
(h) References
Gi) Abbreviations, where these are numerous
3. MANUSCRIPT, to be submitted in triplicate, should be typewritten and neat, double spaced
with 2,5 cm margins all round. First lines of paragraphs should be indented. Tables and a list of
legends for illustrations should be typed separately, their positions indicated in the text. All
pages should be numbered consecutively.
Major headings of the paper are centred capitals; first subheadings are shouldered small
capitals; second subheadings are shouldered italics; third subheadings are indented, shouldered
italics. Further subdivisions should be avoided, as also enumeration (never roman numerals)
of headings and abbreviations.
Footnotes should be avoided unless they are short and essential.
Only generic and specific names should be underlined to indicate italics; all other marking
up should be left to editor and publisher.
4. ILLUSTRATIONS should be reducible to a size not exceeding 12 « 18 cm (19 cm including
legend); the reduction or enlargement required should be indicated; originals larger than
35 x 47 cm should not be submitted; photographs should be rectangular in shape and final
size. A metric scale should appear with all illustrations, otherwise magnification or reduction
should be given in the legend; if the latter, then the final reduction or enlargement should be
taken into consideration.
All illustrations, whether line drawings or photographs, should be termed figures (plates
are not printed; half-tones will appear in their proper place in the text) and numbered in a
single series. Items of composite figures should be designated by capital letters; lettering of
figures is not set in type and should be in lower-case letters.
The number of the figure should be lightly marked in pencil on the back of each illustration.
5. REFERENCES cited in text and synonymies should all be included in the list at the end of
the paper, using the Harvard System (ibid., idem, loc. cit., op. cit. are not acceptable):
(a) Author’s name and year of publication given in text, e.g.:
‘Smith (1969) describes...’
‘Smith (1969: 36, fig. 16) describes...’
‘As described (Smith 1969a, 1969b; Jones 1971)’
‘As described (Haughton & Broom 1927)...’
‘As described (Haughton et al. 1927)...’
Note: no comma separating name and year
Dagination indicated by colon, not p.
names of joint authors connected by ampersand
et al. in text for more than two joint authors, but names of all authors given in list of references.
(b) Full references at the end of the paper, arranged alphabetically by names, chronologically
within each name, with suffixes a, b, etc. to the year for more than one paper by the same
author in that year, e.g. Smith (1969a, 19695) and not Smith (1969, 1969a).
For books give title in italics, edition, volume number, place of publication, publisher.
For journal article give title of article, title of journal in italics (abbreviated according to the Worid list o,
scientific periodicals. 4th ed. London: Butterworths, 1963), series in parentheses, volume number, part
number (only if independently paged) in parentheses, pagination (first and last pages of article).
Examples (note capitalization and punctuation)
BULLOUGH, W. S. 1960. Practical invertebrate anatomy. 2nd ed. London: Macmillan.
FISCHER, P.—H. 1948. Données sur la résistance et de le vitalité des mollusques. J. Conch., Paris 88: 100-140.
FiscHER, P.-H., DuvAL, M. & Rarry, A. 1933. Etudes sur les échanges respiratoires des littorines. Archs
Zool. exp. gén. 74: 627-634. \
Konn, A. J. 1960a. Ecological notes on Conus (Mollusca: Gastropoda) in the Trincomalee region of Ceylon.
Ann, Mag. nat. Hist. (13) 2: 309-320.
Konn, A. J. 19606. Spawning behaviour, egg masses and larval development in Conus from the Indian Ocean.
Bull. Bingham oceanogr. Coll. 17 (4): 1-51.
THIELE, J. 1910. Mollusca: B. Polyplacophora, Gastropoda marina, Bivalvia. In: SCHULTZE, L. Zoologische
und anthropologische Ergebnisse einer Forschungsreise im westlichen und zentralen Siid-Afrika 4: 269-270.
Jena: Fischer. Denkschr. med.-naturw. Ges. Jena 16: 269-270.
(continued inside back cover)
ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
ANNALE VAN DIE SUID-AFRIKAANSE MUSEUM
Volume 86 Band
May 1982 Mei
Part 8 Deel
THE OSTEOLOGY AND RELATIONSHIPS OF
TANGASAURUS MENNELLI HAUGHTON
(REPTILIA, EOSUCHIA)
By
PHILIP J. CURRIE
Cape Town Kaapstad
The ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
are issued in parts at irregular intervals as material
becomes available
Obtainable from the South African Museum, P.O. Box 61, Cape Town 8000
Die ANNALE VAN DIE SUID-AFRIKAANSE MUSEUM
word uitgegee in dele op ongereelde tye na gelang van die
beskikbaarheid van stof
Verkrygbaar van die Suid-Afrikaanse Museum, Posbus 61, Kaapstad 8000
OUT OF PRINT/UIT DRUK
12 (1= 3s 5-8) 31-2 4-5 8) tp) Ser Op
6(l, tpi), 70=4), 8: 9-2, 7), 10-3);
141-2, 5, 7, t=p.i.), 15(4-5), 24), 27, 314=3), 32), 33, 45)
EDITOR/REDAKTRISE
Ione Rudner
Copyright enquiries to the South African Museum
Kopieregnavrae aan die Suid-Afrikaanse Museum
ISBN 0 86813 029 X
Printed in South Africa by In Suid-Afrika gedruk deur
The Rustica Press, Pty., Ltd., Die Rustica-pers, Edms., Bpk.,
Court Road, Wynberg, Cape Courtweg, Wynberg, Kaap
THE OSTEOLOGY AND RELATIONSHIPS OF
TANGASAURUS MENNELLI HAUGHTON
(REPTILIA, EOSUCHIA)
By
PHILIP J. CURRIE
Provincial Museum of Alberta, Edmonton
(With 6 figures and 2 tables)
[MS accepted 11 November 1981]
ABSTRACT
The osteology of Tangasaurus mennelli, an eosuchian reptile from the Upper Permian of
Tanzania, reveals a number of adaptations for an aquatic existence. Specimens from Madagas-
car that were attributed to Tangasaurus mennelli represent a distinct, as yet unnamed, genus
that is related to Tangasaurus but less specialized. Tangasaurus is closely related to, but less
specialized for an aquatic life than Hovasaurus boulei of the Upper Permian of Madagascar.
The taxonomy of younginids and tangasaurids is re-examined, and it is concluded that these
families together comprise a distinct taxonomic unit, the Younginoidea, that did not give rise to
any other eosuchians.
CONTENTS
PAGE
UTD ANE DLO MMR arte eet alates ay este. Aa: Fee eee res, heirs or oh Meg ode de MEN en eae 247
BBY SUSHMIO UOMO ese chs his SE aioe e eet vance a 5 Se GAC Maange, coats ae eee Ue 252
SK UMPIRE ey cir lini», coane Kets aire iy hw Gienarls se uietane “atin avai Maus ee Sotayitn Mea Ne eas 252
Vere Nl CRIN GL TOS Siena tes Ad. ial op wid ONE ato saa ated aha te URaaee ee lee ous Ce aa 253
PMP MEMMICU ATESKClECOMY § cesar: eeinic a an tees Risa eo ene cne be eee 256
PN OIA ONT MAPMT e ete. e csc e sean lee rua ce ieee conven ena s auge es cnn See eae 260
Supeniamily ounginoidea superfam. NOV. .....5...2..4..5-42--+- 284504: 260
NSTI MVCOUMP TTI AEM crysis aa ess ap geeve eda sk steals te santas leternmgetane, neatenclaw weer: 260
HAMMAM ASAT ACs rai okies, Seis ee ulm tacos ge Mage ate area eo 262
Subtamily;Kenyasaurinae subfam\: MOV. .45>...5.:2-c40es.- 45-52 ose. +=: 262
Sulbbtanimlyeltan eas aUnnacr.. os caac mlat os ccace eeoettge oa ae oe Reedley aye as 262
(COME SIONS sg ache leo eo atk eee Caen rel ea aR ees tn a) nce eer ie ce AE 263
PMC OLE CCIM CIIES Hcl ial nts tee sia eaeeelern ty bude mune sentae habeas slays Mech ateeaee aides 264
ANCHE MN COSUM PECs eMac eeuiies meaty sldye eae vaca Geet eae Ace cy nce Ata tie Ye 264
INTRODUCTION
Eosuchians are generally considered to be the basal stock from which all
later diapsids evolved. Recent papers by Carroll (1975, 1976a, 1976b, 1977,
1978), Currie (1980, 1981), Gow (1975), Harris & Carroll (1977), and Reisz
(1977) have shown that eosuchians originated earlier and were more diverse
than previously suspected. By the end of the Permian, at least three distinct lines
had developed. One line is characterized by cervical elongation as in Prolacerta
(Gow 1975) and the highly specialized Tanystropheus (Wild 1973). A separate
lineage of eosuchians might have given rise to lizards (Carroll 1975) and the
247
Ann. S. Afr. Mus. 86 (8), 1982: 247-265, 6 figs, 2 tables.
248 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
gliding genus Daedalosaurus (Carroll 1978). Youngina is one of a diverse
assemblage of terrestrial and aquatic forms that appears to have given rise to
archosaurs (Carroll 1976a) and sauropterygians (Carroll 1981). The more de-
tailed relationships of some of these taxa are considered here.
Four genera of reptiles seem to share a common ancestry with Youngina:
Tangasaurus (Haughton 1924), a Late Permian reptile specialized for an aquatic
existence, known from Tanzania; Kenyasaurus (Harris & Carroll 1977), a
terrestrial relative of Tangasaurus from Lower Triassic strata of Kenya; and
‘Datheosaurus’* and Hovasaurus from Upper Permian beds of Madagascar.
‘Datheosaurus’ was a terrestrial form like Kenyasaurus, whereas Hovasaurus was
even more specialized for an aquatic existence than was Tangasaurus. Descrip-
tions have recently been published on Youngina (Gow 1975) and Kenyasaurus
(Harris & Carroll 1977), and papers on ‘Datheosaurus’ and Hovasaurus are
being prepared by Carroll and Currie respectively. The purpose of this paper is
to redescribe the known specimens of Tangasaurus and to compare them with
other tangasaurids.
In 1924 S. H. Haughton described two fossil reptile specimens that had been
collected from Upper Permian strata in the vicinity of Tanga, in what is now
Tanzania. These were recognized as a previously unknown taxon and named
Tangasaurus mennelli. Although the specimens were designated as co-types, the
smaller, better preserved one (Fig. 1A) is here considered as the lectotype. It is in
the museum in Bulawayo, Zimbabwe, while its counterpart, SAM-—6231 (Fig.
1B), and the larger specimen, SAM-6232 (Fig. 1C), are in the South African
Museum, Cape Town. On the basis of postcranial characteristics, Haughton
(1924) felt that Tangasaurus was probably a diapsid reptile that, because of the
long, powerful, flattened tail, had become adapted for an aquatic existence.
Numerous specimens of small reptiles had been collected in beds of approxi-
mately the same age along the Sakamena River of southern Madagascar. One of
the animals collected was described as Broomia madagascariensis (Piveteau
1925), but was referred the following year by Piveteau to Tangasaurus menelli
(sic). Contrary to Haughton, Piveteau felt that Tangasaurus was a primarily
terrestrial animal. Following Nopcsa (1924), he considered it to be related to
Araeoscelis, Kadaliosaurus, Broomia, Saurosternon, and Pleurosaurus.
A new genus and species, Hovasaurus boulei, also from Madagascar,
described by Piveteau (1926) was considered to be related to Mesosaurus.
Although not as specialized as Mesosaurus for living in the water, Piveteau felt
that the short neck, short manus, well developed haemal spines and slight
pachyostosis of the ribs showed that Hovasaurus was an aquatic animal.
Haughton (1930) restudied Piveteau’s specimens from Madagascar, con-
cluding that Tangasaurus and Hovasaurus were allied and that both were
diapsids. Hovasaurus was recognized as a reptile adapted to an aquatic existence
through reduction of the forelimb and coracoid, and retarded ossification and
* While this paper was in press ‘Datheosaurus’ specimens were redescribed as Thadeosaurus
(Carroll 1981).
249
TANGASAURUS MENNELLI HAUGHTON
"WD | = d[BIG “MOIA [RIUDA “ZEZI-NIVS “OD ‘(LLOT MOULD 2 Sle] Wo.)
uowuoods Surposoid yo yaediojunos ‘TEZI-WVS “A ‘OMQRquIZ ‘wnosnpy OARML[NG Ut 9d{10}99| JO MOIA [RIIUDA “YW “Yjauuaw snanvspsuvy, “| “Bt
q WV
250 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
elongation of the body. Tangasaurus was considered to be morphologically
intermediate between Youngina and Hovasaurus.
Other specimens described by Piveteau (1926) were not associated with
Tangasaurus and Hovasaurus until recently. A large number of caudal sections
were recovered along the Sakamena River of Madagascar. The caudal vertebrae
have high neural spines, and the haemal spines are long and plate-like. Piveteau
recognized these as belonging to a reptile adapted to swimming, but did not
have any other skeletal elements associated with the caudal vertebrae. These are
now known to belong to Hovasaurus.
A third genus recognized by Piveteau (1926: 171-172) was assigned with
doubt to the European genus Datheosaurus, now considered to be congeneric
with Haptodus (Currie 1979), a sphenacodont pelycosaur. The specimens refer-
red to this genus were restudied recently by Carroll (1981) who considers them
to be a new genus. Morphologically this animal appears to be close to the
ancestral stock of Tangasaurus and Hovasaurus.
Kenyasaurus mariakeniensis from the Lower Triassic of Kenya (Harris &
Carroll 1977) is considered to be most closely comparable with Tangasaurus and
Hovasaurus on the basis of general body form, the presence of a sternum and,
particularly, the anatomy of the foot.
Piveteau (1926) included Broomia, Saurosternon and Tangasaurus in the
Tangasaurinae (sic). After Haughton’s paper of 1930 demonstrated the anatom-
ical similarities between Tangasaurus and Hovasaurus, these genera were usually
included as the only representatives of the family Tangasauridae (Camp 1945;
Romer 1956, 1966; Piveteau 1955; Orlov 1964; Kuhn 1969). Depending on how
the various authors have classified primitive diapsid reptiles, the Tangasauridae
have been referred to the Araeosceloidea (Nopcsa 1924; Piveteau 1926),
Eosuchia (Haughton 1930; Von Huene 1940, 1952; Piveteau 1955; Romer 1956,
1966; Kuhn 1969), Prolacertilia (Watson 1957; Orlov 1964) or Protorosauria
(Camp 1945).
In re-examining the anatomy of tangasaurids, it became obvious that there
is a great deal of confusion concerning the identification and anatomy of these
animals. The anatomy of Tangasaurus and Hovasaurus is very similar, and there
are few characters to distinguish these genera. Although more than 300 tanga-
saurid specimens were collected in Madagascar, in almost every case two of the
most diagnostic parts of the body—the skull and the tail—were missing. The
problem is compounded by poor preservation of the type specimens of Tanga-
saurus mennelli from Tanzania that generally have been ignored in favour of the
better preserved specimens from Madagascar. Finally, many of the specimens
have been misidentified because they are immature and show few distinctive
characters. As part of a revision of tangasaurid anatomy, the majority of
specimens that have been figured were re-examined and, in many cases, re-
identified (Table 1). Hopefully, the confusion concerning the identification of
tangasaurids has been resolved. This will permit more accurate conclusions
concerning evolutionary and developmental lineages, palaeoecology, geographic
Identification
(this paper)
‘Datheosaurus’
‘Datheosaurus’
‘Datheosaurus’
‘Datheosaurus’
‘Datheosaurus’
‘Datheosaurus’
Hovasaurus boulei
H. boulei
. boulei
. boulei
. boulei
. boulei
boulei
boulei
boulei
boulei
boulei
boulei
boulei
boulei
copes FT Te TF PTT
. boulei
H. boulei
H. boulei
H. boulei
?H. boulei
Kenyasaurus
mariakaniensis
Tangasaurus
mennelli
T. mennelli
Not a tangasaurid
Not a tangasaurid
Not a tangasaurid
Not a tangasaurid
TANGASAURUS MENNELLI HAUGHTON
Pa
TABLE 1
Figured specimens of Tangasauridae.
Specimen
number
MNHN 1908-5-1
MNHN 1908-11-4
MNHN 1908-11-5
MNHN 1908-11-6
MNHN 1908-11-7
MNHN 1908-11-19
MNHN 1908-21-2
MNHN 1908-21-7
MNHN 1908-21-8
MNHN 1908-21-10
MNHN 1908-21-11
MNHN 1908-21-16
MNHN 1908-32-22
MNHN 1908-32-23
MNHN 1908-32-24
MNHN 1908-32-25
MNHN 1908-32-26
MNHN 1908-32-29
MNHN 1925-5-30
MNHN 1925-5-31
MNHN 1925-5-32
MNHN 1925-5-33
MNHN 1925-5-34
MNHN, number
unknown
MNHN, number
unknown
KNM-MA1
SAM-6231
SAM-6232
MNHN 1909-3-—30
MNHN, number
unknown
MNHN, number
unknown
MNHN, number
unknown
Previous identification
Tangasaurus mennelli (Piveteau 1926, pl. 12 (fig.
1))
T. mennelli (Piveteau 1926, pl. 10 (fig. 2))
T. mennelli (Piveteau 1926, pl. 11 (fig. 2), text-figs
17-18; Piveteau 1955, fig. 9; Gladstone &
Wakeley 1932 fig. 2; Kuhn 1969, figs 18-6,
18-8)
T. mennelli (Piveteau 1926, pl. 16 (fig. 2))
T. mennelli (Piveteau 1926, pl. 10 (fig. 1))
? Datheosaurus sp. (Piveteau 1926, pl. 17 (fig. 2))
Hovasaurus boulei (Piveteau 1926, pl. 8 (fig. 2))
H. boulei (Piveteau 1926, pl. 8 (fig. 1); Haughton
1930, fig. 3C)
H. boulei (Piveteau 1926, pl. 7 (fig. 1))
T. mennelli (Harris & Carroll 1977, text-fig. 5B)
Indeterminate reptile (Piveteau 1926, pl. 10 (fig.
4))
T. mennelli (Piveteau 1926, pl. 15 (fig. 5) text-fig.
20; Gladstone & Wakeley 19372, text-fig. 2)
H. boulei (Piveteau 1926, pl. 9 (fig. 4), text-fig. 14)
H. boulei (Piveteau 1926, pl. 9 (figs 1-2, text-fig.
16)
T. mennelli (Piveteau 1926, pl. 13 (fig. 1); Harris &
Carroll 1977, text-fig. 5A)
T. mennelli (Piveteau 1926, pl. 14 (fig. 3))
T. mennelli (Piveteau 1926, pl. 15 (fig. 1))
H. boulei (Piveteau 1926, pl. 7 (fig. 2))
H. boulei (Piveteau 1926, pl. 9 (fig. 3), text-fig. 12)
T. mennelli (Piveteau 1926, pl. 15 (fig. 4), text-fig.
22; Piveteau 1955, text-fig. 10)
T. mennelli (Piveteau 1926, pl. 16 (fig. 1), text-fig.
23; Haughton 1930, text-fig. 4C; Piveteau
1955, text-fig. 11; Kuhn 1969, text-fig. 18-7;
Harris & Carroll 1977, text-fig. 5C)
T. mennelli (Piveteau 1926, pl. 10 (fig. 3))
T. mennelli (Piveteau 1926, pl. 14 (fig. 2); Camp
1945, text-fig. 10)
H. boulei (Piveteau 1926, pl. 7 (fig. 3); Haughton
1930, text-fig. 1A)
T. mennelli (Piveteau 1926, pl. 13 (fig. 5), pl. 14,
fig. 1)
Kenyasaurus mariakaniensis (Harris & Carroll
1977, text-figs 1-4)
Tangasaurus mennelli (Haughton 1924, pl. 2, text-
figs 1-3; Von Huene 1926, text-fig. 33; Romer
1956, text-fig. 186E; Orlov 1964, text-fig. 468;
Kuhn 1969, text-figs 17-12; Harris & Carroll
1977, text-fig. 6)
. mennelli (Haughton 1924, pl. 1)
. mennelli (Piveteau 1926, pl. 15 (figs 2-3))
. mennelli (Piveteau 1926, pl. 13 (figs 2, 2A))
. mennelli (Piveteau 1926, pl. 13 (fig. 3))
Se oe es
. mennelli (Piveteau 1926, pl. 13 (figs 4, 4A))
US ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
distribution and stratigraphy. One unfortunate result is that Tangasaurus can no
longer be used for biostratigraphic correlation of the middle division of the
Tanga beds of Tanzania with the Lower Sakamena Formation of Madagascar
(McKinlay 1956, 1960).
Tangasaurid eosuchians were relatively small lizard-like reptiles. The largest
is Hovasaurus with an estimated maximum snout—vent length of about 30 cm.
The largest specimen of Tangasaurus is 20 per cent smaller than the largest
Hovasaurus, but it can be inferred from the incompleteness of ossification that
larger specimens probably existed. The linear dimension of a mature specimen
of ‘Datheosaurus’ are about 35 per cent smaller than the same dimensions in
Hovasaurus. Proportions and lengths listed in this paper for Hovasaurus and
‘Datheosaurus’ were estimated for adult size from the allometric growth curves.
Hovasaurus and Kenyasaurus are valid genera. Use of the name Tanga-
saurus in this paper is restricted to the two specimens from Tanzania. When
referring to generic characters attributed by Piveteau (1926), Haughton (1930),
and others to specimens from both Tanzania and Madagascar, the name Janga-
saurus will be used in quotation. ‘Datheosaurus’ is used to refer to most of the
specimens from Madagascar that Piveteau (1926) identified as Datheosaurus and
Tangasaurus.
The following abbreviations have been used when giving specimen num-
bers:
MNHN, Muséum National d’Histoire Naturelle
SAM, South African Museum
DESCRIPTION
SKULL
Cranial anatomy is poorly known in tangasaurids. In one of the two known
specimens of Tangasaurus, the poorly preserved skull is exposed in palatal
aspect. The bone is crushed flat, and seems little better than a film of carbon.
Further preparation of the specimen seems unfeasible. The anterior portion of
the skull was not collected, but the preserved portion is 38 mm in length.
Haughton (1924) felt that the full length of the skull would have been between
50 and 60 mm. In the light of the anterior tapering of the skull, there was
probably no elongate snout, and it is doubtful that the skull would have
exceeded 45 mm. The only bone that can be identified with any degree of
certainty is the basisphenoid-parasphenoid complex. The cultriform process is
long and tapering, and the basipterygoid processes appear to be short. The
complex is concave ventrally in transverse section between the tuberosities.
Haughton (1924) made observations on the pterygoid and various palatal
vacuities, but none of these can be seen clearly enough in the specimen to merit
description. The basioccipital can be seen at the back of the skull, but shows no
distinctive characters. Von Huene (1926) identified one bone as either stapes or
TANGASAURUS MENNELLI HAUGHTON 253
quadrate, but whatever it is, the bone gives us no better understanding of the
skull.
Only the postorbital and palatal regions of the skull of Hovasaurus are
known. The contours and proportions of the parasphenoid-basisphenoid com-
plex of Tangasaurus are similar to those of Hovasaurus.
VERTEBRAE AND RIBS
Haughton (1924) estimated that there were eighteen presacral vertebrae in
the lectotype (SAM-6231) of Tangasaurus mennelli. This number is much less
than that of other eosuchians, and it is assumed that he had not included the
cervical vertebrae in his total. Because he stated that there were seven or fewer
anterior vertebrae obscured by bones of the pectoral girdle, his estimated
presacral count can be raised to a maximum of twenty-five. This is the number
of vertebrae found in Hovasaurus. As in Hovasaurus, the neck of Tangasaurus is
short—probably including only five vertebrae.
Primitive diapsid reptiles characteristically have two sacral vertebrae.
Haughton (1924: 3) stated that one specimen of Tangasaurus mennelli (SAM-
6231) had three fused sacral vertebrae. However, preservation in the sacral
region of this specimen is poor, and it is likely that he misinterpreted the first
caudal rib as a sacral rib. In a later paper Haughton (1930) stated that
‘Tangasaurus’ has two sacrals.
The total length of the tail is known in few eosuchians. 24 caudal vertebrae
are preserved in the lectotype of Tangasaurus, and 28 in SAM-6232. However,
the tail was clearly much longer than this. ‘Datheosaurus’ has at least 45 caudals
and Hovasaurus probably had more than 70.
Details of the dorsal vertebrae are difficult to delineate in the type speci-
mens of Tangasaurus. In Hovasaurus, there is a process at the base of the neural
spine that acts as an extra intervertebral articulation (Fig. 2). A similar accessory
process appears to be present in at least one of the dorsal vertebrae of the larger
specimen of Tangasaurus. Contact between the neural spines has also been
noted in Youngina (Currie 1981), ‘Datheosaurus’, and Kenyasaurus.
Specimens of Tangasaurus (Figs 3A—-B, 4) have caudal vertebrae that are
specialized for propulsion in water. The neural spines are high and the haemal
spines are long and expanded distally. The neural spines of the mid-caudals are
higher than the presacral neural spines, but are not as long as the haemal spines.
The specialization is not as great as in Hovasaurus (Fig. 3D) in that the neural
spines are relatively lower, only about 35 per cent greater than the length of the
associated centrum compared with more than 125 per cent in Hovasaurus.
Nevertheless, the caudal specialization suggests that Tangasaurus and Hova-
saurus are Closely related. Specimens from Madagascar attributed to ‘Tanga-
saurus’ and ‘Datheosaurus’ have unspecialized caudal vertebrae with low neural
spines (Fig. 3C).
The dorsal ribs of Tangasaurus have a single head and are not pachyostotic.
254 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Fig. 2. Hovasaurus boulei, MNHN 1908-32-59. Abbreviations: ac—accessory articulation
on neural spine, b—ballast, COR—coracoid, e—entepicondyle, g—gastralia, H—humerus,
i—intermedium, lc—lateral centrale, m—mammillary process, mc—medical centrale,
pi—pisiform, R—radius, r—radiale, ST—sternum, U—ulna, u—ulnare. Scale = 1 cm.
TANGASAURUS MENNELLI HAUGHTON 255
Fig. 3. Caudal vertebrae of tangasaurid eosuchians. A. Tangasaurus (Bulawayo Museum),
19th to 21st, right aspect. B. Tangasaurus, SAM-6232, 20th to 23rd, left view.
C. ‘Datheosaurus’, MNHN 1908-5—-1, mid-caudal, left view. D. Hovasaurus, MNHN
1908-32-64, 14th caudal, left aspect. Each scale = 1 cm.
256 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Fig. 4. Tangasaurus mennelli, SAM-6233, caudal vertebrae. Scale = 1 cm.
In Hovasaurus, moderate pachyostosis can be seen in the ribs of large indi-
viduals but it is usually not apparent in juveniles.
An exact count of caudal ribs is not possible because of the poor preserva-
tion of the Tangasaurus specimens. The total number, however, would have
been between 9 and 12. There are a maximum of 12 pairs of caudal ribs in
Hovasaurus and an additional 2 pairs of transverse processes. Nineteen pairs of
caudal ribs and transverse processes are found in specimens from Madagascar
that were formerly attributed to Tangasaurus, and 28 pairs in Kenyasaurus.
APPENDICULAR SKELETON
Both Piveteau (1926) and Haughton (1924, 1930) recognized that the
relative lengths of elements of the appendicular skeleton change with age. More
precise calculations (Currie in preparation) have shown that ‘Tangasaurus’
specimens of Madagascar are juveniles of ‘Datheosaurus’, and that the
allometric growth coefficients for ‘Datheosaurus’ and Hovasaurus are different
(Fig. 5).
The two specimens of Tangasaurus represent animals of different ages and
consequently show some differences in limb proportions. Comparison can be
made with Hovasaurus by means of the allometric growth equations. The
constants b’ and k,,’ power equation y = b’xtyx (Currie 1978) were solved to
describe a growth series of Hovasaurus boulei. The average length of a dorsal
centrum that serves as the base for comparison is represented by x, while the
length of the element being compared is represented by y. From this informa-.
tion, the expected mean length (in millimetres) of each element was computed
for Hovasaurus specimens of the same size as the Tangasaurus specimens SAM-—
6231 (x = 6,6 mm) and SAM-6232 (x = 8,0 mm). Lengths of the metacarpals
and metatarsals were not included in the lengths of the digits of the manus and
TANGASAURUS MENNELLI HAUGHTON DF
1,50
0,50 1,00
Fig. 5. Relationship between humerus length (ordinate) and length of associated thoracic
centrum (abscissa) in ‘Datheosaurus’ (circles) and Hovasaurus (squares). Measurements con-
verted to logarithms and plotted on arithmetic paper. Differences in slope represent differences
in allometric growth coefficients.
258 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
pes. With the exception of the length of metatarsal IV of SAM-—6231 and the
length of digit IV of the pes of SAM-—6232, all measurements fell within the 95
per cent confidence intervals for these dimensions in Hovasaurus (Table 2). This
shows that the relative lengths of limb elements are almost the same in
Tangasaurus and Hovasaurus, which also suggests close relationship because of
the specialized proportions of Hovasaurus limbs for swimming.
In the smaller specimen of Tangasaurus (SAM-6231), the humerus is
shorter than the femur, whereas the femur is the shorter of the two in the larger
specimen. This suggests that the humerus grew faster than the femur as the
animal increased in size. The same thing happens in both ‘Datheosaurus’ and
Hovasaurus where more complete growth series are known. Haughton (1930)
stated that the limbs of ‘Tangasaurus’ are longer relative to the body than those
of Hovasaurus. However, it is now known that the humerus of Tangasaurus is
5,8 times the length of a dorsal centrum (x), that of a mature ‘Datheosaurus’ is
6,7x, and that of a mature specimen of Hovasaurus is 7,1x. Similarly, other limb
elements of Tangasaurus have slightly smaller relative lengths than the same
elements in Hovasaurus.
In Tangasaurus, the radius is 60 per cent the length of the humerus,
TABLE 2
Comparisons of the lengths of postcranial elements of Hovasaurus boulei and Tangasaurus
mennelli. The constants b’ and k,,’ of the power equation y = b’x‘¥x’ have been solved to
describe growth series of H. boulei. From this information, the expected mean lengths (in mm)
of each element have been computed for H. boulei specimens the same size as the co-types of
T. mennelli (x = 6,6 mm for SAM-6231, 8,0 mm for SAM-6232). Lengths of the metacarpals
and metatarsals are not included in the lengths of the digits of the manus and pes. Abbrevia-
tions: N—size of sample, R—correlation coefficient.
Estimated mean value of y | Measured
for H. boulei value of
y = length of N R ray b’ X y 95% confidence y for T.
: interval mennelli
Corac0id: %.,i63 2: 9 0,981 2,229 0,360 6,6 24,1 20,7-28,0 2553
8.0 37,0 30,8-44,6 Si E7/
SLCRMUIM 682.ae arg 15 0,987 1,780 0,739 6,6 22.1 20,7-23,7 21,8
8,0 29,9 27,4-32,7 30,3
IAUMETUS Ga ete 20 0,993 1,638 1,674 6,6 36,8 35,6-38,1 36,0
8,0 50,5 48,4-52,7 48,5
Radiusevat ere 13 0,994 1,306 1,893 6,6 22:2. 21,2-23,3 21,6
8,0 28,6 26,9-30,3 28,0
MetacarpalIV.... 12 0,991 1,354 0,599 6,6 dest 7,2- 8,2 8,0
Digit IV (manus) . 12 0,983 1,236 2,035 6,6 20,9 19,2-22,7 21,0
hme eee eee 14 0,996 1,067 2,952 6,6 2251 21,1-23,1 23,0
RemMUIe ee 16 0,990 1,334 3,146 6,6 39,0 36,9-41,2 39,0
8,0 50,4 47,1-54,0 47,2
RIDA haere 15 0,991 1,298 2,872 6,6 33%) 31,3-35,1 34,0
8,0 42,6 39,6-46,0 40,0
MetatarsalIV .... 14 0,995 1,340 1,310 6,6 16,4 15,6-17,2 17,4
8,0 DED 20,0-22,6 20,5
Digit IV (Pes) .... 9 0,991 1,493 1,996 6,6 33,3 30,8-36,2 32,2
8,0 44,5 399-495 39,1
TANGASAURUS MENNELLI HAUGHTON 259
whereas in mature Hovasaurus it is only 52 per cent. In the relatively unspecial-
ized ‘Datheosaurus’ the radius is 54 per cent the length of the humerus at
maturity. Relative to the length of a dorsal centrum, however, the length of the
forearm of Tangasaurus is only 3,3x, whereas that of Hovasaurus is the same as
‘Datheosaurus’ (3,7x). This contradicts Haughton’s (1930) statement that the
forearm is relatively shorter in Hovasaurus. It should be remembered that his
statement is true for immature specimens, and he did not have a complete
growth series available to him.
The tibia is 85 per cent the length of the femur in Tangasaurus and
Hovasaurus at maturity, and 90 per cent in ‘Datheosaurus’.
Many eosuchians, including Youngina (Broom 1922), Tangasaurus (Fig. 1),
Hovasaurus (Piveteau 1926), ‘Datheosaurus’ (Piveteau 1926) and Kenyasaurus
(Harris & Carroll 1977), have ossified sterna. The dimensions and outline of the
sternum of Tangasaurus fall within the range of Hovasaurus.
The coracoids of Tangasaurus and Hovasaurus are similar in outline.
Haughton (1930) stated that they are distinguishable on the basis of proportions,
but the coracoids of the type specimen of Tangasaurus mennelli are too poorly
preserved to confirm this statement.
The humeri of Tangasaurus are identical in outline to those of many
specimens of Hovasaurus. Well-ossified humeri of Tangasaurus, Hovasaurus,
and ‘Datheosaurus’ share the distinctive feature of a greatly expanded entepicon-
dyle (Figs. 1-2). The width of the distal end of the humerus is up to 40 per cent
of its length. It is worth noting that the known humeri of Youngina are all from
immature animals and consequently do not show a well-ossified entepicondyle.
However, the curvature at the base of the entepicondyle and the position of the
entepicondylar foramen suggest that the humerus of mature individuals of
Youngina also had a greatly expanded entepicondyle.
The tarsus of Tangasaurus, Hovasaurus, Kenyasaurus, and ‘Datheosaurus’ is
specialized in the loss of the fifth distal tarsal as a discrete element. Harris &
Carroll (1977) refer to a specimen of Hovasaurus (MNHN 1908-21-10) and
suggest that the fifth and fourth distal tarsals fuse at maturity.
A very distinctive characteristic of most specimens of Hovasaurus is the
presence of abundant pebbles, mainly quartz, in the abdominal cavity (Fig. 2). It
was assumed (Haughton 1930) that these were gastroliths, but they seem to be
too numerous, large, and closely packed to have functioned effectively in food
breakdown. Considering the apparent aquatic habits of Hovasaurus, it may be
more appropriate to consider them as having served as ballast. The same
function appears to be true for ‘gastroliths’ of crocodiles (Cott 1961) and
plesiosaurs (Darby & Ojackangas 1980). Stomach stones are found in at least
one specimen of ‘Datheosaurus’ (MNHN 1908-11-5), (Piveteau 1926, pl. 11) but
are few in number and possibly did serve as aids to digestion. When present, the
relative abundance of stomach stones is a quick way to distinguish Hovasaurus
from ‘Datheosaurus’. Absence of stomach stones from the Tangasaurus speci-
mens does not necessarily mean that this genus did not swallow pebbles. Some
260 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
specimens of Hovasaurus do not have stones in the abdomen, so this may
possibly be explained as post-mortem rupture of the abdominal cavity before the
cadaver came to rest and was buried by sediment.
TAXONOMY
In the light of improved knowledge of the morphology of the tangasaurids,
it is possible to establish a diagnosis for the family. The relationship of the
Tangasauridae to Youngina will be considered here as well.
In recent years, it has become widely accepted that a proper taxonomic
diagnosis should emphasize derived (advanced) character states rather than the
retention of primitive characters. Characters listed in the following suprageneric
diagnoses are derived and can be used to distinguish the taxa from all known
eosuchian taxa that are not considered in this paper. Numbers in parentheses
refer to Figure 6.
Class REPTILIA Linnaeus, 1758
Subclass LEPIDOSAURIA Dumeéril & Bibron, 1839
Order EOSUCHIA Broom, 1914
Suborder YOUNGINIFORMES Romer, 1945
Superfamily YOUNGINOIDEA superfam. nov.
Fig. 6
Diagnosis
Distinctive sutures on parietal for frontal and postfrontal (1). Aceessory
intervertebral articulation present on mid-line of dorsal neural spine (2). Co-
ossification of paired sternal plates into a single unit in mature animals (3).
Entepicondyle of humerus strongly developed at maturity (4). Olecranon pro-
cess and sigmoidal notch of ulna poorly developed in mature animals (5); radius
longer than shaft of ulna (6).
Family Younginidae Broom, 1914
Youngina Broom, 1914
Diagnosis
3 premaxillary, 15-23 maxillary, and 20 dentary teeth. Zygapophyses of
anterior dorsal vertebrae extend laterally beyond the centra and inclined at low
angle from horizontal; neural spines low and rectangular. Iliac blade short and
almost vertical. Humerus only about 70% length of femur, compared with 75 %
in immature Hovasaurus and 110% in mature Hovasaurus. Radius 80% length
of humerus, and 60 % length of tibia; tibia 90% length of femur. Proximal head
of fifth metatarsal expanded but not hooked.
261
TANGASAURUS MENNELLI HAUGHTON
‘1X9] OY] Ul passnosip s19djoeIeYS 0} JoJoI SIOqUINN “SuBTYyONSOS proursunoX jo sdiysuonejesiojul yuoredde oy} Suimoys yeyo onouesojfyd °9 “B14
ae
ered
ee ease snineseAuay _sninesoauje
.___ seulinesebue| ——— seulineseAusy
sepiunesebue, ————————"
g. eulbuno,
sepiulbunod
262 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Family Tangasauridae Camp, 1945
Diagnosis
Humerus as long as or longer than femur in mature animals (7); radius
50-65 per cent length of humerus and 65-75 per cent length of tibia at maturity.
Scapula low in lateral aspect and mainly a ventral element (8); coracoid as large
as the scapula (9). Medial centrale contacts fourth distal carpal, thereby prevent-
ing contact between the lateral centrale and third distal carpal (10). Fifth distal
tarsal not a discrete element (11).
Subfamily Kenyasaurinae subfam. nov.
Diagnosis
19-28 pairs of caudal ribs and transverse processes present, all of which
taper distally (12).
Kenyasaurus Harris & Carroll, 1977
Type species
Kenyasaurus mariakaniensis Harris & Carroll 1977: 140.
Diagnosis
Low but anteroposteriorly elongate neural spines in the dorsal region; 56
caudal vertebrae; 28 pairs of caudal ribs and transverse processes. Astragalus
almost triangular rather than primitive L-shape; pronounced process on fifth
metatarsal for insertion of peroneus brevis.
Thadeosaurus colcanapi Carroll, 1981
Broomia madagascariensis Piveteau, 1925: 157.
Datheosaurus sp., Piveteau, 1926: pl. 17 (fig. 2).
Tangasaurus menelli, Piveteau, 1926: pl. 10 (figs 1-2), pl. 11 (figs 1-2), pl. 12 (fig. 1), pl. 16
(fig. 2).
Diagnosis
Neural spines tall and rectangular in dorsal region; 47 caudal vertebrae; 19
pairs of caudal ribs and transverse processes. Small numbers of gastroliths
present in abdominal cavities of some specimens.
Subfamily Tangasaurinae Piveteau, 1926
Diagnosis
Neural spines high in dorsal region and higher in proximal and mid-caudal
regions (13). 9-12 pairs of caudal ribs (14); anterior caudal ribs expanded
distally (15); haemal spines large and platelike (16). Presacral intercentra, with
the exception of the first three, do not ossify until animal is mature (17).
TANGASAURUS MENNELLI HAUGHTON 263
Tangasaurus Haughton, 1924
Type species
Tangasaurus mennelli Haughton, 1924: 3.
Tanganasaurus Piveteau, 1925: 155.
Tangasaurus menelli Piveteau, 1926: 78.
Tangasaurus minelli Peyer, 1937: 115.
Diagnosis
Neural spines of dorsal vertebrae high and rectangular; height of neural
spine of mid-caudal vertebra about 35 per cent greater than length of associated
centrum, and about 75 per cent length of associated haemal arch and spine.
Hovasaurus Piveteau, 1926
Type species
Hovasaurus boulei Piveteau, 1926: 78.
Diagnosis
Skull lacks tabular. 5 cervical, 20 dorsal, 2 sacral and at least 70 caudal
vertebrae. Height of neural spines of mid-dorsal vertebrae at least 75 per cent
greater than length of associated centrum, whereas height of a mid-caudal neural
spine can be more than 125 per cent greater than length of associated centrum;
neural spine of mid-caudal vertebra almost 90 per cent length of associated
haemal arch and spine. Mammillary processes on neural spines of anterior
dorsals. Ribs slightly pachyostotic in mature animals. High number of stones in
abdominal cavity suggesting they were used as ballast.
CONCLUSIONS
Tangasaurus mennelli is represented only by three specimens from the
Tanga region of Tanzania. Specimens from Madagascar that have been attri-
buted to this species represent a distinct as-yet-unnamed genus that Piveteau
(1926) referred to as ‘Datheosaurus’ and that is being described by Carroll
(1981).
Four genera from Africa and Madagascar are herein assigned to the
Tangasauridae. Two subfamilies are recognized on the basis of differences in
caudal anatomy. Kenyasaurines were not as highly specialized for an aquatic
existence as were the tangasaurines and they were intermediate in morphological
specialization between Youngina and Hovasaurus. Tangasaurids and younginids
share a number of derived characters and, therefore, have been united into a
single superfamily, the Younginoidea.
Acerosodontosaurus (Currie 1980), Galesphyrus (Carroll 1976a), and
Heleosaurus (Carroll 1976a) have recently been referred to the Younginidae, but
they do not possess the derived characters shared by Youngina and the tanga-
saurids. Therefore, they should not be considered as younginoids. Their sys-
tematic position will be considered in a separate paper.
264 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
The shared derived characters of the Younginoidea are not found as a suite
in other eosuchians, which strongly suggests that Youngina is not the ancestral
morphotype for any eosuchians other than the Tangasauridae.
ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS
Casts and photographs of the type specimens of Tangasaurus mennelli were
supplied by Dr M. A. Raath (as Executive Director of the National Museums
and Monuments of Rhodesia (now Zimbabwe) in 1978) and Dr M. A. Cluver
(South African Museum). I am grateful to Dr R. L. Carroll for preparing and
casting tangasaurid specimens in the collections of the Muséum National d’His-
toire Naturelle and the South African Museum, and for providing me with
Figure 1B—C and unpublished data on his research. The manuscript was read by
Dr R. L. Carroll, McGill University, Dr M. J. Heaton, University of Toronto,
Dr J. A. Hopson, University of Chicago, and Dr R. Reisz, University of
Toronto, who made many useful suggestions. Mr Clive Booth (South African
Museum) prepared Figure 4.
REFERENCES
Broom, R. 1914. A new thecodont reptile. Proc. zool. Soc. Lond. 1914: 1072-1077.
Broom, R. 1922. An imperfect skeleton of Youngina capensis, Broom, in the collection of the
Transvaal Museum. Ann. Transv. Mus. 8: 273-277.
Camp, C. L. 1945. Prolacerta and the protorosaurian reptiles. Am. J. Sci. 243: 17-32, 84-101.
CarRrROLL, R. L. 1975. Permo-Triassic ‘lizards’ from the Karroo. Palaeont. afr. 18: 71-87.
CARROLL, R. L. 1976a. Eosuchians and the origin of archosaurs. Jn: CHURCHER, C. S., ed.
Athlon: essays on palaeontology in honour of Loris Shano Russell. Misc. Publs. R. Ont.
Mus.: 58-79.
CARROLL, R. L. 1976b. Galesphyrus capensis, a younginid eosuchian from the Cistecephalus
Zone of South Africa. Ann. S. Afr. Mus. 72: 59-68.
CarRROLL, R. L. 1977. The origin of lizards. In: ANDREws, S. M., Mires, R. S., & WALKER,
A. D., eds. Problems in vertebrate evolution. Linnean Soc. Symp. Ser. 4: 359-396.
CarROLL, R. L. 1978. Permo-Triassic ‘lizards’ from the Karroo system. Part II. A gliding reptile
from the Upper Permian of Madagascar. Palaeont. afr. 21: 143-159.
Carroll, R. L. 1981. Plesiosaur ancestors from the Upper Permian of Madagascar. Phil.
Trans. R. Soc. Lond. (B) 293: 315-383.
Cott, H. B. 1961. Scientific results of an inquiry into the ecology and economic status of the
Nile Crocodile (Crocodilus niloticus) in Uganda and Northern Rhodesia. Trans. zool. Soc.
Lond. 29: 211-354.
CurriE, P. J. 1978. The orthometric linear unit. J. Paleontol. 52: 964-971.
CurriE, P. J. 1979. The osteology of haptodontine sphenacodonts (Reptilia: Pelycosauria).
Palaeontographica. (A) 163: 130-168.
Curri£E, P. J. 1980. A new younginid (Reptilia: Eosuchia) from the Upper Permian of
Madagascar. Can. J. Earth Sci. 17: 500-511.
CurriE, P. J. 1981. The vertebrae of Youngina (Reptilia: Eosuchia). Can. J. Earth Sci. 18:
815-818.
Darsy, D. G. & OJACKANGAS, R. W. 1980. Gastroliths from an Upper Cretaceous Plesiosaur.
J. Paleontol. 54: 548-556.
GLADSTONE, R. J. & WAKELEY, C. P. G. 1932. The morphology of the sternum and its relation
to the ribs. J. Anat. 66: 508-564.
Gow, C. E. 1975. The morphology and relationships of Youngina capensis Broom and
Prolacerta broomi Parrington. Paleont. afr. 51: 139-149.
TANGASAURUS MENNELLI HAUGHTON 265
Harris, J. M. & Carrol, R. L. 1977. Kenyasaurus, a new eosuchian reptile from the Early
Triassic of Kenya. J. Paleont. 51: 139-149.
HaucGuton, S. H. 1924. On reptilian remains from the Karroo beds of East Africa. Quart. J.
geol. Soc. Lond. 80: 1-11.
HauGurTon, S. H. 1930. Notes on the Karroo Reptilia from Madagascar. Trans. R. Soc. S. Afr.
18: 125-136.
HUENE, F. von. 1926. Gondwana Reptilien in Sudamerica. Palaeontol. Hung. 2: 72-73.
HuENE, F. von. 1940. Die Saurier der Karroo-Gondwana und verwandten ablagerungen in
fauitischer, biologischer und phylogenetischer Hinsicht. N. J. Min. Geol. Pal. 83: 246-347.
HUuENE, F. von. 1952. Revision der Gattung Pleurosaurus auf Grund neuer und alter Funde.
Palaeontographica (A) 101: 167-200.
Kuan, O. 1969. Handbuch der palaoherpetologie, Teil 9. Proganosauria, Bolosauria, Placodon-
tia, Araeoscelidia, Trilophosauridae, Weigeltisauria, Millerosauria, Rhynchocephalia, Pro-
tosauria. Stuttgart: Gustav Fischer Verlag.
McKiniay, A. C. M. 1956. Summary of the geology of Tanganyika. Part 1. Introduction and
stratigraphy. Mem. geol. Surv. Tanganyika 1: 81-145.
McKiniray, A. C. M. 1960. Brief comparison of the Karroo rocks of Madagascar and
Tanganyika. Rec. geol. Surv. Tanganyika 8: 37-40.
Noprcsa, F. 1924. On the systematic position of Tangasaurus and Saurosternon. S. Afr. J. Sci.
21: 206-207.
Ortov, J. A. 1964. Osnovy Paleontologii. 12: 446-461. Moscow: Nauka. (In Russian.)
Preyer, B. 1937. Die Triasfauna der Tessiner Kalkalpen. XII. Macronemus bassani Nopcsa.
Schweiz. palaeont. Abh. 59: 3-140.
PIVETEAU, J. 1925. Existence d’un Reptile a affinités lacertiliennes dans les formations permien-
nes de Madagascar. C. r. hebd. Séanc. Acad. Sci., Paris 180: 154-157.
PIVETEAU, J. 1926. Paléontologie de Madagascar XIII. Amphibiens et reptiles permiens. Annls
Paléont. 15: 53-180.
PIVETEAU, J. 1955. Eosuchia. In: PIvETEAU, J., ed. Traité de Paléontologie 5: 545-555. Paris:
Masson.
Reisz, R. 1977. Petrolacosaurus kansensis Lane, the oldest known diapsid reptile. Science N.Y.
196: 1091-1093.
Romer, A. S. 1956. Osteology of the reptiles. Chicago: University of Chicago Press.
Romer, A. S. 1966. Vertebrate paleontology. 3rd ed. Chicago: University of Chicago Press.
Watson, D. M. S. 1957. On Millerosaurus and the early history of the sauropsid reptiles. Phil.
Trans. R. Soc. Lond. (B) 240: 325-400.
WILD, R. 1973. Die Triasfauna der Tessiner Kalkalpen, XXIII. Tanystropheus longobardicus
(Bassani) (neue Ergebnisse). Schweiz. palaeont. Abh. 95: 1-162.
~
’
_- =
eat
~~. 7
x 7 —
~ -
9
; ;
a
= b :
——. *
‘
5 7
oe .
i
>
) ae
; ; _ } a
a 7 ; 2 7
_ : - a
: :
-_ a :
= f a a
ye a PY. MP:
7 7 7
a oy =
ya To a ae 7 7 A
6. SYSTEMATIC papers must conform to the /nternational code of zoological nomenclature
(particularly Articles 22 and 51).
Names of new taxa, combinations, synonyms, etc., when used for the first time, must be
followed by the appropriate Latin (not English) abbreviation, e.g. gen. nov., sp. nov., comb.
nov., syn. nov., etc. .
An author’s name when cited must follow the name of the taxon without intervening
punctuation and not be abbreviated; if the year is added, a comma must separate author’s
name and year. The author’s name (and date, if cited) must be placed in parentheses if a
species or subspecies is transferred from its original genus. The name of a subsequent user of
a scientific name must be separated from the scientific name by a colon.
Synonymy arrangement should be according to chronology of names, i.e. all published
scientific names by which the species previously has been designated are listed in chronological
order, with all references to that name following in chronological order, e.g.:
Family Nuculanidae
Nuculana (Lembulus) bicuspidata (Gould, 1845)
Figs 14-15A
Nucula (Leda) bicuspidata Gould, 1845: 37.
Leda plicifera A. Adams, 1856: 50.
Laeda bicuspidata Hanley, 1859: 118, pl. 228 (fig. 73). Sowerby, 1871: pl. 2 (fig. 8a—b).
Nucula largillierti Philippi, 1861: 87.
Leda bicuspidata: Nickles, 1950: 163, fig. 301; 1955: 110. Barnard, 1964: 234, figs 8-9.
Note punctuation in the above example:
comma separates author’s name and year
semicolon separates more than one reference by the same author
full stop separates references by different authors
figures of plates are enclosed in parentheses to distinguish them from text-figures
dash, not comma, separates consecutive numbers
Synonymy arrangement according to chronology of bibliographic references, whereby
the year is placed in front of each entry, and the synonym repeated in full for each entry, is
not acceptable.
In describing new species, One specimen must be designated as the holotype; other speci-
mens mentioned in the original description are to be designated paratypes; additional material
not regarded as paratypes should be listed separately. The complete data (registration number,
depository, description of specimen, locality, collector, date) of the holotype and paratypes
must be recorded, e.g.:
Holotype
SAM-—A13535 in the South African Museum, Cape Town. Adult female from mid-tide region, King’s Beach
Port Elizabeth (33°51’S 25°39’E), collected by A. Smith, 15 January 1973.
Note standard form of writing South African Museum registration numbers and date.
7. SPECIAL HOUSE RULES
Capital initial letters
(a) The Figures, Maps and Tables of the paper when referred to in the text
e.g. °... the Figure depicting C. namacolus ...’; ‘. .. in C. namacolus (Fig. 10)...’
(b) The prefixes of prefixed surnames in all languages, when used in the text, if not preceded
by initials or full names
e.g. Du Toit but A.L.du Toit; Von Huene but F. von Huene
(c) Scientific names, but not their vernacular derivatives
e.g. Therocephalia, but therocephalian
Punctuation should be loose, omitting all not strictly necessary
Reference to the author should be expressed in the third person
Roman numerals should be converted to arabic, except when forming part of the title of a
book or article, such as
‘Revision of the Crustacea. Part VIII. The Amphipoda.’
Specific name must not stand alone, but be preceded by the generic name or its abbreviation
to initial capital letter, provided the same generic name is used consecutively.
Name of new genus or species is not to be included in the title: it should be included in the
abstract, counter to Recommendation 23 of the Code, to meet the requirements of
Biological Abstracts.
PHILIP J. CURRIE
THE OSTEOLOGY AND RELATIONSHIPS OF
TANGASAURUS MENNELLI HAUGHTON
(REPTILIA, EOSUCHIA)
ALS s ha = im Sh ee
WY ma ZZ. : ap)
OSHLIWS Sagluvudil LIBRARIES SMITHSONIAN
wn y
e = a
< <7
faa = oc
jaa) Oo (oa)
Dy Zz 4 ‘
INSTITUTION NOILALILSNI NVINOSHLIWS
i z ay
6g, = w
P| >)
2 > = >
ae ae ae
wD z wo >
OSHLIWS Sa iyuvudii au B RAR I ES SMITHSONIAN
= ; < =
= Zz =|
as ro) ae
wn A OO
© Se O
= = zZ
HSONIAN INSTITUTION NOILNLILSNI NVINOSHLIWS
—s 4 (Tp) LR
e Ww iE
+ aa +
de aan a x
= ac a
O O
Zz “y =
LIBRARIES
SSIaVESIT CLUB RAR TES. SMITHSONIAN
_INSTITUTION NOILMLILSNI NVINOSHLIWS
Ww SON
“ = a SX
si < 4 SSS
: : 2 B
+
5 a = XY
PE: pa | Zz s
SJIYVUGIT LIBRARIES SMITHSONIAN
S oO z ‘s
: : :
= > :
o — Pe
ze # z
INSTITUTION NOILALILSNI_ NVINOSHLINS
aan Fd eo <
< SS Vie <=
ie 2. 7°) Foe
= SS >" =
Y) - ae ae Ww
S3!1NVYGIT LIBRARIES SMITHSONIAN
2 ee J
WW - Yyy
“ - UD
a > ae DW he
: = fe
3 a
Zz ad
; Zz we 5 om Zz ie
S oO ea ee O a
Se a w — his ES a
SON be Rie 0} fae Pe) Fy Pe)
x = : Ey : : 2
SS ra oe [= ae La at
: 2) m 2 m oe m
ie wn = wn = wn :
HSONIAN INSTITUTION NOILALILSNI NVINOSHLINS S3IYWVYUEIT LIBRARIES SMITHSONIAN
Save Ge Z 2 -
Sk Ss = ‘zs =
aN ee : = a :
: g z a 2 g
ae ®) :
fF Zz = z fe eZ
s > U = > : =
faa Pa v”) mz se kOe 8 ee
OSHLIWS $3 tuvydid LIBRARI ES SMITHSONIAN _INSTITUTION NOUN
= —~| UT ea ams “4 ios —
= se = PY = z a
G&G fara CZ Pe ao =
: : 2 Ge 3 : :
See Z els g 2 ee “
HSONIAN” INSTITUTION | NOILALILSNI NWINOSHLIWS >? l¥vud Be LIBRARI Ss
yy vere Oo jaan S oO as Oo oY
by ioe) — w ‘ — w =
Gy, > : 2 Ye 5 2 :
Yghir y S S ,
lp f= = 2 WWE > :
en ee ad = aN \ — 3
m Y) faa S\N Ww) m Ww)
> s 2 z
w = ” = w” =
JOSHLIWS S43 \Yuvudl me B RAR! ES SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION NOILALILSING Bs
z , Ee < j < wy <
= z ad = My, =
2 iby,
O ae RN O oO Vp, 4 Y,, BE &
Z Sy 2 Zeya
> = a > >” =
Fa 7) 2 2 Zz wn
HSONIAN INSTITUTION NOILALILSNI
NLILSNI
NALILSNI
ARLES
LIBRARIES SMITHSONIAN
RARIES SMITHSONIAN
ALILSNI
RARIES
se Pa fF Y UP O> SER <_ eS a: a eS =< +t ay fe te he
X = “llffd = <On Dee > il = ak = Vas = ial >
UgiT_ LIBRARIES SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION NOILOLILSNI_NVINOSHLINS Saluvuaiy_b
& in a oi
a us .o us a us z
= oc = or ee. ox =
z < = < = < a |
: : ; : : : 3
z ay s z a 2 eka Pad
UTION > NOWLNLILSNI NVINOSHLIWS ~°4 l\YVvVugd fae LIBRARI oe ideel LEI hy mi
O i) fo) ~ Oo y = re)
— wm > ae w = w <a
= Be SX Se a = te =
E = \w We & = F ae F |
b EN Se : Fc ; 5
= Tae pile Ya 2 z p zZ
Yd! we: B RAR| ES SMITHSONIAN STON NOR ets Seen tis iyVyudlt a
Uy lee < ae = < z y=
= = = =
S Sa 5 = 5 = S
7) ma ” OO oO wn ”)
ale O pS 2 ® nee a O BG
= = = =, a =. f=
3 > ’ > :
= > 2 Ce a = > 7
NOILALILSNI_NVINOSHLINS _LIBRAR KES _INSTITUTION ed,
“ 7 Ww < it = us
faa) = m = or — co
7 oO pia (@) aS oO ae
Udit LIBRARIES SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION NOILOALILSNI NVINOSHLINS S3JIYVYEIT LY
5 Z is z is = -
wo 2 re) 2 ow 2 ob
Pe = » 5 re) Ss 20
> — egy > E oa = >
5) = “7 “iy, ee] i= > 6 i Po}
| 9 “Yh im D = D =
wn = 7) = 7) = wn
UTION NOILNLILSNI NVINOSHLINS SSIYVYEIT LIBRARIES INSTITUTION N
n z w z ; wm z oe: w”
\ = <= = ee = < \ . =
“os S oh a. = 5B OS
Bey D a, A D n \ w ,
vs = = = E = = =e
> = > ‘ = > = >
See _ z= Ww Ea Nyls Yn ee
Yi SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION NOILNLILSNI NVINOSHLINS S3I1YVYUdIT_ L
Z i Mies se z eu a Z
” «” aay w n
a o a oc et a za
4 <x” 4 < A <x maT
: ce = & = S =
fe) = Z re) 2 rs Oo
= —s =z —I Zz Xs J z
UTION NOILNLILSNI NVINOSHLINS S3!YVYE!IT LIBRARIES SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION _Ni
z aa z E She ae z
E 2 eg 5 : E 2 =
= = WWE z = aes = |
= = \s Ee i -, és -
Up ee AN NS w* w* w
= os tas = yi 2 iB z
UGI1T_ LIBRARIES SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION NOILONLILSNI NVINOSHLINS S3IYVYUSIT_L
| = W Ze n z ” z
ae = = = . < = =
z = ar Pa
2 5 = 5 . 2 6 = Oo
. “” NN . WM, v”) ae 7) 7 n wn
EN Oo = oe) a5 O L
: : = = z = 2 =
> = NY >" = > =
= ” bisee 2 77) Zz 3 nn
_ NVINOSHLIWS SJ'IYVYEIT LIBRARIES INSTITUTION Ni
= ” S wo us
a oN nee a KE wor aes a
= AS x L
2 We = (SM) & ey
=< WSs SNE ee Dy;
Peters ene ee
sy por b nent eters
SPN Ait ot
De snne
eA Coan
NT
hbraren wrt
4.0 Gath
GaN rations gee
as
LEPC
VERE
teas
tee th
2 Oy
ne
stag
«
‘
wv
SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION LIBRARIES
Ml
t oa
‘ ee
un ‘ 1
S Teal
(ica ie Ot Se a
LU
3 9088 01206 6783